FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1030 802.11g WLAN PCI-E Mini Card

 

INSPIRON SETUP GUIDE INSPIRON SETUP GUIDE Model PP19S Notes, Cautions and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. __________________ Information in this document is subject to change without notice. 2008 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, Inspiron, and YOURS IS HERE are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Intel and Atom are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries; Microsoft and Windows are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries; Ubuntu is a registered trademark of Canonical Ltd.; Bluetooth is a registered trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and is used by Dell under license. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. February 2008 P/N K621P Rev. A00 I N S P I R O N Contents Setting Up Your Inspiron Mini 10 . 5 Before Setting Up Your Computer . 5 Connect the AC Adapter . 6 Connect the Network Cable (Optional) . 7 Press the Power Button . 8 Enable or Disable Wireless. 9 Ubuntu Setup . 9 Microsoft Windows XP Setup. 9 Connect to the Internet (Optional) . 10 Using Your Inspiron Mini 10 . 13 Right Side Features . 13 Left Side Features . 15 Computer Base and Keyboard Features . 17 Touch Pad Gestures. 19 Display Features . 22 Removing and Replacing the Battery . 23 Software Features . 25 Solving Problems . 26 Network Problems . 26 Power Problems . 27 Memory Problems . 28 Lockups and Software Problems . 29 Dell Support Center . 31 Using Support Tools. 31 System Messages . 32 Hardware Troubleshooter . 33 Dell Diagnostics . 34 Restoring Your Operating System . 36 System Restore . 36 Using Dell PC Restore in Windows XP. 38 Operating System Reinstallation . 40 3 Getting Help . 42 Technical Support and Customer Service . 43 Online Services . 43 Automated Order-Status Service . 44 Product Information. 44 Returning Items for Repair Under Warranty or for Credit . 45 Before You Call. 46 Contacting Dell. 47 Finding More Information and Resources . 48 Specifications . 50 Index . 60 4 I N S P I R O N Setting Up Your Inspiron Mini 10 This section provides information about setting up your Inspiron Mini 10 and connecting peripherals. Before Setting Up Your Computer When positioning your computer, ensure that you allow easy access to a power source, adequate ventilation, and a level surface to place your computer. Restricting airflow around your Inspiron Mini 10 may cause it to overheat. To prevent overheating ensure that you leave at least 10.2 cm (4 inches) at the back of the computer and a minimum of 5.1 cm (2 inches) on all other sides. You should never place your computer in an enclosed space, such as a cabinet or drawer when it is powered on. WARNING: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do not place your Dell computer in a low-airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is powered on. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. The computer turns on the fan when the computer gets hot. Fan noise is normal and does not indicate a problem with the fan or the computer. CAUTION: Placing or stacking heavy or sharp objects on the computer may result in permanent damage to the computer. 5 Setting Up Your Inspiron Mini 10 Connect the AC Adapter Connect the AC adapter to the computer and then plug it into a wall outlet or surge protector. WARNING: The AC adapter works with electrical outlets worldwide. However, power connectors and power strips vary among countries. Using an incompatible cable or improperly connecting the cable to a power strip or electrical outlet may cause fire or permanent damage to your computer. 6 Setting Up Your Inspiron Mini 10 Connect the Network Cable

(Optional) To use a wired network connection, connect the network cable. 7 Setting Up Your Inspiron Mini 10 Press the Power Button 8 icon on Enable or Disable Wireless To turn on wireless, with the computer turned on:

1. Press <Fn><F2> or press the the keyboard. The Wireless Enable/Disable dialog box appears. Select one of the following:

Click Enable Bluetooth Enable Wireless LAN 3. To turn off wireless, press <Fn><F2> again to turn off all radios. OK. 2. Setting Up Your Inspiron Mini 10 Ubuntu Setup Your Dell computer is preconfigured with the Ubuntu operating system if you requested for Ubuntu while ordering your computer. See the Ubuntu Quick Start Guide that shipped with your computer for more operating system specific information. Microsoft Windows XP Setup If you ordered Windows XP operating system with your computer, it is already configured. To set up Windows XP for the first time, follow the instructions on the screen. These steps are mandatory and may take up to 15 minutes to complete. The screens will take you through several procedures including accepting license agreements, setting preferences and setting up an Internet connection. CAUTION: Do not interrupt the operating systems setup process. Doing so may render your computer unusable. 9 Setting Up Your Inspiron Mini 10 Connect to the Internet (Optional) NOTE: ISPs and ISP offerings vary by country. To connect to the Internet, you need an external modem or network connection and an Internet service provider (ISP). NOTE: If an external USB modem or WLAN adapter is not a part of your original order, you can purchase one from the Dell website at www.dell.com. Setting Up a Wired Connection in Windows XP If you are using a dial-up connection, connect the telephone line to the external USB modem (optional) and to the telephone wall jack before you set up your Internet connection. If you are using a DSL or cable/satellite modem connection, contact your ISP or cellular telephone service for setup instructions. 10 To complete setting up your wired internet connection, follow the instructions in Setting Up Your Internet Connection in Windows XP on page 11. Setting Up a Wireless Connection in Windows XP NOTE: To set up your wireless router, see the documentation that shipped with your router. Before you can use your wireless Internet connection, you need to connect to your wireless router. To set up your connection to a wireless router:

1. Start Internet Explorer Connect to Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs. Click the Internet. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the setup. 2. 3. Setting Up Your Inspiron Mini 10 Setting Up Your Internet Connection in Windows XP To set up an Internet connection, perform the steps in the following section. NOTE: If you cannot connect to the Internet but have successfully connected in the past, the ISP might have a service outage. Contact your ISP to check the service status, or try connecting again later. NOTE: Have your ISP information ready. If you do not have an ISP, the Connect to the Internet wizard can help you get one. Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs. Click the Internet. Start lnternet Explorer Connect to 1. 2. 3. 4. b. In the next window, click the appropriate option:

a. If you do not have an ISP, click Choose from a list of Internet service providers

(ISPs). If you have already obtained setup information from your ISP but you did not receive a setup CD, click Set up my connection manually. If you have a setup CD, click got from an ISP. NOTE: Your computer may or may not have an optical drive. Use an external optical drive or any external storage device for the procedures that involve media. Click Use the CD I Next. c. 11 Setting Up Your Inspiron Mini 10 If you selected Set up my connection manually in step 3, continue to step 5. Otherwise, follow the instructions on the screen to complete the setup. NOTE: If you do not know which type of connection to select, contact your ISP. Click the appropriate option under How do you want to connect to the Internet?, and click Next. Use the setup information provided by your ISP to complete the setup. 5. 6. 12 Using Your Inspiron Mini 10 Your Inspiron Mini 10 has indicators and buttons that provide information and enable you to perform common tasks. The connectors on your computer provide the option of attaching additional devices. Right Side Features 1 2 3 4 5 I N S P I R O N 13 3 Power USB connector This connector can be used for USB devices that require more power. This connector supports up to 2 A current loading. 4 5 VGA connector Connects to a monitor or projector. Network connector Connects your computer to a network or a broadband device if you are using a wired network. Using Your Inspiron Mini 10 1 2 Audio out/Headphone connector Connects to a pair of headphones, or sends audio to a powered speaker or sound system. Audio in/Microphone connector Connects to a microphone or input signal for use with audio programs. 14 Left Side Features Using Your Inspiron Mini 10 1 2 3 4 15 Using Your Inspiron Mini 10 1 Security cable slot Attaches a commercially available antitheft device to the computer. NOTE: Before you buy an antitheft device, ensure that it works with the security cable slot on your computer. 2 3 AC adapter connector Connects to the AC adapter to power on the computer and charge the battery. USB 2.0 connectors (2) Connects to USB devices, such as a mouse, keyboard, printer, external drive, or MP3 player. 4 SD/SDHC/MMC/MS/MSPro 3-in-1 Media Card Reader Provides a fast and convenient way to view and share digital photos, music, videos, and documents stored on the following digital memory cards:

Secure Digital (SD) memory card Secure Digital High Capacity

(SDHC) card Multimedia Card (MMC) Memory Stick Memory Stick PRO 16 Computer Base and Keyboard Features Using Your Inspiron Mini 10 1 2 3 4 17 2 Keyboard Settings for this keyboard can be personalized by using the system setting utility. 3 Touch pad buttons Provides left- and right-click functions like those on a mouse. 4 Touch pad Provides the functionality of a mouse. It supports the Scroll, Flick, Zoom, Rotate, Desktop, and My Favorites features. For more information, see Touch Pad Gestures on page 19. Using Your Inspiron Mini 10 1 Power/Battery indicator light Turns on steadily or blinks to indicate battery charge status. The light indicates the following states while charging or using the computer with:

an AC adapter Solid white the battery is charging. Blinking white standby mode. Off mode and the battery is adequately charged. The computer is on and The computer is in The computer is off or in hibernate a battery The computer is in The computer is on. Solid white Blinking white standby mode. Blinking amber The battery charge is low. Connect the AC adapter to charge the battery. Off mode. The computer is off or in hibernate 18 Touch Pad Gestures Scroll Allows you to scroll through content. The scroll feature includes:

Pan Allows you to move the focus on the selected object when the entire object is not visible. Move two fingers in the desired direction to pan scroll the selected object. Auto Scroll Vertical Allows you to scroll up or down on the active window. Move two fingers up or down at a fast pace to activate vertical auto scrolling. Tap on the touch pad to stop auto scrolling. Using Your Inspiron Mini 10 Auto Scroll Horizontal Allows you to scroll left or right on the active window. Move two fingers to your left or right at a fast pace to activate auto scrolling horizontally. Tap on the touch pad to stop auto scrolling. Flick Allows you to flip content forward or backward based on the direction of the flick. Move three fingers quickly in the desired direction to flip content in the active window. 19 Using Your Inspiron Mini 10 Zoom Allows you to increase or decrease the magnification of the screen content. The zoom feature includes:

Pinch Allows you to zoom in or zoom out by moving two fingers apart or bringing them closer together on the touch pad. To zoom in: Move two fingers apart to enlarge the view of the active window. To zoom out: Move two fingers close together to reduce the view of the active window. Rotate Allows you to rotate the active content on the screen. The rotate feature includes:

Twist Allows you to rotate active content in 90 degree increments using two fingers where one finger is anchored and the other rotates. Keeping the thumb in place, move the index finger in an arced direction right or left to rotate the selected item 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise. 20 My Favorites Allows you to open your favorite applications. Tap three fingers on the touch pad. The applications that are configured in the touch pad configuration tool launch. Desktop Allows you to minimize all open windows so that the desktop is visible. Place your hand on the touch pad in any orientation and briefly hold in place. Using Your Inspiron Mini 10 21 Using Your Inspiron Mini 10 Display Features 1 2 3 4 1 Microphone Provides quality sound for audio chatting and voice recording. 2 Camera activity light Indicates if the camera is on or off. 3 Camera Built-in camera for video capture, conferencing, and chat. 4 Display Your display can vary based on selections you made when purchasing your computer. For more information about displays, see the Dell Technology Guide. 22 Removing and Replacing the Battery WARNING: Using an incompatible battery may increase the risk of fire or explosion. This computer should only use a battery Using Your Inspiron Mini 10 purchased from Dell. Do not use batteries from other computers. WARNING: Before removing the battery, shut down the computer, and remove external cables (including the AC adapter). 1 2 3 23 Using Your Inspiron Mini 10 3. To remove the battery:

1. 2. Shut down the computer and turn it over. Slide the battery lock latch until it clicks into place. Slide the battery release latch to unlock position. Pull the battery up and out of the battery bay. 4. To replace the battery, slide it into the bay until it clicks into place. Then slide the battery lock latch to the lock position. 1 Battery 2 Battery release latch 3 Battery lock latch 24 Software Features NOTE: For more information about the features described in this section, see the Dell Technology Guide on your hard drive or on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. Productivity and Communication You can use your computer to create presentations, brochures, greeting cards, fliers, and spreadsheets depending on the applications installed in your computer. Check your purchase order for software installed on your computer. After connecting to the Internet, you can access websites, setup an e-mail account, upload and download files, and so on. Entertainment and Multimedia You can use your computer to watch videos, play games, listen to music and Internet radio stations. Using Your Inspiron Mini 10 Customizing the Desktop in Windows XP You can customize your desktop to change the appearance, resolution, wallpaper, screensaver, and so on by accessing the Display Properties window. To access the display properties window:

Right-click an open area of the desktop. 1. Click 2. Properties window and learn more about your customization options. Properties, to open the Display Backing Up Your Data on Windows XP It is recommended that you periodically back up files and folders on your computer. To back up files:

Click 1. System Tools Backup. Follow the instructions in the wizard. Start All Programs Accessories Back up Files 2. 25 N O R I P S N I Solving Problems WARNING: Only trained service personnel should remove the computer cover. See the Service Manual on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com for advanced service and troubleshooting instructions. Network Problems Wireless Connections If the wireless network connection is lost The wireless router is offline or wireless has been disabled on the computer. Check your wireless router to ensure it is powered on and connected to your data source (cable modem or network hub). Interference may be blocking or interrupting your wireless connection. Try moving the computer closer to your wireless router. 26 Re-establish your connection to the wireless router:

a. Start Internet Explorer Connect Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs. Click to the Internet. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the setup. b. c. Wired Connections If the network connection is lost The cable is loose or damaged. Check the cable to ensure it is plugged in and not damaged. The link integrity light on the integrated network connector lets you verify that your connection is working and provides information on the status:

Green A good connection exists between a 10-Mbps network and the computer. Orange A good connection exists between a 100-Mbps network and the computer. Off The computer is not detecting a physical connection to the network. NOTE: The link integrity light on the network connector is only for the wired network cable connection. The link integrity light does not provide status for wireless connections. Power Problems If the power light is off The computer is either turned off or is not receiving power. If the computer is plugged into a power strip, ensure that the power strip is plugged into an electrical outlet and that the power strip Solving Problems is turned on. Also bypass power protection devices, power strips, and power extension cables to verify that the computer turns on properly. Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. Check the AC adapter cable connections. If the AC adapter has a light, ensure that the light on the AC adapter is on. If the power light is solid white and the computer is not responding The display may not be responding. Press the power button until the computer turns off and then turn it back on. If the power light is blinking white The computer is in standby mode. Press a key on the keyboard, move the pointer using the touch pad or a connected mouse, or press the power button to resume normal operation. 27 Solving Problems If the power light is blinking amber A device might be malfunctioning or the battery charge is low. If the computer is receiving electrical power, then a device might be malfunctioning or incorrectly installed. If the battery charge is low, connect the computer to the AC adapter. If you encounter interference that hinders reception on your computer An unwanted signal is creating interference by interrupting or blocking other signals. Some possible causes of interference are:

Power, keyboard, and mouse extension cables. Too many devices connected to a power strip. Multiple power strips connected to the same electrical outlet. 28 Memory Problems If you receive an insufficient memory message Save and close any open files and exit any open programs you are not using to see if that resolves the problem. See the software documentation for minimum memory requirements. If necessary, install additional memory

(See the Service Manual on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com). If you experience other memory problems Ensure that you are following the memory installation guidelines (see the Service Manual on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com). Run the Dell Diagnostics (see Dell Diagnostics on page 34). Lockups and Software Problems If the computer does not start up Ensure that the power cable is firmly connected to the computer and to the electrical outlet. If a program stops responding End the program:

1. 2. 3. Press <Ctrl><Shift><Esc> simultaneously. Click Click the program that is no longer responding Click 4. If a program crashes repeatedly Check the software documentation. If necessary, uninstall and then reinstall the program. Applications. End Task. NOTE: Software usually includes installation instructions in its documentation or on the media (CD or DVD). NOTE: Your computer may or may not have an optical drive. Use an external optical drive or any external storage device for the procedures that involve media. Solving Problems If the computer stops responding or a solid blue screen appears CAUTION: You might lose data if you are unable to perform an operating system shutdown. If you are unable to get a response by pressing a key on your keyboard or moving your mouse, press the power button for at least 8 to 10 seconds until the computer turns off and then restart your computer. If a program is designed for an earlier Microsoft Windows operating system Run the Program Compatibility Wizard. The Program Compatibility Wizard configures a program so that it runs in an environment similar to non-XP operating system environments. Windows XP 1. Start All Programs Accessories Click Program Compatibility Wizard. In the welcome screen, click 2. Next. 29 Verify that the device drivers do not conflict with the program. If necessary, uninstall and then reinstall the program, Dell Support Center. Write down any error message that is displayed to help in troubleshooting when Contacting Dell. Solving Problems Follow the instructions on the screen. 3. If you have other software problems Back up your files immediately. Use a virus-scanning program to check the hard drive or CDs. Save and close any open files or programs and shut down your computer through the Start menu. Check the software documentation or contact the software manufacturer for troubleshooting information:

Ensure that the program is compatible with the operating system installed on your computer. Ensure that your computer meets the minimum hardware requirements needed to run the software. See the software documentation for information. Ensure that the program is installed and configured properly. 30 Using Support Tools NOTE: The instructions in this section are for computers with Windows XP operating system installed. Dell Support Center The Dell Support Center helps you find the service, support, and system-specific information you need. For more information about Dell Support Center and available support tools, click the Services tab at support.dell.com. icon in the taskbar to run the Click the application. The home page provides links to access:

Self Help (Troubleshooting, Security, System Performance, Network/Internet, Backup/

Recovery, and Windows operating system) Alerts (technical support alerts relevant to your computer) I N S P I R O N Assistance from Dell (Technical Support with DellConnect, Customer Service, Training and Tutorials, How-To Help with Dell on Call, and Online Scan with PCCheckUp) About Your System (System Documentation, Warranty Information, System Information, Upgrades & Accessories) The top of the Dell Support Center home page displays your computers model number along with its service tag and express service code. For more information about the Dell Support Center, see the Dell Technology Guide on your hard drive or on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. 31 Using Support Tools System Messages If your computer has an issue or error, it may display a System Message that will help you identify the cause and action needed to resolve the issue. NOTE: If the message you received is not listed in the following examples, see the documentation for either the operating system or the program that was running when the message appeared. Alternatively see the Dell Technology Guide on your hard disk or the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. Alert! Previous attempts at booting this system have failed at checkpoint [nnnn]. For help in resolving this problem, please note this checkpoint and contact Dell Technical Support The computer failed to complete the boot routine three consecutive times for the same error (see Contacting Dell on page 47 for assistance). 32 CMOS checksum error Possible motherboard failure or RTC battery low. Replace the battery.

(See the Dell Technology Guide on your hard disk or the Dell Support website at support.dell.com or see Contacting Dell on page 47 for assistance). Hard-disk drive (HDD) failure Possible hard disk drive failure during POST (see Contacting Dell on page 47 for assistance). Hard-disk drive (HDD) read failure Possible hard disk drive failure during HDD boot test (see Contacting Dell on page 47 for assistance). Keyboard failure Keyboard failure or loose cable. No boot device available No bootable partition on hard disk drive, the hard disk drive connector is loose, or no bootable device exists. If the hard drive is your boot device, ensure that the connector is connected and that the drive is installed properly and partitioned as a boot device. Enter system setup and ensure that the boot sequence information is correct (see the Dell Technology Guide on your hard disk or the Dell Support website at support.dell.com). No timer tick interrupt A chip on the system board might be malfunctioning or motherboard failure (see Contacting Dell on page 47 for assistance). USB over current error Disconnect the USB device. Your USB device needs more power for it to function properly. Use an external power source to connect the USB device, or if your device has two USB cables, connect both of them. NOTICE - Hard Drive SELF MONITORING SYSTEM has reported that a parameter has exceeded its normal operating range. Dell recommends that you back up your data regularly. A parameter out of range may or may not indicate a potential hard drive problem S.M.A.R.T error, possible hard disk drive failure. This feature can be enabled or disabled in the Using Support Tools BIOS setup (see Contacting Dell on page 47 for assistance). Hardware Troubleshooter If a device is either not detected during the operating system setup or is detected but incorrectly configured, you can use the Hardware Troubleshooter to resolve the incompatibility. To start the Hardware Troubleshooter:

1. 2. Start Help and Support. Click hardware troubleshooter in Type the search field and press <Enter> to start the search. In the search results, select the option that best describes the problem and follow the remaining troubleshooting steps. 3. 33 Using Support Tools Dell Diagnostics If you experience a problem with your computer, perform the checks in Lockups and Software Problems on page 29 and run the Dell Diagnostics before you contact Dell

(see Contacting Dell on page 47) for technical assistance. It is recommended that you print these procedures before you begin. NOTE: Dell Diagnostics works only on Dell computers. NOTE: The Drivers and Utilities media is optional and may not ship with your computer. To review your computers configuration information, and ensure that the device that you want to test displays in the system setup program and is active. See the System Setup section in the Dell Technology Guide. Start the Dell Diagnostics from your hard drive or from the Drivers and Utilities media. 34 1. 2. 3. Starting Dell Diagnostics From Your Hard Drive The Dell Diagnostics is located on a hidden diagnostic utility partition on your hard drive. NOTE: If your computer cannot display a screen image, see Contacting Dell on page 47. Ensure that the computer is connected to an electrical outlet that is known to be working properly. Turn on (or restart) your computer. When the DELL immediately. Select Diagnostics from the boot menu and press <Enter>. NOTE: If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft Windows desktop;

then, shut down your computer and try again. NOTE: If you see a message stating that no diagnostics utility partition has been found, run the Dell Diagnostics from the Drivers and Utilities media. logo appears, press <F12>

4. Press any key to start the Dell Diagnostics from the diagnostics utility partition on your hard drive. Starting Dell Diagnostics From the Drivers and Utilities Media 1. 2. NOTE: Your computer may or may not have an optical drive. Use an external optical drive or any external storage device for the procedures that involves media. Insert the Drivers and Utilities media. Shut down and restart the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press <F2>

immediately. NOTE: If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft Windows desktop; then, shut down your computer and try again. Using Support Tools NOTE: The next steps change the boot sequence for one time only. On the next start-up, the computer boots according to the devices specified in the system setup program. When the boot device list appears, highlight CD/DVD/CD-RW and press <Enter>. Select the Boot from CD-ROM option from the menu that appears and press <Enter>. Type 1 to start the CD menu and press

<Enter> to proceed. Select the numbered list. If multiple versions are listed, select the version appropriate for your computer. When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears, select the test you want to run. Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics from 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 35 N O R I P S N I Restoring Your Operating System You can restore your operating system in the following ways:

Factory Image Restore returns your hard Restore returns your computer to an System earlier operating state without affecting data files. Use System Restore as the first solution for restoring your operating system and preserving data files. Dell drive to the operating state it was in when you purchased the computer. This procedure permanently deletes all data on the hard drive and removes any programs installed after you received the computer. Use Dell Factory Image Restore only if System Restore did not resolve your operating system problem. If you received an Operating System disc with your computer, you can use it to restore your operating system. However, using the 36 Operating System disc also deletes all data on the hard drive. Use the disc only if System Restore did not resolve your operating system problem. System Restore The Windows operating systems provide a System Restore option which allows you to return your computer to an earlier operating state (without affecting data files) if changes to the hardware, software, or other system settings have left the computer in an undesirable operating state. Any changes that System Restore makes to your computer are completely reversible. CAUTION: Make regular backups of your data files. System Restore does not monitor your data files or recover them. NOTE: The procedures in this document were written for the Windows default view, so they may not apply if you set your Dell computer to the Windows Classic view. Start All Programs Accessories Starting System Restore in Windows XP 1. Click System Tools System Restore. In the welcome screen, click Follow the instructions on the screen. Next. 2. 3. Restoring Your Operating System Undoing the Last System Restore in Windows XP NOTE: Before you undo the last system restore, save and close all open files and exit any open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete. Click System Tools System Restore. In the welcome screen, click restoration and then click Next. Follow the instructions on the screen. Start All Programs Accessories Undo my last 1. 2. 3. 37 Restoring Your Operating System Using Dell PC Restore in Windows XP CAUTION: Using Dell PC Restore permanently deletes all data on the hard drive and removes any programs or drivers installed after you received your computer. If possible, back up the data before using these options. Use PC Restore only if System Restore did not resolve your operating system problem. NOTE: Dell PC Restore by Symantec and Dell Factory Image Restore may not be available in certain countries or on certain computers. Use Dell PC Restore only as the last method to restore your operating system. These options restore your hard drive to the operating state it was in when you purchased the computer. Any programs or files added since you received your computerincluding data filesare permanently deleted from the hard drive. 38 Data files include documents, spreadsheets, e-mail messages, digital photos, music files, and so on. If possible, back up all data before using PC Restore. Using PC Restore:

1. Turn on the computer. During the boot process, a blue bar with www.dell.com appears at the top of the screen. Immediately upon seeing the blue bar, press

<Ctrl><F11>. If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft Windows desktop; then, shut down your computer and try again. CAUTION: If you do not want to proceed with PC Restore, click Reboot. Click Restore and click Confirm. The restore process takes approximately 6 to 10 minutes to complete. 2. 3. Restoring Your Operating System 4. 5. 6. Yes. Finish to reboot the When prompted, click computer. NOTE: Do not manually shut down the computer. Click Finish and let the computer completely reboot. When prompted, click The computer restarts. Because the computer is restored to its original operating state, the screens that appear, such as the End User License Agreement, are the same ones that appeared the first time the computer was turned on. Click The System Restore screen appears and the computer restarts. Next. After the computer restarts, click OK. 39 Restoring Your Operating System Operating System Reinstallation Before You Begin If you are considering reinstalling the Windows operating system to correct a problem with a newly installed driver, first try using Windows Device Driver Rollback. If Device Driver Rollback does not resolve the problem, then use System Restore to return your operating system to the operating state it was in before you installed the new device driver. See System Restore on page 36. CAUTION: Before performing the installation, back up all data files on your primary hard drive. For conventional hard drive configurations, the primary hard drive is the first drive detected by the computer. To reinstall Windows, you need the following items:

Dell Dell Operating System disc Drivers and Utilities disc 40 NOTE: The Dell Drivers and Utilities disc contains drivers that were installed during the assembly of the computer. Use the Dell Drivers and Utilities disc to load any required drivers. Depending on the region from which you ordered your computer, or whether you requested the media, the Dell Drivers and Utilities disc and Operating System disc may not ship with your computer. Reinstalling Windows The reinstallation process can take 1 to 2 hours to complete. After you reinstall the operating system, you must also reinstall the device drivers, virus protection program, and other software. NOTE: Your computer may or may not have an optical drive. Use an external optical drive or any external storage device for the procedures that involve media. Save and close any open files and exit any open programs. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Operating System disc. Exit if the Install Windows message Insert the Click appears. Restart the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press <F2>

immediately. NOTE: If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft Windows desktop; then, shut down your computer and try again. NOTE: The next steps change the boot sequence for one time only. On the next start-up, the computer boots according to the devices specified in the system setup program. When the boot device list appears, highlight CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive and press <Enter>. Press any key to Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation. Boot from CD-ROM. Restoring Your Operating System 41 N O R I P S N I Getting Help If you experience a problem with your computer, you can complete the following steps to diagnose and troubleshoot the problem:

1. 26 for 34 for See Solving Problems on page information and procedures that pertain to the problem your computer is experiencing. See Dell Diagnostics on page procedures on how to run Dell Diagnostics. Fill out the Diagnostic Checklist on page 46. Use Dells extensive suite of online services available at Dell Support (support.dell.com) for help with installation and troubleshooting procedures. See Online Services on page 43 for a more extensive list of Dell Support online. If the preceding steps have not resolved the problem, see Before You Call on page 46 and then Contacting Dell on page 47. 2. 3. 4. 5. 42 NOTE: Call Dell Support from a telephone near or at the computer so that the support staff can assist you with any necessary procedures. NOTE: Dells Express Service Code system may not be available in all countries. When prompted by Dells automated telephone system, enter your Express Service Code to route the call directly to the proper support personnel. If you do not have an Express Service Code, open the Dell Accessories folder, double-click the Express Service Code icon, and follow the directions. NOTE: Some of the services mentioned below are not always available in all locations outside the continental U.S. Call your local Dell representative for information on availability. Technical Support and Customer Service Dells support service is available to answer your questions about Dell hardware. Our support staff use computer-based diagnostics to provide fast, accurate answers. To contact Dells support service, see Before You Call on page 46 and then see the contact information for your region or go to support.dell.com. Online Services You can learn about Dell products and services on the following websites:

www.dell.com www.dell.com/ap only) www.dell.com/jp www.euro.dell.com www.dell.com/la Caribbean countries)

(Asian/Pacific countries

(Japan only)

(Europe only)

(Latin American and Getting Help www.dell.ca

(Canada only) You can access Dell Support through the following websites and e-mail addresses:

Dell Support websites support.dell.com support.jp.dell.com support.euro.dell.com

(Japan only)

(Europe only) Dell Support e-mail addresses mobile_support@us.dell.com support@us.dell.com la-techsupport@dell.com Caribbean countries only) apsupport@dell.com countries only)

(Asian/Pacific

(Latin America and Dell Marketing and Sales e-mail addresses

(Asian/Pacific apmarketing@dell.com countries only) sales_canada@dell.com

(Canada only) 43 Product Information If you need information about additional products available from Dell, or if you would like to place an order, visit the Dell website at www.dell.com. For the telephone number to call for your region or to speak to a sales specialist, see Contacting Dell on page 47. Getting Help Anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP) ftp.dell.com Log in as user: anonymous, and use your e-mail address as your password. Automated Order-Status Service To check on the status of any Dell products that you have ordered, you can go to support.dell.com, or you can call the automated order-status service. A recording prompts you for the information needed to locate and report on your order. For the telephone number to call your region, see Contacting Dell on page 47 for problems with your order. If you have a problem with your order, such as missing parts, wrong parts, or incorrect billing, contact Dell for customer assistance. Have your invoice or packing slip handy when you call. For the telephone number to call for your region, see Contacting Dell on page 47. 44 Returning Items for Repair Under Warranty or for Credit Prepare all items being returned, whether for repair or credit, as follows:

1. Call Dell to obtain a Return Material Authorization Number, and write it clearly and prominently on the outside of the box. NOTE: For the telephone number to call for your region, see Contacting Dell on page 47. Include a copy of the invoice and a letter describing the reason for the return. Include a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist

(see Dell Diagnostics on page 34), indicating the tests that you have run and any error messages reported by the Dell Diagnostics (see Dell Diagnostics on page 34). 2. 3. Getting Help 4. 5. Include any accessories that belong with the item(s) being returned (power cables, software, guides, and so on) if the return is for credit. Pack the equipment to be returned in the original (or equivalent) packing materials. NOTE: You are responsible for paying shipping expenses. You are also responsible for insuring any product returned, and you assume the risk of loss during shipment to Dell. Collect On Delivery

(C.O.D.) packages are not accepted. NOTE: Returns that are missing any of the preceding requirements will be refused at Dells receiving dock and returned to you. 45 Getting Help Before You Call NOTE: Have your Express Service Code ready when you call. The code helps Dells automated-support telephone system direct your call more efficiently. You may also be asked for your Service Tag (located on the back or bottom of your computer). Remember to fill out the following Diagnostics Checklist. If possible, turn on your computer before you call Dell for assistance and call from a telephone at or near the computer. You may be asked to type some commands at the keyboard, relay detailed information during operations, or try other troubleshooting steps possible only at the computer itself. Ensure that the computer documentation is available. Diagnostic Checklist Name:

Date:

Address:

Phone number:

Service Tag (bar code on the back or bottom of the computer):

Express Service Code:

Return Material Authorization Number

(if provided by Dell support technician):

Operating system and version:

Devices:

Expansion cards:

Are you connected to a network? Yes /No Network, version, and network adapter:

Programs and versions:

46 See your operating system documentation to determine the contents of the computers start-up files. If the computer is connected to a printer, print each file. Otherwise, record the contents of each file before calling Dell. Error message, beep code, or diagnostic code:

Description of problem and troubleshooting procedures you performed:

Contacting Dell For customers in the United States, call 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355). NOTE: If you do not have an active Internet connection, you can find contact information on your purchase invoice, packing slip, bill, or Dell product catalog. Dell provides several online and telephone-

based support and service options. Availability varies by country and product, and some services may not be available in your area. Getting Help To contact Dell for sales, technical support, or customer service issues:

support.dell.com. 1. 2. Visit Verify your country or region in the Choose A Country/Region drop-down menu at the bottom of the page. Click Select the appropriate service or support link based on your need. Choose the method of contacting Dell that is convenient for you. Contact Us on the left side of the page. 3. 4. 5. 47 N O R I P S N I Finding More Information and Resources If you need to:

reinstall your operating system. run a diagnostic program for your computer, reinstall desktop system software, or update drivers for your computer, and readme files. learn more about your operating system, maintaining peripherals, RAID, Internet, Bluetooth, networking, and e-mail. upgrade your computer with new or additional memory, or a new hard drive. reinstall or replace a worn or defective part. See:

the Operating System media. the Drivers and Utilities media. NOTE: Drivers and documentation updates can be found on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. the Dell Technology Guide installed on your hard drive. the Service Manual on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com NOTE: In some countries, opening and replacing parts of your computer may void your warranty. Check your warranty and return policies before working inside your computer. 48 If you need to:

find safety best practices information for your computer review Warranty information, Terms and Conditions (U.S. only), Safety instructions, Regulatory information, Ergonomics information, and End User License Agreement. find your Service tag/Express Service Code You must use the service tag to identify your computer on support.dell.com or to contact technical support. find drivers and downloads. access technical support and product help. check on your order status for new purchases. find solutions and answers to common questions. locate information for last-minute updates about technical changes to your computer or advanced technical-reference material for technicians or experienced users. Finding More Information and Resources See:

the safety and regulatory documents that shipped with your computer and also see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance. the back or bottom of your computer. the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. 49 N O R I P S N I Specifications System model Inspiron Mini 10 This section provides information that you may need when setting up, updating drivers for, and upgrading your computer. NOTE: Offerings may vary by region. For more information regarding the configuration of your computer, click Start Help and Support and select the option to view information about your computer. 50 Processor Type L2 Cache Intel Atom N270 512 KB External bus frequency 533 MHz Memory Connectors Capacities Memory type Memory configuration possible two internally-accessible SO-DIMM sockets 512 MB and 1 GB DDR2-800 (Run @

DDR2-533 MHz) 512 MB, 1 GB Computer information System Chipset Data bus width DRAM bus width Processor address bus width Flash EEPROM PCI Bus Intel 945GSE UMA 64 bits single channel 64-bit buses 32 bits 1 MB 32 bits Communications Modem (optional) type Modem interface Network adapter Wireless Internal storage Type 2.5 HDD SATA 2.5 SSD (Solid-state drive) MLC Capacity 120 GB or 160 GB @

5400 rpm 8 GB or 16 GB Specifications External V.92 56K USB Modem Universal Serial Bus

(USB) 10/100 Ethernet LAN on system board internal WLAN

(Mini-Card) with WiFi bgn, Bluetooth wireless technology 51 Specifications Video Audio video controller Intel 945GSE UMA External Interface video memory LCD interface Audio Audio type Audio controller Stereo conversion Internal Interface 8 MB system memory (shared) LVDS 2 channel High Definition Audio Realtek ALC268 24-bit (analog-to-

digital and digital-to-

analog) Intel High Definition Audio Speaker Internal speaker amplifier Volume controls microphone-in connector, stereo headphones/

speakers connector, digital MIC with camera module two 1.0 watt speakers 1 watt per channel software program controlled 52 Specifications Ports and connectors Display Audio Mini-Card Network adapter USB Video microphone connector, one stereo headphones/

speakers connector, digital MIC with camera module one full size Mini Card slot and one half size Mini Card slot, the half size slot supports dual interface and the full size slots support USB only RJ45 port two 4-pin USB 2.0-compliant connectors one 4-pin power USB 2.0-compliant connector 15-hole connector Type (TrueLife) 10.1 inch WSVGA Dimensions:

Height Width Diagonal 222.72 mm (8.76 in) 125.28 mm (4.93 in) 255.52 mm (10.06 in) Maximum resolution 1024 x 576 Refresh rate 60 Hz Operating angle 0 (closed) to 135 Luminance 162 min. 180 typ. cd/m

(5 point avg) 53 Specifications Display Viewing Angles:

Horizontal Vertical Pixel pitch Controls 54 40 (CR 10) typ. WSVGA AG

+10 - +30

(CR 10) typ. WSVGA 0.2175 x 0.2175 mm brightness can be controlled through keyboard shortcuts

(see Dell Technology Guide for more information) Camera Pixel Video resolution Diagonal viewing angle Touch pad X/Y position resolution (graphics table mode) Size:

Width Height 1.3 megapixel 320 x 240 ~1280 x 1024

(640 x 480 at 30 fps) 66 240 cpi 78.5 mm (3.09 inches) sensor-active area 38 mm (1.49 inches) rectangle Battery Type Depth Height Width Weight 3-cell/6-cell lithium ion 23.1 mm (0.91 inches)

(3-cell) 45.62 mm (1.80 inches)

(6-cell) 39.04 mm (1.54 in)

(3-cell) 45.7 mm (1.8 in)

(6-cell) 204.14 mm (8.04 in)

(3-cell) 214.0 mm (8.42 in)

(6-cell) 0.165 kg (0.36 lb)

(3-cell) 0.350 kg (0.77 lb)

(6-cell) Specifications Battery Voltage 11.1 VDC (3/6-cell) Charge time (approximate):

Computer off Operating Storage Coin-cell battery AC adapter Input voltage Input current

(maximum) Input frequency 3.0 hours (3-cell) 4.0 hours (6-cell) 0 to 35C (32 to 95F) 40 to 65C (40 to 149F) CR-2032 100240 VAC 0.8A 5060 Hz 55 AC adapter 30 W PI Height Width Depth 62.0 mm (2.44 inches) 38.9 mm (1.53 inches) 78.0 mm (3.07 inches) Weight (with cables) 0.185 kg (0.41 lb) 63.2 mm (2.5 inches) 30 W Delta 34.0 mm (1.34 inches) 85.0 mm (3.35 inches) Height Width Depth 59.2 mm (2.33 inches) 34.0 mm (1.34 inches) 85.0 mm (3.35 inches) Weight (with cables) 0.205 kg (0.45 lb) Specifications AC adapter Output power 30 W Output current 1.58 A (continuous) Rated output voltage 19.0 VDC Dimensions:

30 W APD Height Width Depth Weight (with cables) 0.19 kg (0.42 lb) 56 Physical Height Width Depth 25.0 mm to 28.0 mm (0.98 in to 1.10 inches) 261 mm (10.27 inches) 182 mm (7.16 inches) Weight (with 3-cell battery):

Configurable to less than 1.30 kg (2.86 lb) Specifications Computer environment Temperature range:

Operating 0 to 35C (32 to 95F) 20 to 65C (4 to 149F) Relative humidity (maximum):

Storage Operating Storage 10% to 90%

(noncondensing) 5% to 90%

(noncondensing) Maximum vibration (using a random-vibration spectrum that simulates user environment):

Operating 0.66 GRMS Storage 1.3 GRMS 57 Specifications Computer environment Maximum shock (measured with hard drive in head-parked position and a 2-ms half-sine pulse):

Operating 110 G Storage 160 G 58 Specifications 59 N O R I P S N I Index A AC adapter size and weight 56 airflow, allowing 5 B backups creating 25 C calling Dell 46 chipset 51 computer, setting up 5 connect(ing) to the Internet 10 Contacting Dell online 47 customer service 43 60 D damage, avoiding 5 Dell Factory Image Restore 36 Dell Support Center 31 Dell support website 49 Dell Technology Guide for further information 48 Diagnostic Checklist 46 drivers and downloads 49 E e-mail addresses for technical support 43 expansion bus 51 F finding more information 48 FTP login, anonymous 44 H hardware problems diagnosing 33 Hardware Troubleshooter 33 help getting assistance and support 42 I Internet connection 10 ISP Internet Service Provider 10 M memory problems solving 28 memory support 50 Microsoft Windows XP setup 9 N network connection fixing 26 network speed testing 26 O order status 44 P power problems, solving 27 power strips, using 6 problems, solving 26 processor 50 products information and purchasing 44 Index 61 T technical support 43 V ventilation, ensuring 5 W warranty returns 45 Windows, reinstalling 36 Windows XP 29 wired network network cable, connecting 7 wireless network connection 26 Index R reinstalling Windows 36 resources, finding more 48 S setup, before you begin 5 shipping products for return or repair 45 software features 25 software problems 29 solving problems 26 specifications 50 support e-mail addresses 43 support sites worldwide 43 System Messages 32 system reinstall options 36 System Restore 36 62 Index 63 Printed in China. Printed on recycled paper. www.dell.com | support.dell.com 0R891KA00

 

 

Mini User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your device. To obtain the latest information in the Mini User Guide, go to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/support. Copyright 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: May 2009 Document Part Number: 530935-001 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the device, do not place the device directly on your lap or obstruct the device air vents. Use the device only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The device and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

iii iv Safety warning notice Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents 1 Knowing the parts Identifying the hardware ....................................................................................................................... 1 Top components .................................................................................................................. 1 TouchPad ............................................................................................................ 1 Light .................................................................................................................... 2 Keys .................................................................................................................... 2 Front components ................................................................................................................ 3 Right-side components ........................................................................................................ 4 Left-side components .......................................................................................................... 5 Display components ............................................................................................................ 6 Bottom components ............................................................................................................. 7 Wireless antennas ............................................................................................................... 8 Additional hardware components ........................................................................................ 8 Identifying the labels ............................................................................................................................. 9 2 Power management Setting power options ......................................................................................................................... 10 Using power-saving states ................................................................................................. 10 Initiating and exiting Standby ............................................................................ 10 Initiating and exiting Hibernation ....................................................................... 10 Using power schemes ....................................................................................................... 11 Viewing the current scheme .............................................................................. 11 Selecting a different power scheme .................................................................. 11 Customizing power schemes ............................................................................ 12 Setting password protection upon exiting Standby ............................................................ 12 Using external AC power .................................................................................................................... 12 Connecting the AC adapter ............................................................................................... 13 Using battery power ........................................................................................................................... 13 Displaying the remaining battery charge ........................................................................... 14 Inserting or removing the battery ....................................................................................... 14 Charging a battery ............................................................................................................. 15 Maximizing battery discharge time .................................................................................... 16 Managing low battery levels .............................................................................................. 16 Identifying low battery levels ............................................................................. 16 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................. 17 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ....... 17 Resolving a low battery level when a charged battery is available ........................................................................................... 17 v Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ........................................................................................... 17 Resolving a low battery level when the device cannot exit Hibernation ....................................................................................... 17 Calibrating a battery ........................................................................................................... 17 Step 1: Fully charge the battery ........................................................................ 17 Step 2: Disable Hibernation and Standby ......................................................... 18 Step 3: Discharge the battery ............................................................................ 18 Step 4: Fully recharge the battery ..................................................................... 19 Step 5: Reenable Hibernation and Standby ...................................................... 19 Conserving battery power .................................................................................................. 19 Storing a battery ................................................................................................................ 19 Disposing of a used battery ............................................................................................... 19 Shutting down the device ................................................................................................................... 20 3 Internet Connecting to a wired network ........................................................................................................... 21 Connecting to a wireless network ....................................................................................................... 22 Using wireless devices ...................................................................................................... 22 Identifying wireless and network status icons ................................................... 22 Using the wireless controls ............................................................................... 23 Using the wireless switch .................................................................................. 23 Using HP Connection Manager software (select models only) ......................... 23 Using HP Wireless Assistant software .............................................................. 24 Using a WLAN ................................................................................................................... 24 Setting up a WLAN ............................................................................................ 25 Protecting your WLAN ....................................................................................... 25 Connecting to a WLAN ...................................................................................... 26 Roaming to another network ............................................................................. 27 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) ............................................................................. 27 Inserting a SIM ................................................................................................................... 28 Removing a SIM ................................................................................................................ 29 Using the HP Mobile Broadband Setup Utility (select models only) ................................................... 29 4 Multimedia Multimedia features ............................................................................................................................ 30 Identifying your multimedia components ........................................................................... 30 Adjusting the volume ......................................................................................................... 31 Multimedia software ........................................................................................................................... 32 Using other preinstalled multimedia software .................................................................... 33 Installing multimedia software from the Internet ................................................................ 33 Audio .................................................................................................................................................. 33 Connecting external audio devices .................................................................................... 33 vi Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Checking your audio functions ........................................................................................... 33 Video .................................................................................................................................................. 34 Connecting an external monitor or projector ...................................................................... 34 Webcam ............................................................................................................................................. 35 5 Security Protecting the device .......................................................................................................................... 36 Using passwords ................................................................................................................................ 36 Passwords set in Windows ................................................................................................ 37 Passwords set in Setup Utility ........................................................................................... 37 Administrator password ..................................................................................... 38 Managing an administrator password ............................................... 38 Entering an administrator password ................................................. 38 Power-on password .......................................................................................... 38 Managing a power-on password ...................................................... 39 Entering a power-on password ......................................................... 39 Using antivirus software ..................................................................................................................... 39 Using firewall software ....................................................................................................................... 39 Installing critical updates .................................................................................................................... 40 6 Digital cards Inserting a digital card ........................................................................................................................ 41 Stopping and removing a digital card ................................................................................................. 42 7 USB devices Using a USB device ........................................................................................................................... 43 Connecting a USB device .................................................................................................. 43 Stopping and removing a USB device ............................................................................... 43 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Setting pointing device preferences ................................................................................................... 45 Using pointing devices ....................................................................................................................... 45 Using the TouchPad .......................................................................................................... 45 Connecting an external mouse .......................................................................................... 45 Using the keyboard ............................................................................................................................ 45 Using hotkeys .................................................................................................................... 45 Initiating Standby (fn+f1) ................................................................................... 46 Switching the screen image (fn+f2) ................................................................... 47 Decreasing screen brightness (fn+f3) ............................................................... 47 Increasing screen brightness (fn+f4) ................................................................. 47 Initiating QuickLock (fn+f6) ................................................................................ 47 Muting speaker sound (fn+f8) ........................................................................... 47 Decreasing speaker sound (fn+f10) .................................................................. 48 vii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Increasing speaker sound (fn+f11) .................................................................... 48 9 Drives Identifying installed drives .................................................................................................................. 49 Handling drives ................................................................................................................................... 49 Using external drives .......................................................................................................................... 49 Using optional external devices ......................................................................................... 50 10 Memory modules 11 Updating software Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 54 Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................... 54 Downloading a BIOS update ............................................................................................. 55 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................... 56 12 Setup Utility Starting the Setup Utility ..................................................................................................................... 57 Using the Setup Utility ........................................................................................................................ 57 Changing the language of the Setup Utility ....................................................................... 57 Navigating and selecting in the Setup Utility ...................................................................... 57 Displaying system information ........................................................................................... 58 Restoring default settings in the Setup Utility .................................................................... 58 Exiting the Setup Utility ...................................................................................................... 58 Setup Utility menus ............................................................................................................................ 58 Main menu ......................................................................................................................... 59 Security menu .................................................................................................................... 59 System Configuration menu .............................................................................................. 59 Diagnostics menu .............................................................................................................. 60 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 61 viii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 Knowing the parts Identifying the hardware Components included with the device may vary by region and model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features on most device models. To see a list of hardware installed in the device, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. Select Start > My Computer. In the left pane of the System Tasks window, select View system information. Select Hardware tab > Device Manager. Top components TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Left TouchPad button*

TouchPad*

TouchPad scroll zone Right TouchPad button*

Description Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Scrolls up or down. Functions like the right button on an external mouse.

*This table describes factory settings. To view or change pointing device preferences, select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Mouse. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying the hardware 1 Light Keys Component Caps lock light Description On: Caps lock is on. Component

(1) Function keys Description Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. 2 Chapter 1 Knowing the parts Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Component Description

(2)

(3)

(4) fn key Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key. Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Front components Component

(1) Power light

(2) Power switch

(3) Drive light Description On: The device is on. Blinking: The device is in Standby. Off: The device is off or in Hibernation. When the device is off, slide the switch to turn on the device. When the device is on, briefly slide the switch to initiate Hibernation. When the device is in Standby, briefly slide the switch to exit Standby. When the device is in Hibernation, briefly slide the switch to exit Hibernation. If the device has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, slide and hold the power switch for at least 5 seconds to turn off the device. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. Blinking: The hard drive or flash drive is being accessed. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying the hardware 3 Component

(4) Battery light

(5) Wireless light

(6) Wireless switch Right-side components Description On: A battery is charging. Blinking: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the device is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the device are fully charged. If the device is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blue: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, is on. Amber: All wireless devices are off. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not establish a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) USB ports (2) Connect optional USB devices. Digital Media Slot Supports the following optional digital card formats:

Memory stick (MS) MS/Pro MultiMediaCard (MMC) Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card xD-Picture card Connects an optional external display, such as a monitor or projector, to the device. External monitor port RJ-45 (network) jack Connects a network cable. 4 Chapter 1 Knowing the parts Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Left-side components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the device. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the device from being mishandled or stolen. Power connector Connects an AC adapter. Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The device fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. USB port Connects an optional USB device. Audio-out (headphones) jack/Audio-in (microphone) jack Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or television audio. Also connects an optional headset microphone. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. NOTE: When an audio component is connected to the jack, the device speakers are disabled. The audio component cable must have a 4conductor connector. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying the hardware 5 Display components Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Speakers (2) Internal display switch Webcam Webcam light Internal microphone Description Produce sound. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. NOTE: The display switch is not visible from the outside of the device. Captures still photographs and videos. NOTE: To capture videos, you will need to install additional webcam software. On: The webcam is in use. Records sound. 6 Chapter 1 Knowing the parts Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Bottom components Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Battery bay Description Holds the battery. Battery release latches (2) Release the battery from the battery bay. Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The device fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Memory module compartment Contains the memory module slot. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying the hardware 7 Wireless antennas Component Description

(1)

(2) WWAN antennas (2) (select models only)*

WLAN antennas (2)*

Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide-area networks (WWANs). Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs).

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the device. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. To see wireless regulatory notices, refer to the section of the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access these notices, click Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Additional hardware components 8 Chapter 1 Knowing the parts Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Power cord*

AC adapter Battery*

Description Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Converts AC power to DC power. Powers the device when the device is not plugged into external power.

*Batteries and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. Identifying the labels The labels affixed to the device provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the device. Service tagProvides important information including the following:

Product name (1). This is the product name affixed to the front of your device. Serial number (s/n) (2). This is an alphanumeric identifier that is unique to each product. Part Number/Product number (p/n) (3). This number provides specific information about the hardware components of the product. The part number helps a service technician to determine what components and parts are needed. Model description (4). This is the alphanumeric identifier you use to locate documents, drivers, and support for your device. Warranty period (5). This number describes the duration (in years) of the warranty period for this device. Have this information available when you contact technical support. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the device. Microsoft Certificate of AuthenticityContains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the device. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the device, including the following:

Information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The serial number of your HP Mobile Broadband Module (select models only). The regulatory label is affixed inside the battery bay. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying the labels 9 2 Power management Setting power options Using power-saving states The device has two power-saving states enabled at the factory: Standby and Hibernation. When Standby is initiated, the power light blinks and the screen clears. Your work is saved to memory. Exiting Standby is faster than exiting Hibernation. If the device is in Standby for an extended period or if the battery reaches a critical battery level while in Standby, the device initiates Hibernation. When Hibernation is initiated, your work is saved to a hibernation file on the hard drive and the device turns off. CAUTION: To prevent possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Standby or Hibernation while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. NOTE: You cannot initiate any type of networking connection or perform any device functions while the device is in Standby or in Hibernation. Initiating and exiting Standby The system is set at the factory to initiate Standby after 10 minutes of inactivity when running on battery power and 25 minutes of inactivity when running on external power. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. With the device on, you can initiate Standby in any of the following ways:

Press fn+f1. Click Start > Turn Off Computer > Stand By. To exit Standby:

Briefly slide the power switch. When the device exits Standby, the power light turns on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:

Windows password before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required when the device exits Standby, you must enter your Initiating and exiting Hibernation The system is set at the factory to initiate Hibernation after 30 minutes of inactivity when running on battery power or when the battery reaches a critical battery level. NOTE: The system will not initiate Hibernation when running on external power. NOTE: To reduce the risk of information loss, periodically save your work. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. 10 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Select Start > Turn Off Computer. To initiate Hibernation:

1. 2. Hold down the shift key and select Hibernate. or If the device is on, briefly slide the power switch. To exit Hibernation:

Briefly slide the power switch. When the device exits Hibernation, the power light turns on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:

your Windows password before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required when the device exits Hibernation, you must enter Using power schemes A power scheme is a collection of system settings that manages how the device uses power. Power schemes can help you conserve power and maximize device performance. The following power schemes are available:

Portable/Laptop (recommended) Home/Office Desk Presentation Always On Minimal Power Management Max Battery You can change the settings of these power plans through Power Options. Viewing the current scheme Click the Power Meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. or Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. Selecting a different power scheme Click the Power Meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select a power scheme from the list. or a. b. Select a power scheme from the Power schemes list. c. Click OK. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Setting power options 11 Customizing power schemes Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. Select a power scheme from the Power schemes list. 1. 2. 3. Modify the Plugged in and Running on batteries settings as needed. 4. Click OK. Setting password protection upon exiting Standby To set the device to prompt for a password when the device exits Standby, follow these steps:

1. Right-click the Power Meter icon in the notification area, and then click Adjust Power Properties. 2. Click the Advanced tab. 3. 4. Click Apply. Select the Prompt for password when computer resumes from standby check box. Using external AC power External AC power is supplied through one of the following devices:

WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the device, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. Approved AC adapter Optional docking device or optional expansion product Connect the device to external AC power under any of the following conditions:

WARNING! Do not charge the device battery while you are onboard aircraft. When you are charging or calibrating a battery When you are installing or modifying system software When you are writing information to a CD or DVD When you connect the device to external AC power, the following events occur:

The battery begins to charge. If the device is turned on, the battery meter icon in the notification area changes appearance. When you disconnect external AC power, the following events occur:

The device switches to battery power. The display brightness is automatically decreased to save battery life. To increase display brightness, press the fn+f4 hotkey or reconnect the AC adapter. 12 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Connecting the AC adapter WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the device by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the device). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. To connect the device to external AC power, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector (1) on the device. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter (2). Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet (3). Using battery power When a charged battery is in the device and the device is not plugged into external power, the device runs on battery power. When the device is plugged into external AC power, the device runs on AC power. If the device contains a charged battery and is running on external AC power supplied through the AC adapter, the device switches to battery power if the AC adapter is disconnected from the device. NOTE: The display brightness is decreased to save battery life when you disconnect AC power. To increase display brightness, use the fn+f4 hotkey or reconnect the AC adapter. You can keep a battery in the device or in storage, depending on how you work. Keeping the battery in the device whenever the device is plugged into AC power charges the battery and also protects your work in case of a power outage. However, a battery in the device slowly discharges when the device is off and unplugged from external power. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the device, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. Device battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the device, display brightness, external devices connected to the device, and other factors. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using battery power 13 Displaying the remaining battery charge Double-click the Power Meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. or Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options > Power Meter tab. Most charge indicators report battery status as both a percentage and as the number of minutes of charge remaining:

The percentage indicates the approximate amount of charge remaining in the battery. The time indicates the approximate running time remaining on the battery if the battery continues to provide power at the current level. For example, the time remaining will decrease when a DVD is playing and will increase when a DVD stops playing. When a battery is charging, a lightning bolt icon may be superimposed over the battery icon on the Power Meter screen. Inserting or removing the battery CAUTION: Removing a battery that is the sole power source may cause loss of information. To prevent loss of information, save your work and initiate Hibernation or shut down the device through Windows before removing the battery. To insert the battery:

1. Disconnect all external devices. 2. 3. 4. If the device is connected to AC power, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Turn the device upside down on a flat surface. Align the tabs on the battery with the notches on the device, and then insert the battery into the battery bay. The battery release latches automatically lock the battery into place. 14 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

To remove the battery:

1. Disconnect all external devices. 2. 3. 4. If the device is connected to AC power, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Turn the device upside down on a flat surface. Slide the battery release latches (1) to release the battery, and then remove the battery (2). Charging a battery WARNING! Do not charge the device battery while you are onboard aircraft. The battery charges whenever the device is plugged into external power through an AC adapter, an optional power adapter, an optional docking device, or an optional expansion product. The battery charges whether the device is off or in use, but it charges faster when the device is off. Charging may take longer if a battery is new, has been unused for 2 weeks or more, or is much warmer or cooler than room temperature. To prolong battery life and optimize the accuracy of battery charge displays, follow these recommendations:

If the device is on while the battery is charging, the battery meter in the notification area If you are charging a new battery, charge it fully before turning on the device. Charge the battery until the battery light turns off. NOTE:

may show 100 percent charge before the battery is fully charged. Allow the battery to discharge below 5 percent of a full charge through normal use before charging it. If the battery has been unused for one month or more, calibrate the battery instead of simply charging it. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using battery power 15 The battery light displays charge status:

On: The battery is charging. Blinking: The battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: The battery is fully charged, in use, or not installed. Maximizing battery discharge time Battery discharge time varies depending on the features you use while on battery power. Maximum discharge time gradually shortens, as the battery storage capacity naturally degrades. Tips for maximizing battery discharge time:

Lower the brightness on the display. Remove the battery from the device when it is not being used or charged. Store the battery in a cool, dry location. Managing low battery levels The information in this section describes the alerts and system responses set at the factory. Some low-

battery alerts and system responses can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. Preferences set using Power Options do not affect lights. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the device reaches a low battery level, the battery light blinks. If a low battery level is not resolved, the device enters a critical battery level, and the battery light blinks rapidly. The device takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is enabled and the device is on or in Standby, the device initiates Hibernation. If Hibernation is disabled and the device is on or in Standby, the device remains briefly in Standby, and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. 16 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Resolving a low battery level CAUTION: To reduce the risk of losing information when the device reaches a critical battery level and has initiated Hibernation, do not restore power until the power lights turn off. Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect one of the following devices:

AC adapter Optional expansion product or docking device Optional power adapter Resolving a low battery level when a charged battery is available Turn off the device or initiate Hibernation. 1. 2. Remove the discharged battery, and then insert a charged battery. 3. Turn on the device. Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Initiate Hibernation. or Save your work and shut down the device. Resolving a low battery level when the device cannot exit Hibernation When the device lacks sufficient power to exit Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. 2. Insert a charged battery or plug the device into external power. Exit Hibernation by briefly sliding the power switch. Calibrating a battery Calibrate a battery under the following conditions:

When battery charge displays seem inaccurate When you observe a significant change in battery run time Even if a battery is heavily used, it should not need to be calibrated more than once a month. It is also not necessary to calibrate a new battery. Step 1: Fully charge the battery WARNING! Do not charge the device battery while you are onboard aircraft. NOTE: The battery charges whether the device is off or in use, but it charges faster when the device is off. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using battery power 17 To fully charge the battery:

1. 2. Connect the device to an AC adapter, optional power adapter, optional expansion product, or Insert the battery into the device. optional docking device, and then plug the adapter or device into external power. The battery light on the device turns on. Leave the device plugged into external power until the battery is fully charged. The battery light on the device turns off. 3. Step 2: Disable Hibernation and Standby 1. Right-click the Power Meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Adjust Power Properties. or Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. 2. Record the 4 settings listed in the Running on batteries column and the Plugged in column so that you can reset them after the calibration. Set the 4 options to Never. 3. 4. Click OK. Step 3: Discharge the battery The device must remain on while the battery is being discharged. The battery can discharge whether or not you are using the device, but the battery will discharge faster while you are using it. If you plan to leave the device unattended during the discharge, save your information before beginning the discharge procedure. If you use the device occasionally during the discharge procedure and have set energy-saving timeouts, expect the following performance from the system during the discharge process:

The monitor will not turn off automatically. Hard drive speed will not decrease automatically when the device is idle. System-initiated Hibernation will not occur. To discharge a battery:

1. Unplug the device from its external power source, but do not turn off the device. 2. Run the device on battery power until the battery is discharged. The battery light begins to blink when the battery has discharged to a low battery level. When the battery is discharged, the battery light turns off and the device shuts down. 18 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Step 4: Fully recharge the battery To recharge the battery:

1. Plug the device into external power and maintain external power until the battery is fully recharged. When the battery is recharged, the battery light on the device turns off. You can use the device while the battery is recharging, but the battery will charge faster if the device is off. If the device is off, turn it on when the battery is fully charged and the battery light has turned off. 2. Step 5: Reenable Hibernation and Standby CAUTION: Failure to reenable Hibernation after calibration may result in a full battery discharge and information loss if the device reaches a critical battery level. 1. 2. Reenter the settings that you recorded for the items in the Plugged in column and the Running Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. on batteries column. 3. Click OK. Conserving battery power Select low power-use settings through Power Options in Windows Control Panel. Turn off wireless and local area network (LAN) connections and exit modem applications when you are not using them. Disconnect external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, when you are not using them. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Use the fn+f3 and fn+f4 hotkeys to adjust screen brightness as needed. If you leave your work, initiate Standby or Hibernation, or shut down the device. Storing a battery CAUTION: To prevent damage to a battery, do not expose it to high temperatures for extended periods of time. If a device will be unused and unplugged from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately. To prolong the charge of a stored battery, place it in a cool, dry place. NOTE: A stored battery should be checked every 6 months. If the capacity is less than 50 percent, recharge the battery before returning it to storage. Calibrate a battery before using it if it has been stored for one month or more. Disposing of a used battery WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. Refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices for battery disposal information. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using battery power 19 Shutting down the device CAUTION: Unsaved information will be lost when the device is shut down. The Shut Down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and device. Shut down the device under any of the following conditions:

When you need to replace the battery or access components inside the device When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB port When the device will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period To shut down the device, follow these steps:

NOTE:

shutdown is possible. 1. 2. If the device is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Save your work and close all open programs. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. If the device is in Standby or in Hibernation, you must first exit Standby or Hibernation before Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, click Shut Down > Turn Off. Slide and hold the power switch for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the device from external power and remove the battery. 20 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

3 Internet Your device supports the following types of Internet access:

WiredYou can access the Internet by connecting to a broadband network using the RJ-45

(network) jack. WirelessFor mobile Internet access, you can use a wireless connection. To learn about setting up a wireless network or adding your device to an existing network, refer to the Connecting to a wireless network section. Connecting to a wired network Connecting to a local area network (LAN) requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 network cable (purchased separately). If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (1), which prevents interference from TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable (2) toward the device. To connect the network cable:

WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a modem cable or telephone cable into an RJ-45 (network) jack. 1. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the device. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Connecting to a wired network 21 2. Plug the other end of the cable into a network wall jack (2). Connecting to a wireless network Using wireless devices Wireless technology transfers data across radio waves instead of wires. Your device may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

Wireless local area network (WLAN) deviceConnects the device to wireless local area networks

(commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, each mobile wireless device communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband Module (select models only)A wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that provides access to information wherever mobile network operator service is available. In a WWAN, each mobile device communicates to a mobile network operators base station. Mobile network operators install networks of base stations (similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. The device supports the following IEEE industry standards:

802.11b, the first popular standard, supports data rates of up to 11 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. 802.11g supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. An 802.11g WLAN device is backward compatible with 802.11b devices, so they can operate on the same network. For more information on wireless technology, refer to the information and Web site links provided in Help and Support. Identifying wireless and network status icons Icon Name Description 22 Chapter 3 Internet Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Wireless (connected) Identifies the location of the wireless light and the wireless switch on the device. Also identifies that one or more of the wireless devices are on. Wireless (disconnected) Indicates that all of the wireless devices are off. Wireless network connection (connected) Indicates that one or more of your WLAN devices are connected to the network. Wireless network connection (disconnected) Indicates that one or more of your WLAN devices are not connected to a network. Network status (connected) Indicates that one or more of your LAN drivers are installed and one or more LAN devices are connected to the network. Network status (disconnected) Indicates that one or more of your LAN drivers are installed but no LAN devices are connected to the network. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your device using these features:

Wireless switch Operating system controls Using the wireless switch The device has a wireless switch, one or more wireless devices, and one wireless light. All of the wireless devices on your device are enabled at the factory, so the wireless light is on (blue) when you turn on the device. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. If the wireless light is blue, at least one wireless device is on. If the wireless light is amber, all wireless devices are off. Because the wireless devices are enabled at the factory, you can use the wireless switch to turn on or turn off all of the wireless devices simultaneously. Using HP Connection Manager software (select models only) Connection Manager allows you to manage your Internet profiles, SMS (Short Message Service) messaging, connection devices and methods, and edit additional settings. To start Connection Manager:

1. Click the HP Connection Manager icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 2. Click Connect to turn on the wireless wide area network (WWAN) feature and use HP Mobile Broadband. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Connecting to a wireless network 23 NOTE: Connection time varies. After the connection is established, a notification message is displayed in the Connection Manager window. NOTE: Connection Manager is minimized when first opened. To maximize the Connection Manager window and view more information on connectivity status, click Details. For more details about using Connection Manager, refer to the Connection Manager Help. Using HP Wireless Assistant software A wireless device can be turned on or off using the Wireless Assistant software. If a wireless device is disabled by the Setup Utility, it must be reenabled by the Setup Utility before it can be turned on or off using Wireless Assistant. NOTE: Enabling or turning on a wireless device does not automatically connect the device to a network. To view the state of the wireless devices, position the mouse pointer over the wireless icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the wireless icon, click the Show hidden icons icon (< or <<) in the notification area. If the wireless icon is not displayed in the notification area, complete the following steps to change Wireless Assistant properties:

1. Click Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections > HP Wireless Assistant. 2. Click Properties. 3. 4. Click Apply. For more information, refer to the Wireless Assistant software Help:

1. Open Wireless Assistant by double-clicking the icon in the notification area. 2. Click the Help button. You can use the properties dialog box in Wireless Assistant to show the on/off controls for each installed wireless device and control the devices separately. To show the on/off controls:

1. Double-click the Wireless Assistant icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 2. Click Properties. 3. Select the Independent controls for installed wireless devices check box, and then click Apply. Select the check box next to Wireless Assistant icon in notification area. 4. Click Turn off or Turn on to control each wireless device separately. Using a WLAN With a WLAN device, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other devices and accessories that are linked by a wireless router or a wireless access point. 24 Chapter 3 Internet Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

NOTE: The terms wireless router and wireless access point are often used interchangeably. A large-scale WLAN, such as a corporate or public WLAN, typically uses wireless access points that can accommodate a large number of devices and accessories and can separate critical network functions. A home or small office WLAN typically uses a wireless router, which allows several wireless and wired devices to share an Internet connection, a printer, and files without requiring additional pieces of hardware or software. To use the WLAN device in your device, you must connect to a WLAN infrastructure (provided through a service provider or a public or corporate network). Setting up a WLAN To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet, you need the following equipment:

A broadband modem (either DSL or cable) (1) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider (ISP) A wireless router (purchased separately) (2) The wireless device (3) The illustration below shows an example of a wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet. As your network grows, additional wireless and wired devices can be connected to the network to access the Internet. For help in setting up your WLAN, refer to the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. Protecting your WLAN It is essential to understand that because the WLAN standard was designed with only limited security capabilitiesbasically to foil casual eavesdropping rather than more powerful forms of attackWLANs are vulnerable to well-known and well-documented security weaknesses. WLANs in public areas, or hotspots, like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. New technologies are being developed by wireless manufacturers and hotspot service providers that make the public environment more secure and anonymous. If you are concerned about the security of your device in a hotspot, limit your network activities to noncritical e-mail and basic Internet surfing. When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. The common security levels are Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)-

Personal and Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). Because wireless radio signals travel outside the network, other WLAN devices can pick up unprotected signals and either connect to your network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Connecting to a wireless network 25

(uninvited) or capture information being sent across it. However, you can take precautions to protect your WLAN:

Use a wireless transmitter with built-in security Many wireless base stations, gateways, or routers provide built-in security features such as wireless security protocols and firewalls. With the correct wireless transmitter, you can protect your network from the most common wireless security risks. Work behind a firewall A firewall is a barrier that checks both data and requests for data that are sent to your network, and discards any suspicious items. Firewalls are available in many varieties, both software and hardware. Some networks use a combination of both types. Use wireless encryption A variety of sophisticated encryption protocols is available for your WLAN. Find the solution that works best for your network security:

Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a wireless security protocol that encodes or encrypts all network data before it is transmitted using a WEP key. Usually, you can allow the network to assign the WEP key. Alternatively, you can set up your own key, generate a different key, or choose other advanced options. Without the correct key, others will not be able to use the WLAN. WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access), like WEP, uses security settings to encrypt and decrypt data that is transmitted over the network. However, instead of using one static security key for encryptions as WEP does, WPA uses temporal key integrity protocol (TKIP) to dynamically generate a new key for every packet. It also generates different sets of keys for each device on the network. Close your network If possible, prevent your network name (SSID) from being broadcast by the wireless transmitter. Most networks initially broadcast the name, telling any device nearby that your network is available. By closing the network, other devices are less likely to know that your network exists. NOTE:

the SSID to connect new devices to the network. Write down the SSID and store it in a secure place before closing the network. If your network is closed and the SSID is not broadcast, you will need to know or remember Connecting to a WLAN To connect to the WLAN, follow these steps:

1. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. If it is on, the wireless light is blue. If the wireless light is amber, slide the wireless switch. Select Start > Connect to. Select your WLAN from the list, and then type the network security key, if required. 2. 3. If the network is unsecured, meaning that anyone can access the network, a warning is displayed. Click Connect Anyway to accept the warning and complete the connection. If the network is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a network security key, which is a security code. Type the code, and then click Connect to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you are out of range of a wireless router or access point. 26 Chapter 3 Internet Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

If you do not see the network you want to connect to, click Set up a connection or NOTE:

network. A list of options is displayed. You can choose to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. After the connection is made, place the mouse pointer over the wireless network connection icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name, speed, strength, and status of the connection. 4. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. More information about using a WLAN is available through the following resources:

Information from your ISP and the user guides included with your wireless router and other WLAN equipment Information and Web site links provided in Help and Support For a list of public WLANs near you, contact your ISP or search the Web. Web sites that list public WLANs include Cisco Internet Mobile Office Wireless Locations, Hotspotlist, and Geektools. Check with each public WLAN location for cost and connection requirements. Roaming to another network When you move your device within range of another WLAN, Windows attempts to connect to that network. If the attempt is successful, your device is automatically connected to the new network. If Windows does not recognize the new network, follow the same procedure you used initially to connect to your WLAN. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) An HP Mobile Broadband Module is a wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that provides access to information wherever mobile network operator service is available. Using HP Mobile Broadband requires a network service provider (called a mobile network operator), which in most cases is a mobile phone network operator. Coverage for HP Mobile Broadband is similar to mobile phone voice coverage. When used with mobile network operator service, HP Mobile Broadband gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road or outside the range of Wi-Fi hotspots. HP Mobile Broadband supports the following technologies:

HSPA (High Speed Packet Access) module, which provides access to networks based on the Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) telecommunications standard. EV-DO (Evolution Data Optimized), which provides access to networks based on the code division multiple access (CDMA) telecommunications standard. You may need the HP Mobile Broadband Module serial number to activate mobile broadband service. The serial number is printed on a label inside the battery bay of your device. Some mobile network operators require the use of a subscriber identity module (SIM). A SIM contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some devices include a SIM that is preinstalled in the battery bay. If the SIM is not preinstalled, it may be provided in the packet of HP Mobile Broadband information provided with your device, or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the device. For information on inserting and removing the SIM, refer to the Inserting a SIM and Removing a SIM sections in this chapter. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) 27 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

For information on HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, refer to the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your device. For additional information, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/mobilebroadband (US only). Inserting a SIM CAUTION: To prevent damage to the connectors, use minimal force when inserting a SIM. To insert a SIM:

1. Shut down the device. If you are not sure whether the device is off or in Hibernation, turn the device on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the device through the operating system. 2. Close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the device. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. 6. Remove the battery. 7. Turn the device upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. Insert the SIM into the SIM slot, and gently push the SIM into the slot until it is firmly seated. 8. Replace the battery. NOTE: HP Mobile Broadband will be disabled if the battery is not replaced. 9. Reconnect external power. 10. Reconnect external devices. 11. Turn on the device. 28 Chapter 3 Internet Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Removing a SIM To remove a SIM:

1. Shut down the device. If you are not sure whether the device is off or in Hibernation, turn the device on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the device through the operating system. 2. Close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the device. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. 6. Remove the battery. 7. Press in on the SIM (1), and then remove it from the slot (2). Turn the device upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 8. Replace the battery. 9. Reconnect external power. 10. Reconnect external devices. 11. Turn on the device. Using the HP Mobile Broadband Setup Utility (select models only) The HP Mobile Broadband Setup Utility provides basic information about setting up HP Mobile Broadband. NOTE: The HP Mobile Broadband Setup Utility is not available in all regions. When you first turn on HP Mobile Broadband, the Getting Started with HP Mobile Broadband page opens. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the HP Mobile Broadband Setup Utility (select models only) 29 4 Multimedia Multimedia features Your device includes multimedia features that allow you to listen to music, watch movies, and view pictures. Your device may include the following multimedia components:

Integrated speakers for listening to music Integrated webcam that allows you to capture photographs and videos Preinstalled multimedia software that allows you to play and manage your music, movies, and pictures NOTE: Your device may not include all of the components listed. The following sections explain how to identify and use the multimedia components included with your device. Identifying your multimedia components The following illustration and table describe the multimedia features of the device. 30 Chapter 4 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8) Webcam Captures still photographs and videos. NOTE: To capture videos, you will need to install additional webcam software. Webcam light Internal microphone Speakers (2) Volume up hotkey Volume down hotkey Volume mute hotkey Audio-out (headphones) jack/Audio-in

(microphone) jack On: The webcam is in use. Records sound. Produce sound. Increases speaker sound when pressed in combination with the fn key. Decreases speaker sound when pressed in combination with the fn key. Mutes speaker sound when pressed in combination with the fn key. Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or television audio. Also connects an optional headset microphone. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the device speakers are disabled. Adjusting the volume You can adjust the volume using the following controls:

Device volume hotkeyA combination of the fn key (1) and either the f8 (2), f10 (3), or f11 (4) function key:

To mute or restore volume, press fn+f8. To decrease volume, press fn+f10. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Multimedia features 31 To increase volume, press fn+f11. Windows volume control:

a. Click the Volume icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. b. Increase or decrease the volume by moving the slider up or down. Select the Mute check box to mute the volume. or a. Double-click the Volume icon in the notification area. b. In the Volume Control column, you can increase or decrease the volume by moving the Volume slider up or down. You can also adjust the balance or mute the volume. If the Volume icon is not displayed in the notification area, follow these steps to add it:

a. Select Start > Control Panel > Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices > Sounds and Audio Devices > Volume tab. b. Select the Place volume icon in the taskbar check box. c. Click Apply. Program volume control:

Volume can also be adjusted within some programs. Multimedia software Your device includes preinstalled multimedia software that allows you to play music, watch movies, and view pictures. 32 Chapter 4 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using other preinstalled multimedia software To locate other preinstalled multimedia software:

Select Start > All Programs, and then open the multimedia program you want to use. For example, if you want to use Windows Media Player (select models only), click Windows Media Player. NOTE: Some programs may be located in subfolders. Installing multimedia software from the Internet To install multimedia software from the Internet, go to the software manufacturers Web site and follow the instructions. NOTE: Software downloaded from the Internet may contain viruses. Refer to the Security chapter for more information. Audio Your device has a variety of audio features that allow you to:

Play music using your device speakers and/or connected external speakers. Record sound using the internal microphone or an optional external headset microphone. Download music from the Internet. Create multimedia presentations using audio and images. Transmit sound and images with instant messaging programs. Connecting external audio devices WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To connect external devices such as external speakers, headphones, or a headset microphone, refer to the information provided with the device. For best results, remember the following tips:

Be sure that the device cable has 4conductor connector that supports both audio-out

(headphones) and audio-in (microphone). Be sure that the device cable is securely connected to the jack on your device. Be sure to install any drivers required by the external device. NOTE: A driver is a required program that acts like a translator between the device and the programs that use the device. Checking your audio functions To check the system sound on your device, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices > Sounds and Audio Devices. 2. When the Sound and Audio Device Properties window opens, click the Sounds tab. Under Program events, select any sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and click the arrow button to check the sound. Audio 33 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

You should hear sound through the speakers or through connected headphones. To check the record functions of the device, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Entertainment > Sound Recorder. 2. Click the record button and speak into the microphone. Save the file to your desktop. 3. Open a multimedia program and play back the sound. NOTE: For best results when recording, speak directly into the microphone and record sound in a setting free of background noise. To confirm or change the audio settings on your device, right-click the Volume icon on the taskbar, or select Start > Control Panel > Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices > Sounds and Audio Devices. Video Your device enables you to use a variety of video features:

Watch movies Play games over the Internet Edit pictures and video to create presentations Connect external video devices Connecting an external monitor or projector Use a VGA cable (purchased separately) to connect an external display, such as a monitor or projector, to the external monitor port on the device. To connect an external monitor or projector:

1. Connect the optional VGA cable to the external monitor port on the device. 2. Connect the external monitor or projector to the other end of the cable. NOTE:

fn+f2 to transfer the image to the external display. Repeatedly pressing fn+f2 alternates the screen image between the external display and the device. If a properly connected external monitor or projector does not display a screen image, press 34 Chapter 4 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Webcam Your device includes an integrated webcam, located at the top of the display. The webcam is an input device that allows you to capture still photographs and videos. NOTE: To record videos, you need to install additional webcam software. To access the webcam:

1. Click Start > My Computer, and then double-click the camera icon. 2. Click Take a new picture to take a picture. NOTE: The picture is automatically saved in the My Documents folder. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Webcam 35 5 Security Protecting the device Standard security features provided by the Windows operating system and the non-Windows Setup Utility can protect your personal settings and data from a variety of risks. Follow the procedures in this chapter to use the following features:

Passwords Firewall software Antivirus support (Norton Internet Security) Critical security updates NOTE: Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents, but they may not deter software attacks or prevent the device from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE: Before you send your device for service, remove all password settings. Device risk Unauthorized use of the device Unauthorized access to data Unauthorized access to Setup Utility, BIOS settings, and other system identification information Security feature QuickLock Power-on password Firewall software Windows updates Administrator password Ongoing or future threats to the device Critical security updates from Microsoft Unauthorized access to a Windows user account User password Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your device information. Several types of passwords can be set, depending on how you want to control access to your information. Passwords can be set in Windows or in the non-Windows Setup Utility preinstalled on the device. CAUTION: To prevent being locked out of the device, record each password you set. Because most passwords are not displayed as they are set, changed, or deleted, it is essential to record each password immediately and store it in a secure place. You can use the same password for a Setup Utility feature and for a Windows security feature. You can also use the same password for more than one Setup Utility feature. 36 Chapter 5 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Use the following guidelines when setting a password in Setup Utility:

A password can be any combination of up to 8 letters and numbers and is case sensitive. A password set in the Setup Utility must be entered at a Setup Utility prompt. A password set in Windows must be entered at a Windows prompt. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Write down your passwords and store them in a secure place away from the device. Do not store passwords in a file on the device. Do not use your name or other personal information that could be easily discovered by an outsider. The following sections list Windows and Setup Utility passwords and describe their functions. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords, select Start > Help and Support. Passwords set in Windows Password Administrator password User password QuickLock Passwords set in Setup Utility Password Administrator password*

Function Protects administrator-level access to device contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility contents. Protects access to a Windows user account. It also protects access to the device contents and must be entered when you exit Standby or Hibernation. Protects the device by requiring a password to be entered in the Windows Log On dialog box before you access the device. After you set a user or administrator password, follow these steps:

1. 2. Initiate QuickLock by pressing fn+f6. Exit QuickLock by entering your Windows user or administrator password. Function Protects access to Setup Utility. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you access Setup Utility. CAUTION:

cannot access Setup Utility. If you forget your administrator password, you Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using passwords 37 Password Power-on password*

Function Protects access to the device contents. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you turn on or restart the device, or exit Hibernation. CAUTION:

If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the device, or exit Hibernation.

*For details about each of these passwords, refer to the following topics. Administrator password Your administrator password protects the configuration settings and system identification information in Setup Utility. After this password is set, you must enter it each time you access Setup Utility. Your administrator password is not interchangeable with an administrator password set in Windows, nor is it displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. Be sure that you record your password and store it in a safe place. Managing an administrator password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:

1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Set Administrator Password, and then press enter. To set an administrator password, type your password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To change an administrator password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, type a new password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To delete an administrator password, type your current password in the Enter Password field, and then press enter 4 times. 3. To save your changes and exit the Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes. Your changes go into effect when the device restarts. Entering an administrator password At the Enter Password prompt, type your administrator password, and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the administrator password, you must restart the device and try again. Power-on password Your power-on password prevents unauthorized use of the device. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you turn on or restart the device, or exit Hibernation. A power-on password is not displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. 38 Chapter 5 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Managing a power-on password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:

1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Set Power-On Password, and then press enter. To set a power-on password, type your password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To change a power-on password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, type a new password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To delete a power-on password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, and then press enter 4 times. 3. To save your changes and exit the Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes. Your changes go into effect when the device restarts. Entering a power-on password At the Enter Password prompt, type your password, and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the password, you must restart the device and try again. Using antivirus software When you use the device for e-mail or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses that can disable the operating system, programs, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Norton Internet Security, an antivirus program, is preinstalled on the device. Your version of Norton Internet Security includes 60 days of free updates. It is strongly recommended that you protect the device against new viruses beyond 60 days by purchasing extended update service. Instructions for using and updating Norton Internet Security software and for purchasing extended update service are provided within the program. To access Norton Internet Security, or to get more information about it, click Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security. NOTE: HP recommends that always update the antivirus software to help protect your device. NOTE: For more information about computer viruses, type viruses in the Search box in Help and Support. Using firewall software When you use the device for e-mail, network, or Internet access, unauthorized persons may be able to gain access to the device, your personal files, and information about you. Use the firewall software preinstalled on the device to protect your privacy. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using antivirus software 39 Firewall features include logging and reporting of network activity, and automatic monitoring of all incoming and outgoing traffic. Refer to the firewall user guide or contact your firewall manufacturer for more information. NOTE: Under some circumstances a firewall can block access to Internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a network, or block authorized e-mail attachments. To temporarily resolve the problem, disable the firewall, perform the task that you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall. Installing critical updates CAUTION: Microsoft sends alerts regarding critical updates. To protect the device from security breaches and device viruses, install all critical updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. Updates to the operating system and other software may have become available after the device was shipped. To be sure that all available updates are installed on the device, observe these guidelines:

Run Windows Update as soon as possible after you set up your device. Use the update link at Start > All Programs > Windows Update. Run Windows Update at regular intervals, such as once a month. Obtain updates to Windows and other Microsoft programs, as they are released, from the Microsoft Web site and through the updates link in Help and Support. 40 Chapter 5 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

6 Digital cards Optional digital cards provide secure data storage and convenient data sharing. These cards are often used with digital mediaequipped cameras and PDAs as well as with other devices. The Digital Media Slot supports the following formats:

Memory Stick (MS) MS/Pro MultiMediaCard (MMC) Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card xD-Picture card Inserting a digital card CAUTION: To avoid damaging the digital card or the device, do not insert any type of adapter into the Digital Media Slot. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the digital card connectors, use minimal force to insert a digital card. 1. Hold the digital card label-side up, with the connectors facing the device. 2. Insert the card into the Digital Media Slot, and then push in on the card until it is firmly seated. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected, and a menu of options may be displayed. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Inserting a digital card 41 Stopping and removing a digital card CAUTION: To prevent loss of data or an unresponsive system, stop a digital card before removing it. 1. Save your information and close all programs associated with the digital card. NOTE: To stop a data transfer, click Cancel in the operating system Copying window. 2. 3. Stop the digital card:

a. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware icon, click the Show Hidden Icons icon

(< or <<) in the notification area. b. Click the name of the digital card in the list. c. Click Stop, and then click OK. Press in on the digital card (1), and then remove the card from the slot (2). 42 Chapter 6 Digital cards Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

7 USB devices Using a USB device Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a hardware interface that can be used to connect an optional external device, such as a USB keyboard, mouse, drive, printer, scanner, or hub. Devices can be connected to the system, an optional docking device, or an optional expansion product. Some USB devices may require additional support software, which is usually included with the device. For more information about device-specific software, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. The device has 3 USB ports, which support USB 1.0, USB 1.1, and USB 2.0 devices. An optional USB hub, optional docking device, or an optional expansion product provides additional USB ports that can be used with the device. Connecting a USB device CAUTION: To prevent damage to a USB connector, use minimal force to connect a USB device. To connect a USB device, connect the USB cable for the device to the USB port. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected. NOTE: When you connect a USB device, you may see a message in the notification area to let you know that the device is recognized by the system. Stopping and removing a USB device CAUTION: To prevent loss of information or an unresponsive system, stop a USB device before removing it. CAUTION: To prevent damage to a USB connector, do not pull on the cable to remove the USB device. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using a USB device 43 To stop and remove a USB device:

1. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware icon, click the Show Hidden Icons icon (< or

<<) in the notification area. 2. Click the name of the device in the list. NOTE:

If the USB device is not listed, you do not have to stop the device before you remove it. 3. Click Stop, and then click OK. 4. Remove the device. 44 Chapter 7 USB devices Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

8 Pointing devices and keyboard Setting pointing device preferences Use Mouse Properties in Windows to customize settings for pointing devices, such as button configuration, click speed, and pointer options. To access Mouse Properties, select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware >

Mouse. Using pointing devices Using the TouchPad To move the pointer, slide your finger across the TouchPad surface in the direction you want the pointer to go. Use the TouchPad buttons like the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To scroll up and down using the TouchPad vertical scroll zone, slide your finger up or down over the lines. NOTE:

If you are using the TouchPad to move the pointer, you must lift your finger off the TouchPad before moving it to the scroll zone. Simply sliding your finger from the TouchPad to the scroll zone will not activate the scrolling function. Connecting an external mouse You can connect an external USB mouse to the device using one of the USB ports on the device. Using the keyboard Using hotkeys Hotkeys are combinations of the fn key (1) and one of the function keys (2). The icons on the f1 through f4, and f6, f8, f10, and f11 keys represent the hotkey functions. Hotkey functions and procedures are discussed in the following sections. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Setting pointing device preferences 45 Function Initiate Standby. Switch the image. Decrease screen brightness. Increase screen brightness. Initiate QuickLock. Mute or restore speaker. Decrease speaker sound. Increase speaker sound. Hotkey fn+f1 fn+f2 fn+f3 fn+f4 fn+f6 fn+f8 fn+f10 fn+f11 To use a hotkey command on the device keyboard, follow either of these steps:

Briefly press the fn key, and then briefly press the second key of the hotkey command. or Press and hold down the fn key, briefly press the second key of the hotkey command, and then release both keys at the same time. Initiating Standby (fn+f1) Press fn+f1 to initiate Standby. When Standby is initiated, your information is stored in memory, the screen is cleared, and power is conserved. While the device is in Standby, the power light blinks. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of information loss, save your work before initiating Standby. The device must be on before you can initiate Standby. 46 Chapter 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

NOTE:

If a critical battery level occurs while the device is in Standby, the device initiates Hibernation and the information stored in memory is saved to the hard drive. The factory setting for critical battery action is Hibernate, but this setting can be changed in advanced power settings. To exit Standby, briefly slide the power switch. The function of the fn+f1 hotkey can be changed. For example, you can set the fn+f1 hotkey to initiate Hibernation instead of Standby. NOTE:

hotkey. In all Windows operating system windows, references to the sleep button apply to the fn+f1 Switching the screen image (fn+f2) Press fn+f2 to switch the screen image among display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the device, pressing fn+f2 alternates the screen image from device display to monitor display to simultaneous display on both the device and the monitor. NOTE: You must use a VGA cable (purchased separately) to connect an external display, such as a monitor or projector, to the external monitor port on the device. Most external monitors receive video information from the device using the external VGA video standard. The fn+f2 hotkey can also alternate images among other devices receiving video information from the device. The following video transmission types, with examples of devices that use them, are supported by the fn+f2 hotkey:

LCD (device display) External VGA (most external monitors) Decreasing screen brightness (fn+f3) Press fn+f3 to decrease screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to decrease the brightness level incrementally. Increasing screen brightness (fn+f4) Press fn+f4 to increase screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to increase the brightness level incrementally. Initiating QuickLock (fn+f6) Press fn+f6 to initiate the QuickLock security feature. QuickLock protects your information by displaying the operating system Log On window. While the Log On window is displayed, the device cannot be accessed until a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password is entered. NOTE: Before you can use QuickLock, you must set a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password. For instructions, refer to Help and Support. To use QuickLock, press fn+f6 to display the Log On window and lock the device. Then follow the instructions on the screen to enter your Windows user password or your Windows administrator password and access the device. Muting speaker sound (fn+f8) Press fn+f8 to mute speaker sound. Press the hotkey again to restore speaker sound. Using the keyboard 47 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Decreasing speaker sound (fn+f10) Press fn+f10 to decrease speaker sound. Hold down the hotkey to decrease speaker sound incrementally. Increasing speaker sound (fn+f11) Press fn+f11 to increase speaker sound. Hold down the hotkey to increase speaker sound incrementally. 48 Chapter 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

9 Drives Identifying installed drives To view the drives installed on the device, select Start > My Computer. Handling drives Drives are fragile device components that must be handled with care. Refer to the following cautions before handling drives. Additional cautions are included with the procedures to which they apply. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the device, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

Before you move a device that is connected to an external hard drive, initiate Standby and allow the screen to clear, or properly disconnect the external hard drive. Before handling a drive, discharge static electricity by touching the unpainted metal surface of the drive. Do not touch the connector pins on a removable drive or on the device. Handle a drive carefully; do not drop a drive or place items on it. Before removing or inserting a drive, shut down the device. If you are unsure whether the device is off, in Standby, or in Hibernation, turn the device on and then shut it down through the operating system. Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive into a drive bay. Do not type on the keyboard or move the device while an optional optical drive is writing to a disc. The write process is sensitive to vibration. When the battery is the only source of power, be sure that the battery is sufficiently charged before writing to media. Avoid exposing a drive to temperature or humidity extremes. Avoid exposing a drive to liquids. Do not spray the drive with cleaning products. Remove media from a drive before removing the drive from the drive bay, or traveling with, shipping, or storing a drive. If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-

through devices and security wands. The airport security devices that check carry-on luggage, such as conveyor belts, use X-rays instead of magnetism and will not damage a drive. Using external drives Removable external drives expand your options for storing and accessing information. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying installed drives 49 USB drives include the following types:

1.44-megabyte diskette drive Hard drive module (a hard drive with an adapter attached) DVD-ROM Drive DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive DVD+RW/R and CD-RW Combo Drive DVDRW/R and CD-RW Combo Drive Using optional external devices NOTE: For more information about required software and drivers, or to learn which device port to use, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. To connect an external device:

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the equipment when connecting a powered device, be sure that the device is turned off and the AC power cord is unplugged. 1. Connect the device. 2. 3. To disconnect an unpowered external device, turn off the device, and then disconnect it. To disconnect a powered external device, turn off the device, disconnect it, and then unplug the AC power cord. If you are connecting a powered device, plug the device power cord into a grounded AC outlet. Turn on the device. 50 Chapter 9 Drives Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

10 Memory modules The device has one memory module compartment, which is located on the bottom of the device. The memory capacity of the device can be upgraded by replacing the existing memory module in the primary memory module slot. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock and damage to the equipment, unplug the power cord and remove all batteries before installing a memory module. CAUTION: Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage electronic components. Before beginning any procedure, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. To add or replace a memory module:

1. 2. Save your work. Shut down the device and close the display. If you are not sure whether the device is off or in Hibernation, turn the device on by sliding the power switch. Then shut down the device through the operating system. Turn the device upside down on a flat surface. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the device. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. 6. Remove the battery from the device. 7. Using a small Phillips screwdriver, loosen the 2 cover screws (1). 8. Lift the memory module compartment cover (2) away from the device. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

51 9. Remove the existing memory module:

a. Pull away the retention clips (1) on each side of the memory module. The memory module tilts up. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module. b. Grasp the edge of the memory module (2), and gently pull the module out of the memory module slot. To protect a memory module after removal, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 10. Insert a new memory module:

CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module, and do not bend the memory module. a. b. With the memory module at a 45-degree angle from the surface of the memory module Align the notched edge (1) of the memory module with the tab in the memory module slot. compartment, press the module (2) into the memory module slot until it is seated. 52 Chapter 10 Memory modules Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

c. Gently press the memory module (3) down, applying pressure to both the left and right edges of the memory module, until the retention clips snap into place. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, be sure that you do not bend the memory module. 11. Align the tabs on the memory module compartment cover with the notches on the device, and then close the cover (1). 12. Tighten the 2 cover screws (2). 13. Replace the battery. 14. Turn the device right-side up, and then reconnect external power and external devices. 15. Turn on the device. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

53 11 Updating software Updated versions of the software provided with your device may be available on the HP Web site. Most software and BIOS updates on the HP Web site are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. To update the software, follow these steps, which are explained in the remainder of this guide:

1. Identify your device model, product category, and series or family. Prepare for a system BIOS update by identifying the BIOS version currently installed on the device. If your device is connected to a network, consult the network administrator before installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. NOTE: The device system BIOS is stored on the system ROM. The BIOS initializes the operating system, determines how the device will interact with the hardware devices, and provides for data transfer among hardware devices, including the time and date. Access the updates on the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com. Install the updates. Updating the BIOS 2. 3. To update the BIOS, first determine what BIOS version you currently have and then download and install the new BIOS. Determining the BIOS version To determine whether available BIOS updates contain later BIOS versions than those currently installed on the device, you need to know the version of the system BIOS currently installed. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be displayed by opening the Setup Utility. To display the BIOS information:

1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. If the Setup Utility does not open with the system information displayed, use the arrow keys to select the Main menu. When the Main menu is selected, BIOS and other system information is displayed. To exit the Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. 2. 3. 54 Chapter 11 Updating software Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To prevent damage to the device or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the device is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the device is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the device by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the device or initiate Standby or Hibernation. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. To download a BIOS update:

1. Access the page on the HP Web site that provides software for your device:

Select Start > Help and Support, and then select the software and drivers update. Follow the instructions on the screen to identify your device and access the BIOS update you want to download. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. Identify the BIOS update that is later than the BIOS version currently installed on your device. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. Follow the instructions on the screen to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update will be downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. 2. 3. b. NOTE:

any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If you connect your device to a network, consult the network administrator before installing BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are displayed, follow these steps:

1. Open Windows Explorer by selecting Start > My Computer. 2. Double-click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the instructions on the screen. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Updating the BIOS 55 Updating programs and drivers To download and install software other than a BIOS update, follow these steps:

1. Access the page on the HP Web site that provides software for your device:

Select Start > Help and Support, and then select the software and drivers update. Follow the instructions on the screen to find the software you want to update. At the download area, select the software you want to download and follow the instructions on the screen. NOTE: Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the software will be downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the software. 2. 3. 4. When the download is complete, open Windows Explorer by selecting Start > My Computer. 5. Double-click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 6. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 7. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The installation begins. 8. Complete the installation by following the instructions on the screen. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. 56 Chapter 11 Updating software Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

12 Setup Utility Starting the Setup Utility The Setup Utility is a ROM-based information and customization utility that can be used even when your Windows operating system is not working. The utility reports information about the device and provides settings for startup, security, and other preferences. To start the Setup Utility:

Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. Using the Setup Utility Changing the language of the Setup Utility The following procedure explains how to change the language of the Setup Utility. If the Setup Utility is not already running, begin at step 1. If the Setup Utility is already running, begin at step 2. 1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select System Configuration > Language, and then press enter. 3. Use the arrow keys to select a language, and then press enter. 4. When a confirmation prompt with your language selected is displayed, press enter. 5. To save your change and exit the Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. Your change goes into effect immediately. Navigating and selecting in the Setup Utility Because the Setup Utility is not Windows based, it does not support the TouchPad. Navigation and selection are by keystroke. To choose a menu or a menu item, use the arrow keys. To choose an item in a list or to toggle a field, for example an Enable/Disable field, use either the arrow keys or f5 or f6. To select an item, press enter. To close a text box or return to the menu display, press esc. To display additional navigation and selection information while the Setup Utility is open, press f1. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Starting the Setup Utility 57 Displaying system information The following procedure explains how to display system information in the Setup Utility. If the Setup Utility is not open, begin at step 1. If the Setup Utility is open, begin at step 2. 1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10 2. 3.

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. Select the Main menu. System information such as the system time and date, and identification information about the device is displayed. To exit the Setup Utility without changing any settings, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. Restoring default settings in the Setup Utility The following procedure explains how to restore the Setup Utility default settings. If the Setup Utility is not already running, begin at step 1. If the Setup Utility is already running, begin at step 2. 1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Exit > Load Setup Defaults, and then press enter. 3. When the Setup Confirmation is displayed, press enter. 4. To save your change and exit the Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. The Setup Utility default settings go into effect when the device restarts. NOTE: Your password, security, and language settings are not changed when you restore the factory default settings. Exiting the Setup Utility You can exit the Setup Utility with or without saving changes. To exit the Setup Utility and save your changes from the current session:

If the Setup Utility menus are not visible, press esc to return to the menu display. Then use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. To exit the Setup Utility without saving your changes from the current session:

If the Setup Utility menus are not visible, press esc to return to the menu display. Then use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. After either choice, the device restarts in Windows. Setup Utility menus The menu tables in this section provide an overview of Setup Utility options. NOTE: Some of the Setup Utility menu items listed in this chapter may not be supported by your device. 58 Chapter 12 Setup Utility Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Main menu Select System information Security menu Select Administrator password Power-On Password System Configuration menu To do this View and change the system time and date. View identification information about the device. View specification information about the processor, memory size, and system BIOS. To do this Enter, change, or delete an administrator password. Enter, change, or delete a power-on password. Select Language Support Processor C4 State Boot Options To do this Change the Setup Utility language. Enable/disable the processor C4 sleep state. Set the following boot options:

f10 and f12 Delay (sec.)Set the delay for the f10 and f12 functions of the Setup Utility in intervals of 5 seconds each (0, 5, 10, 15, 20). Internal Network Adapter bootEnable/disable boot from Internal Network Adapter. Boot OrderSet the boot order for:

Internal hard drive (select models only) USB Floppy USB CD/DVD ROM Drive USB flash drive USB Hard drive USB Card Reader Network adapter NOTE: Only the devices attached to the system will appear in the boot order menu. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Setup Utility menus 59 Diagnostics menu Select To do this Hard Disk Self Test (select models only) Run a comprehensive self-test on the hard drive. Memory Test Run a diagnostic test on the system memory. 60 Chapter 12 Setup Utility Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index A AC adapter connecting 13 identifying 9 administrator password creating 38 entering 38 managing 38 airport security devices 49 antennas 8 applications key, Windows 3 audio devices, connecting external 33 audio functions, checking 33 audio-in (microphone) jack 5, 31 audio-out (headphones) jack 5, 31 B battery calibrating 17 charging 15, 17 conserving power 19 discharging 16 disposing 19 identifying 9 inserting 14 low battery levels 16 recharging 19 removing 14 storing 19 battery bay, identifying 7 battery light 4, 15, 16 battery power 13 battery release latches 7, 14 battery temperature 19 bay, battery 7 BIOS, updating 54 boot options 59 boot order 59 button, volume mute 31 buttons left TouchPad 1 right TouchPad 1 C cables LAN 21 USB 43 VGA 34 calibrating battery 17 caps lock light, identifying 2 CD drive 50 changing the Setup Utility language 57 charging batteries 15, 17 checking audio functions 33 compartments, memory module 7 components additional hardware 8 bottom 7 display 6 front 3 left-side 5 right-side 4 TouchPad 1 connecting to a WLAN 26 connection, external power 13 conservation, power 19 cord, power 9 corporate WLAN connection 26 critical battery level 16 D Diagnostics menu 60 digital card inserting 41 removing 42 stopping 42 Digital Media Slot, identifying 4 diskette drive 50 display image, switching 47 screen brightness hotkeys 47 display switch, identifying 6 displaying system information 58 drive light, identifying 3 drive media 10 drives diskette 50 external 49 hard 49 optical 50 drives, boot order 59 DVD drive 50 E earbuds 5, 31 encryption 26 entering a power-on password 39 entering an administrator password 38 exiting the Setup Utility 58 external audio devices, connecting 33 external drive 49 external monitor port 34 external monitor port, identifying 4 F firewall 26 fn key 3, 45 function keys 2, 45 H hard disk drive, external 49 hard drive self test 60 hard drive, external 49 hardware, identifying 1 headphones 5, 31 headphones (audio-out) jack 5, 31 Hibernation exiting 10 initiated during critical battery level 16 initiating 10 hotkeys decreasing screen brightness 47 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index 61 decreasing speaker sound 48 description 45 increasing screen brightness 47 increasing speaker volume 48 initiating QuickLock 47 initiating Standby 46 muting speaker sound 47 switching screen image 47 using 46 HP Mobile Broadband Module 27 HP Mobile Broadband, disabled 28 hubs 43 I icons network status 22 wireless 22 internal display switch, identifying 6 internal microphone, identifying 6, 31 Internet connection setup 25 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 5, 31 audio-out (headphones) 5, 31 RJ-45 (network) 4 K keyboard hotkeys, identifying 45 keys fn 3 function 2 Windows applications 3 Windows logo 3 L labels Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 9 regulatory 9 service tag 9 language support 59 latches, battery release 7 left TouchPad button, identifying 1 lights battery 4 caps lock 2 drive 3 power 3 webcam 6 wireless 4 local area network (LAN) cable required 21 connecting cable 21 low battery level 16 M Main menu 59 managing a power-on password 39 managing an administrator password 38 memory module inserting 52 removing 52 cover removing 51 replacing 53 memory module compartment memory module compartment, identifying 7 memory test 60 microphone (audio-in) jack 5, 31 monitor, connecting 34 mouse, external connecting 45 setting preferences 45 multimedia components, identifying 30 multimedia software installing 33 using 33 mute button 31 mute hotkey, identifying 31 N navigating in the Setup Utility 57 network cable connecting 21 noise suppression circuitry 21 network jack, identifying 4 network status icon 22 noise suppression circuitry, network cable 21 62 Index Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

O operating system 20 optical drive 50 P passwords administrator 38 power-on 38 set in Setup Utility 37 set in Windows 37 external monitor 34 USB 4, 5, 43 ports power connecting 13 conserving 19 power connector, identifying 5 power cord, identifying 9 power light, identifying 3 power switch, identifying 3 power-on password creating 39 entering 39 managing 39 Processor C4 State 59 product name and number, device 9 programs, updating 56 projector, connecting 34 public WLAN connection 26 HP Mobile Broadband Module Q QuickLock 37 QuickLock hotkey 47 R readable media 10 regulatory information serial number 9 regulatory label 9 wireless 9 release latches battery 7, 15 restoring default settings 58 right TouchPad button, identifying 1 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 4 S screen brightness hotkeys 47 screen image, switching 47 security cable slot, identifying 5 Security menu 59 security, cable slot 5 security, wireless 25 selecting in the Setup Utility 57 serial number, device 9 service tag 9 setup of WLAN 25 Setup Utility, passwords set in 37 setup, device 1 shut down 20 SIM inserting 28 removing 29 software installing 33 multimedia 33 Windows Media Player 33 speakers, identifying 6, 31 Standby exiting 10 initiating 10 Standby hotkey 46 storing battery 19 switches power 3 wireless 4 System Configuration menu 59 system information 59 T temperature 19 TouchPad buttons 1 identifying 1 using 45 TouchPad scroll zone, identifying 1 traveling with the device 19 turning off the device 20 removing 43 stopping 43 USB hubs 43 USB ports, identifying 4, 5, 43 V vents, identifying 5, 7 video transmission types 47 volume down hotkey, identifying 31 volume mute button 31 volume up hotkey, identifying 31 volume, adjusting 31 W webcam light, identifying 6, 31 webcam, identifying 6, 31 Windows applications key, identifying 3 Windows logo key, identifying 3 Windows, passwords set in 37 wireless antennas 8 wireless controls button 23 operating system 23 wireless icon 22 wireless light, identifying 4, 23 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 26 corporate WLAN connection 26 equipment needed 25 functional range 27 public WLAN connection 26 security 25 wireless network, connecting 22 wireless switch, identifying 4, 23 WLAN antennas, identifying 8 WLAN device 22 writable media 10 WWAN antennas, identifying 8 U unresponsive system 20 USB cable, connecting 43 USB devices connecting 43 description 43 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index 63 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

 

 

For more information about HP products and services, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com. Copyright 2010 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: April 2010 Document Part Number: 602795-001 Contents 1 Getting started Charging the battery . 1 Verifying the box contents . 2 Getting information. 3 User Manual on a Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card . 3 Electronic manuals in Help and Support . 3 Turning off the computer from Windows . 4 2 Whats new?

Windows 7 . 5 Customizable desktop . 5 HP QuickWeb software (select models only). 5 Action keys . 6 One-touch launch keys . 8 TouchPad . 9 Navigating. 9 Selecting . 9 Turning the TouchPad on and off . 10 Using TouchPad gestures . 10 Beats Audio. 12 Sharing optical drives . 13 3 Using HP QuickWeb (select models only) Setting up HP QuickWeb for the first time. 16 Starting Microsoft Windows. 17 Identifying the QuickWeb control buttons . 17 Identifying the LaunchBar icons. 18 Identifying the notification icons . 19 Using the Settings panel . 20 Configuring the network. 20 Playing music . 20 Browsing photos . 21 Creating instant messages with Chat . 21 Making Internet phone calls with Skype (select models only). 21 Disabling and enabling HP QuickWeb. 22 4 Connecting to the Internet Choosing the type of Internet access . 23 Using an ISP . 23 Connecting to a wired network. 24 Connecting to an existing wireless network . 25 Setting up a new wireless network . 26 Step 1: Purchase and install a wireless router. 27 Step 2: Configure the computer to connect to the wireless network . 27 User Manual iii Contents 5 Multimedia features Using multimedia software. 29 Installing multimedia software from a disc . 29 Using HP MediaSmart . 30 Using the webcam. 30 Using audio features . 31 Using video features . 31 Connecting an external monitor or projector . 31 Connecting an HDMI device . 31 6 Updating software Updating the software installed on the computer . 33 Updating programs and drivers. 33 7 Backup and recovery A Creating recovery discs. 35 Backing up your information . 36 Using Windows Backup and Restore . 37 Using system restore points . 37 When to create restore points . 37 Creating a system restore point. 38 Restoring to a previous date and time. 38 Performing a recovery . 38 Recovering using the recovery discs . 39 Recovering using the partition on the hard drive (select models only) . 39 Product information and troubleshooting Input power . 41 Operating environment . 41 Traveling with the computer. 42 Routine care . 43 Cleaning the display . 43 Cleaning the TouchPad and keyboard . 43 Troubleshooting resources . 43 Quick troubleshooting. 44 The computer is unable to start up . 44 The TouchPad is behaving erratically . 44 The computer screen is blank . 44 Software is functioning abnormally . 44 The computer is on but is not responding. 45 The computer is unusually warm . 45 An external device is not working . 45 The wireless network connection is not working . 46 Index iv User Manual 1 Getting started Charging the battery To fully charge the battery, leave the computer plugged into external power until the battery light on the left side of the computer turns white. WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment, observe these guidelines:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on your power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. A partially charged new battery can run the computer after software setup is complete, but battery charge displays will not be accurate until the new battery has been fully charged. When the computer is connected to external power, the battery light turns white when the battery is fully charged. User Manual 1 1 Getting started Verifying the box contents Computer color, features, and options may vary by computer model. The illustrations in this guide may look slightly different from your computer. Component 1 Computer 2 AC adapter Component 3 Power cord*

4 SD Memory Card

*Power cords vary in appearance by country or region. 2 User Manual 1 Getting started Getting information User Manual on a Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card This guide provides information about new features, such as HP QuickWeb software, action keys, TouchPad gestures, optical drive sharing, as well as details about connecting to the Internet and multimedia features. Electronic manuals in Help and Support For detailed information about your computer, such as information about power management, multimedia, TouchPad and keyboard, security, and other features, click Start, click Help and Support, and then click User Guides. You do not need to connect to the Internet to access the user guides in Help and Support. User Manual 3 1 Getting started Help and Support In Help and Support, you can find information about technical support, and about the operating system, drivers, and troubleshooting tools. To access Help and Support, click Start, and then click Help and Support. For country- or region-specific support, go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety & Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. To access this document, click Start, click Help and Support, and then click User Guides. The Safety & Comfort Guide is also available on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo. Regulatory, safety, and environmental notices For more safety and regulatory information, and for battery disposal information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access the notices, click Start, click Help and Support, and then click User Guides. Turning off the computer from Windows To turn off the computer from Windows:

1. Save your work and close all programs. 2. Click Start, and then click Shut down. 4 User Manual 2 Whats new?

Windows 7 Your computer includes the new Windows 7 operating system. Windows 7 has several new program and feature enhancements, such as:

Faster startup Updated Wi-Fi network controls Customizable taskbar Fewer pop-ups and notifications Support for more multimedia formats Customizable desktop The Stardock MyColors program (select models only) offers a customizable desktop theme that transforms the look and feel of your basic Windows desktop. The new desktop includes custom icons, visual styles (Start button and taskbar), and a corresponding wallpaper. To change back to the standard Windows theme, open the Stardock MyColors program and select the standard Windows theme. HP QuickWeb software (select models only) HP QuickWeb software is an optional, instant-on environment that is separate from your Windows operating system. QuickWeb allows you to rapidly access certain programs without the need to start your operating system. You will enjoy this feature if you browse the Internet, view and send e-mail, view digital photos, listen to music, or keep in touch through instant messages or Skype. QuickWeb is ready to go within seconds of pressing the power button. For detailed information on using QuickWeb, refer to Chapter 3, Using HP QuickWeb

(select models only). User Manual 5 2 Whats new?

Action keys Action keys are customized actions that are assigned to specific keys at the top of the keyboard. To use an action key, press and hold the key to activate the assigned action. Some action keys are not available in QuickWeb. For additional information about action keys, refer to the HP ENVY 15 User Guide. To access this guide, click Start, click Help and Support, and then click User Guides. Icon Description Opens Help and Support, which provides information about your Windows operating system and computer, answers to questions, tutorials, and updates to your computer. Help and Support also provides automated troubleshooting and links to support specialists. Decreases the screen brightness level incrementally when held down. Increases the screen brightness level incrementally when held down. Switches the screen image among display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, pressing this key alternates the screen image from computer display to monitor display to simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Most external monitors receive video information from the computer using the external VGA video standard. The switch screen image key can also alternate images among other devices that are receiving video information from the computer.

(Continued) User Manual 6 2 Whats new?

Icon Description Plays the previous track of an audio CD, or the previous section of a DVD or a Blu-ray Disc (BD). Plays, pauses, or resumes an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD. Stops audio or video playback of a CD, a DVD, or a BD. Plays the next track of an audio CD or the next section of a DVD or a BD. Decreases speaker sound incrementally when held down. Increases speaker sound incrementally when held down. Mutes or restores speaker sound. Initiates the QuickLock security feature. QuickLock protects your information by displaying the operating system Log On window. While the Log On window is displayed, the computer cannot be accessed until a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password is entered. Before you can use QuickLock, you must set a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password. For instructions, refer to Help and Support. prt sc Takes a snapshot or picture of your computer screen and copies it to the clipboard. User Manual 7 2 Whats new?

One-touch launch keys One-touch launch keys are customized actions that are assigned to specific keys on the left side of the keyboard. To use a one-touch launch key, press the key to activate the assigned action. Item Icon Description 1 2 3 4 5 Opens your default e-mail program. The first time you press the mail key, you may be prompted to set up your e-mail account. After you have set up your e-mail account, you can press the mail key to quickly access your e-mail. Opens HP MediaSmart. HP MediaSmart turns your computer into a mobile entertainment center. You can enjoy music and movies, and manage and edit your photo collections. Opens a Web browser. Until you have set up your Internet or network services, the Web key opens the Windows Internet Connection Wizard. After you have set up your Internet or network services and your Web browser home page, you can press the Web key to quickly access your home page and the Internet. Opens the Print Options window of the active Windows program. Opens the Windows calculator function. 8 User Manual 2 Whats new?

TouchPad Navigating To move the pointer, slide one finger across the TouchPad in the direction you want the pointer to go. Selecting Use the left and right TouchPad buttons like the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. User Manual 9 2 Whats new?

Turning the TouchPad on and off To turn the TouchPad on and off, quickly double-tap the TouchPad off indicator. When the TouchPad is on, the light is off. Using TouchPad gestures The TouchPad supports gestures that make it easy and fun to work with images or pages of text. To activate the TouchPad gestures, place 2 fingers on the TouchPad at the same time as described in the following sections. Scrolling Scrolling is useful for moving up or down on a page or image. To scroll, place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad and drag them across the TouchPad in an up, down, left, or right motion. Scrolling speed is controlled by finger speed. 10 User Manual 2 Whats new?

Pinching/Zooming Pinching allows you to zoom in or out on items such as PDFs, images, and photos. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the TouchPad, and then moving them apart. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the TouchPad, and then moving them together. Setting preferences Scrolling and pinching are enabled at the factory. You computer also supports additional TouchPad gestures that are disabled at the factory. To disable or reenable TouchPad gestures or to explore other TouchPad gestures:

1. Double-click the Synaptics icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click the Device Settings tab. 2. Select the device, and then click Settings. 3. Select the check box to disable or reenable the TouchPad gesture. 4. Click Apply, and then click OK. For additional information about using the TouchPad, refer to the HP ENVY 15 User Guide. To access this guide, click Start, click Help and Support, and then click User Guides. User Manual 11 2 Whats new?

Beats Audio To increase or decrease the Beats Audio bass settings, press fn+b. Beats Audio is an enhanced audio profile that provides a deep, controlled bass while maintaining a clear sound. Beats Audio is enabled by default. You can also view and control the bass settings through the Windows operating system. Click Start, click Control Panel, click Sound, and then click Speakers and Headphone Properties to view and control the bass properties. The following table shows and describes the Beats Audio icons. Icon Description Indicates that Beats Audio is connected. Indicates that Beats Audio is not connected. 12 User Manual 2 Whats new?

Sharing optical drives Although your computer does not have an integrated optical drive, you can easily access software, install programs, and access information by sharing an optical drive connected to another computer in your network. Drive sharing is a feature of the Windows operating system that allows a drive on one computer to be accessible to other computers on the same network. You must have a network set up in order to share an optical drive. Refer to Help and Support for information on setting up a network. Some discs, such as DVD movies and game discs, may be copy-protected and therefore unusable through DVD or CD sharing. To share an optical drive:

1. From the computer with the optical drive you want to share, click Start, and then click Computer. 2. Right-click the optical drive you want to share, and then click Properties. 3. Click the Sharing tab, and then click Advanced Sharing. 4. Select the Share this folder check box. 5. Type a name for the optical drive in Share name text box. 6. Click Apply, and then click OK. 7. To view the shared optical drive on your computer, click Start, click Control Panel, click Network and Internet, and then click Network and Sharing Center. User Manual 13 3 Using HP QuickWeb (select models only) HP QuickWeb is an optional, instant-on environment that is separate from your Windows operating system. QuickWeb allows you to rapidly access a Web browser, and other communication and multimedia programs, without the need to start Windows. QuickWeb is ready to go within seconds of pressing the power button after system setup. QuickWeb includes the following features:

Web browserSearch and browse the Internet, and create links to your favorite Web sites. ChatChat with friends on multiple instant messaging programs, such as Google Talk, Windows Live Messenger, Yahoo! Messenger, and other providers. Skype (select models only)Skype is a voice over Internet protocol (VoIP) that lets you communicate free of charge with other Skype users. With Skype, you can have a conference call or a video chat with one or more people at a time. You can also make long-distance phone calls to land lines. Web e-mailView and send e-mail using Yahoo, Gmail, and other Web e-mail providers. Web calendarDisplay, edit, and organize your schedule using your favorite online calendar program. Music PlayerListen to your favorite music and create playlists. Photo ViewerBrowse through photos, create albums, and view slide shows. User Manual 15 3 Using HP QuickWeb (select models only) Setting up HP QuickWeb for the first time The first time you turn on your computer after completing the Windows setup process, the QuickWeb setup screens appear. Follow the on-screen instructions to activate QuickWeb. At the end of the setup process, you are given the choice to start Windows or to continue to QuickWeb for the current session. If you select the option to start QuickWeb, the QuickWeb Home screen appears. Click an icon on the QuickWeb Home screen to launch a program. The QuickWeb Home screen may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. The following section assumes that you have completed the QuickWeb setup process and enabled QuickWeb. For more information, refer to the QuickWeb software Help. QuickWeb allows you to access a Web browser, and other communication and multimedia programs, within seconds without starting Windows. To start QuickWeb when the computer is powered off:

1. Turn on your computer. The HP QuickWeb Home screen appears. 2. Click an icon on the QuickWeb Home screen to launch a program. 16 User Manual 3 Using HP QuickWeb (select models only) Starting Microsoft Windows If QuickWeb has been activated, it will start every time you power up your computer. To start Microsoft Windows, you must click the Windows Start icon in the QuickWeb Home screen. To start Microsoft Windows:

1. Turn on your computer. The HP QuickWeb Home screen appears. 2. Click the Windows Start icon on the far left of the QuickWeb Home screen. 3. A dialog box appears, asking if you are sure you want to start Windows. Click Yes. Clicking on the Make Windows your default Power On experience in this dialog box disables QuickWeb. To reenable QuickWeb, refer to the section Disabling and enabling HP QuickWeb, later in this chapter. Identifying the QuickWeb control buttons The following table shows and describes the QuickWeb control buttons. Icon Description Launches the Windows operating system. Turns off the computer from QuickWeb. For details on turning off the computer from Windows, refer to Turning off the computer from Windows in Chapter 1. User Manual 17 3 Using HP QuickWeb (select models only) Identifying the LaunchBar icons The following table shows and describes HP QuickWeb icons. Icon Description Launches the Web browser. You can bookmark your favorite Web sites and view Web pages. Launches the Chat application. This is compatible with Google Talk, Windows Live Messenger, Yahoo! Messenger, and other providers. Launches Skype (select models only). This is a voice over Internet protocol

(VoIP) that lets you communicate free of charge with other Skype users. Launches Web e-mail so you can view your Web-based e-mail programs, such as Gmail, Hotmail, Yahoo, and other Web e-mail providers. Launches Web calendar so you can schedule and manage your activities using your favorite online calendar application. Launches Music Player. Select and play music stored on your hard drive or external drives. Supports .mp3 files. Launches Photo Viewer. Browse photos stored on your hard drive or external drive. Supports .bmp, .gif, .jpg, and .png file types. 18 User Manual 3 Using HP QuickWeb (select models only) Identifying the notification icons The following table shows and describes the notification icons:

Icon Description Indicates that a USB drive is present. If a USB drive is inserted, the File Manager window containing a USB icon appears. Click the USB icon to open the File Manager window. Right-click the USB icon to open a menu to safely eject the device. If your HP ENVY 15 comes equipped with USB 3.0, please note that only the eSATA/USB 2.0 port may be used for USB devices while in HP QuickWeb mode. Indicates that the network is connected. Click the Network icon to open the Network dialog box. Indicates that the network is disconnected. Controls volume for speakers and the microphone. Click the Volume Control icon to open the Volume Control dialog box. Controls power settings:

When the computer is connected to AC power, the icon appears with an AC power cord. When the computer is running on battery power, the icon appears as only a battery. The state of charge is indicated by the color of the Battery icon:

Green: charged Yellow: low Red: critical low Click the Battery icon to display a menu to control power settings and to see information about battery capacity. Launches the Settings panel. Use the Settings panel to modify QuickWeb settings such as date and time. Refer to the following section, Using the Settings panel for more information. Displays the QuickWeb software Help. User Manual 19 3 Using HP QuickWeb (select models only) Using the Settings panel 1. After turning on the computer, click the Settings icon. The Settings panel selection box is displayed. 2. Click the icon that corresponds to the system setting you want to modify. Choose from any of the following:

Date and Time Input Language Language and Keyboard Network Environment Settings Screen Settings Volume Control Applications For more information on changing settings in the Settings panel, refer to the HP QuickWeb software Help. Configuring the network QuickWeb can be configured to set up a wireless connection by using the HP QuickWeb Configuration Tool. To access this tool, click the Settings icon, click Network, and then select the Enable Wi-Fi check box. For more information on setting up a wireless connection using HP QuickWeb and Windows, refer to Chapter 4, Connecting to the Internet, and to the HP QuickWeb software Help. Playing music To play music:

1. Click the Music icon on the LaunchBar. Music Player is displayed. 2. On the left side of the Music Player window, navigate to the directory that contains your music files. The directory can be on either your hard drive or an external drive. 3. Click a music file you want to play from the list on the right side of the window. 4. When you are finished making your music selection, click the Play icon at the bottom right of the window. 20 User Manual 3 Using HP QuickWeb (select models only) Browsing photos To view photos:

1. Click the Photos icon on the LaunchBar. Photo Viewer is displayed. 2. On the left side of the Photo Viewer window, navigate to the directory that contains your photos. The directory can be on either your hard drive or an external drive. The right side of the Photo Viewer window displays thumbnail views of all the photos in the selected directory. 3. Double-click the thumbnail of the photo you want to view. The photo thumbnail views appear at the bottom right of the Photo Viewer window. A larger view of the selected photo appears above the thumbnails. 4. Navigate the thumbnail views by pressing the right arrow key or left arrow key, or by clicking the next thumbnail image you want to see enlarged. Creating instant messages with Chat Chat is an instant messaging program that is compatible with Google Talk, Yahoo!

Messenger, and other providers. To start an instant messaging session:

1. Click the Chat icon on the LaunchBar. The buddy list window and a configuration tool are displayed. 2. In the buddy list window, click Help to get information on configuring Chat for your instant messaging protocol and setting up your account. You can also configure Chat to work with an existing instant messaging account. Making Internet phone calls with Skype (select models only) Skype is a voice over Internet protocol (VoIP) that lets you communicate free of charge with other Skype users. You can also make long-distance phone calls to land lines at lower costs than many long-distance carriers charge. To start Skype:

1. Click the Skype icon on the LaunchBar. A Sign in to Skype window is displayed. 2. Click the Create a new Skype Account tab. 3. Before you proceed, read the information provided by the links at the bottom of the Create Account window, to be sure that you understand the terms and possible charges you can incur from using Skype. For more information on using Skype, refer to the software Help. User Manual 21 3 Using HP QuickWeb (select models only) Disabling and enabling HP QuickWeb You can disable or reenable QuickWeb in two ways. To disable or reenable QuickWeb from within the Windows operating system:

1. Click Start, click All Programs, and then click HP QuickWeb. The HP QuickWeb Installer folder displays. Click HP QuickWeb Configuration Tool. 2. Select the Enable QuickWeb check box. 3. Click OK. The HP QuickWeb Configuration Tool can also be accessed by clicking Start, clicking Control Panel, and then clicking the View by arrow. Select Large icons or Small icons to locate the HP QuickWeb Configuration Tool. To disable or reenable QuickWeb from within Setup Utility:

1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer. Immediately press f10 repeatedly to start Setup Utility. 2. Use the right arrow key to tab across the menu headings and select System Configuration. 3. Use the down arrow key to select Boot Options, and then press enter. The Boot Options screen opens. 4. Use the down arrow key to select HP QuickWeb, and then press enter. 5. Use the arrow keys to select Disable or Enable, and then press enter. 6. To save your change and exit Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit, select Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. 22 User Manual 4 Connecting to the Internet Internet hardware and software features vary depending on the computer model and your location. Choosing the type of Internet access The computer supports 2 types of Internet access:

WiredYou can access the Internet by connecting to a broadband network using the RJ-45 (network) jack. To learn how to connect to a wired network, refer to the Connecting to a wired network section. WirelessFor mobile Internet access, you can use a wireless connection. To learn about adding the computer to an existing network or setting up a wireless network, refer to the Connecting to an existing wireless network section or the Setting up a new wireless network section. The networking features of the computer enable you to access high-speed broadband Internet service providers with the following types of connections:

Cable modem Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Satellite Other services Broadband access may require additional hardware or software provided by your Internet service provider (ISP). Using an ISP The following features will help you set up a new Internet account or configure the computer to use an existing account:

Choosing an ISP: You must set up Internet service before you can connect to the Internet. Contact a local ISP to purchase Internet service and a modem. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless computer to the modem, and test the Internet service. Your ISP will give you a user ID and password to access the Internet. Record this information and store it in a safe place. Internet Services & Offers (available in some locations): This utility assists with signing up for a new Internet account and configuring the computer to use an existing account. To access this utility, click Start, click All Programs, click Online Services, and then click Get Online. User Manual 23 4 Connecting to the Internet ISP-provided icons (available in some locations): These icons may be displayed either individually on the Windows desktop or grouped in a desktop folder named Online Services. To set up a new Internet account or configure the computer to use an existing account, double-click an icon, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Windows Connect to the Internet Wizard: You can use the Windows Connect to the Internet Wizard to connect to the Internet in any of these situations:

You already have an account with an ISP. You have a disc from an ISP. You do not have an Internet account and want to select an ISP from the list provided within the wizard. (The list of ISP providers is not available in all regions.) You have selected an unlisted ISP, and the ISP has provided you with information such as a specific IP address and POP3 and SMTP settings. To access the Windows Connect to the Internet Wizard and instructions for using it, click Start, click Help and Support, and then type Connect to the Internet wizard in the Search box. Connecting to a wired network Connecting to a wired network requires a network cable (purchased separately). If the cable contains noise suppression circuitry 1, which prevents interference from TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable 2 toward the computer. 24 User Manual 4 Connecting to the Internet To connect the cable:

WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. 1. Connect the network cable to the RJ-45 (network) jack 1 on the computer. 2. Connect the other end of the network cable to a network wall jack 2. Connecting to an existing wireless network To connect the computer to an existing wireless network, follow these steps:

1. Click the network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 2. Select the network to which you want to connect. 3. Click Connect. 4. If required, enter the security key. User Manual 25 4 Connecting to the Internet Setting up a new wireless network This section describes how to use a wireless computer to set up a typical home or small office wireless network, which is also called a wireless local area network (WLAN). To set up a wireless network and to connect to the Internet, you need the following equipment:

A broadband modem (either DSL or cable) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider (ISP) A wireless router (purchased separately) Your new wireless computer The following illustration shows an example of a completed wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet and to a wired computer. As this network grows, additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to the network to access the Internet. 26 User Manual Step 1: Purchase and install a wireless router 4 Connecting to the Internet Read this section carefully before you install the wireless router using the router manufacturer's instructions and your wireless computer. If you need technical assistance during the router installation, contact the router manufacturer. Temporarily connect your new wireless computer to the router by using the network cable provided with the router. This will ensure that the computer can access the Internet. 1. Be sure that the wireless device is off (the wireless light on the computer is amber). If the wireless device is on, press the wireless key to turn it off. For help locating the wireless key or light, refer to the HP ENVY 15 User Guide in Help and Support. 2. During the router installation, the router manufacturer's software allows you to change the network name (SSID) and enable security to protect the privacy of your wireless network. Many routers are shipped with a default network name and with security disabled. If you change the default network name or enable security during the router setup, record the information and store it in a safe place. You will need this information when you configure the computer and any other existing computers to access the router. If you do not enable security, an unauthorized wireless user can access the information on the computer and use your Internet connection without your knowledge. For more information on securing your wireless network, refer to the HP ENVY 15 User Guide in Help and Support. The Windows operating system also provides tools to help you set up your wireless network for the first time. To use the Windows tools to set up your network, click Start, click Control Panel, click Network and Internet, click Set up a new connection or network, and then click Set up a new network. Follow the on-screen instructions. Step 2: Configure the computer to connect to the wireless network 1. If the computer is off, turn it on. 2. Be sure that the wireless device is on (the wireless light is off). For help locating the wireless key or light, refer to the HP ENVY 15 User Guide in Help and Support. 3. Connect the computer to the wireless network:

a. Click the network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. b. Select the network to which you want to connect. c. Click Connect. d. If required, enter the security key. 4. Test the wireless network by opening your Web browser and accessing a Web site. User Manual 27 5 Multimedia features The following section highlights the entertainment features of the computer. Using multimedia software The computer includes preinstalled multimedia software. To see a list of the software that is preinstalled on the computer, click Start, and then click All Programs. For details about using software included with the computer, refer to the software manufacturers instructions, which may be provided with the software, on disc, or on the manufacturers Web site. If you have an external optical drive (purchased separately), you can also perform the following multimedia tasks:

Playing digital media, including audio and video CDs, audio and video DVDs, and BDs Listening to Internet radio Creating (burning) data CDs Burning and editing audio CDs Burning and editing video DVDs or video CDs The external optical drive must be connected to the USB port on the computer, not to a USB port on another external device, such as a hub or docking station. Installing multimedia software from a disc Although your computer does not have an integrated optical drive, you can easily access software as well as install programs and access information in either of the following ways:

Connect an external optical drive (purchased separately) to one of the USB ports on your computer. Share an optical drive that is connected to another computer on your network. Refer to the Sharing optical drives section in Chapter 2 for additional information. User Manual 29 5 Multimedia features Using HP MediaSmart MediaSmart turns your computer into a mobile entertainment center. With MediaSmart, you can enjoy music and movies, and also manage and edit photo collections. To start MediaSmart, click Start, click All Programs, click HP, and then click HP MediaSmart. MediaSmart includes the following features:

Internet TVView a range of TV shows and channels, as well as the HP-TV channel streamed in full-screen mode to computers with an Internet connection. Photo and video upload support, for example:

Upload your MediaSmart photos to Internet photo storage sites, such as Snapfish. Upload your home videos (for example, fun videos created with the integrated webcam) directly to YouTube. Pandora Internet radio (North America only)Listen to music selected just for you, streamed from the Internet. Using the webcam Your computer includes an integrated webcam, located at the top of the display. With the preinstalled software, you can use the webcam to take a photo or record a video. You can then preview the photo or video recording, and save it on your computer hard drive. The webcam is a perfect companion to your instant messaging program. To access the webcam, click Start, click All Programs, click HP, click HP MediaSmart, and then click HP MediaSmart Webcam. The webcam software enables you to experiment with the following features:

Capturing and sharing video Streaming video with instant messaging software Taking still photos 30 User Manual 5 Multimedia features Using audio features Your computer enables you to use a variety of audio features:

Playing music using your computer speakers and/or connected external speakers. Controlling the bass with the Beats Audio feature (fn+b). Recording sound using the internal microphone, or connect an external microphone. Downloading music from the Internet. Creating multimedia presentations using audio and images. Transmitting sound and images with instant messaging programs. Streaming radio programs. Creating (burning) audio CDs with an optional optical drive. Using video features Your computer enables you to use a variety of video features:

Watch movies Play games over the Internet Edit pictures and video and create presentations Connect external video devices Watch TV over the Internet Connecting an external monitor or projector You can connect an external display such as a monitor or projector to the computer, using the HP HDMI to VGA Display Adapter (select models only). The adapter connects to the HDMI port on the computer. Connecting an HDMI device The computer includes an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) port. The HDMI port connects the computer to an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, or any compatible digital or audio component. For more information on multimedia features, refer to the HP ENVY 15 User Guide. To access this guide, click Start, click Help and Support, and then click User Guides. User Manual 31 6 Updating software Updating the software installed on the computer Most software, including the operating system, is updated frequently by the manufacturer or provider. Important updates to the software included with the computer may have been released since the computer left the factory. Some updates may affect the way the computer responds to optional software or external devices. Many updates provide security enhancements. Update the operating system and other software installed on the computer as soon as the computer is connected to the Internet. To access links for updating installed software, refer to Help and Support. Updating programs and drivers Updated versions of the software provided with your computer may be available on the HP Web site. Most software updates on the HP Web site are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information on installing and troubleshooting the file. For information on updating the BIOS, refer to the HP ENVY 15 User Guide. To access this guide, click Start, click Help and Support, and then click User Guides. To download and install software other than a BIOS update, follow these steps:

1. Open your Web browser, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and select your country or region. 2. Click the option for software and driver downloads, type your computer model number in the Search box, and then press enter. or If you want a specific SoftPaq, enter the SoftPaq number in the Search box, press enter, and then follow the instructions provided. Proceed to step 6. 3. Click your specific product from the models listed. 4. Select your operating system. 5. When the list of drivers is displayed, click an updated driver to open a window containing additional information. User Manual 33 6 Updating software 6. Click Install now to install the updated driver without downloading the file. or Click Download only to save the file to your computer. When prompted, click Save, and then select a storage location on your hard drive. After the file is downloaded, navigate to the folder where the file was stored, and double-click the file to install the driver. 7. If you are prompted to do so, restart your computer after the installation is complete, and then verify the operation of the device. 34 User Manual 7 Backup and recovery Tools provided by the operating system and by HP Recovery Manager software are designed to help you with the following tasks for safeguarding your information and restoring it in case of a system failure:

Backing up your information Creating a set of recovery discs Creating system restore points Recovering a program or driver Performing a full system recovery Creating recovery discs HP recommends that you create recovery discs to be sure that you can restore your system to its original factory state if you experience serious system failure or instability. Create these discs after setting up the computer for the first time. If your computer does not include an integrated optical drive, you can use an optional external optical drive (purchased separately) to create recovery discs, or you can purchase recovery discs for your computer from the HP Web site. The external optical drive must be connected to the USB port on the computer, not to a USB port on another external device, such as a hub or docking station. Handle these discs carefully and keep them in a safe place. The software allows the creation of only one set of recovery discs. Note the following guidelines before creating recovery discs:

You will need high-quality DVD-R, DVD+R, BD-R (writable Blu-ray) or CD-R discs. All these discs are purchased separately. DVDs have a larger storage capacity than CDs. If you use CDs, up to 20 discs may be required, whereas only a few DVDs are required. Double-layer discs and read-write discssuch as CD-RW, DVDRW, and BD-RE (rewritable Blu-ray) discsare not compatible with the Recovery Manager software. The computer must be connected to AC power during this process. Only one set of recovery discs can be created per computer. Number each disc before inserting it into an optical drive. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating the recovery discs. The next time you open Recovery Manager, you will be prompted to continue the disc creation process. To create a set of recovery discs:

1. Click Start, click All Programs, click Recovery Manager, and then click Recovery Disc Creation. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. User Manual 35 7 Backup and recovery Backing up your information As you add new software and data files, you should back up your system on a regular basis to maintain a reasonably current backup. Back up your system at the following times:

At regularly scheduled times Set reminders to back up your information periodically. Before the computer is repaired or restored Before you add or modify hardware or software Note the following when backing up:

Create system restore points using the Windows System Restore feature, and periodically copy them to a disc. Store personal files in the Documents library, and periodically back up this folder. Back up templates stored in their associated programs. Save the customized settings in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of the settings. The screen shot can be a time-saver if you have to reset your preferences. To copy the screen and paste the image into a word-processing document:

a. Display the screen. b. Copy the screen:

To copy only the active window, press alt+prt sc. To copy the entire screen, press prt sc. c. Open a word-processing document, click Edit, and then click Paste. d. Save the document. You can back up your information to an optional external hard drive, a network drive, or discs. When backing up to discs, use any of the following types of discs (purchased separately): CD-R, CD-RW, DVD+R, DVD-R, or DVDRW. The discs you use depend on the type of optical drive you are using. DVDs store more information than CDs, so using them for backup reduces the number of recovery discs required. When backing up to discs, number each disc before inserting it into an optical drive. 36 User Manual 7 Backup and recovery Using Windows Backup and Restore To create a backup using Windows Backup and Restore, follow these steps:

Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you start the backup process. The backup process may take over an hour, depending on file size and the speed of the computer. 1. Click Start, click All Programs, click Maintenance, and then click Backup and Restore. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up and create a backup. Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. Using system restore points When you back up your system, you are creating a system restore point. A system restore point allows you to save and name a snapshot of your hard drive at a specific point in time. You can then revert back to that point if you want to reverse subsequent changes made to your system. Recovering to an earlier restore point does not affect data files saved or e-mails created since the last restore point. You also can create additional restore points to provide increased protection for your system files and settings. When to create restore points Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware. Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally. If you revert to a restore point and then change your mind, you can reverse the restoration. User Manual 37 7 Backup and recovery Creating a system restore point 1. Click Start, click Control Panel, click System and Security, and then click System. 2. In the left pane, click System protection. 3. Click the System Protection tab. 4. Under Protection Settings, select the disk for which you want to create a restore point. 5. Click Create. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions. Restoring to a previous date and time To revert to a restore point (created at a previous date and time) when the computer was functioning optimally, follow these steps:

1. Click Start, click Control Panel, click System and Security, and then click System. 2. In the left pane, click System protection. 3. Click the System Protection tab. 4. Click System Restore. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Performing a recovery You can recover only files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use Recovery Manager to create a set of recovery discs (entire drive backup) as soon as you set up your computer. Recovery Manager software allows you to repair or restore the system if you experience system failure or instability. Recovery Manager works from recovery discs that you create or from a dedicated recovery partition (select models only) on the hard drive. However, computers that include a solid-state drive (SSD) may not have a recovery partition. If that is the case, recovery discs have been included with your computer. Use these discs to recover your operating system and software. Windows has its own built-in repair features, such as System Restore. If you have not already tried these features, try them before using Recovery Manager. For more information on these built-in repair features, click Start, and then click Help and Support. Recovery Manager recovers only the software that was preinstalled at the factory. Software not provided with this computer must be downloaded from the manufacturers Web site or reinstalled from the disc provided by the manufacturer. 38 User Manual 7 Backup and recovery Recovering using the recovery discs To restore the system from the recovery discs:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Insert the first recovery disc into an optional external optical drive, and restart the computer. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Recovering using the partition on the hard drive (select models only) On some models, you can perform a recovery from the partition on the hard drive, which is accessed by pressing either the Start button or f11. This restores the computer to its factory condition. Computers with an SSD may not have a recovery partition. If the computer does not have a recovery partition, you will not be able to recover using this procedure. Recovery discs have been included for computers that do not have a partition. Use these discs to recover your operating system and software. To restore the system from the partition, follow these steps:

1. Access Recovery Manager in either of the following ways:

Click Start, click All Programs, click Recovery Manager, and then click Recovery Manager. or a. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the esc key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. b. Press f11 while the Press <F11> for recovery message is displayed on the screen. It may take several minutes for Recovery Manager to load. 2. In the Recovery Manager window, click System Recovery. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. User Manual 39 A Product information and troubleshooting Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. Input power Rating Operating voltage 19.5 V dc @ 6.50 A - 120W Operating current 6.50 A This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. The computer operating voltage and current can be found on the system regulatory label on the bottom of the computer. Operating environment Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C 41F to 95F Nonoperating

-20C to 60C

-4F to 140F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

10% to 90%

5% to 95%

-15 m to 3,048 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 40,000 ft User Manual 41 A Product information and troubleshooting Traveling with the computer For best results, follow these traveling and shipping tips:

Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

1. Back up your information. 2. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as digital cards. To reduce the risk of damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, remove the media from a drive before removing the drive from a drive bay, and before shipping, storing, or traveling with a drive. 3. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. 4. Shut down the computer. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage, and do not check it in with the rest of your bags. Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. The airport security devices that check carry-on luggage, such as conveyor belts, use X-rays instead of magnetism and will not damage a drive. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, check with the airline in advance. If the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. If the computer has a wireless device or a cell phone device installed, such as an 802.11b/g device, a Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) device, or a General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) device, the use of these devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply onboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a particular device, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 42 User Manual A Product information and troubleshooting Routine care Cleaning the display CAUTION: To prevent permanent damage to the computer, never spray water, cleaning fluids, or chemicals on the display. To remove smudges and lint, frequently clean the display with a soft, damp, lint-free cloth. If the screen requires additional cleaning, use premoistened antistatic wipes or an antistatic screen cleaner. Cleaning the TouchPad and keyboard Dirt and grease on the TouchPad can cause the pointer to jump around on the screen. To avoid this, clean the TouchPad with a damp cloth, and wash your hands frequently when using the computer. WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking, and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Troubleshooting resources If you experience computer problems, perform these troubleshooting steps in the sequence provided until the problem is resolved:

1. Refer to Quick troubleshooting, the next section in this chapter. 2. Access Web site links and additional information about the computer through Help and Support. Click Start, and then click Help and Support. Although many checkup and repair tools require an Internet connection, other tools, such as Help and Support, can help you fix a problem when the computer is offline. User Manual 43 A Product information and troubleshooting Quick troubleshooting The computer is unable to start up If the computer does not turn on when you press the power button, the following suggestions may help you resolve the problem:

If the computer is plugged into an AC outlet, unplug the computer, and then plug another electrical device into the outlet to be sure that the outlet is providing adequate power. Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved by HP for this computer. If the computer is running on battery power, or if it is plugged into an external power source other than an AC outlet, plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. Be sure that the power cord and AC adapter connections are secure. The TouchPad is behaving erratically If the TouchPad is behaving erratically, follow these guidelines:

Be sure that TouchPad is on. If the TouchPad light is amber, quickly double-tap the TouchPad on/off button to turn on the TouchPad. If the TouchPad light is off, the TouchPad is on. Follow these guidelines when using the TouchPad:

Use one finger to navigate, click, or turn on/turn off the TouchPad. Use 2 fingers to control TouchPad gestures, such as scrolling, pinching/zooming, and rotating. To turn the TouchPad gestures off or explore other TouchPad features, click the Synaptics icon in the notification area at the far right of the taskbar, click the Device Settings tab, and then click Settings. The computer screen is blank If the screen is blank, but the computer is on and the power light is on, the computer may not be set to display the image on the computer screen. To transfer the image to the computer screen, press the switch screen image key. Software is functioning abnormally If the software is unresponsive or responds abnormally, follow these suggestions:

Restart the computer by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to Shut down, and then clicking Restart. If you cannot restart the computer using this procedure, refer to the next section, The computer is on but is not responding. Run a virus scan. For information about using the antivirus resources on the computer, refer to the antivirus software Help for more details. 44 User Manual A Product information and troubleshooting The computer is on but is not responding If the computer is on but is not responding to software or keyboard commands, try the following emergency shutdown procedures, in the sequence provided, until shutdown occurs:

CAUTION: Emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press and hold the power button on the computer for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. The computer is unusually warm It is normal for the computer to feel warm to the touch while it is in use. But if the computer feels unusually warm, it may be overheating because a vent is blocked. If you suspect that the computer is overheating, turn off the computer to allow the computer to cool to room temperature. Then be sure to keep all vents free from obstructions while you are using the computer. WARNING: To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). The fan in the computer starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. An external device is not working Follow these suggestions if an external device does not function as expected:

Turn on the device according to the manufacturers instructions. Be sure that all device connections are secure. Be sure that the device is receiving electrical power. Be sure that the device, especially if it is older, is compatible with the operating system. Be sure that the correct drivers are installed and updated. User Manual 45 A Product information and troubleshooting The wireless network connection is not working If a wireless network connection is not working as expected, follow these suggestions:

Click Start, click Control Panel, click Network and Internet, and then click Network and Sharing. Be sure that the wireless device is turned on (wireless light is off). If the light is amber, press the wireless key to turn on the wireless device. Be sure that the computer wireless antennas are free from obstructions. Be sure that the cable or DSL modem and its power cord are properly connected and that the lights are on. Be sure that the wireless router or access point is properly connected to its power adapter and the cable or DSL modem, and that the lights are on. Turn the wireless device off and then on again to resynchronize the device. Disconnect and then reconnect all cables, and turn the power off and then back on. For more information on wireless technology, refer to the relevant Help topics and Web site links in Help and Support. For information on activating mobile broadband service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. 46 User Manual Index A action keys, identifying 6 altitude specifications 41 audio features 31 B backing up 36 Beats Audio 12, 31 C cable, modem 23 cables and cords, power 44 calculator key 8 Chat 21 connecting to a wired network 24 connecting to an existing wireless network 25 D devices, external, troubleshooting 45 drivers, updating 33 E environmental specifications 41 external devices, troubleshooting 45 external monitor 31 H HDMI device 31 Help and Support key 6 HP HDMI to VGA Display Adapter 31 HP MediaSmart 30 humidity specifications 41 I Internet choosing an ISP 23 choosing type of access 23 wireless access 23 Internet service provider (ISP) 23 L LaunchBar icons, identifying 18 M mail key 8 media keys 7 Media Launch key 8 Microsoft Windows default power on 17 starting 17 monitor, external 45 multimedia software 29 Music Player 15 N notification icons, identifying 19 O one-touch launch keys, identifying 8 operating environment specifications 41 optical drive, sharing 13 overheating, computer 45 P partition 39 Photo Viewer 15 pinching gesture 11 power, turning on the computer 44 print options key 8 printer 45 programs, updating 33 Q QuickLock key 7 QuickWeb browsing photos 21 configuring the network 20 disabling or enabling 22 features 15 identifying 17 playing music 20 setting up 16 Settings Panel 20 QuickWeb software, using 5 User Manual 47 Web browser key 8 Web calendar 15 Web e-mail 15 webcam 30 Windows Backup and Restore 37 wireless Internet access 23 wireless network connection 25 Z zooming gesture 11 Index R recovery discs, creating 35 Recovery Manager 38, 39 recovery, performing 38 recovery, system 35 regulatory information notices 4 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 4 S screen brightness keys 6 scrolling gesture 10 Skype 21 software multimedia 29 safeguarding information 35 updating 33 specifications altitude 41 humidity 41 operating environment 41 temperature 41 switch screen image key 6 system recovery 35 system restore points 37 T temperature specifications 41 troubleshooting 45 TouchPad gestures 9 troubleshooting 43 external device problems 45 overheating problems 45 resources 43 software problems 44 virus problems 44 wireless network problems 46 turning on the computer 44 V vents, precautions 45 video features 31 volume keys 7 W Web browser 15 48 User Manual

 

 

HP TouchSmart User Guide TouchSmart tm2 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. Copyright 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: January 2010 Document Part Number: 582064-001 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

iii iv Safety warning notice Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents 1 Getting started Charging the battery ............................................................................................................................. 1 Identifying the installed hardware and software ................................................................................... 1 Identifying hardware ............................................................................................................ 1 Identifying software .............................................................................................................. 1 Rotating the display .............................................................................................................................. 2 Finding more information ...................................................................................................................... 3 Locating Help and Support .................................................................................................. 3 Locating regulatory, safety, and environmental notices ....................................................... 3 2 What's next Creating recovery discs ........................................................................................................................ 4 Connecting to the Internet .................................................................................................................... 4 Updating your antivirus software .......................................................................................................... 4 Getting to know the computer .............................................................................................................. 4 3 Using Instant Web Starting Instant Web ............................................................................................................................. 6 Starting Microsoft Windows .................................................................................................................. 6 Disabling and enabling HP Instant Web ............................................................................................... 7 4 Features Components ......................................................................................................................................... 8 Top components .................................................................................................................. 8 TouchPad ............................................................................................................ 8 Lights ................................................................................................................... 9 Keys .................................................................................................................. 10 Front components .............................................................................................................. 10 Right-side components ...................................................................................................... 11 Left-side components ........................................................................................................ 12 Display components .......................................................................................................... 13 Bottom components ........................................................................................................... 14 5 Networking Choosing an ISP ................................................................................................................................ 15 Using Internet Services & Offers ....................................................................................... 15 Using ISP-provided icons .................................................................................................. 15 v Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the Windows Connect to the Internet Wizard .......................................................... 16 Creating a wireless connection .......................................................................................................... 16 Identifying wireless icons and controls .............................................................................. 16 Identifying wireless and network status icons ................................................... 16 Using the wireless key ...................................................................................... 17 Using Wireless Assistant software .................................................................... 18 Using operating system controls ....................................................................... 18 Connecting to a WLAN ...................................................................................................... 18 Connecting to an existing wireless network ...................................................... 19 Setting up a wireless network ........................................................................... 19 Step 1: Purchase high-speed Internet service .................................. 20 Step 2: Purchase and install a wireless router ................................. 20 Step 3: Configure the computer to connect to the wireless network ............................................................................................. 20 Protecting your WLAN ....................................................................................... 21 Roaming to another network ............................................................................. 21 Using HP Mobile Broadband ............................................................................................. 21 Inserting a SIM .................................................................................................. 22 Removing a SIM ................................................................................................ 23 Using Bluetooth wireless devices ...................................................................................... 24 Bluetooth and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) ............................................. 24 Connecting to a wired network ........................................................................................................... 25 6 Pointing devices and keyboard Using pointing devices ....................................................................................................................... 26 Setting pointing device preferences ................................................................................... 26 Using the TouchPad .......................................................................................................... 26 Using TouchPad gestures ................................................................................. 26 Scrolling ............................................................................................ 26 Pinching ............................................................................................ 27 Rotating ............................................................................................ 27 Using the digitizer pen ........................................................................................................................ 28 Identifying the pen components ......................................................................................... 28 Holding the pen .................................................................................................................. 28 Storing the pen .................................................................................................................. 28 Using the touch screen ...................................................................................................................... 29 Tapping (or clicking) .......................................................................................................... 29 Flicking ............................................................................................................................... 29 Dragging ............................................................................................................................ 30 Scrolling ............................................................................................................................. 30 Rotating ............................................................................................................................. 30 Pinching ............................................................................................................................. 31 Setting touch screen preferences ...................................................................................... 32 Using the action keys ......................................................................................................................... 32 vi Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the hotkeys ............................................................................................................................... 33 7 Multimedia Using the media activity keys ............................................................................................................. 35 Multimedia software ........................................................................................................................... 36 Using HP TouchSmart software or HP MediaSmart software ........................................... 36 Using multimedia software ................................................................................................. 36 Installing multimedia software from a disc ......................................................................... 37 Audio .................................................................................................................................................. 37 Adjusting the volume ......................................................................................................... 37 Connecting external audio devices .................................................................................... 38 Webcam ............................................................................................................................................. 38 Adjusting webcam properties ............................................................................................. 39 Video .................................................................................................................................................. 40 Using the external monitor port .......................................................................................... 40 Connecting an HDMI device .............................................................................................. 40 Configuring audio for HDMI ............................................................................... 41 8 Power management Shutting down the computer ............................................................................................................... 42 Setting power devices ........................................................................................................................ 42 Using power-saving states ................................................................................................. 42 Initiating and exiting Sleep ................................................................................ 43 Initiating and exiting Hibernation ....................................................................... 43 Conserving power .............................................................................................................. 44 Using the battery meter ..................................................................................................... 44 Using power plans ............................................................................................................. 44 Viewing the current power plan ......................................................................... 44 Selecting a different power plan ........................................................................ 44 Customizing power plans .................................................................................. 45 Setting password protection on wakeup ............................................................................ 45 Using battery power ........................................................................................................................... 45 Finding battery information in Help and Support ............................................................... 46 Using Battery Check .......................................................................................................... 46 Displaying the remaining battery charge ........................................................................... 46 Removing or inserting the battery ...................................................................................... 46 Charging a battery ............................................................................................................. 47 Maximizing battery discharge time .................................................................................... 48 Managing low battery levels .............................................................................................. 48 Identifying low battery levels ............................................................................. 48 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................. 49 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ....... 49 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

vii Resolving a low battery level when a charged battery is available ........................................................................................... 49 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ........................................................................................... 49 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ....................................................................................... 49 Calibrating a battery ........................................................................................................... 49 Storing a battery ................................................................................................................ 49 Disposing of a used battery ............................................................................................... 50 Replacing the battery ......................................................................................................... 50 Using external AC power .................................................................................................................... 50 Connecting AC power ........................................................................................................ 50 Testing an AC adapter ....................................................................................................... 51 9 External devices Using Digital Media Slot cards ........................................................................................................... 52 Inserting a digital card ........................................................................................................ 52 Removing a digital card ..................................................................................................... 53 Using a USB device ........................................................................................................................... 53 Connecting a USB device .................................................................................................. 53 Removing a USB device .................................................................................................... 54 10 Drives Handling drives ................................................................................................................................... 55 Improving hard drive performance ..................................................................................................... 55 Using Disk Defragmenter ................................................................................................... 55 Using Disk Cleanup ........................................................................................................... 56 Using HP ProtectSmart Hard Drive Protection .................................................................................. 56 Identifying HP ProtectSmart Hard Drive Protection status ................................................ 56 Managing power with a parked hard drive ......................................................................... 57 Using HP ProtectSmart Hard Drive Protection software .................................................... 57 Inserting and removing a hard drive ................................................................................................... 58 Using external drives .......................................................................................................................... 60 Connecting optional external drives ................................................................................... 60 Using an external optical drive ........................................................................................... 60 Removing an optical disc when the disc tray will not open ............................... 61 Sharing an optical drive ...................................................................................................................... 61 11 Memory modules 12 Security Protecting the computer ..................................................................................................................... 66 Using passwords ................................................................................................................................ 66 viii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Setting passwords in Windows .......................................................................................... 67 Setting passwords in Setup Utility ..................................................................................... 67 Administrator password ..................................................................................... 68 Managing an administrator password ............................................... 68 Entering an administrator password ................................................. 68 Power-on password .......................................................................................... 68 Managing a power-on password ...................................................... 69 Entering a power-on password ......................................................... 69 Using antivirus software ..................................................................................................................... 69 Using firewall software ....................................................................................................................... 69 Installing critical security updates ....................................................................................................... 70 Installing an optional security cable .................................................................................................... 70 Using the fingerprint reader (select models only) ............................................................................... 71 Registering fingerprints ...................................................................................................... 71 Using your registered fingerprint to log on to Windows ..................................................... 72 13 Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs ...................................................................................................................... 73 Backing up your information ............................................................................................................... 74 Using Windows Backup and Restore ................................................................................ 75 Using system restore points .............................................................................................. 75 When to create restore points ........................................................................... 75 Create a system restore point ........................................................................... 75 Restore to a previous date and time ................................................................. 75 Performing a recovery ........................................................................................................................ 76 Recovering from the recovery discs .................................................................................. 76 Recovering from the dedicated recovery partition (select models only) ............................ 76 14 Setup Utility (BIOS) Starting Setup Utility ........................................................................................................................... 77 Using Setup Utility .............................................................................................................................. 77 Changing the language of Setup Utility ............................................................................. 77 Navigating and selecting in Setup Utility ............................................................................ 78 Displaying system information ........................................................................................... 78 Restoring default settings in Setup Utility .......................................................................... 78 Exiting Setup Utility ............................................................................................................ 79 Setup Utility Menus ............................................................................................................................ 79 Main menu ......................................................................................................................... 79 Security menu .................................................................................................................... 79 System Configuration menu .............................................................................................. 79 Diagnostics menu .............................................................................................................. 80 Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 80 Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................. 80 ix Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................... 80 Downloading a BIOS update ............................................................................. 81 Appendix A Product information Input power ......................................................................................................................................... 83 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................... 83 Traveling with the computer ............................................................................................................... 84 Routine care ....................................................................................................................................... 84 Cleaning the display .......................................................................................................... 84 Cleaning the TouchPad and keyboard .............................................................................. 85 Labels ................................................................................................................................................. 85 Appendix B Troubleshooting Quick troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................... 87 The computer is unable to start up .................................................................................... 87 The TouchPad is behaving erratically ................................................................................ 87 The computer screen is blank ............................................................................................ 87 Software is functioning abnormally .................................................................................... 88 The computer is on but is not responding .......................................................................... 88 The computer is unusually warm ....................................................................................... 88 Checking your audio functions ........................................................................................... 88 An external device is not working ...................................................................................... 89 The wireless network connection is not working ................................................................ 89 Cannot connect to a preferred network ............................................................................. 90 Network icon for WLAN is not displayed ............................................................................ 90 Current WLAN network security codes are unavailable .................................................... 90 WLAN connection is very weak ......................................................................................... 91 Cannot connect to the wireless router ............................................................................... 91 Contacting customer support ............................................................................................................. 91 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 92 x Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 Getting started Charging the battery To fully charge the battery, leave the computer plugged into external power until the battery light on the computer turns white. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment, observe these guidelines:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on your power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. NOTE: A partially charged new battery can run the computer after software setup is complete, but battery charge displays will not be accurate until the new battery has been fully charged. The battery light turns white when the battery is fully charged. Identifying the installed hardware and software Identifying hardware To see a list of hardware installed in the computer:

Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security. Then in the System area, click Device Manager. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing applications, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. Identifying software To see a list of the software installed on the computer:

Select Start > All Programs. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Charging the battery 1 Rotating the display To use the computer in slate mode:

1. Open the display. 2. Rotate the display clockwise 180 degrees. 3. Lower the display over the keyboard. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to your computer, do not force the display past 180 degrees, and do not transport the computer while it is in slate mode. 2 Chapter 1 Getting started Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Finding more information Locating Help and Support In addition to the user guides, Help and Support provides information about the operating system, power management, software updates, networking, drivers, troubleshooting tools, and accessing technical support. NOTE: You do not need to connect to the Internet to access the user guides in Help and Support. To access Help and Support:

Select Start > Help and Support. or For country- or region-specific support, go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. Locating regulatory, safety, and environmental notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety & Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. To access this guide, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. The Safety & Comfort Guide is also available on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo. For more safety and regulatory information, and for battery disposal information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access the notices:

Select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Finding more information 3 2 What's next After you set up and register the computer, it is important to take the next steps in this chapter before you begin using the computer. For help in identifying specific components of the computer, refer to Features on page 8. Creating recovery discs After setting up the computer, one of the first and most important steps to take is to create a set of recovery discs of the full factory image. The recovery discs are essential in case of system instability or failure, when they are used to recover the operating system and software to factory settings. For instructions, refer to Backup and recovery on page 73. Connecting to the Internet After creating the recovery discs, set up your wired or wireless network so that you can send and receive e-mail and connect to the Internet. For more information, refer to Networking on page 15. Updating your antivirus software After you have connected to the Internet, be sure to update your antivirus software. The software is preinstalled on the computer and includes a limited subscription for free updates. Antivirus software helps protect your computer from damage caused by viruses. For more information, refer to Using antivirus software on page 69. Getting to know the computer When you have completed the preceding steps, familiarize yourself with the features of the computer and set up any additional components, such as optional external audio devices. The following list highlights the entertainment features of the computer and explains where to get additional information for each feature.

HP Instant WebYou can perform many of your favorite activities without the need to start the main operating system. If you like to browse the Internet, view digital photos, listen to music, or keep in touch through e-mail, instant messages, or Skype (select models only), you will enjoy the many features of HP Instant Web. For details, refer to Using Instant Web on page 6.

Multimedia softwareThe computer comes with preinstalled multimedia software, including HP TouchSmart software, which turns the computer into a mobile entertainment center. For details, refer to Multimedia software on page 36. AudioThe computer includes integrated speakers. For more information on using the integrated speakers and setting up optional external audio devices, refer to Audio on page 37.

4 Chapter 2 What's next Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

VideoYou can connect an optional display device or an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) device to the computer. You can also connect an optional optical drive. For more information about the video features, refer to Video on page 40.

WebcamAdjustable, with low-light image technology and built-in microphones, the webcam is a perfect companion to your instant messaging program. For more information on the webcam, refer to Webcam on page 38. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Getting to know the computer 5 3 Using Instant Web HP Instant Web provides a fun and engaging way to perform many of your favorite activities. Your computer is ready to go within seconds of sliding the power switch and you can rapidly access several applications without the need to start the main operating system. If you like to browse the Internet, view digital photos, listen to music, or keep in touch through e-mail, instant messages, or Skype (select models only), you will enjoy the many features of HP Instant Web. NOTE:

operating system. Instant Web includes the following features:

Web browserBrowsing the Internet has never been faster or easier. Web browser is optimized Instant Web is an optional, instant-on environment that is separate from your Windows to give you a great Internet experience instantly. Enjoy surfing the Web and bookmarking your favorite sites at your convenience. ChatAccess popular Instant Messaging programs such as Google Talk, Windows Live Messenger, or Yahoo! Messenger to chat with friends. Skype (select models only)Skype is a voice over Internet protocol (VoIP) that lets you communicate free of charge with other Skype users. Skype permits long-distance phone calls to land lines and also offers video chat capability.

Web e-mailView your Web-based e-mail using Gmail, Hotmail, Yahoo, and other webmail providers.

Web calendarSchedule and manage your activities using your favorite online calendar application.

Music PlayerListen to your favorite music files with Music Player. When you are suddenly in the mood, your favorite tunes are only moments away. Photo ViewerBrowse through photos, create albums, take pictures, and view slide shows using Photo Viewer. If a picture is worth a thousand words, it is worth even more to view your pictures when you want to.

For detailed information on Instant Web, refer to the software Help. Starting Instant Web To start Instant Web when the computer is powered off:

1. 2. Click an icon on the Instant Web Home screen to launch a program. Turn on your computer. The Instant Web Home screen appears. Starting Microsoft Windows To start the main operating system:

1. Click the Windows Start button on the far left of the Instant Web Home screen. 2. A dialog box appears, asking if you are sure you want to start Windows. Click Yes. 6 Chapter 3 Using Instant Web Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

NOTE: Clicking on the Make Windows your default Power On experience in this dialog box disables Instant Web. For more information on disabling and enabling Instant Web, refer to Disabling and enabling HP Instant Web on page 7. Disabling and enabling HP Instant Web Select the Enable HP Instant Web check box. You can disable or reenable Instant Web in two ways. To disable or reenable Instant Web from the Windows operating system:

1. Click Start > All Programs > HP Instant Web. The HP Instant Web Installer folder displays. 2. Click HP Instant Web Configuration Tool. 3. 4. Click OK. NOTE: The HP Instant Web Configuration Tool can also accessed by clicking Start > Control Panel. To disable or reenable Instant Web from within Setup Utility:

1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer. Immediately press f10 repeatedly to enter Setup Utility. 2. Use the arrow keys to select System Configuration. 3. Use the down arrow key to select HP Instant Web Support, and then press enter. 4. Use the arrow key to select Enable or Disable, and then press enter. 5. 6. Press enter to confirm your change. To save your change and exit Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit, select Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Disabling and enabling HP Instant Web 7 4 Features Components Top components TouchPad Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) TouchPad on/off button Left TouchPad button*

Right TouchPad button*

TouchPad*

Turns the TouchPad on and off. Lightly press the button and hold for 3 seconds to turn the TouchPad on and off. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen.

*This table describes factory settings. To view and change pointing device preferences, select Start > Devices and Printers. Then, right-click the device representing your computer, and select Mouse settings. 8 Chapter 4 Features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Right-side components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Fingerprint reader Rotate button Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows instead of a password logon. Rotates the screen image counter-clockwise into 4 orientations: landscape primary, portrait primary, landscape secondary, and portrait secondary. Power light

White: The computer is on. Power switch Wireless button Wireless light

Blinking white: The computer is in the Sleep state. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation.

When the computer is off, slide the power switch to turn on the computer.

When the computer is on, briefly slide the power switch to exit Sleep.

When the computer is in the Sleep state, briefly slide the power switch to exit Sleep.

When the computer is in Hibernation, briefly slide the power switch to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, slide and hold the power switch for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start >

Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not establish a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection.

Off: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. NOTE: Wireless devices are enabled at the factory. Amber: All wireless devices are off. Components 11 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Component Description

(7) Digital Media Slot Supports the following digital card formats:

(8)

(9) USB ports (2) Battery light

Memory Stick

Memory Stick Pro

MultiMediaCard

Secure Digital Memory Card xD-Picture Card Connect optional USB devices.

Off: The computer is running on battery power. Blinking amber: The battery has reached a low battery level, a critical battery level, or there is a battery error. Amber: A battery is charging.

White: The computer is connected to external power and the battery is fully charged.

(10) Power connector Connects an AC adapter. Left-side components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components. HDMI port USB port Audio-out (headphone) jack/Audio-in

(microphone) jack NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-

definition television, or any compatible digital or audio component. Connects an optional USB device. Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or television audio. Also connects an optional headset microphone. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the device speakers are disabled. 12 Chapter 4 Features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Component Description

(5) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen.

(6) Pen holder Holds the pen. Display components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) WWAN antennas (2)*

WLAN antennas (2)*

Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide-area networks (WWAN). Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLAN). Internal microphones (2) Record sound. Webcam light Webcam Speakers (2) Convertible hinge On: The webcam is in use. Records video and captures still photographs. Produce sound. Swivels the display and converts the computer from traditional notebook mode into slate mode or vice versa. In slate mode, the display is rotated and folded flat, so that you can view content while carrying the computer.

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. To see wireless regulatory notices, refer to the section of the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. These notices are located in Help and Support. Components 13 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Bottom components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Battery release latch Releases the battery from the battery bay. Battery bay Holds the battery. Vents (4) Enable airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The battery is preinstalled in the battery bay at the factory. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Hard drive bay Holds the hard drive. Memory module compartment Contains the memory module slots. 14 Chapter 4 Features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

5 Networking The computer supports 2 types of Internet access:

WirelessFor mobile Internet access, you can use a wireless connection. To learn about adding the computer to an existing network or setting up a wireless network, refer to Creating a wireless connection on page 16.

WiredYou can access the Internet by connecting to a broadband network using the RJ-45

(network) jack. To learn about connecting using the RJ-45 jack, refer to Connecting to a wired network on page 25. Choosing an ISP You must set up Internet service before you can connect to the Internet. The computer includes the following software features to help you set up a new Internet account or configure the computer to use an existing account:

Internet Services & Offers (available in some locations) ISP-provided icons (available in some locations)

Windows Connect to the Internet Wizard (available in all locations) Using Internet Services & Offers If the Internet Service & Offers utility is supported in the country or region in which you purchased the computer, you can access the utility by using the following method:

Select Start > All Programs > Online Services > Get Online. The Internet Services & Offers utility assists with these tasks:

Signing up for a new Internet account Configuring the computer to use an existing account Using ISP-provided icons If ISP-provided icons are supported in the country or region in which you purchased the computer, the icons may be displayed either individually on the Windows desktop or grouped in a desktop folder named Online Services.

To set up a new Internet account or configure the computer to use an existing account, double-

click an icon, and then follow the instructions on the screen. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Choosing an ISP 15 Using the Windows Connect to the Internet Wizard You can use the Windows Connect to the Internet Wizard to connect to the Internet in any of these situations:

If you already have an account with an ISP. If you have a disc from an ISP. If you do not have an Internet account and would like to select an ISP from the list provided within the wizard. (The list of ISP providers is not available in all regions.) If you have selected an unlisted ISP and the ISP has provided you with such information as a specific IP address and POP3 and SMTP settings. To access the Windows Connect To The Internet Wizard and instructions for using the wizard, click Start, and then click Help and Support. NOTE:

Firewall, choose to enable the firewall. If you are prompted within the wizard to choose between enabling or disabling Windows Creating a wireless connection Wireless technology transfers data across radio waves instead of wires. Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

Wireless local area network (WLAN) deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, each mobile wireless device communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband ModuleA wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that provides access to information wherever mobile network operator service is available. In a WWAN, each mobile device communicates to a mobile network operators base station. Mobile network operators install networks of base stations (similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close together typically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other.

For more information on wireless technology, refer to the information and Web site links provided in Help and Support. Identifying wireless icons and controls Identifying wireless and network status icons Icon Name Description Wireless (connected) Identifies the location of the wireless light and the wireless key on the computer. Also identifies the Wireless Assistant software on the computer and indicates that one or more of the wireless devices are on. 16 Chapter 5 Networking Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Wireless (disconnected) Identifies the Wireless Assistant software on the computer and indicates that all of the wireless devices are off. Wired network (connected) Wired network (disabled/disconnected) Network (connected) Network (disabled/disconnected) Network (disconnected) Indicates that one or more network drivers on your computer are installed and one or more network devices are connected to the network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed, all network devices or all wireless devices are disabled in Windows Control Panel, and no network devices are connected to a wired network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed, one or more network devices are connected to a wireless network, and one or more network devices may be connected to a wired network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed, no wireless connections are available or all wireless network devices are disabled by the wireless button or Wireless Assistant, and no network devices are connected to a wired network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed and wireless connections are available, but no network devices are connected to a wired or wireless network. Using the wireless key The computer has a wireless key (1), one or more wireless devices, and one wireless light (2). All of the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory. If the wireless light is amber, one or more wireless devices are off. If the wireless light is off, an integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. Press the wireless key to turn the wireless devices off or on. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Creating a wireless connection 17 Because the wireless devices are enabled at the factory, you can use the wireless key to turn on or turn off the wireless devices simultaneously. Individual wireless devices can be controlled through Wireless Assistant software. Using Wireless Assistant software A wireless device can be turned on or off using the Wireless Assistant software. If a wireless device is disabled in Setup Utility, it must be reenabled in Setup Utility before it can be turned on or off using Wireless Assistant. NOTE: Enabling or turning on a wireless device does not automatically connect the computer to a network or a Bluetooth-enabled device. To view the state of the wireless devices, click the Show hidden icons icon, the arrow at the left of the notification area, and position the mouse pointer over the wireless icon. If the wireless icon is not displayed in the notification area, complete the following steps to change Wireless Assistant properties:

1. 2. Click the wireless icon in the Wireless Assistant tile, which is located in the bottom row of Windows Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Windows Mobility Center. Mobility Center. Select the check box next to HP Wireless Assistant icon in notification area. 3. Click Properties. 4. 5. Click Apply. 6. Click Close. For more information, refer to the Wireless Assistant software Help:

1. Open Wireless Assistant by clicking the wireless icon in Windows Mobility Center. 2. Click the Help button. Using operating system controls Some operating systems also offer a way to manage integrated wireless devices and the wireless connection. For example, Windows provides the Network and Sharing Center that allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, manage wireless networks, and diagnose and repair network problems. To access the Network and Sharing Center, select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet >

Network and Sharing Center. For more information, select Start > Help and Support. Connecting to a WLAN With a WLAN device, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other computers and accessories that are linked by a wireless router or a wireless access point. 18 Chapter 5 Networking Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

NOTE: The terms wireless router and wireless access point are often used interchangeably.

A large-scale WLAN, such as a corporate or public WLAN, typically uses wireless access points that can accommodate a large number of computers and accessories and can separate critical network functions. A home or small office WLAN typically uses a wireless router, which allows several wireless and wired computers to share an Internet connection, a printer, and files without requiring additional pieces of hardware or software. To use the WLAN device in your computer, you must connect to a WLAN infrastructure (provided through a service provider or a public or corporate network). Connecting to an existing wireless network To connect the computer to an existing wireless network, follow these steps:

1. Be sure that the wireless device is on (wireless light is off). If the wireless light is amber, press the wireless key. Select a network to connect to. 2. Click the network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 3. 4. Click Connect. 5. If the network is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a network security key, which is a security code. Type the code, and then click OK to complete the connection. Setting up a wireless network To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet, you need the following equipment:

A broadband modem (either DSL or cable) (1) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider (ISP) A wireless router (purchased separately) (2) The wireless computer (3)

The illustration below shows an example of a wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet. NOTE: When setting up a wireless connection, be sure that your computer and wireless router are synchronized. To synchronize your computer and wireless router, turn your computer and wireless router off and then back on. As your network grows, additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to the network to access the Internet. For additional help in setting up your WLAN, refer to the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Creating a wireless connection 19 Step 1: Purchase high-speed Internet service If you already have high-speed Internet service (DSL, cable, or satellite), begin with . If you do not have high-speed Internet service, follow these steps:

1. Contact a local ISP to purchase high-speed Internet service and a DSL or cable modem. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless computer to the modem, and test the Internet service. Your ISP will give you a User ID and password to access the Internet. Record this information and store it in a safe place. 2. Step 2: Purchase and install a wireless router Read this section carefully before you install the wireless router using the router manufacturer's instructions and your wireless computer. If you need technical assistance during the router installation, contact the router manufacturer. NOTE:

using the network cable provided with the router. This will ensure that the computer can access the Internet. 1. Be sure that the wireless light on the computer is off. If the wireless light is on, turn it off by pressing the wireless key. It is recommended that you temporarily connect your new wireless computer to the router by 2. During the router installation, the router manufacturer's software allows you to change the network name (SSID) and enable security to protect the privacy of your wireless network. Many routers are shipped with a default network name and with security disabled. If you change the default network name or enable security during the router setup, record the information and store it in a safe place. You will need this information when you configure the computer and any other existing computers to access the router. NOTE:

computer and use your Internet connection without your knowledge. For more information on securing your wireless network, refer to the Wireless guide in Help and Support. If you do not enable security, an unauthorized wireless user can access the data on the The Windows operating system also provides tools to help you set up your wireless network for the first time. To use the Windows tools to set up your network:

Click Start > Network > Network and Sharing Center > Set up a connection or network > Set up a wireless router or access point. Then follow the on-screen instructions. Step 3: Configure the computer to connect to the wireless network 1. Be sure that the wireless device is on (wireless light is off). If the wireless light is amber, press the wireless key. Select a network to connect to. 2. Click the network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 3. 4. Click Connect. 5. If the network is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a network security key, which is a security code. Type the code, and then click OK to complete the connection. Test the wireless network by opening your Web browser and accessing a Web site. 6. 20 Chapter 5 Networking Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Protecting your WLAN Because the WLAN standard was designed with only limited security capabilitiesbasically to foil casual eavesdropping rather than more powerful forms of attackit is essential to understand that WLANs are vulnerable to well-known and well-documented security weaknesses. WLANs in public areas, or hotspots, like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. New technologies are being developed by wireless manufacturers and hotspot service providers that make the public environment more secure and anonymous. If you are concerned about the security of your computer in a hotspot, limit your network activities to noncritical e-mail and basic Internet surfing. When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. The common security levels are Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)-

Personal and Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). Because wireless radio signals travel outside the network, other WLAN devices can pick up unprotected signals and either connect to your network

(uninvited) or capture information being sent across it. However, you can take precautions to protect your WLAN:

Use a wireless transmitter with built-in security Many wireless base stations, gateways, or routers provide built-in security features such as wireless security protocols and firewalls. With the correct wireless transmitter, you can protect your network from the most common wireless security risks.

Work behind a firewall

A firewall is a barrier that checks both data and requests for data that are sent to your network, and discards any suspicious items. Firewalls are available in many varieties, both software and hardware. Some networks use a combination of both types. Use wireless encryption A variety of sophisticated encryption protocols is available for your WLAN. Find the solution that works best for your network security:

Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a wireless security protocol that encodes or encrypts all network data before it is transmitted using a WEP key. Usually, you can allow the network to assign the WEP key. Alternatively, you can set up your own key, generate a different key, or choose other advanced options. Without the correct key, others will not be able to use the WLAN.

WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access), like WEP, uses security settings to encrypt and decrypt data that is transmitted over the network. However, instead of using one static security key for encryptions as WEP does, WPA uses temporal key integrity protocol (TKIP) to dynamically generate a new key for every packet. It also generates different sets of keys for each computer on the network. Roaming to another network When you move your computer within range of another WLAN, Windows attempts to connect to that network. If the attempt is successful, your computer is automatically connected to the new network. If Windows does not recognize the new network, follow the same procedure you used initially to connect to your WLAN. Using HP Mobile Broadband HP Mobile Broadband enables your computer to use wireless wide area networks (WWANs) to access the Internet from more places and over larger areas than it can by using WLANs. Using HP Mobile Broadband requires a network service provider (called a mobile network operator), which in most cases Creating a wireless connection 21 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

is a mobile phone network operator. Coverage for HP Mobile Broadband is similar to mobile phone voice coverage. When used with mobile network operator service, HP Mobile Broadband gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road or outside the range of Wi-Fi hotspots. HP Mobile Broadband supports the following technologies:

HSPA (High Speed Packet Access), which provides access to networks based on the Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) telecommunications standard. EV-DO (Evolution Data Optimized), which provides access to networks based on the code division multiple access (CDMA) telecommunications standard. You may need the HP Mobile Broadband Module serial number to activate mobile broadband service. The serial number is printed on a label inside the battery bay of your computer. Some mobile network operators require the use of a subscriber identity module (SIM). A SIM contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM that is preinstalled in the battery bay. If the SIM is not preinstalled, it may be provided in the HP Mobile Broadband information provided with your computer, or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information on inserting and removing the SIM, refer to the Inserting a SIM and Removing a SIM sections in this chapter. For information on HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, refer to the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. For additional information, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/mobilebroadband (US only). Inserting a SIM CAUTION: To prevent damage to the connectors, use minimal force when inserting a SIM. To insert a SIM:

1. Shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by sliding the power switch. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. Verify that the SIM inserting and removal procedures are correct for Luke 2. Close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. 6. Remove the battery. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 22 Chapter 5 Networking Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

7. Insert the SIM into the SIM slot, and gently push the SIM into the slot until it is firmly seated. 8. Replace the battery. NOTE: HP Mobile Broadband will be disabled if the battery is not replaced. 9. Reconnect external power. 10. Reconnect external devices. 11. Turn on the computer. Removing a SIM To remove a SIM:

1. Shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by sliding the power switch. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. 2. Close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. 6. Remove the battery. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Creating a wireless connection 23 7. Press in on the SIM (1), and then remove it from the slot (2). 8. Replace the battery. 9. Reconnect external power. 10. Reconnect external devices. 11. Turn on the computer. Using Bluetooth wireless devices A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Computers (desktop, notebook, PDA) Phones (cellular, cordless, smart phone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers)

Bluetooth devices provide peer-to-peer capability that allows you to set up a personal area network

(PAN) of Bluetooth devices. For information on configuring and using Bluetooth devices, refer to the Bluetooth software Help. Bluetooth and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) HP does not recommend setting up one computer with Bluetooth as a host and using it as a gateway through which other computers may connect to the Internet. When two or more computers are connected using Bluetooth, and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) is enabled on one of the computers, the other computers may not be able to connect to the Internet using the Bluetooth network. The strength of Bluetooth is in synchronizing information transfers between your computer and wireless devices including cellular phones, printers, cameras, and PDAs. The inability to consistently connect two or more computers to share the Internet through Bluetooth is a limitation of Bluetooth and the Windows operating system. 24 Chapter 5 Networking Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Connecting to a wired network Connecting to a local area network (LAN) requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 network cable (purchased separately). If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (1), which prevents interference from TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable (2) toward the computer. To connect to a LAN:

1. 2. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2). WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a modem cable or telephone cable into an RJ-45 (network) jack. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Connecting to a wired network 25 6 Pointing devices and keyboard Using pointing devices NOTE:

ports on the computer. In addition to the TouchPad, you can also connect an external USB mouse to one of the USB Setting pointing device preferences Use Mouse Properties in Windows to customize settings for pointing devices, such as button configuration, click speed, and pointer options. To access Mouse Properties, select Start > Devices and Printers. Then, right-click the device representing your computer, and select Mouse settings. Using the TouchPad To move the pointer, touch and slide one finger across the TouchPad surface in the direction you want the pointer to go. Use the left and right TouchPad buttons like the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. NOTE: For information on identifying the TouchPad components, refer to TouchPad on page 8. Using TouchPad gestures Review to ensure that the TouchPad gesture text and illustrations are correct for Luke The TouchPad supports a variety of TouchPad gestures. To activate the TouchPad gestures, place two fingers on the TouchPad at the same time as described in the following sections. The TouchPad gestures described in this section are enabled at the factory. To disable or reenable these gestures:

1. Double-click on the Synaptics icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click the Device Settings tab. Select the device, and then click Settings. Select the checkbox to disable or reenable the TouchPad gesture. 2. 3. 4. Click Apply, and then click OK. NOTE: Your computer also supports additional TouchPad features that are disabled at the factory. To view and enable these features, click the Synaptics icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click the Device Settings tab. Select the device, and then click Settings. Scrolling Scrolling is useful for moving up or down on a page or image. To scroll, place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad and drag them across the TouchPad in an up, down, left, or right motion. NOTE: Scrolling speed is controlled by finger speed. 26 Chapter 6 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Pinching Pinching allows you to zoom in or out on items such as PDFs, images, and photos. To pinch:

Zoom in by holding two fingers together on the TouchPad, and then pull the fingers apart to increase an object's size. Zoom out by holding two fingers apart on the TouchPad, and then pull the fingers together to decrease an object's size. Rotating Rotating allows you rotate items such as photos and pages. To rotate, move your thumb and forefinger in a circular motion on the TouchPad. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using pointing devices 27 Using the digitizer pen You can write with the pen in pen-specific programs such as Tablet PC Input Panel, in all Microsoft Office applications, and in most other Windows programs and utilities. The information you write on the screen with the pen can be filed, searched, and shared among most Windows programs. Identifying the pen components The pen interacts with the computer whenever the tip (1) of the pen is pressed against the screen. The pen tether eyelet (2) allows you to connect a tether from the pen to the pen tether hole on the computer. Holding the pen Hold the pen as if you were writing with a standard pen or pencil. Storing the pen To store the pen when you are not using it, insert the pen, tip first, into the pen holder on the computer. 28 Chapter 6 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the touch screen Review to ensure the touch screen text and illustrations are correct for Luke The computer allows you to use your fingers or the digitizer pen to perform certain actions on the touch screen. NOTE: The instructions in this section are based on the preferences set at the factory. To modify settings for recognized clicks and flicks, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Pen and Touch. NOTE: All movements may not be supported in all programs. Tapping (or clicking) Tap or double-tap an item on the screen as you would click or double-click with the TouchPad or an external mouse. Tap and hold an item to see the context menu as you would with the right TouchPad button. NOTE: You must tap and hold your finger until the operating system draws a circle around the area you are touching, and then the context menu appears. Flicking Touch the screen in a light, quick flicking motion up, down, left, or right to navigate through screens or quickly scroll through documents. NOTE: For the flick movement to work, a scrollbar must be present and in the active window. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the touch screen 29 Dragging Press your finger on an item on the screen and then move your finger to drag an item to a new location. You can also use this motion to slowly scroll through documents. Scrolling Scrolling is useful for moving up or down on a page or image. To scroll, place two fingers on the screen, and then drag them across the screen in an up, down, left, or right motion. NOTE: Scrolling speed is controlled by finger speed. Rotating Rotating allows you rotate items such as photos and pages. To rotate, anchor your thumb on the screen, and then move your forefinger in a semicircular motion around your thumb. 30 Chapter 6 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Pinching Pinching allows you to zoom in or out on items such as PDFs, images, and photos. To pinch:

Zoom out by holding two fingers apart on the screen, and then pull the fingers together to decrease an object's size. Zoom in by holding two fingers together on the screen, and then pull the fingers apart to increase an object's size. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the touch screen 31 Setting touch screen preferences

To set preferences for visual feedback, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >

Pen and Touch. These preferences are specific to the touch screen and the computer.

To set preferences for left-handed or right-handed users, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Tablet PC Settings > Other tab. These preferences are specific to the touch screen and the computer.

To set pointing device preferences such as pointer speed, click speed, and mouse trails, select Start > Devices and Printers. Then, right-click the device representing your computer, and select Mouse settings. These preferences apply to any pointing device in the system. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound> Pen and Touch > Pen Options tab. After making any changes or testing the settings, click OK. To change or test click settings:

1. 2. Under Pen Actions, select the action, and then click Settings. 3. To change or create flick assignments:

1. 2. Click Navigational flicks and editing flicks, and then click Customize. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to change or create a flick assignment. 4. Click OK. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound> Pen and Touch > Flicks tab. Using the action keys Action keys are customized actions that are assigned to specific keys at the top of the keyboard. To use an action key, press and hold this key to activate the assigned . NOTE: Depending on the application you are using, pressing fn and one of the action keys will open a specific shortcut menu within that application. NOTE: The action key feature is enabled at the factory. You can disable this feature in Setup Utility

(BIOS) and revert back to pressing the fn key and one of the action keys to activate the assigned . Refer to Setup Utility (BIOS) on page 77 for additional information. Icon Action Description Help and Support Opens Help and Support, which provides information about your Windows operating system and computer, answers to questions and tutorials, and updates to your computer. Help and Support also provides automated troubleshooting and links to support specialists. 32 Chapter 6 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Icon Action Description Screen brightness down Decreases the screen brightness level incrementally when you hold down this key. Screen brightness up Increases the screen brightness level incrementally when you hold down this key. Switch screen image Switches the screen image among display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, pressing this key alternates the screen image from computer display to monitor display to simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Most external monitors receive video information from the computer using the external VGA video standard. The switch screen image key can also alternate images among other devices that are receiving video information from the computer. Previous track Plays the previous track of an audio CD or the previous section of a DVD or a BD. Play/Pause Plays, pauses, or resumes an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD.

If an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD is not playing, press this key to begin or resume the play. If an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD is playing, press this key to pause the play. Stop Stops audio or video playback of a CD, a DVD, or a BD. Next track Plays the next track of an audio CD or the next section of a DVD or a BD. Volume down Decreases speaker sound incrementally when you hold down this key. Volume up Increases speaker sound incrementally when you hold down this key. Mute Wireless Mutes or restores speaker sound. Turns the wireless feature on or off. NOTE: This key does not establish a wireless connection. To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must be set up. prt sc Print screen Takes a snapshot or picture of your computer screen and copies it to the clipboard. Using the hotkeys Hotkeys are combinations of the fn key (1) and either the esc key (3) or one of the arrow keys (4). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the hotkeys 33 Hotkey Description Display system information. fn+esc Displays information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number. Scroll up. fn+up arrow Scrolls the page up. Scroll down. fn+down arrow Scrolls the page down. Go home. fn+left arrow Returns the cursor to the beginning of the line where the cursor is located or returns to the beginning of the document. Go to the end. fn+right arrow Places the cursor at the end of the line or scrolls to the end of the document. To use a hotkey command, follow either of these steps:

Briefly press the fn key, and then briefly press the second key of the hotkey command. or Press and hold down the fn key, briefly press the second key of the hotkey command, and then release both keys at the same time. 34 Chapter 6 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

7 Multimedia Your computer includes multimedia features that allow you to listen to music, watch movies, and view pictures. Your computer may include the following multimedia components:

Integrated speakers for listening to music Integrated microphones for recording your own audio Integrated webcam that allows you to capture and share video Preinstalled multimedia software that allows you to play and manage your music, movies, and pictures

Multimedia keys that provide fast access to multimedia tasks The following sections explain how to use the multimedia components included with your computer. Using the media activity keys The media activity keys control the play of an audio CD or a DVD or BD that is inserted into an external optical drive (purchased separately).

When an audio CD or a DVD is not playing, press the play/pause key (2) to play the disc.

When an audio CD or a DVD is playing, use the following keys:

To play the previous track of an audio CD or the previous chapter of a DVD, press the previous track key (1). To pause or resume playing the disc, press play/pause key (2). To stop the disc, press the stop key (3). To play the next track of an audio CD or the next chapter of a DVD, press the next track key

(4). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the media activity keys 35 Installing multimedia software from a disc Although your computer does not have an integrated optical drive, you can easily access software, install applications, and access data in either of the following ways:

Connect an external optical drive (select models only or purchased separately) to one of the USB ports on your computer. NOTE: For additional information on external optical drives, refer to Using external drives on page 60. Share the optical drive that is connected to another computer on your network. NOTE: You must have a network set up in order to share an optical drive. For additional information on sharing optical drives, refer to Sharing an optical drive on page 61. NOTE: Some discs, such as DVD movies and game discs, may be copy-protected and therefore unusable through DVD or CD sharing. Audio Your computer enables you to use a variety of audio features:

Play music using your computer speakers and/or connected external speakers Record sound using the internal microphone or connect an external microphone Download music from the Internet Create multimedia presentations using audio and images Transmit sound and images with instant messaging programs Stream radio programs Create (burn) audio CDs with an optional optical drive Adjusting the volume You can adjust the volume using the computer volume keys.

To decrease volume, press the volume down key (1). To increase volume, press the volume up key (2). To mute or restore volume, press the mute key (3). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Audio 37

GammaControls the contrast affecting the mid-level grays or midtones of an image. Adjusting the gamma of an image allows you to change the brightness values of the middle range of gray tones without dramatically altering the shadows and highlights. A lower gamma setting makes grays look black, and makes dark colors even darker. Backlight CompCompensates in cases where a subject with a large amount of background light would otherwise be obscured by blooming or silhouetting. For more information about using the webcam, select Start > Help and Support. Video Your computer enables you to use a variety of video features:

Watch movies

Play games over the Internet Edit pictures and video and create presentations Connect external video devices

Watch TV over the Internet Using the external monitor port The external monitor port connects an external display device, such as an external monitor or a projector, to the computer.

To connect a display device, connect the device cable to the external monitor port. If a properly connected external display device does not display an image, press the switch NOTE:

screen image key to transfer the image to the device. Repeatedly pressing this key alternates the screen image between the computer display and the device. Connecting an HDMI device The computer includes an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) port. The HDMI port connects the computer to an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, or any compatible digital or audio component. 40 Chapter 7 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

NOTE: To transmit video signals through the HDMI port, you need an HDMI cable (purchased separately). The computer can support one HDMI device connected to the HDMI port, while simultaneously supporting an image on the computer display or any other supported external display. To connect a video or audio device to the HDMI port:

1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the video device, according to the device manufacturers instructions. Press the switch screen image key on the computer to switch the image between the display devices connected to the computer. 3. Configuring audio for HDMI To configure HDMI audio, first connect an audio or video device, such as a high-definition TV, to the HDMI port on your computer. Then configure the default audio playback device as follows:

1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click either Digital Output or Digital Output Device (HDMI). 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. To return audio to the computer speakers, follow these steps:

1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click Speakers. 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Video 41 8 Power management Shutting down the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information will be lost when the computer is shut down. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and computer. Shut down the computer under any of the following conditions:

When you need to replace the battery or access components inside the computer

When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB port

When the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period Although you can shut down the computer with the power switch, the recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. To shut down the computer:

NOTE:

before shutdown is possible. 1. 2. Click Start. 3. Click Shut down. If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, and then click the Power button. Slide and hold the power switch for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, you must first exit Sleep or Hibernation Save your work and close all open programs.

Setting power devices Using power-saving states The computer has two power-saving states enabled at the factory: Sleep and Hibernation. When Sleep is initiated, the power light blinks and the screen clears. Your work is saved to memory, letting you exit Sleep faster than exiting Hibernation. If the computer is in the Sleep state for an extended period or if the battery reaches a critical battery level while in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. When Hibernation is initiated, your work is saved to a hibernation file on the hard drive and the computer turns off. 42 Chapter 8 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

CAUTION: To prevent possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep or Hibernation while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. NOTE: You cannot initiate any type of networking connection or perform any computer functions while the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation. Initiating and exiting Sleep The system is set at the factory to initiate Sleep after 15 minutes of inactivity when running on battery power and 30 minutes of inactivity when running on external power. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. With the computer on, you can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly slide the power switch. Close the display. Click Start, click the arrow next to the Shut down button, and then click Sleep.

You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly slide the power switch. If the display is closed, open the display. Press a key on the keyboard. Activate the TouchPad.

When the computer exits Sleep, the power light turns on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:

before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows password Initiating and exiting Hibernation The system is set at the factory to initiate Hibernation after 1,080 minutes (18 hours) of inactivity when running on battery power, 1,080 minutes (18 hours) of inactivity when running on external power, or when the battery reaches a critical battery level. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. To initiate Hibernation:

Click Start, click the arrow next to the Shut down button, and then click Hibernate. To exit Hibernation:

Briefly slide the power switch. The power light turns on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:

before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows password Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Setting power devices 43 Conserving power

Select the Power saver power plan through Power Options under System and Security in Windows Control Panel. Turn off wireless and local area network (LAN) connections and exit modem applications when you are not using them. Disconnect external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, when you are not using them. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Use the screen brightness keys to adjust screen brightness as needed. If you leave your work, initiate Sleep or Hibernation, or shut down the computer. Using the battery meter The battery meter is located in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. The battery meter allows you to quickly access power settings, view remaining battery charge, and select a different power plan.

To display the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, move the pointer over the battery meter icon. To access Power Options, or to change the power plan, click the battery meter icon and select an item from the list. Different battery meter icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. The icon also displays a message if the battery has reached a low battery level, critical battery level, or reserve battery level. To hide or display the battery meter icon:

1. Right-click the Show hidden icons icon (the arrow at the left side of the notification area). 2. Click Customize notification icons. 3. Under Behaviors, select Show icon and notifications for the Power icon. 4. Click OK. Using power plans A power plan is a collection of system settings that manages how the computer uses power. Power plans can help you conserve power or maximize performance. You can change power plan settings or create your own power plan. Viewing the current power plan

Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. Selecting a different power plan

Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then select a power plan from the list. 44 Chapter 8 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options, and then select a power plan from the list. Customizing power plans 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. Select a power plan, and then click Change plan settings. 2. 3. Change the settings as needed. 4. To change additional settings, click Change advanced power settings and make your changes. Setting password protection on wakeup To set the computer to prompt for a password when the computer exits Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. 2. In the left pane, click Require a password on wakeup. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. Click Require a password (recommended). If you need to create a user account password or change your current user account NOTE:

password, click Create or change your user account password, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you do not need to create or change a user account password, go to step 5. 5. Click Save changes. Using battery power When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is plugged into external AC power, the computer runs on AC power. If the computer contains a charged battery and is running on external AC power supplied through the AC adapter, the computer switches to battery power if the AC adapter is disconnected from the computer. NOTE: The display brightness is decreased to save battery life when you disconnect AC power. To increase display brightness, press the increase screen brightness key or reconnect the AC adapter. You can keep a battery in the computer or in storage, depending on how you work. Keeping the battery in the computer whenever the computer is plugged into AC power charges the battery and also protects your work in case of a power outage. However, a battery in the computer slowly discharges when the computer is off and unplugged from external power. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, display brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Using battery power 45 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Finding battery information in Help and Support Help and Support provides the following tools and information about the battery:

Battery Check tool to test battery performance Information on calibration, power management, and proper care and storage to maximize battery life Information on battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity

To access battery information:

Select Start > Help and Support > Learn > Power Plans: Frequently Asked Questions. Using Battery Check Battery Check in Help and Support provides information on the status of the battery installed in the computer. To run Battery Check:

1. Connect the AC adapter to the computer. NOTE: The computer must be connected to external power for Battery Check to properly. Select Start > Help and Support > Troubleshoot > Power, Thermal and Mechanical. 2. 3. Click the Power tab, and then click Battery Check. Battery Check examines the battery and its cells to see if they are functioning properly, and then reports the results of the examination. Displaying the remaining battery charge

Move the pointer over the battery meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Removing or inserting the battery CAUTION: Removing a battery that is the sole power source can cause loss of information. To prevent loss of information, initiate Hibernation or shut down the computer through Windows before removing the battery. To remove the battery:

1. Close the display and turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. 2. Slide the battery release latch (1) to release the battery. NOTE: The battery release latch automatically returns to its original position. 46 Chapter 8 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

3. Pivot the battery (2) upward and remove it from the computer (3). To insert the battery:

1. Close the display and turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. 2. Align the tabs on the battery with the notches on the outer edge of the battery bay (1) and rotate the battery into the battery bay until it is seated (2). The battery release latch (3) automatically locks the battery into place. 3. Charging a battery WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. The battery charges whenever the computer is plugged into external power through an AC adapter or an optional power adapter. The battery charges whether the computer is off or in use, but it charges faster when the computer is off. Using battery power 47 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Charging may take longer if a battery is new, has been unused for 2 weeks or more, or is much warmer or cooler than room temperature. To prolong battery life and optimize the accuracy of battery charge displays, follow these recommendations:

If the computer is on while the battery is charging, the battery meter in the notification If you are charging a new battery, charge it fully before turning on the computer. Charge the battery until the battery light turns white. NOTE:

area may show 100 percent charge before the battery is fully charged. Allow the battery to discharge below 5 percent of a full charge through normal use before charging it. If the battery has been unused for one month or more, calibrate the battery instead of simply charging it. Maximizing battery discharge time Battery discharge time varies depending on the features you use while on battery power. Maximum discharge time gradually shortens, as the battery storage capacity naturally degrades. Tips for maximizing battery discharge time:

Lower the brightness on the display. Check the Power saver setting in Power Options. Remove the battery from the computer when it is not being used or charged. Store the battery in a cool, dry location. Managing low battery levels The information in this section describes the alerts and system responses set at the factory. Some low-

battery alerts and system responses can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. Preferences set using Power Options do not affect lights. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the battery meter icon in the notification area shows a low or critical battery notification. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, a notification appears above the battery meter icon that shows how much battery charge remains. NOTE: For additional information on the battery meter, refer to Using the battery meter on page 44. The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state, and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. 48 Chapter 8 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Resolving a low battery level CAUTION: To reduce the risk of losing information when the computer reaches a critical battery level and has initiated Hibernation, do not restore power until the power light turns off. Resolving a low battery level when external power is available

Connect one of the following devices:

AC adapter Optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP. Resolving a low battery level when a charged battery is available Turn off the computer or initiate Hibernation. 1. 2. Remove the discharged battery, and then insert a charged battery. 3. Turn on the computer. Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available

Initiate Hibernation. or Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the computer lacks sufficient power to exit Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. 2. Insert a charged battery or plug the computer into external power. Exit Hibernation by sliding the power switch. Calibrating a battery To maximize battery performance, you should calibrate a battery under the following conditions:

When battery charge displays seem inaccurate

When you observe a significant change in battery run time Even if a battery is heavily used, it should not need to be calibrated more than once a month. It is also not necessary to calibrate a new battery.

To calibrate a battery and for additional information, select Start > Help and Support. Storing a battery CAUTION: To prevent damage to a battery, do not expose it to high temperatures for extended periods of time. If a computer will be unused and unplugged from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately. To prolong the charge of a stored battery, place it in a cool, dry place. Calibrate a battery before using it if it has been stored for one month or more. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using battery power 49 Disposing of a used battery WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. Refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices for proper battery disposal. Replacing the battery Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, display brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Battery Check notifies you to replace the battery when an internal cell is not charging properly, or when the battery storage capacity has reached a weak condition. A message refers you to the HP Web site for more information about ordering a replacement battery. If the battery is possibly covered by an HP warranty, instructions include a warranty ID. NOTE: To ensure that you always have battery power when you need it, HP recommends purchasing a new battery when the storage capacity indicator turns green-yellow. Using external AC power External AC power is supplied through an approved AC adapter. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. Connect the computer to external AC power under any of the following conditions:

When you are charging or calibrating a battery WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft.

When you are installing or modifying system software

When you are writing information to an optional external CD or DVD When you connect the computer to external AC power, the following events occur:

The battery begins to charge. If the computer is turned on, the battery meter icon in the notification area changes appearance.

When you disconnect external AC power, the following events occur:

The computer switches to battery power. The display brightness is automatically decreased to save battery life. To increase display brightness, press the increase screen brightness key or reconnect the AC adapter. Connecting AC power WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. 50 Chapter 8 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

To connect the computer to external AC power:

1. 2. 3. Plug the adapter into the power connector (1) on the computer. Plug the power cord into the adapter (2). Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet (3). Testing an AC adapter Test the AC adapter if the computer exhibits any of the following symptoms when it is connected to AC power:

The computer will not turn on. The display does not turn on. The power light is off.

To test the AC adapter:

1. Remove the battery from the computer. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer, and then plug it into an AC outlet. 3. Turn on the computer.

If the power light turns on, the AC adapter is working properly. If the power light remains off, the AC adapter is not functioning and should be replaced. Contact technical support for information on obtaining a replacement AC power adapter. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using external AC power 51 Removing a digital card CAUTION: To prevent loss of data or an unresponsive system, use the following procedure to safely remove the digital card. 1. Save your information and close all programs associated with the digital card. NOTE: To stop a data transfer, click Cancel in the operating system Copying window. 2. To remove a digital card:

a. Click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon, click the Show hidden icons icon (the arrow at the left of the notification area). b. Click the name of the digital card in the list. NOTE: You are prompted that it is safe to remove the hardware device. 3. Pull the digital card from the slot. Using a USB device A USB port connects an optional external device, such as a USB keyboard, mouse, drive, printer, scanner, or hub, to the computer. Some USB devices may require additional support software, which is usually included with the device. For more information about device-specific software, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. The computer has 3 USB ports, which support USB 1.0, USB 1.1, and USB 2.0 devices. To add more USB ports, connect an optional hub. Connecting a USB device CAUTION: To prevent damage to a USB connector, use minimal force to connect a USB device. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using a USB device 53

To connect a USB device to the computer, connect the USB cable for the device to the USB port. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected. NOTE: The first time you connect a USB device, the "Installing device driver software" message is displayed in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Removing a USB device CAUTION: To prevent loss of information or an unresponsive system, use the following procedure to safely remove the USB device. CAUTION: To prevent damage to a USB connector, do not pull on the cable to remove the USB device. To remove a USB device:

1. Click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon, click the Show hidden icons icon (the arrow at the left of the notification area). 2. Click the name of the device in the list. NOTE: You are prompted that it is safe to remove the hardware device. 3. Remove the device. 54 Chapter 9 External devices Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

10 Drives Handling drives Drives are fragile computer components that must be handled with care. Refer to the following cautions before handling drives. Additional cautions are included with the procedures to which they apply. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

Before you move a computer that is connected to an external hard drive, initiate Sleep and allow the screen to clear, or properly disconnect the external hard drive. Before handling a drive, discharge static electricity by touching the unpainted metal surface of the drive. Do not touch the connector pins on a removable drive or on the computer. Handle a drive carefully; do not drop a drive or place items on it. Before removing or inserting a drive, shut down the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off, in the Sleep state, or in Hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive into a drive bay. Do not type on the keyboard or move the computer while the optical drive is writing to a disc. The write process is sensitive to vibration. When the battery is the only source of power, be sure that the battery is sufficiently charged before writing to media. Avoid exposing a drive to temperature or humidity extremes. Avoid exposing a drive to liquids. Do not spray the drive with cleaning products. Remove media from a drive before removing the drive from the drive bay, or traveling with, shipping, or storing a drive. If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-

through devices and security wands. The airport security devices that check carry-on luggage, such as conveyor belts, use x-rays instead of magnetism and will not damage a drive. Improving hard drive performance Using Disk Defragmenter As you use the computer, files on the hard drive become fragmented. Disk Defragmenter consolidates the fragmented files and folders on the hard drive so that the system can run more efficiently. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Handling drives 55 To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. 2. Click Defragment disk. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Defragmenter. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing applications, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Disk Cleanup searches the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer to run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. 2. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Cleanup. Follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP ProtectSmart Hard Drive Protection HP ProtectSmart Hard Drive Protection protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under either of the following conditions:

You drop the computer. You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power.

A short time after the end of one of these events, HP ProtectSmart Hard Drive Protection returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Because solid-state drives (SSD) lack moving parts, HP ProtectSmart Hard Drive Protection is unnecessary. NOTE: Hard drives connected to USB ports are not covered by HP ProtectSmart Hard Drive Protection. For more information, refer to the HP ProtectSmart Hard Drive Protection software Help. Identifying HP ProtectSmart Hard Drive Protection status The drive light on the computer turns amber to show that the drive is parked. To determine whether drives are currently protected or whether a drive is parked, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Windows Mobility Center:

If the software is enabled, a green check mark is superimposed over the hard drive icon. If the software is disabled, a red X is superimposed over the hard drive icon. If the drives are parked, a yellow moon is superimposed over the hard drive icon.

The icon in the Mobility Center may not show the most up-to-date status for the drive. For immediate updates after a change in status, you need to enable the notification area icon. 56 Chapter 10 Drives Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

To enable the notification area icon:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > HP ProtectSmart Hard Drive Protection. NOTE:

If prompted by User Account Control, click Yes. 2. On the Icon in System Tray row, click Show. 3. Click OK. Managing power with a parked hard drive If HP ProtectSmart Hard Drive Protection has parked the drive, the computer will behave in the following ways:

The computer will not shut down. The computer will not initiate Sleep or Hibernation, except as described in the following Note. NOTE:

If the computer is running on battery power and reaches a critical battery level, HP ProtectSmart Hard Drive Protection allows the computer to initiate Hibernation. Before you move the computer, HP recommends that you either shut it down or initiate Sleep or Hibernation. Using HP ProtectSmart Hard Drive Protection software The HP ProtectSmart Hard Drive Protection software enables you to perform the following tasks:

Enable and disable HP ProtectSmart Hard Drive Protection. NOTE: Depending on your user privileges, you may not be able to enable or disable HP ProtectSmart Hard Drive Protection. Additionally, members of an Administrator group can change the privileges for non-Administrator users. Determine whether a drive in the system is supported.

To open the software and change settings, follow these steps:

1. In Mobility Center, click the hard drive icon to open the HP ProtectSmart Hard Drive Protection window. or Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > HP ProtectSmart Hard Drive Protection. NOTE:

If prompted by User Account Control, click Yes. 2. Click the appropriate button to change settings. 3. Click OK. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using HP ProtectSmart Hard Drive Protection 57 Inserting and removing a hard drive Save your work. Shut down the computer and close the display. CAUTION: To prevent information loss or an unresponsive system:

Shut down the computer before removing the hard drive from the hard drive bay. Do not remove the hard drive while the computer is on, in the Sleep state, or in Hibernation. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by sliding the power switch. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. To remove the hard drive:

1. 2. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. 6. Remove the battery from the computer. 7. With the hard drive bay toward you, loosen the 2 hard drive cover screws (1). 8. Remove the hard drive cover (2). Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. 9. Pull the hard drive tab to the left (1) to disconnect the hard drive. 58 Chapter 10 Drives Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

10. Lift the hard drive (2) out of the hard drive bay. To install a hard drive:

1. 2. Insert the hard drive into the hard drive bay (1). Pull the hard drive tab (2) to the right until the hard drive snaps into place. Align the tabs (1) on the hard drive cover with the notches on the computer. 3. 4. Close the cover (2). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Inserting and removing a hard drive 59 5. Tighten the hard drive cover screws (3). Using external drives Removable external drives expand your options for storing and accessing information. USB drives include the following types:

1.44-megabyte diskette drive Hard drive module (a hard drive with an adapter attached) DVD-ROM Drive DVDRW SuperMulti Double-Layer (DL) Drive Blu-ray ROM DVDR/RW SuperMulti Double-Layer (DL) Drive Connecting optional external drives NOTE: For more information about required software and drivers, or to learn which computer port to use, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. To connect an external drive to the computer:

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the equipment when connecting a powered drive, be sure that the drive is turned off and the AC power cord is unplugged. 1. Connect the drive to the computer. 2. 3. To disconnect an unpowered external drive, turn off the drive, and then disconnect it from the computer. To disconnect a powered external drive, turn off the drive, disconnect it from the computer, and then unplug the AC power cord. If you are connecting a powered drive, plug the device power cord into a grounded AC outlet. Turn on the drive. Using an external optical drive Select computer models ship with an external optical drive. An external optical drive connects to a USB port on the computer and enables you to read data discs, play music, and watch movies. If your external optical drive is a Blu-ray Disc (BD) drive, you can also watch high-definition video from discs. 60 Chapter 10 Drives Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

You may have one of the following types of drives:

DVDRW SuperMulti Double-Layer (DL) Drive Blu-ray ROM DVDR/RW SuperMulti Double-Layer (DL) Drive

Removing an optical disc when the disc tray will not open If your optical drive is a tray load drive and the disc tray does not open, follow these steps:

1. Insert the end of a paper clip (1) into the release access in the front bezel of the drive. 2. Press in gently on the paper clip until the tray is released, and then pull out the tray (2) until it stops. 3. Remove the disc (3) from the tray by gently pressing down on the spindle while lifting the outer edges of the disc. Hold the disc by the edges and avoid touching the flat surfaces. NOTE:

If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully as you remove it. 4. Close the disc tray and place the disc in a protective case. Sharing an optical drive Although your computer does not have an integrated optical drive, you can easily access software, install applications, and access data by sharing an optical drive connected to another computer in your network. Sharing drives is a feature of the Windows operating system that allows a drive on one computer to be accessible to other computers on the same network. NOTE: You must have a network set up in order to share an optical drive; refer to Networking on page 15 for additional information on setting up a network. NOTE: Some discs, such as DVD movies and game discs, may be copy-protected and therefore unusable through DVD or CD sharing. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Sharing an optical drive 61 From the computer with the optical drive you are sharing, select Start > Computer. To share an optical drive:

1. 2. Right-click the optical drive you want to share, and click Properties. 3. 4. 5. 6. Click Apply, and then click OK. 7. Select the Sharing tab > Advanced Sharing. Select the Share this folder check box. Type a name for the optical drive in the Share name text box. To view the shared optical drive on your computer, select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 62 Chapter 10 Drives Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

11 Memory modules The computer has two memory module compartments, which are located on the bottom of the computer. The memory capacity of the computer can be upgraded by adding a memory module to the vacant expansion memory module slot or by upgrading the existing memory module in the primary memory module slot. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock and damage to the equipment, unplug the power cord and remove all batteries before installing a memory module. CAUTION: Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage electronic components. Before beginning any procedure, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. NOTE: To use a dual-channel configuration when adding a second memory module, be sure that both memory modules are the same size. To add or replace a memory module:

1. 2. Save your work. Shut down the computer and close the display. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by sliding the power switch. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. 6. Remove the battery from the computer. 7. 8. Loosen the 2 memory module compartment screws (1). Lift the memory module compartment cover (2) away from the computer. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

63 9. If you are replacing a memory module, remove the existing memory module:

a. Pull away the retention clips (1) on each side of the memory module. The memory module tilts up. b. Grasp the edge of the memory module (2), and gently pull the module out of the memory module slot. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module. To protect a memory module after removal, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 10. Insert a new memory module:

CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module, and do not bend the memory module. a. b. With the memory module at a 45-degree angle from the surface of the memory module Align the notched edge (1) of the memory module with the tab in the memory module slot. compartment, press the module (2) into the memory module slot until it is seated. 64 Chapter 11 Memory modules Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

c. Gently press the memory module (3) down, applying pressure to both the left and right edges of the memory module, until the retention clips snap into place. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, be sure that you do not bend the memory module. 11. Align the tabs (1) on the memory module compartment cover with the notches on the computer. 12. Close the cover (2). 13. Tighten the 2 memory module compartment screws (3). 14. Replace the battery. 15. Turn the computer right-side up, and then reconnect external power and external devices. 16. Turn on the computer. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

65 12 Security Protecting the computer Standard security features provided by the Windows operating system and the non-Windows Setup Utility can protect your personal settings and data from a variety of risks. Follow the procedures in this guide to use the following features:

Passwords Antivirus software Firewall software Critical security updates Optional security cable Fingerprint reader

NOTE: Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents, but they may not deter software attacks or prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE: Before you send your computer for service, remove all password and fingerprint settings. Computer risk Security feature Unauthorized use of the computer Power-on password or fingerprint reader Computer viruses Unauthorized access to data Unauthorized access to Setup Utility, BIOS settings, and other system identification information Norton Internet Security software Firewall software

Windows updates Administrator password Ongoing or future threats to the computer Critical security updates from Microsoft Unauthorized access to a Windows user account User password Unauthorized removal of the computer Security cable slot (used with an optional security cable) Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information. Several types of passwords can be set, depending on how you want to control access to your information. Passwords can be set in Windows or in the non-Windows Setup Utility preinstalled on the computer. CAUTION: To prevent being locked out of the computer, record each password you set. Because most passwords are not displayed as they are set, changed, or deleted, it is essential to record each password immediately and store it in a secure place. 66 Chapter 12 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

You can use the same password for a Setup Utility feature and for a Windows security feature. You can also use the same password for more than one Setup Utility feature. Use the following guidelines when setting a password in Setup Utility:

A password can be any combination of up to 8 letters and numbers and is case sensitive. A password set in Setup Utility must be entered at a Setup Utility prompt. A password set in Windows must be entered at a Windows prompt. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program.

Write down your passwords and store them in a secure place away from the computer.

Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. Do not use your name or other personal information that could be easily discovered by an outsider.

The following sections list Windows and Setup Utility passwords and describe their functions. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords, select Start > Help and Support. Setting passwords in Windows Password Administrator password User password Setting passwords in Setup Utility Password Administrator password*

Power-on password*

Protects administrator-level access to computer contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility contents. Protects access to a Windows user account. It also protects access to the computer contents and must be entered when you exit Sleep or Hibernation.

Protects access to Setup Utility. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you access Setup Utility. CAUTION:

cannot access Setup Utility. If you forget your administrator password, you

Protects access to the computer contents. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer, or exit Hibernation. If you forget your power-on password, you CAUTION:

cannot turn on or restart the computer, or exit Hibernation. NOTE: The administrator password can be used in place of the power-on password.

*For details about each of these passwords, refer to the following topics. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using passwords 67 Administrator password Your administrator password protects the configuration settings and system identification information in Setup Utility. After this password is set, you must enter it each time you access Setup Utility. Your administrator password is not interchangeable with an administrator password set in Windows, nor is it displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. Be sure that you record your password and store it in a safe place. If you enter the administrator password at the first password check before the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed, you do not have to enter it again to access Setup Utility. If you enter the power-on password at the first password check before the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed, you must enter the administrator password to access Setup Utility. Managing an administrator password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:

1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer. While the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen, press f10. or Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer. While the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen, press esc. When the Startup Menu is displayed, press f10.

2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Set Administrator Password, and then press enter. To set an administrator password, type your password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To change an administrator password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, type a new password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To delete an administrator password, type your current password in the Enter Password field, and then press enter 4 times.

3. To save your changes and exit Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Entering an administrator password At the Enter Password prompt, type your administrator password, and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the administrator password, you must restart the computer and try again. Power-on password Your power-on password prevents unauthorized use of the computer. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer, or exit Hibernation. A power-on password is not displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. 68 Chapter 12 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Managing a power-on password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:

1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer. While the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen, press f10. or Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer. While the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen, press esc. When the Startup Menu is displayed, press f10. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Set Power-On Password, and then press enter.

To set a power-on password, type your password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To change a power-on password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, type a new password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To delete a power-on password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, and then press enter 4 times. 3. To save your changes and exit Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Entering a power-on password At the Enter Password prompt, type your password, and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the password, you must restart the computer and try again. Using antivirus software When you use the computer to access e-mail, a network, or the Internet, you expose it to computer viruses. Computer viruses can disable the operating system, programs, or utilities, or cause them to abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Norton Internet Security, an antivirus program, is preinstalled on the computer. The software includes 60 days of free updates. It is strongly recommended that you protect the computer against new viruses beyond 60 days by purchasing extended update service. Instructions for using and updating Norton Internet Security software and for purchasing extended update service are provided within the program. To view and access Norton Internet Security, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security. For more information about computer viruses, type viruses in the Search box in Help and Support. Using firewall software When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, unauthorized persons may be able to gain access to the computer, your personal files, and information about you. Use the firewall software preinstalled on the computer to protect your privacy. Using antivirus software 69 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Firewall features include logging and reporting of network activity, and automatic monitoring of all incoming and outgoing traffic. Refer to the firewall user guide or contact your firewall manufacturer for more information. NOTE: Under some circumstances a firewall can block access to Internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a network, or block authorized e-mail attachments. To temporarily resolve the problem, disable the firewall, perform the task that you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall. Installing critical security updates CAUTION: Microsoft sends alerts regarding critical updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all critical updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. Updates to the operating system and other software may have become available after the computer was shipped. To be sure that all available updates are installed on the computer, observe these guidelines:

Run Windows Update as soon as possible after you set up your computer. Use the update link at Start > All Programs > Windows Update. Run Windows Update monthly thereafter. Obtain updates to Windows and other Microsoft programs, as they are released, from the Microsoft Web site and through the updates link in Help and Support. Installing an optional security cable NOTE: A security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. 1. 2. 3. Loop the security cable around a secured object. Insert the key (1) into the cable lock (2). Insert the cable lock into the security cable slot on the computer (3), and then lock the cable lock with the key. 4. Remove the key and keep it in a safe place. 70 Chapter 12 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using your registered fingerprint to log on to Windows To log on to Windows using your fingerprint, follow these steps:

1. 2. Immediately after you have registered your fingerprints, restart Windows. Swipe any of your registered fingers to log on to Windows. 72 Chapter 12 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

13 Backup and recovery

Recovery after a system failure is as complete as your most current backup. HP recommends that you create recovery discs immediately after software setup. As you add new software and data files, you should continue to back up your system on a regular basis to maintain a reasonably current backup. Tools provided by the operating system and HP Recovery Manager software are designed to help you with the following tasks for safeguarding your information and restoring it in case of a system failure:

Creating a set of recovery discs (Recovery Manager software feature). Recovery discs are used to start up (boot) your computer and restore the operating system and software programs to factory settings in case of system failure or instability. Backing up your information regularly to protect your important system files. Creating system restore points (operating system feature). System restore points allow you to reverse undesirable changes to your computer by restoring the computer to an earlier state. Recovering a program or driver (Recovery Manager software feature). This feature helps you reinstall a program or driver without performing a full system recovery. Performing a full system recovery (Recovery Manager software feature). With Recovery Manager, you can recover your full factory image if you experience system failure or instability. Recovery Manager works from a dedicated recovery partition (select models only) on the hard drive or from recovery discs you create. NOTE: Computers with a solid-state drive (SSD) may not have a recovery partition. Recovery discs have been included for computers that do not have a partition. Use these discs to recover your operating system and software. To check for the presence of a recovery partition, select Start, right-click Computer, click Manage, and then click Disk Management. If the partition is present, an HP Recovery drive is listed in the window.

Creating recovery discs HP recommends that you create recovery discs to be sure that you can restore your system to its original factory state if you experience serious system failure or instability. Create these discs after setting up the computer for the first time. Handle these discs carefully and keep them in a safe place. The software allows the creation of only one set of recovery discs. NOTE:

If your computer does not include an integrated optical drive, you can use an optional external optical drive (purchased separately) to create recovery discs, or you can purchase recovery discs for your computer from the HP Web site. Note the following guidelines before creating recovery discs:

You will need high-quality DVD-R, DVD+R, BD-R (writable Blu-ray), or CD-R discs. All these discs are purchased separately. DVDs and BDs have a much higher capacity than CDs. If you use CDs, up to 20 discs may be required, whereas only a few DVDs or BDs are required. NOTE: Read-write discs, such as CD-RW, DVDRW, double-layer DVDRW, and BD-RE

(rewritable Blu-ray) discs, are not compatible with the Recovery Manager software. The computer must be connected to AC power during this process. Creating recovery discs 73 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Only one set of recovery discs can be created per computer. Number each disc before inserting it into the optical drive. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating the recovery discs. The next time you open Recovery Manager, you will be prompted to continue the disc creation process. To create a set of recovery discs:

1. 2. Select Start > All Programs > Recovery Manager > Recovery Disc Creation. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up your information As you add new software and data files, you should back up your system on a regular basis to maintain a reasonably current backup. Back up your system at the following times:

At regularly scheduled times NOTE: Set reminders to back up your information periodically. Before the computer is repaired or restored Before you add or modify hardware or software

Note the following when backing up:

Create system restore points using the Windows System Restore feature, and periodically copy them to disc. Store personal files in the Documents library and back up this folder periodically. Back up templates stored in their associated programs. Save customized settings in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your settings. The screen shot can be a time-saver if you have to reset your preferences. To copy the screen and paste it into a word-processing document, follow these steps:

1. Display the screen. 2. Copy the screen:

To copy only the active window, press alt+prt sc. To copy the entire screen, press prt sc. Save the document. 3. Open a word-processing document, and then select Edit > Paste. 4. You can back up your information to an optional external hard drive, a network drive, or discs.

When backing up to discs, use any of the following types of discs (purchased separately): CD-R, CD-RW, DVD+R, DVD-R, or DVDRW. The discs you use will depend on the type of optical drive installed in your computer. NOTE: DVDs store more information than CDs, so using them for backup reduces the number of recovery discs required.

When backing up to discs, number each disc before inserting it into the optical drive of the computer. 74 Chapter 13 Backup and recovery Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using Windows Backup and Restore To create a backup using Windows Backup and Restore, follow these steps:

NOTE: Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you start the backup process. NOTE: The backup process may take over an hour, depending on file size and the speed of the computer. 1. 2. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. Select Start > All Programs > Maintenance > Backup and Restore. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up and create a backup. Using system restore points When you back up your system, you are creating a system restore point. A system restore point allows you to save and name a snapshot of your hard drive at a specific point in time. You can then recover back to that point if you want to reverse subsequent changes made to your system. NOTE: Recovering to an earlier restore point does not affect data files saved or e-mails created since the last restore point. You also can create additional restore points to provide increased protection for your system files and settings. When to create restore points Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally

NOTE:

If you revert to a restore point and then change your mind, you can reverse the restoration. Create a system restore point Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > System. In the left pane, click System Protection. 1. 2. 3. Click the System Protection tab. 4. Under Protection Settings, select the disk for which you want to create a restore point. 5. Click Create. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions. Restore to a previous date and time To revert to a restore point (created at a previous date and time), when the computer was functioning optimally, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Click the System Protection tab. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > System. In the left pane, click System protection. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Backing up your information 75 4. Click System Restore. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Performing a recovery NOTE: You can recover only files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Recovery Manager to create a set of recovery discs (entire drive backup) as soon as you set up your computer. Recovery Manager software allows you to repair or restore the system if you experience system failure or instability. Recovery Manager works from recovery discs or from a dedicated recovery partition (select models only) on the hard drive. However, if your computer includes a solid-state drive (SSD), you may not have a recovery partition. If that is the case, recovery discs have been included with your computer. Use these discs to recover your operating system and software. NOTE: Windows has its own built-in repair features, such as System Restore. If you have not already tried these features, try them before using Recovery Manager. NOTE: Recovery Manager recovers only software that was preinstalled at the factory. Software not provided with this computer must be downloaded from the manufacturer's Web site or reinstalled from the disc provided by the manufacturer. Recovering from the recovery discs To restore the system from the recovery discs:

1. 2. 3. Back up all personal files. Insert the first recovery disc into an optional external optical drive and restart the computer. Follow the on-screen instructions. Recovering from the dedicated recovery partition (select models only) NOTE: Computers with an SSD may not have a recovery partition. If the computer does not have a recovery partition, you will not be able to recover using this procedure. Recovery discs have been included for computers that do not have a partition. Use these discs to recover your operating system and software. On some models, you can perform a recovery from the partition on the hard drive, accessed by pressing either the Start button or f11. This restores the computer to its factory condition. To restore the system from the partition, follow these steps:

1. Access Recovery Manager in either of the following ways:

Select Start > All Programs > Recovery Manager > Recovery Manager. or Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Then, press f11 while the Press

<F11> for recovery message is displayed on the screen. 2. Click System Recovery in the Recovery Manager window. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. 76 Chapter 13 Backup and recovery Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

14 Setup Utility (BIOS) Starting Setup Utility Setup Utility is a ROM-based information and customization utility that can be used even when your Windows operating system is not working. The utility reports information about the computer and provides settings for startup, security, and other preferences. To start Setup Utility:

Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer. While the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen, press f10. or 1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer. While the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen, press esc. 2. When the Startup Menu is displayed, press f10. Using Setup Utility Changing the language of Setup Utility The following procedure explains how to change the language of Setup Utility. If Setup Utility is not already running, begin at step 1. If Setup Utility is already running, begin at step 2. 1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer. While the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen, press f10. or Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer. While the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen, press esc. When the Startup Menu is displayed, press f10. 2. Use the arrow keys to select System Configuration > Language, and then press enter. 3. Use the arrow keys to select a language, and then press enter. 4. When a confirmation prompt with your language selected is displayed, press enter. 5. To save your change and exit Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. Your change goes into effect immediately. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Starting Setup Utility 77 Navigating and selecting in Setup Utility Because Setup Utility is not Windows based, it does not support the TouchPad. Navigation and selection are by keystroke.

To choose a menu or a menu item, use the arrow keys. To choose an item in a list or to toggle a field, for example an Enable/Disable field, use either the arrow keys or f5 or f6. To select an item, press enter. To close a text box or return to the menu display, press esc. To display additional navigation and selection information while Setup Utility is open, press f1. Displaying system information The following procedure explains how to display system information in Setup Utility. If Setup Utility is not open, begin at step 1. If Setup Utility is open, begin at step 2. 1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer. While the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen, press f10. or Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer. While the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen, press esc. When the Startup Menu is displayed, press f10. Select the Main menu. System information such as the system time and date, and identification information about the computer is displayed. To exit Setup Utility without changing any settings, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. 2. 3. Restoring default settings in Setup Utility The following procedure explains how to restore the Setup Utility default settings. If Setup Utility is not already running, begin at step 1. If Setup Utility is already running, begin at step 2. 1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer. While the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen, press f10. or Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer. While the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen, press esc. When the Startup Menu is displayed, press f10. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Exit > Load Setup Defaults, and then press enter. 3. When the Setup Confirmation is displayed, press enter. 4. To save your change and exit Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. The Setup Utility default settings go into effect when the computer restarts. NOTE: Your password, security, and language settings are not changed when you restore the factory default settings. 78 Chapter 14 Setup Utility (BIOS) Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Exiting Setup Utility You can exit Setup Utility with or without saving changes.

To exit Setup Utility and save your changes from the current session:

If the Setup Utility menus are not visible, press esc to return to the menu display. Then use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. To exit Setup Utility without saving your changes from the current session:

If the Setup Utility menus are not visible, press esc to return to the menu display. Then use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. After either choice, the computer restarts in Windows. Setup Utility Menus The menu tables in this section provide an overview of Setup Utility options. NOTE: Some of the Setup Utility menu items listed in this chapter may not be supported by your computer. Main menu Select System information Security menu Select Administrator password Power-On Password System Configuration menu To do this

View and change the system time and date. View identification information about the computer. View specification information, such as processor information, memory size, and system BIOS. To do this Enter, change, or delete an administrator password. Enter, change, or delete a power-on password. Select Language Support To do this Change the Setup Utility language. Virtualization Technology (select models only) Enable/disable the processor Virtualization Technology. Fan Always On Enabled/disable Fan Always On. When enabled, the computer fan will always be on. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Setup Utility Menus 79 Select Action Keys Mode Boot Options To do this Enable/disable the Action Keys. Set the following boot options:

POST Hot Key Delay (sec.)Set the delay for the user to press hot keys in intervals of 5 seconds each (0, 5, 10, 15, 20). Floppy BootEnable/disable boot from diskette. Network Adapter BootEnable/disable boot from external Network Adapter. Boot OrderSet the boot order for:

Notebook Hard Drive USB Diskette on Key/USB Hard Drive USB CD/DVD ROM Drive USB Floppy Network adapter Diagnostics menu Select To do this Primary Hard Disk Self Test Run a comprehensive self-test on the hard drive. Memory Test Run a diagnostic test on the system memory. Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS may be available on the HP Web site. Most BIOS updates on the HP Web site are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Updating the BIOS Determining the BIOS version To determine whether available BIOS updates contain later BIOS versions than those currently installed on the computer, you need to know the version of the system BIOS currently installed. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be displayed by pressing fn+esc (if you are already in Windows) or by opening Setup Utility. 80 Chapter 14 Setup Utility (BIOS) Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

To use Setup Utility for displaying BIOS information:

1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer. While the Press the ESC key for 2. 3. Startup Menu message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen, press f10. If Setup Utility does not open with the system information displayed, use the arrow keys to select the Main menu. When the Main menu is selected, BIOS and other system information is displayed. To exit Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To prevent damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep or Hibernation. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. To download a BIOS update:

1. Access the page on the HP Web site that provides software for your computer:

Select Start > Help and Support > Maintain. Follow the instructions on the screen to identify your computer and access the BIOS update you want to download. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. Identify the BIOS update that is later than the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. Follow the instructions on the screen to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update will be downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before NOTE:

installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. 2. 3. b. BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are displayed, follow these steps:

1. Open Windows Explorer by selecting Start > Computer. 2. Double-click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Updating the BIOS 81 The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the instructions on the screen. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. 82 Chapter 14 Setup Utility (BIOS) Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

A Product information Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. Input power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A - 65W 3.5 A NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. NOTE: The computer operating voltage and current can be found on the system regulatory label on the bottom of the computer. Operating environment Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C Nonoperating

-20C to 60C Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) 41F to 95F

-4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Operating Nonoperating

-15 m to 3,048 m

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 40,000 ft Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Input power 83 Traveling with the computer For best results, follow these traveling and shipping tips:

Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Back up your information. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as digital cards. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, remove the media from a drive before removing the drive from a drive bay, and before shipping, storing, or traveling with a drive. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Shut down the computer.

Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer.

When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage, and do not check it in with the rest of your bags. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. The airport security devices that check carry-on luggage, such as conveyor belts, use X-rays instead of magnetism and will not damage a drive. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, check with the airline in advance. If the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. If the computer has a wireless device or a cell phone device installed, such as an 802.11b/g device, a Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) device, or a General Packet Radio Service

(GPRS) device, the use of these devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply onboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a particular device, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Routine care Cleaning the display CAUTION: To prevent permanent damage to the computer, never spray water, cleaning fluids, or chemicals on the display. 84 Appendix A Product information Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

To remove smudges and lint, frequently clean the display with a soft, damp, lint-free cloth. If the screen requires additional cleaning, use premoistened antistatic wipes or an antistatic screen cleaner. Cleaning the TouchPad and keyboard Dirt and grease on the TouchPad can cause the pointer to jump around on the screen. To avoid this, clean the TouchPad with a damp cloth, and wash your hands frequently when using the computer. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer:

Service tagProvides important information, including the following:

Product name (1). This is the product name affixed to the front of the computer. Serial number (s/n) (2). This is an alphanumeric identifier that is unique to each product. Part number/Product number (p/n) (3). This number provides specific information about the product's hardware components. The part number helps a service technician to determine what components and parts are needed. Model description (4). This is an alphanumeric identifier used to locate documents, drivers, and support for the computer.

Warranty period (5). This number describes the duration of the warranty period for the computer. Have this information available when you contact technical support. The service tag label is located inside the battery bay.

Microsoft Certificate of AuthenticityContains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. The Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity is located on the bottom of the computer. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer. The regulatory label is located on the bottom of the computer.

Wireless certification label(s)Provide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device or an optional Bluetooth device. If your computer model includes one or more wireless devices, one or more Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Labels 85 certification labels are included with your computer. You may need this information when traveling internationally. Wireless certification labels are affixed to the bottom of the computer. SIM label (select models only)Provides the ICCID (Integrated Circuit Card Identifier) of your SIM. This label is located inside the battery bay. HP Mobile Broadband Module serial number label (select models only)Provides the serial number of your HP Mobile Broadband Module. This label is located inside the battery bay.

86 Appendix A Product information Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

B Troubleshooting If you experience computer problems, perform these troubleshooting steps in the sequence provided until the problem is resolved:

1. Refer to Quick troubleshooting, the next section in this appendix. 2. Access Web site links and additional information about the computer through Help and Support. Click Start, and then click Help and Support. 3. Contact customer support. Refer to Contacting customer support, later in this appendix. Quick troubleshooting The computer is unable to start up If the computer does not turn on when you slide the power switch, the following suggestions may help you resolve the problem:

If the computer is plugged into an AC outlet, unplug the computer, and then plug another electrical device into the outlet to be sure that the outlet is providing adequate power. NOTE: Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved by HP for this computer. If the computer is running on battery power, or if it is plugged into an external power source other than an AC outlet, plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. Be sure that the power cord and AC adapter connections are secure. The TouchPad is behaving erratically If the TouchPad is behaving erratically, follow these guidelines:

Be sure that TouchPad is on. If the TouchPad light is amber, lightly press and hold the TouchPad on/off button for 2 seconds to turn on the TouchPad. If the TouchPad light is off, the TouchPad is on. Follow these guidelines when using the TouchPad:

Use one finger to navigate, click, or turn on/turn off the TouchPad. Use 2 fingers to control TouchPad gestures, such as scrolling, pinching/zooming, and rotating.

NOTE: To turn the TouchPad gestures off or explore other TouchPad features, click the Synaptics icon in the notification area at the far right of the taskbar, click the Device Settings tab, and then click Settings. The computer screen is blank If the screen is blank, but the computer is on and the power light is on, the computer may not be set to display the image on the computer screen. To transfer the image to the computer screen, press the switch screen image key. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Quick troubleshooting 87 Software is functioning abnormally If the software is unresponsive or responds abnormally, follow these suggestions:

Restart the computer by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to Shut down, and then clicking Restart. If you cannot restart the computer using this procedure, refer to the next section, The computer is on but is not responding. Run a virus scan. For information about using the antivirus resources on the computer, refer to the antivirus software Help for more details. The computer is on but is not responding If the computer is on but is not responding to software or keyboard commands, try the following emergency shutdown procedures, in the sequence provided, until shutdown occurs:

CAUTION: Emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information.

Slide and hold the power switch on the computer for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. The computer is unusually warm It is normal for the computer to feel warm to the touch while it is in use. But if the computer feels unusually warm, it may be overheating because a vent is blocked. If you suspect that the computer is overheating, turn off the computer to allow the computer to cool to room temperature. Then be sure to keep all vents free from obstructions while you are using the computer. WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). NOTE: The fan in the computer starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Checking your audio functions To check the system sound on your computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Control Panel. 2. Click Hardware and Sound. 3. Click Sound. 4. When the Sound window opens, click the Sounds tab. Under Program Events, select any sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and click the Test button. You should hear sound through the speakers or through connected headphones. 88 Appendix B Troubleshooting Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Sound Recorder. To check the record functions of the computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. Click Start Recording and speak into the microphone. Save the file to your desktop. 3. Open Windows Media Player or MediaSmart and play back the sound. NOTE: For best results when recording, speak directly into the microphone and record sound in a setting free of background noise. To confirm or change the audio settings on your computer, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Sound. An external device is not working Follow these suggestions if an external device does not function as expected:

Turn on the device according to the manufacturers instructions. Be sure that all device connections are secure. Be sure that the device is receiving electrical power. Be sure that the device, especially if it is older, is compatible with the operating system. Be sure that the correct drivers are installed and updated. The wireless network connection is not working

If a wireless network connection is not working as expected, follow these suggestions:

Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing. Be sure that the wireless device is turned on (wireless light is off). If the light is amber, press the wireless key to turn on the wireless device. Be sure that the computer wireless antennas are free from obstructions. Be sure that the cable or DSL modem and its power cord are properly connected and that the lights are on. Be sure that the wireless router or access point is properly connected to its power adapter and the cable or DSL modem, and that the lights are on. Turn the wireless device off and then on again to resynchronize the device. Disconnect and then reconnect all cables, and turn the power off and then back on.

NOTE: For more information on wireless technology, refer to the relevant help topics and Web site links in Help and Support. NOTE: For information on activating mobile broadband service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer.

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Quick troubleshooting 89 Cannot connect to a preferred network Windows can automatically repair a corrupted WLAN connection:

If there is a network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, right-click the icon, and then click Diagnose and repair from the menu. Windows resets your network device and attempts to reconnect to one of the preferred networks. If there is no network icon in the notification area, follow these steps:

1. 2. Click Troubleshoot problems and select the network you wish to repair. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. Network icon for WLAN is not displayed If the network icon is not displayed in the notification area after you configure the WLAN, the software driver is either missing or corrupted. A Windows Device not Found error message may also be displayed. The driver must be reinstalled. Get the latest version of the WLAN device software and drivers for your computer from the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com:

1. Open your Internet browser and go to http://www.hp.com/support. 2. 3. Click the option for software and driver downloads, and then type your computer model number in Select your country or region. the search box. Press enter, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 4. Current WLAN network security codes are unavailable If you are prompted for a network key or a name (SSID) when connecting to a WLAN, the network is protected by security. You must have the current codes to make a connection on a secure network. The SSID and network key are alphanumeric codes that you enter into your computer to identify your computer to the network.

For a network connected to your personal wireless router, review the router user guide for instructions on setting up the same codes on both the router and the WLAN device. For a private network, such as a network in an office or at a public Internet chat room, contact the network administrator to obtain the codes, and then enter the codes when prompted to do so. Some networks change the SSID or network keys used in their routers or access points on a regular basis to improve security. You must change the corresponding code in your computer accordingly. If you are provided with new wireless network keys and SSID for a network, and if you have previously connected to that network, follow the steps below to connect to the network:

1. 2. Click Manage wireless networks in the left panel. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 3. A list showing the available WLANs is displayed. If you are in a hotspot where several WLANs are active, several will be displayed. Select the network in the list, right-click the network, and then click Properties. NOTE:

the router or access point is operating. If the network you want is not listed, check with the network administrator to be sure that 90 Appendix B Troubleshooting Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

4. Click the Security tab and enter the correct wireless encryption data into the Network security key box. 5. Click OK to save these settings. WLAN connection is very weak If the connection is very weak, or if your computer cannot make a connection to a WLAN, minimize interference from other devices, as follows:

Move your computer closer to the wireless router or access point.

Temporarily disconnect devices such as a microwave, cordless phone, or cellular phone to be sure that other wireless devices are not interfering. If the connection does not improve, try forcing the device to reestablish all connection values:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 2. Click Manage wireless networks in the left pane. A list showing the available WLANs is displayed. If you are in a hotspot where several WLANs are active, several will be displayed. 3. Click a network, and then click Remove. Cannot connect to the wireless router If you are trying to connect to the wireless router and are unsuccessful, reset the wireless router by removing power from the router for 10 to 15 seconds. If the computer still cannot make a connection to a WLAN, restart the wireless router. For details, refer to the router manufacturer's instructions. Contacting customer support If the information provided in this guide or Help and Support does not address your questions, you can contact HP Customer Support at http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. Here you can:

Chat online with an HP technician. NOTE: When technical support chat is not available in a particular language, it is available in English. E-mail HP Customer Support. Find HP Customer Support worldwide telephone numbers. Locate an HP service center. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Contacting customer support 91 Index A AC adapter testing 51 AC power, connecting 50 action key mode 80 action keys adjusting volume 33 audio CD, DVD, or BD controls 33 decrease screen brightness 33 Help and Support 32 identifying 10 increase screen brightness 33 muting speaker sound 33 switching screen image 33 using 32 volume 37 wireless 17, 33 administrator password creating 68 entering 68 managing 68 airport security devices 55 antivirus software, using 69 audio devices, connecting external 38 audio functions, checking 88 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 12 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 12 B backing up customized window, toolbar, and menu bar settings 74 personal files 74 templates 74 battery calibrating 49 charging 47 conserving power 44 discharging 48 disposing 50 inserting 46 low battery levels 48 removing 46 replacing 50 storing 49 battery bay 85 battery bay, identifying 14 Battery Check 46 battery light 12, 47 battery power 45 battery release latch 14, 46 battery temperature 49 bays battery 85 BD drive 60 BIOS, updating 80 Bluetooth device 16 Bluetooth label 86 Bluetooth wireless devices 24 boot options 80 boot order 80 buttons left TouchPad 8 right TouchPad 8 rotate 11 TouchPad on/off 8 wireless 11 C cables USB 54 calibrating battery 49 caps lock light, identifying 9 CD drive 60 Certificate of Authenticity label 85 charging batteries 47 checking audio functions 88 cleaning, TouchPad and keyboard 85 clicks changing settings 32 testing 32 components bottom 14 display 13 front 10 left-side 12 right-side 11 top 8 computer traveling 84 configuring HDMI 41 Connect to the Internet Wizard 15, 16 connection, external power 51 connector, power 12 conservation, power 44 convertible hinge, identifying 13 critical battery level 42, 48 critical security updates, installing 70 customer support, contacting 91 D default settings, restoring 78 Diagnostics menu 80 digital card inserting 52 removing 53 supported formats 52 Digital Media Slot, identifying 12 Disk Cleanup software 56 Disk Defragmenter software 55 diskette drive 60 display cleaning 84 display image, switching 33 drive light 56 drive light, identifying 9 drive media 43 drives boot order 80 connecting external 60 diskette 60 external 60 handling 55 92 Index Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

hard 58, 59, 60 optical 60 DVD drive 60 E encryption 21 End hotkey 34 entering a power-on password 69 entering an administrator password 68 esc key, identifying 10 external audio devices, connecting 38 external drive 60 external monitor port 40 external optical drive 37 external WWAN antenna, identifying 10 F f11 76 fan always on 79 fingerprint reader identifying 11 fingerprints, registering 71 firewall software 21, 69 flicks changing assignments 32 creating assignments 32 fn key, identifying 10, 33 full system recovery 73 H hard disk drive external 60 installing 59 removing 58 hard drive external 60 HP ProtectSmart Hard Drive Protection 56 installing 59 removing 58 hard drive bay, identifying 14 HDMI configuring 41 connecting 40 HDMI port, identifying 12, 40 headphone (audio-out) jack 12 Help and Support key 32 Hibernation exiting 43 initiated during critical battery level 48 initiating 43 high-definition devices, connecting 40 hinge, identifying 13 Home hotkey 34 hotkeys description 33 display system information 34 End 34 Home 34 page down 34 page up 34 using 34 HP Mobile Broadband Module 22 HP ProtectSmart Hard Drive Protection 56 HP USB Ethernet Adapter connecting 25 hubs 53 I icons network 16, 90 wireless 16 input power 83 Instant Web disabling 7 enabling 7 starting 6 using 6 instant Web starting Windows 6 integrated webcam light, identifying 13 interference, minimizing 91 internal microphones, identifying 13 Internet choosing an ISP 15 Internet connection setup 19 Internet Service & Offers 15 Internet Service Provider

(ISP) 15 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 12 audio-out (headphone) 12 K keyboard hotkeys, identifying 33 keyboard, cleaning 85 keys action 10 esc 10 fn 10 mute 37 Windows application 10 Windows logo 10 L labels Bluetooth 86 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 85 regulatory 85 service tag 85 wireless certification 86 WLAN 86 language support 79 latch, battery release 14 lights battery 12 caps lock 9 drive 9, 56 mute 9 power 11 TouchPad 9 webcam 13 wireless 9, 11 local area network (LAN) cable required 25 connecting cable 25 low battery level 48 M Main menu 79 maintenance Disk Cleanup 56 Disk Defragmenter 55 managing a power-on password 69 managing an administrator password 68 media activity keys 35 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index 93 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity setting preferences 26 30 media controls, keys 33 MediaSmart using 36 MediaSmart software 36 memory module inserting 64 removing 64 memory module compartment cover removing 63 replacing 65 memory module compartment, identifying 14 memory test 80 microphone (audio-in) jack, identifying 12 label 85 minimizing interference 91 monitor, connecting 40 mouse, external setting preferences 26 multimedia software installing 37 using 36 mute key identifying 33 using 37 mute light, identifying 9 N network cable, connecting 25 network icon 16, 90 network key 90 network security codes network key 90 SSID 90 O operating environment 83 operating system Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 85 Product Key 85 optical drive external 37 sharing 37, 61 P page down hotkey 34 94 Index page up hotkey 34 passwords administrator 68 power-on 68 set in Setup Utility 67 set in Windows 67 pen identifying 28 storing 28 using 28 pen holder 28 pen holder, identifying 13 pen tether eyelet 28 pinching TouchPad gesture 27, pointing devices 31 ports external monitor 40 HDMI 12, 40 USB 12, 53 power connecting 51 conserving 44 power connector, identifying 12 power light, identifying 11 power switch, identifying 11 power-on password creating 69 entering 69 managing 69 primary hard disk self test 80 Product Key 85 product name and number, computer 85 programs, using 36 projector, connecting 40 Q quick troubleshooting 87 R readable media 43 recovering a program or driver 73 recovering from the dedicated recovery partition 76 recovering from the recovery recovery discs 73 recovery discs, creating 4 Recovery Manager 73, 76 recovery partition 73 recovery, system 76 regulatory information regulatory label 85 wireless certification labels 86 restore points 75 rotate button, identifying 11 rotating TouchPad gesture 27, 30 routine care 84 S screen brightness keys 33 screen image, switching 33 scrolling TouchPad gesture 26, security cable slot, identifying 13 security cable, installing 70 Security menu 79 security, wireless 21 serial number, computer 85 service tag 85 setup of WLAN 19 Setup Utility changing the language 77 displaying system information 78 exiting 79 menus 79 navigating 78 passwords set in 67 restoring default settings 78 selecting 78 starting 77 shared drives 61 shutdown 42 SIM inserting 22 removing 23 Sleep exiting 43 initiating 43 slots Digital Media 12 memory 63 security cable 13 software Disk Cleanup 56 Disk Defragmenter 55 optical drive, external 60 discs 76 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

wireless network (WLAN) equipment needed 19 security 21 WLAN antennas, identifying 13 WLAN device 86 WLAN label 86 writable media 43 WWAN antennas, identifying 13 WWAN device 21 Z zooming TouchPad gesture 27, 31 U unresponsive system 42 USB cable, connecting 54 USB devices connecting 53 description 53 removing 54 USB hubs 53 USB port, identifying 12 USB ports, identifying 12, 53 using system restore 75 V vents, identifying 10, 12, 14 Virtualization Technology 79 volume adjust 37 keys 37 mute 37 volume keys, identifying 33 MediaSmart 36 TouchSmart 36 using 36 Wireless Assistant 18 solid-state drive (SSD) 73, 76 speakers, identifying 13 storing battery 49 supported discs 73 switch power 11 System Configuration menu 79 system failure or instability 73 system information hotkey 34 system information, displaying 78, 79 system recovery 76 system restore points 73, 75 T temperature 49 touch screen TouchPad buttons 8 cleaning 85 gestures 26 identifying 8 using 26 TouchPad gestures pinching 27, 31 rotating 27, 30 scrolling 26, 30 zooming 27, 31 TouchPad light, identifying 9 TouchPad on/off button 8 TouchSmart starting 36 using 36 TouchSmart software 36 traveling with the computer 49, 84, 86 troubleshooting performing screen actions 29 preferences 32 using 29 W webcam adjusting properties 39 identifying 13 webcam light, identifying 13 Windows application key, identifying 10 Windows Connect to the Internet Wizard 16 Windows logo key, identifying 10 Windows, passwords set in 67 wireless protecting 21 set up 19 wireless antennas, identifying 13 Wireless Assistant software 16, 18 wireless button, identifying 11 wireless certification label 86 wireless controls key 16 operating system 16 Wireless Assistant computer is unable to start up 87 computer screen is blank 87 TouchPad 87 turning off the computer 42 software 16 wireless icon 16 wireless key identifying 33 using 16, 17 wireless light 9, 11, 16 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index 95 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

 

 

HP EliteBook 2740p User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. Copyright 2010 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries or regions. Java is a U.S. trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: February 2010 Document Part Number: 599104-001 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

iii iv Safety warning notice Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents 1 Features Identifying hardware ............................................................................................................................. 1 Top components .................................................................................................................. 1 Pointing devices .................................................................................................. 1 Lights ................................................................................................................... 3 Buttons and switches .......................................................................................... 4 Keys .................................................................................................................... 5 Front components ................................................................................................................ 6 Right-side components ........................................................................................................ 7 Left-side components .......................................................................................................... 8 Rear components ................................................................................................................ 9 Bottom components ........................................................................................................... 10 Display ............................................................................................................................... 11 Wireless antennas (select models only) ............................................................................ 12 Additional hardware components ...................................................................................... 13 Identifying the labels ........................................................................................................................... 14 2 Using the tablet Tablet display components ................................................................................................................. 15 Rotating the display ............................................................................................................................ 16 Tablet mode ....................................................................................................................... 16 Notebook mode ................................................................................................................ 18 3 Wireless, modem, and local area network Using wireless devices (select models only) ...................................................................................... 20 Identifying wireless and network icons .............................................................................. 21 Using the wireless controls ................................................................................................ 21 Using the wireless button ................................................................................................... 21 Using Wireless Assistant software (select models only) .................................................... 22 Using HP Connection Manager (select models only) ........................................................ 22 Using operating system controls ........................................................................................ 23 Using a WLAN .................................................................................................................................... 24 Setting up a WLAN ............................................................................................................ 24 Protecting your WLAN ....................................................................................................... 24 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

v Connecting to a WLAN ...................................................................................................... 25 Roaming to another network .............................................................................................. 26 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) ............................................................................. 27 Inserting a SIM ................................................................................................................... 27 Removing a SIM ................................................................................................................ 28 Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select models only) ...................................................................... 30 Bluetooth and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) ............................................................. 30 Troubleshooting wireless connection problems ................................................................................. 31 Cannot create a WLAN connection ................................................................................... 31 Cannot connect to a preferred network ............................................................................. 32 Network icon is not displayed ............................................................................................ 32 Current network security codes are unavailable ................................................................ 32 WLAN connection is very weak ......................................................................................... 33 Cannot connect to the wireless router ............................................................................... 33 Using the modem (select models only) .............................................................................................. 34 Connecting a modem cable ............................................................................................... 34 Connecting a country-specific modem cable adapter ........................................................ 34 Selecting a location setting ................................................................................................ 35 Viewing the current location selection ............................................................... 35 Adding new locations when traveling ................................................................ 36 Solving travel connection problems .................................................................. 37 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) .......................................................................................... 39 4 Pointing devices and keyboard Using pointing devices ....................................................................................................................... 40 Setting pointing device preferences ................................................................................... 40 Using the TouchPad .......................................................................................................... 40 Using the pointing stick ...................................................................................................... 40 Connecting an external mouse .......................................................................................... 40 Using the keyboard ............................................................................................................................ 40 Using the keyboard light .................................................................................................... 40 Using hotkeys .................................................................................................................... 42 Displaying system information .......................................................................... 42 Initiating Sleep ................................................................................................... 43 Switching the screen image .............................................................................. 43 Viewing battery charge information ................................................................... 44 Enabling/disabling the TouchPad (fn+f5) .......................................................... 44 Decreasing screen brightness ........................................................................... 44 Increasing screen brightness ............................................................................ 44 Activating the ambient light sensor .................................................................. 44 Using QuickLook (select models only) ............................................................................................... 45 Installing QuickLook ........................................................................................................... 45 Using HP Quick Launch Buttons ........................................................................................................ 46 vi Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Opening the Quick Launch Buttons control panel .............................................................................. 47 Using HP QuickLook 3 ....................................................................................................................... 48 Using the pen ..................................................................................................................................... 48 Identifying the pen components ......................................................................................... 48 Holding the pen .................................................................................................................. 48 Performing mouse clicks with the pen ............................................................................... 49 Performing other procedures with the pen ......................................................................... 49 Pressure sensitivity ............................................................................................................ 49 Calibrating the pen ............................................................................................................. 50 Using the pen holder .......................................................................................................... 50 Setting pen preferences ..................................................................................................... 51 Using the embedded numeric keypad ................................................................................................ 51 Using the embedded numeric keypad ............................................................................... 51 Enabling and disabling the embedded numeric keypad .................................... 51 Switching key functions on the embedded numeric keypad ............................. 51 Cleaning the TouchPad and keyboard ............................................................................................... 52 5 Multimedia Multimedia features ............................................................................................................................ 53 Adjusting the volume ......................................................................................................... 53 Multimedia software ........................................................................................................................... 54 Accessing your preinstalled multimedia software .............................................................. 55 Installing your preloaded multimedia software ................................................................... 55 Installing multimedia software from a disc ......................................................................... 55 Audio .................................................................................................................................................. 56 Connecting external audio devices .................................................................................... 56 Checking your audio functions ........................................................................................... 56 Video .................................................................................................................................................. 58 Connecting an external monitor or projector ...................................................................... 58 Using the external monitor port ......................................................................... 58 Using the DreamColor display (select models only) ......................................... 58 Webcam ............................................................................................................................................. 59 Webcam tips ...................................................................................................................... 59 Adjusting webcam properties ............................................................................................. 59 Capturing business card images ....................................................................................... 60 6 Power management Setting power options ......................................................................................................................... 62 Using power-saving states ................................................................................................. 62 Initiating and exiting Sleep ................................................................................ 62 Initiating and exiting Hibernation ....................................................................... 63 Using the battery meter ..................................................................................................... 63 Using power plans ............................................................................................................. 63 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

vii Viewing the current power plan ......................................................................... 64 Selecting a different power plan ........................................................................ 64 Customizing power plans .................................................................................. 64 Setting password protection on wakeup ............................................................................ 64 Using external AC power .................................................................................................................... 65 Connecting the AC adapter ............................................................................................... 65 Using battery power ........................................................................................................................... 66 Finding battery information in Help and Support ............................................................... 66 Using Battery Check .......................................................................................................... 67 Displaying the remaining battery charge ........................................................................... 67 Inserting or removing the battery ....................................................................................... 67 Charging a battery ............................................................................................................. 68 Maximizing battery discharge time .................................................................................... 69 Managing low battery levels .............................................................................................. 69 Identifying low battery levels ............................................................................. 69 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................. 71 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ....... 71 Resolving a low battery level when a charged battery is available ........................................................................................... 71 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ........................................................................................... 71 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ....................................................................................... 71 Calibrating a battery ........................................................................................................... 71 Step 1: Fully charge the battery ........................................................................ 71 Step 2: Disable Hibernation and Sleep ............................................................. 72 Step 3: Discharge the battery ............................................................................ 72 Step 4: Fully recharge the battery ..................................................................... 73 Step 5: Reenable Hibernation and Sleep .......................................................... 73 Conserving battery power .................................................................................................. 73 Storing a battery ................................................................................................................ 74 Disposing of a used battery ............................................................................................... 74 Replacing the battery ........................................................................................................ 74 Testing an AC adapter ....................................................................................................................... 75 Shutting down the computer ............................................................................................................... 75 Identifying installed drives .................................................................................................................. 77 Handling drives ................................................................................................................................... 78 Improving hard drive performance ..................................................................................................... 79 Using Disk Defragmenter ................................................................................................... 79 Using Disk Cleanup ........................................................................................................... 79 Using HP 3D DriveGuard .................................................................................................................. 80 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status ................................................................................. 80 7 Drives viii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using HP 3D DriveGuard software .................................................................................... 81 Replacing the hard drive in the hard drive bay ................................................................................... 82 8 External devices Using a USB device ........................................................................................................................... 86 Connecting a USB device .................................................................................................. 86 Stopping and removing a USB device ............................................................................... 86 Using USB legacy support ................................................................................................. 87 Using a 1394 device ........................................................................................................................... 88 Connecting a 1394 device ................................................................................................. 88 Stopping and removing a 1394 device .............................................................................. 88 Using external drives .......................................................................................................................... 89 Using optional external devices ......................................................................................... 89 Using the docking connector .............................................................................................................. 90 9 External media cards Using Media Card Reader cards ........................................................................................................ 91 Inserting a digital card ........................................................................................................ 91 Stopping and removing a digital card ................................................................................ 92 Using ExpressCards (select models only) .......................................................................................... 93 Configuring an ExpressCard .............................................................................................. 93 Inserting an ExpressCard .................................................................................................. 93 Stopping and removing an ExpressCard ........................................................................... 94 Using Smart Cards (select models only) ............................................................................................ 96 Inserting a smart card ........................................................................................................ 96 Removing a smart card ...................................................................................................... 96 10 Memory modules Adding or replacing a memory module .............................................................................................. 98 11 Security Protecting the computer ................................................................................................................... 101 Using passwords .............................................................................................................................. 102 Setting passwords in Windows ........................................................................................ 102 Setting passwords in Computer Setup ............................................................................ 102 BIOS administrator password .......................................................................................... 103 Managing a BIOS administrator password ...................................................... 104 Entering a BIOS administrator password ........................................................ 105 Using Computer Setup DriveLock ................................................................................... 105 Setting a DriveLock password ......................................................................... 106 Entering a DriveLock password ...................................................................... 106 Changing a DriveLock password .................................................................... 106 Removing DriveLock protection ...................................................................... 107 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ix Using Computer Setup Auto DriveLock ........................................................................... 107 Entering an Automatic DriveLock password ................................................... 108 Removing Automatic DriveLock protection ..................................................... 108 Using Computer Setup security features .......................................................................................... 109 Securing system devices ................................................................................................. 109 Viewing Computer Setup System Information ................................................................. 109 Using Computer Setup System IDs ................................................................................. 110 Using antivirus software ................................................................................................................... 111 Using firewall software ..................................................................................................................... 112 Installing critical updates .................................................................................................................. 113 Using HP ProtectTools Security Manager (select models only) ....................................................... 114 Installing a security cable ................................................................................................................. 115 12 Software updates Updating software ............................................................................................................................ 116 Updating the BIOS ........................................................................................................................... 118 Determining the BIOS version ......................................................................................... 118 Downloading a BIOS update ........................................................................................... 119 Updating programs and drivers ........................................................................................................ 121 Using SoftPaq Download Manager .................................................................................................. 122 13 Backup and recovery Backing up your information ............................................................................................................. 124 Performing a recovery ...................................................................................................................... 126 Using the Windows recovery tools ................................................................................... 126 Using f11 .......................................................................................................................... 127 Using a Windows 7 operating system DVD (purchased separately) .............................. 127 14 Computer Setup Starting Computer Setup .................................................................................................................. 129 Using Computer Setup ..................................................................................................................... 129 Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup ................................................................... 129 Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup ................................................................. 130 Computer Setup menus ................................................................................................................... 130 File menu ......................................................................................................................... 131 Security menu .................................................................................................................. 131 Diagnostics menu ............................................................................................................ 132 System Configuration menu ............................................................................................ 133 15 MultiBoot About the boot device order ............................................................................................................. 136 Enabling boot devices in Computer Setup ....................................................................................... 138 Considering boot order changes ...................................................................................................... 139 x Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Choosing MultiBoot preferences ...................................................................................................... 140 Setting a new boot order in Computer Setup ................................................................... 140 Dynamically choosing a boot device using the F9 prompt ............................................... 140 Setting a MultiBoot Express prompt ................................................................................ 141 Entering MultiBoot Express preferences ......................................................................... 141 16 Management and printing Using Client Management Solutions ................................................................................................ 142 Configuring and deploying a software image ................................................................... 142 Managing and updating software ..................................................................................... 143 HP Client Manager for Altiris (select models only) .......................................... 143 HP CCM (Client Configuration Manager) (select models only) ....................... 144 HP SSM (System Software Manager) ............................................................. 144 Using Intel Active Management Technology (select models only) ................................................... 146 Enabling the iAMT solution .............................................................................................. 146 Using the MEBx setup utility menus ................................................................................ 146 Using the HP Universal Print Driver (select models only) ................................................................ 148 Index ................................................................................................................................................................. 149 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

xi xii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 Features Identifying hardware To see a list of hardware installed in the computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing applications, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Windows Help for more information. Top components Pointing devices Component

(1) TouchPad light Description

Off: TouchPad is enabled. Amber: TouchPad is disabled.

(2) TouchPad on/off control Enables/disables the TouchPad when pressed in combination with the fn key. Identifying hardware 1 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Component Description

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) Pointing stick*

fn key Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Enables/disables the TouchPad when pressed in combination with the f5 key. Left pointing stick button*

Functions like the left button on an external mouse. TouchPad*

Left TouchPad button*

Right TouchPad button*

TouchPad scroll zone*

Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Scrolls up or down.

(10) Right pointing stick button*

Functions like the right button on an external mouse.

*This table describes factory settings. To view or change pointing device preferences, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Mouse. 2 Chapter 1 Features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Lights Component

(1) Power light

(2) Battery light

(3) Drive light

(4)

(5) Caps lock light TouchPad light

(6) Volume mute light

(7) Volume down light Description

On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Amber: A battery is charging. Turquoise: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking turquoise: The hard drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the internal hard drive. On: Caps lock is on.

Off: TouchPad is enabled. Amber: TouchPad is disabled. Turquoise: Computer sound is on. Amber: Computer sound is off. Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to decrease speaker volume. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying hardware 3 Component

(8)

(9) Volume up light Num lock light Buttons and switches Description Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to increase speaker volume. On: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Internal display switch Volume mute button Volume down button Volume up button Description Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. Mutes and restores speaker sound. Decreases computer volume. Increases computer volume. 4 Chapter 1 Features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Keys Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key or the esc key. Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Embedded numeric keypad keys Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. Function keys Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying hardware 5 Front components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Webcam light On: The webcam is in use. External WWAN antenna button Opens the external WWAN antenna. External WWAN antenna Power switch Sends and receives wireless signals to communicate with WWANs.

When the computer is off, slide the switch to the right to turn on the computer.

When the computer is on, slide the switch to the right to shut down the computer.

When the computer is in the Sleep state, slide the switch to the right briefly to exit Sleep.

When the computer is in Hibernation, slide the switch to the right briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, slide the switch to the right and hold for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options.

(5) Vents (2) Enable airflow to cool internal components.

(6)

(7)

(8) Business card slot Display release latch Bluetooth compartment NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Holds a business card in position so that the webcam can capture an image. Opens the computer. Contains an optional Bluetooth device. 6 Chapter 1 Features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Right-side components Component Description HP Fingerprint Sensor (fingerprint reader) Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows instead of a password logon.

(1)

(2) QuickWeb button

(3) QuickLook button

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8) Audio-out (headphone) jack/Audio-in

(microphone) jack Smart card reader USB ports (2) RJ-11 (modem) jack Security cable slot

When the computer is off, press the button to open HP QuickWeb.

When the computer is on, press the button to open the default Web browser.

When the computer is off, press the button to open HP QuickLook.

When the computer is on, press the button to open Software Setup. NOTE:

browser opens. If Software Setup is not available, the default Web Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, ear buds, a headset, or television audio. Also connects an optional headset microphone. NOTE: When a device is connected to the headphone jack, the computer speakers are disabled. Supports optional smart cards and Java Cards. Connect optional USB devices. Connects a modem cable. Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying hardware 7 Left-side components Component Description

(1) Media Card Reader Supports the following optional digital card formats:

Memory Stick

Memory Stick Duo (adapter required)

Memory Stick Pro (adapter required)

Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card

MultiMediaCard (MMC)

xD-Picture Card xD-Picture Card Type H xD-Picture Card Type M Stores the pen. Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Pen holder Vent ExpressCard slot (select models only) Supports optional ExpressCards.

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Wireless light

Blue: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Mobile Broadband Module, and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Amber: All wireless devices are off. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not create a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. Connects an optional IEEE 1394 or 1394a device, such as a camcorder. Provides power to a USB device, such as an optional external MultiBay, if used with a powered USB cable.

(6) Wireless switch

(7)

(8) 1394 port Powered USB port 8 Chapter 1 Features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Rear components Component

(1) Jog dial Description In tablet mode, functions like the enter key and the up and down arrows on a standard keyboard.

Press inward to enter a command. Rotate up to scroll up. Rotate down to scroll down.

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Esc button Rotate button In tablet mode, allows you to exit or escape out of an application. In tablet mode, switches the image between landscape and portrait orientation. Ctrl+alt+del button In tablet mode:

While Windows is running, press the button with the pen to enter the ctrl+alt+del command.*

While the Computer Setup utility is running, press the button with the pen to enter the reset command. The computer resets and all unsaved information is lost. The reset function can be used to restore functionality when the system has become unresponsive. Connects an AC adapter. Connects a network cable. Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. Power connector RJ-45 (network) jack External monitor port

*To protect your work and the system, the ctrl+alt+delete command cannot be entered using the ctrl, alt, and del keys on the on-screen keyboard. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying hardware 9 Bottom components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) Battery bay SIM slot Vents (5) Hard drive bay Docking connector Charge level indicator Battery release latch Holds the battery and subscriber identity module (SIM). Contains a wireless subscriber identity module (SIM) (select models only). The SIM slot is located inside the battery bay. Enable airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Holds the hard drive, memory module slots, WLAN module (select models only), and WWAN module (select models only). Connects an optional docking device. Displays the approximate remaining battery charge. Releases the battery from the battery bay. Accessory battery connector Connects an optional accessory battery. Accessory battery connector door Slides open to expose the accessory battery connector. 10 Chapter 1 Features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Display Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Webcam light (select models only) On: The webcam is in use. Webcam (select models only) Records audio and video and captures still photographs. Keyboard light button Opens and turns on the keyboard light. HP Fingerprint Sensor (fingerprint reader) Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows instead of a password logon. Internal microphones (2) Ambient light sensor Convertible hinge Record sound and transmit sound for video conferencing and Voice Over IP (VoIP). Automatically adjusts the display brightness based on the lighting conditions in your environment. Swivels the display and converts the computer from traditional notebook mode into tablet mode or vice versa. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying hardware 11 Wireless antennas (select models only) The antennas send and receive signals from one or more wireless devices. These antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) WWAN antenna (1)*

WLAN antennas (2)*

Sends and receives wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide area networks (WWANs). Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs). External WWAN antenna button**

Press to open the external WWAN antenna. External WWAN antenna**

Sends and receives wireless signals to communicate with WWANs.

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions.

**Before connecting to a WWAN, press the WWAN antenna button to open the external WWAN antenna to a vertical position. The external WWAN antenna allows you to connect to a WWAN, and then to the Internet, using the integrated HP Broadband Wireless Module and service from a supported Cellular network operator. Do not close the external WWAN antenna if you are connected to a WWAN. To see wireless regulatory notices, refer to the section of the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. These notices are located in Help and Support. 12 Chapter 1 Features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Additional hardware components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Power cord*

AC adapter Battery*

Modem cable (select models only)*

Country- or region-specific modem cable adapter

(select models only)*

Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Converts AC power to DC power. Powers the computer when the computer is not plugged into an external power source. Connects the internal modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a country- or region-specific modem cable adapter. Adapts the modem cable to a non-RJ-11 telephone jack.

*Modem cables, batteries, modem cable adapters, and power cords vary in appearance by country or region. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying hardware 13 Identifying the labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer:

Service tagProvides important information, including the following:

Product Name (1). This is the product name affixed to the front of your computer. Serial Number (s/n) (2). This is an alphanumeric identifier that is unique to each product. Part number/Product number (p/n) (3). This number provides specific information about the product's hardware components. The part number helps a service technician to determine what components and parts are needed. Model description (4). This is an alphanumeric identifier used to locate documents, drivers, and support for your computer.

Warranty period (5). This number describes the duration (in years) of the warranty period for this computer. Have this information available when you contact technical support. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the computer.

Microsoft Certificate of AuthenticityContains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the computer.

Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer. The regulatory label is affixed inside the battery bay.

Modem approval labelProvides regulatory information about the modem and lists the agency approval markings required by some of the countries in which the modem has been approved for use. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The modem approval label is affixed inside the memory module compartment.

Wireless certification label(s) (select models only)Provide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device or an optional Bluetooth device. If your computer model includes one or more wireless devices, one or more certification labels are included with your computer. You may need this information when traveling internationally. Wireless certification labels are affixed to the bottom of the computer.

SIM (subscriber identity module) label (select models only)Provides the ICCID (Integrated Circuit Card Identifier) of your SIM. This label is located inside the battery bay. HP Mobile Broadband Module serial number label (select models only)Provides the serial number of your HP Mobile Broadband Module. This label is located inside the battery bay. 14 Chapter 1 Features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

2 Using the tablet Tablet display components Component

(1) Ctrl+alt+del button*

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Rotate button Convertible hinge Esc button Jog dial*

Description

While Windows is running, press the button with the pen to enter the ctrl+alt+delete command.

While the Computer Setup utility is running, press the button with the pen to enter the reset command. The computer resets and all unsaved information is lost. The reset function can be used to restore functionality when the system has become unresponsive. Switches the image between landscape and portrait orientation. Swivels the display and converts the computer from traditional notebook mode into tablet mode or vice versa. Allows you to exit or escape out of a program. Functions like the enter key and the up and down arrow keys on a standard keyboard:

Press to enter a command. Rotate up to scroll up. Rotate down to scroll down. Tablet display components 15 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

(6) Pen holder Stores the pen.

*This table describes default settings. For information about changing the functions of the Ctrl+alt+del button and jog dial, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Tablet PC Settings. To protect your work and the system, the ctrl+alt+delete command cannot be entered using the ctrl, alt, and del keys on the on-screen keyboard. Rotating the display The computer display can rotate from traditional notebook mode to tablet mode. NOTE: When the computer is docked in either notebook mode or tablet mode, the display will not rotate. Tablet mode To change the computer from notebook mode to tablet mode:

1. Slide the display release latch to release the display (1), and then open the computer display (2). 16 Chapter 2 Using the tablet Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

2. Rotate the computer display clockwise until it snaps into place facing away from the keyboard. 3. Tilt the computer display downward onto the keyboard until it snaps into place. In tablet mode, the screen display automatically rotates from portrait to landscape as it is being turned. NOTE:

automatic rotation of the screen display. If antennae on the computer are held in close proximity to the body, the antennae may disable Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Rotating the display 17 Notebook mode To change the computer from tablet mode to notebook mode:

1. Slide the display release latch (1). 2. Open the computer display (2). 18 Chapter 2 Using the tablet Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

3. Rotate the computer display counterclockwise until it snaps into place facing the keyboard. NOTE: To prevent a lack of response when you turn on the computer, be sure that the battery is firmly seated. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Rotating the display 19 3 Wireless, modem, and local area network Using wireless devices (select models only) Wireless technology transfers data across radio waves instead of wires. Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

Wireless local area network (WLAN) deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, each mobile wireless device communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point.

HP Mobile Broadband ModuleA wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that provides access to information wherever mobile network operator service is available. In a WWAN, each mobile device communicates to a mobile network operators base station. Mobile network operators install networks of base stations (similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close together typically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. Computers with WLAN devices support one or more of the following IEEE industry standards:

802.11b, the first popular standard, supports data rates of up to 11 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. 802.11g supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. An 802.11g WLAN device is backward compatible with 802.11b devices, so they can operate on the same network. 802.11a supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 5 GHz. NOTE: 802.11a is not compatible with 802.11b and 802.11g. 802.11n supports data rates of up to 450 Mbps and may operate at 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz, making it backward compatible with 802.11a, b, and g. NOTE: The specifications for the 802.11n WLAN are draft specifications and are not final. If the final specifications differ from the draft specifications, it may affect the ability of the computer to communicate with other 802.11n WLAN devices. 20 Chapter 3 Wireless, modem, and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

For more information on wireless technology, refer to the information and Web site links provided in Help and Support. Identifying wireless and network icons Icon Name Description Wireless (connected) Identifies the location of the wireless lights and the wireless buttons on the computer. Also identifies the Wireless Assistant software on the computer and indicates that one or more of the wireless devices are on. Wireless

(disconnected) Identifies the Wireless Assistant software on the computer and indicates that all of the wireless devices are off. HP Connection Manager Opens HP Connection Manager, which enables you to create a connection with an HP Mobile Broadband device (select models only). Wired network

(connected) Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed and one or more network devices are connected to the network. Network (connected) Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed, one or more network devices are connected to a wireless network, and one or more network devices may be connected to a wired network. Network

(disconnected) Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed and wireless connections are available, but no network devices are connected to a wired or wireless network. Network (disabled/

disconnected) Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed, no wireless connections are available or all wireless network devices are disabled by the wireless button or Wireless Assistant, and no network devices are connected to a wired network. Wired network

(disabled/

disconnected) Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed, all network devices or all wireless devices are disabled in Windows Control Panel, and no network devices are connected to a wired network. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using these features:

Wireless button or wireless switch (referred to in this guide as the wireless button)

Wireless Assistant software (select models only)

HP Connection Manager software (select models only) Operating system controls Using the wireless button The computer has a wireless button, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights, depending on the model. All of the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory, so the wireless light is on (blue) when you turn on the computer. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using wireless devices (select models only) 21 The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. If the wireless light is blue, at least one wireless device is on. If the wireless light is off, all wireless devices are off. NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. Because the wireless devices are enabled at the factory, you can use the wireless button to turn on or turn off the wireless devices simultaneously. Individual wireless devices can be controlled through Wireless Assistant software (select models only) or through Computer Setup. NOTE:

you reenable your devices. If the wireless devices are disabled by Computer Setup, the wireless button will not work until Using Wireless Assistant software (select models only) A wireless device can be turned on or off using the Wireless Assistant software. If a wireless device is disabled by Computer Setup, it must be reenabled by Computer Setup before it can be turned on or off using Wireless Assistant. NOTE: Enabling or turning on a wireless device does not automatically connect the computer to a network or a Bluetooth-enabled device. To view the state of the wireless devices, click the Show hidden icons icon, the arrow at the left of the notification area, and position the cursor over the wireless icon. If the wireless icon is not displayed in the notification area, complete the following steps to change the Wireless Assistant properties:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Windows Mobility Center. 2. Click the wireless icon in the Wireless Assistant tile, which is located in the bottom row of Windows Mobility Center. 3. Click Properties. 4. Select the check box next to HP Wireless Assistant icon in notification area. 5. Click Apply. 6. Click Close. For more information, refer to the Wireless Assistant software Help:

1. Open Wireless Assistant by clicking the wireless icon in Windows Mobility Center. 2. Click the Help button. Using HP Connection Manager (select models only) You can use HP Connection Manager to connect to WWANs using the HP Mobile Broadband device in your computer (select models only). To start Connection Manager, click the Connection Manager icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. or Select Start > All Programs > HP Connection Manager > HP Connection Manager. 22 Chapter 3 Wireless, modem, and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

For more details about using Connection Manager, refer to the Connection Manager software Help. Using operating system controls Some operating systems also offer a way to manage integrated wireless devices and the wireless connection. For example, Windows provides the Network and Sharing Center that allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, manage wireless networks, and diagnose and repair network problems. To access the Network and Sharing Center, select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet >

Network and Sharing Center. For more information, refer to Windows Help and Support. Select Start > Help and Support. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using wireless devices (select models only) 23 Using a WLAN With a WLAN device, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other computers and accessories that are linked by a wireless router or a wireless access point. NOTE: The terms wireless router and wireless access point are often used interchangeably.

A large-scale WLAN, such as a corporate or public WLAN, typically uses wireless access points that can accommodate a large number of computers and accessories and can separate critical network functions. A home or small office WLAN typically uses a wireless router, which allows several wireless and wired computers to share an Internet connection, a printer, and files without requiring additional pieces of hardware or software. To use the WLAN device in your computer, you must connect to a WLAN infrastructure (provided through a service provider or a public or corporate network). Setting up a WLAN To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet, you need the following equipment:

A broadband modem (either DSL or cable) (1) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider (ISP) A wireless router (purchased separately) (2) The wireless computer (3)

The illustration below shows an example of a wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet. As your network grows, additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to the network to access the Internet. For help in setting up your WLAN, refer to the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. Protecting your WLAN Because the WLAN standard was designed with only limited security capabilitiesbasically to foil casual eavesdropping rather than more powerful forms of attackit is essential to understand that WLANs are vulnerable to well-known and well-documented security weaknesses. WLANs in public areas, or hotspots, like coffee shops and airports, may not provide any security. New technologies are being developed by wireless manufacturers and hotspot service providers that make the public environment more secure and anonymous. If you are concerned about the security of your computer in a hotspot, limit your network activities to noncritical e-mail and basic Internet surfing. 24 Chapter 3 Wireless, modem, and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. The common security levels are Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) and Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). Because wireless radio signals travel outside the network, other WLAN devices can pick up unprotected signals and either connect to your network (uninvited) or capture information being sent across it. However, you can take precautions to protect your WLAN:

Use a wireless transmitter with built-in security Many wireless base stations, gateways, and routers provide built-in security features such as wireless security protocols and firewalls. With the correct wireless transmitter, you can protect your network from the most common wireless security risks.

Work behind a firewall A firewall is a barrier that checks both data and requests for data that are sent to your network and then discards any suspicious items. Firewalls are available in many varieties, both software and hardware. Some networks use a combination of both types.

Use wireless encryption A variety of sophisticated encryption protocols is available for your WLAN. Find the solution that works best for your network security:

Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a wireless security protocol that uses a WEP key to encode or encrypt all network data before it is transmitted. Usually, you can allow the network to assign the WEP key. Alternatively, you can set up your own key, generate a different key, or choose other advanced options. Without the correct key, others will not be able to use the WLAN.

WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access), like WEP, uses security settings to encrypt and decrypt data that is transmitted over the network. However, instead of using one static security key for encryptions as WEP does, WPA uses temporal key integrity protocol (TKIP) to dynamically generate a new key for every packet. It also generates different sets of keys for each computer on the network. Connecting to a WLAN To connect to the WLAN, follow these steps:

1. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. If it is on, the wireless light is on. If the wireless light is off, press the wireless button. NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. 2. Click the network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 3. Select your WLAN from the list. 4. Click Connect. If the network is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a network security key, which is a security code. Type the code, and then click OK to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you are out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE:

If you do not see the network you want to connect to, click Open Network and Sharing Center, and then click Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed. You can choose to manually search for and connect to a network or to set up a new network connection. Using a WLAN 25 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

After the connection is made, place the mouse pointer over the network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. More information about using a WLAN is available through the following resources:

Information from your ISP and the manufacturer's instructions included with your wireless router and other WLAN equipment Information and Web site links provided in Help and Support

For a list of public WLANs near you, contact your ISP or search the Web. Web sites that list public WLANs include Cisco Internet Mobile Office Wireless Locations, Hotspotlist, and Geektools. Check with each public WLAN location for cost and connection requirements. For additional information on connecting your computer to a corporate WLAN, contact your network administrator or IT department. Roaming to another network When you move your computer within range of another WLAN, Windows attempts to connect to that network. If the attempt is successful, your computer is automatically connected to the new network. If Windows does not recognize the new network, follow the same procedure you used initially to connect to your WLAN. 26 Chapter 3 Wireless, modem, and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) HP Mobile Broadband enables your computer to use wireless wide area networks (WWANs) to access the Internet from more places and over larger areas than it can by using WLANs. Using HP Mobile Broadband requires a network service provider (called a mobile network operator), which in most cases is a mobile phone network operator. Coverage for HP Mobile Broadband is similar to mobile phone voice coverage. When used with mobile network operator service, HP Mobile Broadband gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road or outside the range of Wi-Fi hotspots. HP supports the following technologies:

HSPA (High Speed Packet Access), which provides access to networks based on the Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) telecommunications standard. EV-DO (Evolution Data Optimized), which provides access to networks based on the code division multiple access (CDMA) telecommunications standard. You may need the HP Mobile Broadband Module serial number to activate mobile broadband service. The serial number is printed on a label inside the battery bay of your computer. Some mobile network operators require the use of a subscriber identity module (SIM). A SIM contains basic information about you, such as a PIN, as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM that is preinstalled in the battery bay. If the SIM is not preinstalled, it may be provided in the HP Mobile Broadband information provided with your computer or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information on inserting and removing the SIM, refer to the Inserting a SIM and Removing a SIM sections in this chapter. For information on HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, refer to the mobile broadband information included with your computer. For additional information, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/mobilebroadband (US only). Inserting a SIM CAUTION: To prevent damage to the connectors, use minimal force when inserting a SIM. To insert a SIM:

1. Shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by sliding the power switch to the right. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. 2. Close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 6. Remove the battery. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) 27 7. Insert the SIM into the SIM slot, and gently push the SIM into the slot until it is firmly seated. 8. Replace the battery. NOTE: HP Mobile Broadband will be disabled if the battery is not replaced. 9. Turn the computer right-side up, and then reconnect external power and external devices. 10. Turn on the computer. Removing a SIM To remove a SIM:

1. Shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by sliding the power switch to the right. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. 2. Close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 6. Remove the battery. 28 Chapter 3 Wireless, modem, and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

7. Press in on the SIM (1), and then remove it from the slot (2). 8. Replace the battery. 9. Turn the computer right-side up, and then reconnect external power and external devices. 10. Turn on the computer. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) 29 Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select models only) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices, such as the following:

Computers (desktop, notebook, PDA) Phones (cellular, cordless, smart phone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers)

Bluetooth devices provide peer-to-peer capability that allows you to set up a personal area network

(PAN) of Bluetooth devices. For information on configuring and using Bluetooth devices, refer to the Bluetooth software Help. Bluetooth and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) HP does not recommend setting up one computer with Bluetooth as a host and using it as a gateway through which other computers may connect to the Internet. When two or more computers are connected using Bluetooth, and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) is enabled on one of the computers, the other computers may not be able to connect to the Internet using the Bluetooth network. The strength of Bluetooth is in synchronizing information transfers between your computer and wireless devices including cellular phones, printers, cameras, and PDAs. The inability to consistently connect two or more computers to share the Internet through Bluetooth is a limitation of Bluetooth and the Windows operating system. 30 Chapter 3 Wireless, modem, and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Troubleshooting wireless connection problems Some possible causes for wireless connection problems include the following:

Wireless device is not installed correctly or has been disabled.

Wireless device or router hardware has failed. Network configuration (SSID or security) has been changed.

Wireless device encountered interference from other devices. NOTE: Wireless networking devices are included with select computer models only. If wireless networking is not listed in the feature list on the side of the original computer package, you may add wireless networking capability to the computer by purchasing a wireless networking device. Before working your way through the sequence of possible solutions to your network connection problem, be sure that device drivers are installed for all wireless devices. Use the procedures in this chapter to diagnose and repair a computer that does not connect to the network you want to use. Cannot create a WLAN connection If you have a problem connecting to a WLAN, confirm that the integrated WLAN device is properly installed on your computer:

NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Windows Help and Support for more information. 1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security. In the System area, click Device Manager. 3. Click the arrow next to Network adapters to expand the list and show all adapters. 4. Identify the WLAN device from the Network adapters list. The listing for a WLAN device may include the term wireless, wireless LAN, WLAN, Wi-Fi, or 802.11. If no WLAN device is listed, either your computer does not have an integrated WLAN device, or the driver for the WLAN device is not properly installed. For more information on troubleshooting WLANs, refer to the Web site links provided in Help and Support. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Troubleshooting wireless connection problems 31 Cannot connect to a preferred network Windows can automatically repair a corrupted WLAN connection:

If there is a network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, right-click the icon, and then click Troubleshoot problems. Windows resets your network device and attempts to reconnect to one of the preferred networks. If there is no network icon in the notification area, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 2. Click Troubleshoot problems and select the network you wish to repair. Network icon is not displayed If the network icon is not displayed in the notification area after you configure the WLAN, the software driver is either missing or corrupted. A Windows Device not Found error message may also be displayed. The driver must be reinstalled. To get the latest version of the WLAN device software for your computer, follow these steps:

1. Open your Internet browser and go to http://www.hp.com/support. 2. Select your country or region. 3. Click the option for software and driver downloads, and then type your computer model number in the search box. 4. Press enter, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

site for the latest software. If the WLAN device you are using was purchased separately, consult the manufacturer's Web Current network security codes are unavailable If you are prompted for a network key or a name (SSID) when connecting to a WLAN, the network is protected by security. You must have the current codes to make a connection on a secure network. The SSID and network key are alphanumeric codes that you enter into your computer to identify your computer to the network.

For a network connected to your personal wireless router, review the router user guide for instructions on setting up the same codes on both the router and the WLAN device. For a private network, such as a network in an office or at a public Internet chat room, contact the network administrator to obtain the codes, and then enter the codes when prompted to do so. Some networks change the SSID or network keys used in their routers or access points on a regular basis to improve security. You must change the corresponding code in your computer accordingly. 32 Chapter 3 Wireless, modem, and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

If you are provided with new wireless network keys and SSID for a network, and if you have previously connected to that network, follow the steps below to connect to the network:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 2. Click Manage wireless networks in the left panel. A list showing the available WLANs is displayed. If you are in a hotspot where several WLANs are active, several will be displayed. 3. Select the network in the list, right-click the network, and then click Properties. NOTE:

the router or access point is operating. If the network you want is not listed, check with the network administrator to be sure that 4. Click the Security tab, and then enter the correct wireless encryption data into the Network security key field. 5. Click OK to save these settings. WLAN connection is very weak If the connection is very weak, or if your computer cannot make a connection to a WLAN, minimize interference from other devices, as follows:

Move your computer closer to the wireless router or access point.

Temporarily disconnect other wireless devices such as a microwave, cordless phone, or cellular phone to be sure that they are not interfering. If the connection does not improve, try forcing the device to reestablish all connection values:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 2. Click Manage wireless networks in the left panel. A list showing the available WLANs is displayed. If you are in a hotspot where several WLANs are active, several will be displayed. 3. Click a network, and then click Remove. Cannot connect to the wireless router If you are trying to connect to the wireless router and are unsuccessful, reset the wireless router by removing power from the router for 10 to 15 seconds. If the computer still cannot make a connection to a WLAN, restart the wireless router. For details, refer to the router manufacturer's instructions. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Troubleshooting wireless connection problems 33 Using the modem (select models only) The modem must be connected to an analog telephone line using a 6-pin, RJ-11 modem cable (included with select models only). In some countries, a country-specific modem cable adapter (included with select models only) is also required. Jacks for digital PBX systems may resemble analog telephone jacks, but they are not compatible with the modem. WARNING! Connecting the internal analog modem to a digital line can permanently damage the modem. Immediately disconnect the modem cable if you accidentally connect it to a digital line. If the modem cable contains noise suppression circuitry (1), which prevents interference from TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end (2) of the cable toward the computer. Connecting a modem cable WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a modem cable (included with select models only) or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. To connect a modem cable:

1. 2. Plug the modem cable into the modem jack (1) on the computer. Plug the modem cable into the RJ-11 telephone wall jack (2). Connecting a country-specific modem cable adapter Telephone jacks vary by country. To use the modem and the modem cable (included with select models only) outside the country in which you purchased the computer, you must obtain a country-specific modem cable adapter (included with select models only). 34 Chapter 3 Wireless, modem, and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

To connect the modem to an analog telephone line that does not have an RJ-11 telephone jack, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Plug the modem cable into the modem jack (1) on the computer. Plug the modem cable into the country-specific modem cable adapter (2). Plug the country-specific modem cable adapter (3) into the telephone wall jack. Selecting a location setting Viewing the current location selection To view the current location setting for the modem, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Control Panel. 2. Click Clock, Language, and Region. 3. Click Region and Language. 4. Click the Location tab to display your location. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the modem (select models only) 35 Adding new locations when traveling By default, the only location setting available to the modem is a location setting for the country in which you purchased the computer. As you travel to different countries, set the internal modem to a location setting that meets the operating standards of the country in which you are using the modem. As you add new location settings, they are saved by the computer so that you can switch among settings at any time. You can add multiple location settings for any country. CAUTION: To prevent losing your home country settings, do not delete your current modem country settings. To enable modem use in other countries while preserving your home country configuration, add a new configuration for each location in which you will use the modem. CAUTION: To prevent configuring the modem in a way that violates the telecommunications regulations and laws of the country you are visiting, select the country in which the computer is located. The modem may not function properly if the correct country selection is not made. To add a location setting for the modem, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Devices and Printers. 2. Right-click the device that represents your computer, and click Modem settings. NOTE: You must set up an initial (current) location area code before you can view the Dialing Rules tab. If you do not have a location set up, you will be prompted to enter the location when you click Modem settings. 3. Click the Dialing Rules tab. 4. Click New. (The New Location window is displayed.) 5. 6. 7. In the Location name box, type a name (such as home or work) for the new location setting. Select a country or region from the Country/region drop-down list. (If you select a country or region that is not supported by the modem, the Country/region selection for USA or UK is displayed by default.) Enter the area code, a carrier code (if necessary), and the number to access an outside line (if necessary). 8. Next to Dial using, click Tone or Pulse. 9. Click OK to save your new location setting. (The Phone and Modem window is displayed.) 10. Do one of the following:

To set your new location setting as the current location, click OK. To select another location setting as the current location setting, select your preference from the settings in the Location list, and then click OK. NOTE: You can use the preceding procedure to add location settings for places within your own country as well as in other countries. For example, you could add a setting named Work that includes dialing rules for accessing an outside line. 36 Chapter 3 Wireless, modem, and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Solving travel connection problems If you experience modem connection problems when using the computer outside of the country in which you purchased it, try the following suggestions:

Check the telephone line type. The modem requires an analog, not a digital, telephone line. A line described as a PBX line is usually a digital line. A telephone line described as a data line, fax machine line, modem line, or standard telephone line is usually an analog line. Check for pulse or tone dialing. An analog telephone line supports one of two dialing modes: pulse dialing or tone dialing. These dialing mode options are selected in the Phone and Modem settings. The dialing mode option selected must match the dialing mode supported by the telephone line in your location. To determine the dialing mode supported by a telephone line, dial a few digits on the telephone, and then listen for clicks (pulses) or tones. Clicks indicate that the telephone line supports pulse dialing. Tones indicate that the telephone line supports tone dialing. To change the dialing mode in your current modem location setting, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Devices and Printers. 2. Right-click the device that represents your computer, and click Modem settings. 3. Click the Dialing Rules tab. 4. Select your modem location setting. 5. Click Edit. 6. Click either Tone or Pulse. 7. Click OK twice. Check the telephone number you are dialing and the response of the remote modem. Dial a telephone number, make sure there is a response from the remote modem, and then hang up. Set the modem to ignore dial tones. If the modem receives a dial tone it does not recognize, it does not dial and displays a No Dial Tone error message. To set the modem to ignore all dial tones before dialing, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Devices and Printers. 2. Right-click the device that represents your computer, and click Modem settings. 3. Click the Modems tab. 4. Click the listing for the modem. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click Modem. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the modem (select models only) 37 7. Clear the check box for Wait for dial tone before dialing. 8. Click OK twice. 38 Chapter 3 Wireless, modem, and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Connecting to a local area network (LAN) Connecting to a local area network (LAN) requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 network cable (purchased separately). If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (1), which prevents interference from TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable (2) toward the computer. To connect the network cable:

1. 2. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. Plug the other end of the cable into a network wall jack (2). WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Connecting to a local area network (LAN) 39 4 Pointing devices and keyboard Using pointing devices Setting pointing device preferences Use Mouse Properties in Windows to customize settings for pointing devices, such as button configuration, click speed, and pointer options. To access Mouse Properties, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Mouse. Using the TouchPad To move the pointer, slide your finger across the TouchPad surface in the direction you want the pointer to go. Use the TouchPad buttons like the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To scroll up and down using the TouchPad vertical scroll zone, slide your finger up or down over the lines. NOTE:

If you are using the TouchPad to move the pointer, you must lift your finger off the TouchPad before moving it to the scroll zone. Simply sliding your finger from the TouchPad to the scroll zone will not activate the scrolling function. Using the pointing stick Press the pointing stick in the direction you want to move the pointer on the screen. Use the left and right pointing stick buttons as you would the left and right buttons on an external mouse. Connecting an external mouse You can connect an external USB mouse to the computer using one of the USB ports on the computer. A USB mouse can also be connected to the system using the ports on an optional docking device. Using the keyboard Using the keyboard light The keyboard light illuminates the computer keyboard in low light conditions. 40 Chapter 4 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

To open and turn on the keyboard light, press the keyboard light button.

To turn off and close the keyboard light, gently press the keyboard light button until it clicks into place. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the keyboard 41 Using hotkeys Hotkeys are combinations of the fn key (1) and either the esc key (2) or one of the function keys (3). The icons on the f3 through f5, and f8 through f11 keys represent the hotkey functions. Hotkey functions and procedures are discussed in the following sections. Function Display system information. Initiate Sleep. Switch the screen image. Enable/disable the TouchPad Display battery information. Decrease screen brightness. Increase screen brightness. Activate the ambient light sensor. Hotkey fn+esc fn+f3 fn+f4 Fn+f5 fn+f8 fn+f9 fn+f10 fn+f11 To use a hotkey command on the computer keyboard, follow either of these steps:

Briefly press the fn key, and then briefly press the second key of the hotkey command. or Press and hold down the fn key, briefly press the second key of the hotkey command, and then release both keys at the same time. Displaying system information Press fn+esc to display information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number. 42 Chapter 4 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

In the Windows fn+esc display, the version of the system BIOS (basic input-output system) is displayed as the BIOS date. On some computer models, the BIOS date is displayed in decimal format. The BIOS date is sometimes called the system ROM version number. Initiating Sleep CAUTION: To reduce the risk of information loss, save your work before initiating Sleep. Press fn+f3 to initiate Sleep. When Sleep is initiated, your information is stored in system memory, the screen is cleared, and power is conserved. While the computer is in the Sleep state, the power lights blink. The computer must be on before you can initiate Sleep. If a critical battery level occurs while the computer is in the Sleep state, the computer initiates NOTE:

Hibernation and the information stored in memory is saved to the hard drive. The factory setting for critical battery action is Hibernate, but this setting can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. To exit Sleep, briefly slide the power switch to the right. The function of the fn+f3 hotkey can be changed. For example, you can set the fn+f3 hotkey to initiate Hibernation instead of Sleep. NOTE:

hotkey. In all Windows operating system windows, references to the sleep button apply to the fn+f3 Switching the screen image Press fn+f4 to switch the screen image among display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, pressing fn+f4 alternates the screen image from computer display to monitor display to simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Most external monitors receive video information from the computer using the external VGA video standard. The fn+f4 hotkey can also alternate images among other devices receiving video information from the computer. The following video transmission types, with examples of devices that use them, are supported by the fn+f4 hotkey:

LCD (computer display) External VGA (most external monitors) S-Video (televisions, camcorders, DVD players, VCRs, and video capture cards with S-Video-in jacks) HDMI (televisions, camcorders, DVD players, VCRs, and video capture cards with HDMI ports) Composite video (televisions, camcorders, DVD players, VCRs, and video capture cards with composite-video-in jacks) NOTE: Composite video devices can be connected to the system only by using an optional docking device. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the keyboard 43 Viewing battery charge information Press fn+f8 to display charge information for all installed batteries. The display indicates which batteries are charging and reports the amount of charge remaining in each battery. Enabling/disabling the TouchPad (fn+f5) Press fn+f5 to enable or disable the TouchPad. Decreasing screen brightness Press fn+f9 to decrease screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to decrease the brightness level incrementally. Increasing screen brightness Press fn+f10 to increase screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to increase the brightness level incrementally. Activating the ambient light sensor Press fn+f11 to activate and deactivate the ambient light sensor. 44 Chapter 4 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using QuickLook (select models only) NOTE: QuickLook must be installed before you can view the QuickLook information. QuickLook saves Inbox e-mails and calendar, contact, and task information from Microsoft Outlook to your computer's hard drive. When the computer is off, in the Sleep state, or in Hibernation, you can quickly view this information by pressing the info button on the computer. NOTE:

you press the info button while the computer is off, in the Sleep state, or in Hibernation. If you have set a Windows logon password, you will be prompted to enter your password when NOTE: For additional information about QuickLook and setting preferences, refer to the online Help. Installing QuickLook To install QuickLook:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Software Setup. 2. Clear all check boxes. 3. Expand Optional Software Applications, and then select HP QuickLook. 4. Click Install. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using QuickLook (select models only) 45 Using HP Quick Launch Buttons The HP Quick Launch Buttons enable you to quickly open programs, files, or Web sites you use frequently. You can use the factory settings, which are described in the following table. Or you can reprogram the buttons by opening the Q Menu in the Quick Launch Buttons control panel. The Quick Launch Buttons include the QuickWeb button (1), and the QuickLook button (2) . The following table describes the factory settings for the Quick Launch Buttons. NOTE: Button functions vary, depending on the software installed on your computer. Component

(1) QuickWeb button

(2) QuickLook button Description

When the computer is off, press the button to open HP QuickWeb.

When the computer is on, press the button to open the default Web browser.

When the computer is off, press the button to open HP QuickLook .

When the computer is on, press the button to open Software Setup. NOTE:

browser opens. If Software Setup is not available, the default Web 46 Chapter 4 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Opening the Quick Launch Buttons control panel You can open the HP Quick Launch Buttons control panel in any of the following ways:

Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Quick Launch Buttons. Double-click the HP Quick Launch Buttons icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Right-click the HP Quick Launch Buttons icon in the notification area, and click Adjust HP Quick Launch Buttons Properties. NOTE: On some models, an icon is displayed on the desktop. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Opening the Quick Launch Buttons control panel 47 Using HP QuickLook 3 QuickLook 3 allows you to save calendar, contact, inbox, and task information from Microsoft Outlook to the hard drive of your computer. Then, when the computer is off or in Hibernation, you can press the QuickLook button on the computer to view this information without waiting for the operating system to restart. Use QuickLook 3 to manage contact information, calendar events, e-mail information, and tasks without restarting your computer. NOTE: QuickLook 3 does not support the Sleep state in Windows. For more information about setting up and using QuickLook 3, refer to the QuickLook 3 software Help. Using the pen You can write with the pen in pen-specific programs such as the Tablet PC Input Panel, in all Microsoft Office applications, and in most other Windows programs and utilities. The information you write on the screen with the pen can be filed, searched, and shared among most Windows programs. Identifying the pen components The pen interacts with the tablet PC whenever the tip (1) or eraser (3) of the pen is approximately 1.27 cm (0.5 inch) from the screen. The pen button (2) emulates the functions of the right button on an external mouse. Holding the pen Hold the pen as if you were writing with a standard pen or pencil. Position the pen in your hand so that you will not accidentally press the pen button. As you monitor the movements of the pen, focus on the pointer, not on the tip of the pen. 48 Chapter 4 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Performing mouse clicks with the pen

To select an item on the screen as you would with the left button of an external mouse, tap the item with the tip of the pen.

To double-click an item on the screen as you would with the left button of an external mouse, tap the item twice with the tip of the pen.

To select an item as you would with the right button of an external mouse, press and hold down the pen button, and then tap the item with the tip of the pen. Performing other procedures with the pen In addition to emulating mouse clicks, the pen can be used for the following tasks:

To display the pointer location, hold the pen tip immediately over any location on the tablet PC screen without touching the screen with the pen tip. To display the menu options related to an item on the screen, tap the screen with the pen tip. To write with the pen, write on the screen with the tip of the pen. To press a pen-activated button, tap the button with the tip of the pen. To erase with the pen, hold the pen with the eraser side down and move the eraser over the writing that you want to delete. Pressure sensitivity The tablet PC pen is equipped with a pressure-sensitive feature. This means that you can manipulate the pen to create lines of various thickness, depending upon the amount of pressure you use to write. NOTE: This feature is available only if the Tablet PC Input Panel software is enabled. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the pen 49 Calibrating the pen The pen can function at the default calibration or at a calibration set by another user. However, HP highly recommends that you use the pen only while it is calibrated to your personal handwriting and mouse action motions. Calibration optimizes pen performance for all users and particularly for left-handed users. To calibrate the pen:

1. 2. 3. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Tablet PC Settings. At the bottom of the General tab, tap the Calibrate button. Follow the instructions on the screen.

Tap the pen in the exact center of each of the calibration markers. The calibration markers are displayed on the screen as plus signs (+). Be sure to calibrate the pen for use in both portrait and landscape orientations. NOTE: You can display information about any setting in the Tablet PC Settings window by selecting the Help button in the upper-right corner of the window, and then selecting a setting. Using the pen holder To remove the pen from the pen holder on the computer, press the pen in to eject it. To protect the pen when you are not using it, insert the pen, tip first, into the pen holder on the computer. 50 Chapter 4 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Setting pen preferences Pen preferences are set in the Tablet PC Settings window of the operating system. The preferences include setting the location of on-screen menus for either right-handed or left-handed users, calibrating the screen for pen use, and optimizing handwriting recognition. To access pen preferences:

Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Tablet PC Settings. Pen options are set in the Pen and Input Devices window. The options include speed settings for double-

tapping and pressandhold pen use, pen pointer options, and flick settings. To access pen options:

Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Pen and Input Devices. The preferences and options you set in the Tablet PC Settings and the Pen and Input Devices window are specific to the pen and the tablet PC. Pointing device preferences, such as pointer speed, click speed, and mouse trails, are set in the Mouse Properties window. These preferences apply to any pointing device in the system. To access Mouse Properties:

Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Mouse. Using the embedded numeric keypad Using the embedded numeric keypad The 15 keys of the embedded numeric keypad can be used like the keys on an external keypad. When the embedded numeric keypad is turned on, each key on the keypad performs the function indicated by the icon in the upper-right corner of the key. Enabling and disabling the embedded numeric keypad Press fn+num lk to enable the embedded numeric keypad. Press fn+num lk again to return the keys to their standard keyboard functions. NOTE: The embedded numeric keypad will not function while an external keyboard or numeric keypad is connected to the computer. Switching key functions on the embedded numeric keypad You can temporarily alternate the functions of keys on the embedded numeric keypad between their standard keyboard functions and their keypad functions by using the fn key or the fn+shift key combination.

To change the function of a keypad key to keypad functions while the keypad is off, press and hold the fn key while pressing the keypad key. To use the keypad keys temporarily as standard keys while the keypad is on:

Press and hold the fn key to type in lowercase. Press and hold fn+shift to type in uppercase. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the embedded numeric keypad 51 Cleaning the TouchPad and keyboard Dirt and grease on the TouchPad can cause the pointer to jump around on the screen. To avoid this, clean the TouchPad with a damp cloth, and wash your hands frequently when using the computer. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. 52 Chapter 4 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

5 Multimedia Multimedia features Your computer includes multimedia features that allow you to listen to music, watch movies, and view pictures. Your computer may include the following multimedia components:

Optical drive for playing audio and video discs Integrated speakers for listening to music Integrated microphone for recording your own audio Integrated webcam that allows you to capture and share video Preinstalled multimedia software that allows you to play and manage your music, movies, and pictures Hotkeys that provide fast access to multimedia tasks

NOTE: Your computer may not include all of the components listed. The following sections explain how to identify and use the multimedia components included with your computer. Adjusting the volume You can adjust the volume using the following controls:

Computer volume buttons:

To mute or restore volume, press the mute button (1). To decrease volume, press and hold the volume down button (2) until the desired volume level is reached. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Multimedia features 53

To increase volume, press and hold the volume up button (3) until the desired volume level is reached.

Windows volume control:

a. Click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. b. Increase or decrease the volume by moving the slider up or down. Click the Mute Speakers icon to mute the volume. or a. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, and then click Open Volume Mixer. b. In the Speakers column, you can increase or decrease the volume by moving the Volume slider up or down. You can also mute the volume by clicking the Mute Speakers icon. If the Speakers icon is not displayed in the notification area, follow these steps to add it:

a. Right-click the Show hidden icons icon (the arrow at far left of the notification area). b. Click Customize notification icons. c. Under Behaviors, select Show icon and notifications for the Volume icon. d. Click OK.

Program volume control:

Volume can also be adjusted within some programs. Multimedia software NOTE: To use optical discs (CDs and DVDs), you must use the optional HP 2740 Ultra-Slim Expansion Base or an optional external MultiBay with an optical drive. The computer includes preinstalled multimedia software. Some computer models also include additional multimedia software on an optical disc. 54 Chapter 5 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Depending on the hardware and software included with the computer, the following multimedia tasks may be supported:

Playing digital media, including audio and video CDs, audio and video DVDs, and Internet radio Creating or copying data CDs Creating, editing, and burning audio CDs Creating, editing, and burning a video or movie to a DVD or video CD

CAUTION: To prevent loss of information or damage to a disc, observe the following guidelines:

Before writing to a disc, connect the computer to a reliable external power source. Do not write to a disc while the computer is running on battery power. Before writing to a disc, close all open programs except the disc software you are using. Do not copy directly from a source disc to a destination disc or from a network drive to a destination disc. Instead, copy from a source disc or network drive to your hard drive, and then copy from your hard drive to the destination disc. Do not use the computer keyboard or move the computer while the computer is writing to a disc. The write process is sensitive to vibration. NOTE: For information about using software included with the computer, refer to the software manufacturer's instructions that may be provided on disc, as online Help files, or on the software manufacturer's Web site. Accessing your preinstalled multimedia software To access your preinstalled multimedia software:

Select Start > All Programs, and then open the multimedia program you want to use. NOTE: Some programs may be located in subfolders. NOTE: For details about using software included with the computer, refer to the software manufacturers instructions, which may be provided with the software, on disc, or on the manufacturers Web site. Installing your preloaded multimedia software To install your preloaded software from your hard drive, select Start > All Programs > HP Software Setup, and then follow the instructions on the screen. Installing multimedia software from a disc 1. Insert the disc into the optical drive. 2. When the installation wizard opens, follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Restart the computer if prompted to do so. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Multimedia software 55 Audio Your computer enables you to use a variety of audio features:

Play music using your computer speakers and/or connected external speakers Record sound using the internal microphone or connect an external microphone Download music from the Internet Create multimedia presentations using audio and images Transmit sound and images with instant messaging programs Stream radio programs (select models only) or receive FM radio signals Create or burn audio CDs (select models only) Connecting external audio devices WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To connect external devices such as external speakers, headphones, or a microphone, refer to the information provided with the device. For best results, remember the following tips:

Be sure that the device cable is securely connected to the correct jack on your computer. (Cable connectors are normally color-coded to match the corresponding jacks on the computer.) Be sure to install any drivers required by the external device. NOTE: A driver is a required program that acts like a translator between the device and the programs that use the device. Checking your audio functions To check the system sound on your computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Control Panel. 2. Click Hardware and Sound. 3. Click Sound. 4. When the Sound window opens, click the Sounds tab. Under Program Events, select any sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and click the Test button. You should hear sound through the speakers or through connected headphones. To check the record functions of the computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Sound Recorder. 2. Click Start Recording and speak into the microphone. Save the file to your desktop. 3. Open Windows Media Player and play back the sound. 56 Chapter 5 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

NOTE: For best results when recording, speak directly into the microphone and record sound in a setting free of background noise. To confirm or change the audio settings on your computer, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Sound. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Audio 57 Video Your computer enables you to use a variety of video features:

Watch movies

Play games over the Internet Edit pictures and video to create presentations Connect external video devices Connecting an external monitor or projector Your computer has an external monitor port that allows you to connect external monitors and projectors. Using the external monitor port The external monitor port connects an external display device, such as an external monitor or a projector, to the computer.

To connect a display device, connect the device cable to the external monitor port. If a properly connected external display device does not display an image, press fn+f4 to NOTE:

transfer the image to the device. Repeatedly pressing fn+f4 alternates the screen image between the computer display and the device. Using the DreamColor display (select models only) Computer models with the HP DreamColor display include the preinstalled HP Mobile Display Assistant software. You can use this program to adjust display color settings such as preset color space, white point/color temperature, and luminance/brightness.

To access Mobile Display Assistant, click the Mobile Display Assistant icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar or select Start > All Programs > Mobile Display Assistant. For more information on using Mobile Display Assistant, refer to the software Help. 58 Chapter 5 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Webcam NOTE: This section describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. Your computer includes an integrated webcam, located at the top of the display. With the preinstalled software, you can use the webcam to take a photo, record a video, or make an audio recording. You can preview the photo, video recording, or audio recording, and save it on your computer hard drive. To access the webcam and HP Webcam software, select Start > All Programs > HP Webcam Application. The webcam software enables you to experiment with the following features:

VideoRecord and play back webcam video. AudioRecord and play back audio. Streaming videoUse with instant message software solutions that support UVC (Universal Video Class) cameras. SnapshotsTake still photos. HP Presto! Bizcard (select models only)Use to transform business cards into a usable database of contact information. Webcam tips For optimum performance, observe the following guidelines while using the webcam:

Be sure that you have the latest version of an instant message program before starting a video conversation. The webcam may not work properly across some network firewalls. If you are having trouble viewing or sending multimedia files to someone on another LAN NOTE:

or outside your network firewall, temporarily disable the firewall, perform the task you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall as necessary, and adjust the policies and settings of other intrusion detection systems. For additional information, contact your network administrator or IT department.

Whenever possible, place bright light sources behind the webcam and out of the picture area. NOTE: For details about using your webcam, refer to the webcam software Help. Adjusting webcam properties You can adjust webcam properties using the Properties dialog box, which is accessible from various programs that use the integrated webcam, usually from a configuration, settings, or properties menu:

BrightnessControls the amount of light that is incorporated into the image. A higher brightness setting creates a brighter image; a lower brightness setting creates a darker image. ContrastControls the difference between lighter and darker areas on the image. A higher contrast setting intensifies the image; a lower contrast setting maintains more of the original informations dynamic range, but leads to a flatter image. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Webcam 59

HueControls the aspect of color that distinguishes it from another color (what makes a color red, green, or blue). Hue is distinct from saturation, which measures the intensity of the hue. SaturationControls the strength of color in the final image. A higher saturation setting creates a bolder image; a lower saturation setting creates a more subtle image. SharpnessControls the definition of edges in an image. A higher sharpness setting creates a more defined image; a lower sharpness setting creates a softer image. GammaControls the contrast affecting the mid-level grays or midtones of an image. Adjusting the gamma of an image allows you to change the brightness values of the middle range of gray tones without dramatically altering the shadows and highlights. A lower gamma setting makes grays look black, and makes dark colors even darker. For information about using the webcam, select Start > Help and Support. Capturing business card images You can use the webcam with the Presto! BizCard program to capture business card images and export the text to many types of address book software, such as Microsoft Outlook Contacts. To capture a business card image:

1. Open Presto! BizCard by selecting Start > All Programs > NewSoft > Presto! BizCard > Presto!

BizCard. 2. To capture one business card, select File > Snap One Card and Recognize. or To capture multiple business cards, select File > Snap Cards and Recognize. The Preview window opens. 3. Slowly lower the display (1) until the webcam light (2) stops blinking and you hear a sound. The webcam is now in focus. 60 Chapter 5 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

4. Insert a business card into the business card slot on the front of the computer (1) and slide the card to the right (2) to align it with the webcam. NOTE: Be sure that text on the bottom of the card is not obscured by the slot. If any text is obscured by the slot, rotate the card 180 degrees. The webcam captures the business card image and the webcam light turns off. 5. If you are capturing multiple business card images, remove the business card and insert another one. The webcam light turns on when the card is in focus. The webcam then captures the business card image and the webcam light turns off. Repeat this step for additional business cards. 6. When you have finished capturing one or more business card images, remove the business card from the slot and raise the display. 7. Review the data captured by Presto! BizCard to be sure that it is complete. For more information on using Presto! BizCard, refer to the software Help. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Webcam 61 6 Power management Setting power options Using power-saving states The computer has two power-saving states enabled at the factory: Sleep and Hibernation. When Sleep is initiated, the power lights blink and the screen clears. Your work is saved to memory. Exiting Sleep is faster than exiting Hibernation. If the computer is in the Sleep state for an extended period or if the battery reaches a critical battery level while in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. When Hibernation is initiated, your work is saved to a hibernation file on the hard drive and the computer turns off. CAUTION: To prevent possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep or Hibernation while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. NOTE: You cannot initiate any type of networking connection or perform any computer functions while the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation. NOTE: When HP 3D DriveGuard has parked a drive, the computer will not initiate Sleep or Hibernation, and the display will be turned off. Initiating and exiting Sleep The system is set at the factory to initiate Sleep after 15 minutes of inactivity when running on battery power and 30 minutes of inactivity when running on external power. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. With the computer on, you can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Press fn+f3. Click Start, and then click the Power button. Click Start, click the arrow next to the Lock button, and then click Sleep.

To exit Sleep:

Briefly slide the power switch to the right. When the computer exits Sleep, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. 62 Chapter 6 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

NOTE:

Windows password before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required when the computer exits Sleep, you must enter your Initiating and exiting Hibernation The system is set at the factory to initiate Hibernation after 1080 minutes (18 hours) of inactivity when running on battery power, 1080 minutes (18 hours) of inactivity when running on external power, or when the battery reaches a critical battery level. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. To initiate Hibernation:

1. Click Start, and then click the arrow next to the Lock button. 2. Click Hibernate. To exit Hibernation:

Briefly slide the power switch to the right. The power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:

your Windows password before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required when the computer exits Hibernation, you must enter Using the battery meter The battery meter is located in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. The battery meter allows you to quickly access power settings, view remaining battery charge, and select a different power plan.

To display the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, move the pointer over the battery meter icon. To access Power Options, or to change the power plan, click the battery meter icon and select an item from the list. Different battery meter icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. The icon also displays a message if the battery has reached a critical battery level. To hide or display the battery meter icon:

1. Right-click the taskbar, and then click Properties. 2. Click the Notification Area tab. 3. Under System icons, clear the Power check box to hide the battery meter icon, or select the Power check box to display the battery meter icon. 4. Click OK. Using power plans A power plan is a collection of system settings that manages how the computer uses power. Power plans can help you conserve power or maximize performance. You can change power plan settings or create your own power plan. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Setting power options 63 Viewing the current power plan

Move the pointer over the battery meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. Selecting a different power plan

Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then select a power plan from the list. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options, and then select a power plan from the list. Customizing power plans 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. 2. Select a power plan, and then click Change plan settings. 3. Change the Turn off the display and Put the computer to sleep timeout settings, as needed. 4. To change additional settings, click Change advanced power settings and make your changes. Setting password protection on wakeup To set the computer to prompt for a password when the computer exits Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. In the left pane, click Require a password on wakeup. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. Click Require a password (recommended). 5. Click Save changes. 64 Chapter 6 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using external AC power External AC power is supplied through one of the following devices:

WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP.

Approved AC adapter Optional docking device

Connect the computer to external AC power under any of the following conditions:

WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft.

When you are charging or calibrating a battery

When you are installing or modifying system software

When you are writing information to a CD or DVD When you connect the computer to external AC power, the following events occur:

The battery begins to charge. If the computer is turned on, the battery meter icon in the notification area changes appearance.

When you disconnect external AC power, the following events occur:

The computer switches to battery power. The display brightness is automatically decreased to save battery life. To increase display brightness, press the fn+f10 hotkey or reconnect the AC adapter. Connecting the AC adapter WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. To connect the computer to external AC power:

1. 2. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector (1) on the computer. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter (2). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using external AC power 65 3. Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet (3). Using battery power When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is plugged into external AC power, the computer runs on AC power. If the computer contains a charged battery and is running on external AC power supplied through the AC adapter, the computer switches to battery power if the AC adapter is disconnected from the computer. NOTE: The display brightness is decreased to save battery life when you disconnect AC power. To increase display brightness, use the fn+f10 hotkey or reconnect the AC adapter. You can keep a battery in the computer or in storage, depending on how you work. Keeping the battery in the computer whenever the computer is plugged into AC power charges the battery and also protects your work in case of a power outage. However, a battery in the computer slowly discharges when the computer is off and unplugged from external power. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, display brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Finding battery information in Help and Support The Battery information section of the Help and Support Learning Center provides the following tools and information:

Battery Check tool to test battery performance Information on calibration, power management, and proper care and storage to maximize battery life Information on battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity

To access Battery information:

Select Start > Help and Support > Learning Center > Battery information. 66 Chapter 6 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using Battery Check Battery Check provides information on the status of the battery installed in the computer. To run Battery Check:

1. Connect the AC adapter to the computer. NOTE: The computer must be connected to external power for Battery Check to function properly. 2. Select Start > Help and Support > Troubleshoot > Power, Thermal and Mechanical, and then click the Power tab. Battery Check examines the battery and its cells to see if they are functioning properly, and then reports the results of the examination. Displaying the remaining battery charge

Move the pointer over the battery meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. or View the estimated number of minutes of battery charge remaining in Windows Mobility Center:

Click the battery meter icon, and then click Windows Mobility Center. or Select Start > Control Panel > Mobile PC > Windows Mobility Center. The time shown indicates the approximate running time remaining on the battery if the battery continues to provide power at the current level. For example, the time remaining will decrease when a DVD is playing and will increase when a DVD stops playing. Inserting or removing the battery CAUTION: Removing a battery that is the sole power source can cause loss of information. To prevent loss of information, save your work, and initiate Hibernation or shut down the computer through Windows before removing the battery. To insert the battery:

1. 2. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. Align the tabs (1) on the battery with the notches on the battery bay. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using battery power 67 3. Press the battery (2) into the battery bay until the battery clicks into place. To remove the battery:

1. 2. 3. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. Slide the battery release latch (1) to release the battery. Pivot the battery upward (2), and remove the battery from the computer (3). Charging a battery WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. The battery charges whenever the computer is plugged into external power through an AC adapter, an optional power adapter, an optional expansion product, or an optional docking device. The battery charges whether the computer is off or in use, but it charges faster when the computer is off. Charging may take longer if a battery is new, has been unused for 2 weeks or more, or is much warmer or cooler than room temperature. 68 Chapter 6 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

To prolong battery life and optimize the accuracy of battery charge displays, follow these recommendations:

If you are charging a new battery, charge it fully before turning on the computer. Charge the battery until the battery light turns off. NOTE:

area may show 100 percent charge before the battery is fully charged. If the computer is on while the battery is charging, the battery meter in the notification Allow the battery to discharge below 5 percent of a full charge through normal use before charging it. If the battery has been unused for one month or more, calibrate the battery instead of simply charging it. The battery light displays charge status:

On: The battery is charging. Blinking: The battery has reached a low battery level or critical battery level and is not charging. Off: The battery is fully charged, in use, or not installed. Maximizing battery discharge time Battery discharge time varies, depending on the features you use while on battery power. Maximum discharge time gradually shortens as the battery storage capacity naturally degrades. Tips for maximizing battery discharge time:

Lower the brightness on the display. Check the Power saver setting in Power Options. Remove the battery from the computer when it is not being used or charged. Store the battery in a cool, dry location. Managing low battery levels The information in this section describes the alerts and system responses set at the factory. Some low-

battery alerts and system responses can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. Preferences set using Power Options do not affect lights. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low battery level, the battery light blinks. If a low battery level is not resolved, the computer enters a critical battery level, and the battery light blinks rapidly. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using battery power 69 The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state, and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. 70 Chapter 6 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Resolving a low battery level CAUTION: To reduce the risk of losing information when the computer reaches a critical battery level and has initiated Hibernation, do not restore power until the power lights turn off. Resolving a low battery level when external power is available

Connect one of the following devices:

AC adapter Optional expansion product or docking device Optional power adapter Resolving a low battery level when a charged battery is available 1. Turn off the computer or initiate Hibernation. 2. Remove the discharged battery, and then insert a charged battery. 3. Turn on the computer. Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available

Initiate Hibernation. or Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the computer lacks sufficient power to exit Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. 2. Insert a charged battery or plug the computer into external power. Exit Hibernation by briefly sliding the power switch to the right. Calibrating a battery Calibrate a battery under the following conditions:

When battery charge displays seem inaccurate

When you observe a significant change in battery run time Even if a battery is heavily used, it should not need to be calibrated more than once a month. It is also not necessary to calibrate a new battery. Step 1: Fully charge the battery WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. NOTE: The battery charges whether the computer is off or in use, but it charges faster when the computer is off. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using battery power 71 To fully charge the battery:

1. Insert the battery into the computer. 2. Connect the computer to an AC adapter, optional power adapter, optional expansion product, or optional docking device, and then plug the adapter or device into external power. The battery light on the computer turns on. 3. Leave the computer plugged into external power until the battery is fully charged. The battery light on the computer turns off. Step 2: Disable Hibernation and Sleep 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. 2. Under the current power plan, click Change plan settings. 3. Record the Turn off the display and Put the computer to sleep settings listed in the On battery column so that you can reset them after the calibration. 4. Change the Turn off the display and Put the computer to sleep settings to Never. 5. Click Change advanced power settings. 6. Click the plus sign (+) next to Sleep, and then click the plus sign (+) next to Hibernate after. 7. Record the On battery setting under Hibernate after so that you can reset it after the calibration. 8. Change the On battery setting to Never. 9. Click OK. 10. Click Save changes. Step 3: Discharge the battery The computer must remain on while the battery is being discharged. The battery can discharge whether or not you are using the computer, but the battery will discharge faster while you are using it.

If you plan to leave the computer unattended during the discharge, save your information before beginning the discharge procedure. If you use the computer occasionally during the discharge procedure and have set energy-saving timeouts, expect the following performance from the system during the discharge process:

The monitor will not turn off automatically. Hard drive speed will not decrease automatically when the computer is idle. System-initiated Hibernation will not occur. 72 Chapter 6 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

To discharge a battery:

1. Unplug the computer from its external power source, but do not turn off the computer. 2. Run the computer on battery power until the battery is discharged. The battery light begins to blink when the battery has discharged to a low battery level. When the battery is discharged, the battery light turns off and the computer shuts down. Step 4: Fully recharge the battery To recharge the battery:

1. 2. Plug the computer into external power and maintain external power until the battery is fully recharged. When the battery is recharged, the battery light on the computer turns off. You can use the computer while the battery is recharging, but the battery will charge faster if the computer is off. If the computer is off, turn it on when the battery is fully charged and the battery light has turned off. Step 5: Reenable Hibernation and Sleep CAUTION: Failure to reenable Hibernation after calibration may result in a full battery discharge and information loss if the computer reaches a critical battery level. 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. 2. Under the current power plan, click Change plan settings. 3. Reenter the settings that you recorded for the items in the On battery column. or Click Restore default settings for this plan, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

If you restore default settings, omit steps 4 through 8. 4. Click Change advanced power settings. 5. Click the plus sign (+) next to Sleep, and then click the plus sign (+) next to Hibernate after. 6. Reenter the setting that you recorded for On battery. 7. Click OK. 8. Click Save changes. Conserving battery power

Select low power-use settings through Power Options in Windows Control Panel. Turn off wireless and local area network (LAN) connections and exit modem applications when you are not using them. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using battery power 73

Disconnect external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, when you are not using them. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Use the fn+f9 and fn+f10 hotkeys to adjust screen brightness as needed. If you leave your work, initiate Sleep or Hibernation, or shut down the computer. Storing a battery CAUTION: To prevent damage to a battery, do not expose it to high temperatures for extended periods of time. If a computer will be unused and unplugged from external power for more than two weeks, remove the battery and store it separately. To prolong the charge of a stored battery, place it in a cool, dry place. NOTE: A stored battery should be checked every six months. If the capacity is less than 50 percent, recharge the battery before returning it to storage. Calibrate a battery before using it if it has been stored for one month or more. Disposing of a used battery WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture a battery; short the external contacts on a battery; or dispose of a battery in fire or water. Do not expose a battery to temperatures above 60C (140F). Replace the battery only with a battery approved for this computer. Refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices for battery disposal information. Replacing the battery Computer battery life varies, depending on the power management settings, programs running on the computer, display brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Battery Check notifies you to replace the battery when an internal cell is not charging properly, or when the battery storage capacity has reached a weak condition. A message refers you to the HP Web site for more information about ordering a replacement battery. If the battery is possibly covered by an HP warranty, instructions include a warranty ID. NOTE: To ensure that you always have battery power when you need it, HP recommends purchasing a new battery when the storage capacity indicator turns green-yellow. 74 Chapter 6 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Testing an AC adapter Test the AC adapter if the computer exhibits any of the following symptoms:

The computer will not turn on when connected to the AC adapter. The display does not turn on when the computer is connected to the AC adapter and external power. The power light is off when the computer is connected to the AC adapter.

To test the AC adapter:

1. Remove the battery from the computer. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to an AC outlet. 3. Turn on the computer.

If the power light turns on, the AC adapter is functioning properly. If the power light remains off, the AC adapter is not functioning and should be replaced.

Contact technical support for information on obtaining a replacement AC power adapter. Select Start > Help and Support > Get assistance. Shutting down the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information will be lost when the computer is shut down. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and computer. Shut down the computer under any of the following conditions:

When you need to replace the battery or access components inside the computer

When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB port

When the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period Although you can shut down the computer with the power switch, the recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. To shut down the computer, follow these steps:

NOTE:

before shutdown is possible. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, you must first exit Sleep or Hibernation 1. Save your work and close all open programs. 2. Click Start. 3. Click Shut down. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Testing an AC adapter 75 If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Slide the power switch to the right and hold it for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. 76 Chapter 6 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

7 Drives Identifying installed drives Your computer includes a hard drive (with a rotating disc) or a solid-state drive (SSD) with solid-state memory. Because it has no moving parts, an SSD does not generate as much heat as a hard drive. To view the drives installed on the computer, select Start > Computer. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing applications, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying installed drives 77 Handling drives Drives are fragile computer components that must be handled with care. Refer to the following cautions before handling drives. Additional cautions are included with the procedures to which they apply. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

Before you move a computer or external hard drive from one location, initiate Sleep, and allow the screen to clear. Before handling a drive, discharge static electricity by touching the unpainted metal surface of the drive. Do not touch the connector pins on a removable drive or on the computer. Handle a drive carefully; do not drop a drive or place items on it. Before removing or inserting a drive, shut down the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on and then shut it down through the operating system. Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive into a drive bay. Do not type on the keyboard or move the computer while the optical drive is writing to a disc. The write process is sensitive to vibration. When the battery is the only source of power, be sure that the battery is sufficiently charged before writing to media. Avoid exposing a drive to temperature or humidity extremes. Avoid exposing a drive to liquids. Do not spray the drive with cleaning products. Remove media from a drive before removing the drive from the drive bay, or traveling with, shipping, or storing a drive. If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-

through devices and security wands. The airport security devices that check carry-on luggage, such as conveyor belts, use X-rays instead of magnetism and will not damage a drive. 78 Chapter 7 Drives Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Improving hard drive performance Using Disk Defragmenter As you use the computer, files on the hard drive become fragmented. Disk Defragmenter consolidates the fragmented files and folders on the hard drive so that the system can run more efficiently. After you start Disk Defragmenter, it works without supervision. Depending on the size of your hard drive and the number of fragmented files, Disk Defragmenter may take more than an hour to complete. You may want to set it to run during the night or another time when you do not need access to your computer. HP recommends defragmenting your hard drive at least once a month. You may set Disk Defragmenter to run on a monthly schedule, but you can defragment your computer manually at any time. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Defragmenter. 2. Click Defragment disk. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Disk Cleanup searches the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer to run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. 2. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Cleanup. Follow the on-screen instructions. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Improving hard drive performance 79 Using HP 3D DriveGuard HP 3D DriveGuard protects the hard drive by parking the drive and halting I/O requests under either of the following conditions:

You drop the computer. You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power.

A short time after the end of one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. If the upgrade bay contains a hard drive, the hard drive is protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. NOTE:

Hard drives installed in optional docking devices or connected to USB ports are not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. Because solid-state drives lack rotating parts, protection by HP 3D DriveGuard is unnecessary. For more information, refer to the HP 3D DriveGuard software Help. Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status The drive light on the computer changes to an amber color to show that the drive is parked. To determine whether drives are currently protected or whether a drive is parked, select Start > Control Panel >

Hardware and Sound > Windows Mobility Center:

If the software is enabled, a green check mark is superimposed over the hard drive icon. If the software is disabled, a white diagonal line is superimposed over the hard drive icon. If the drives are parked, a yellow moon is superimposed over the hard drive icon.

NOTE: The icon in the Mobility Center may not show the most up-to-date status for the drive. For immediate updates after a change in status, you need to enable the notification area icon. To enable the notification area icon:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > HP 3D DriveGuard. NOTE:

If prompted by User Account Control, click Yes. 2. On the Icon in system tray row, click Show. 3. Click OK. If HP 3D DriveGuard has parked the drive, the computer will behave in the following ways:

The computer will not shut down. The computer will not initiate Sleep or Hibernation, except as described in the following Note. NOTE:

DriveGuard allows the computer to initiate Hibernation. If the computer is running on battery power and reaches a critical battery level, HP 3D Before you move the computer, HP recommends that you either shut it down, or initiate Sleep or Hibernation. 80 Chapter 7 Drives Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using HP 3D DriveGuard software The HP 3D DriveGuard software enables you to perform the following tasks:

Enable and disable HP 3D DriveGuard. NOTE: Permission to enable or disable HP 3D DriveGuard is dependent on certain user privileges. Members of an Administrator group can change privileges for non-Administrator users. Determine whether a drive in the system is supported.

To open the software and change settings, follow these steps:

1. In Mobility Center, click the hard drive icon to open the HP 3D DriveGuard window. or Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > HP 3D DriveGuard. NOTE:

If prompted by User Account Control, click Yes. 2. Click the appropriate button to change settings. 3. Click OK. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using HP 3D DriveGuard 81 Replacing the hard drive in the hard drive bay CAUTION: To prevent information loss or an unresponsive system:

Shut down the computer before removing the hard drive from the hard drive bay. Do not remove the hard drive while the computer is on, in the Sleep state, or in Hibernation. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by sliding the power switch to the right. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. To remove a hard drive:

1. 2. Save your work. Shut down the computer and close the display. 3. Disconnect all external hardware devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the hard drive bay toward you. 6. Remove the battery from the computer. 7. Loosen the 3 hard drive cover screws (1). 8. Remove the hard drive cover (2). 9. Remove the 2 hard drive bracket screws (1). 82 Chapter 7 Drives Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

10. Remove the hard drive bracket (2). 11. Grasp the mylar tab on the hard drive and pull upward (1) until the hard drive is at a 45-degree angle. 12. With the hard drive at a 45-degree angle, pull it forward (2) until the rear of the hard drive is clear of the computer back edge. 13. Lift the hard drive (3) out of the hard drive bay. To install a hard drive:

1. Insert the rear of the hard drive at a 45-degree angle into the back of the hard drive bay (1). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Replacing the hard drive in the hard drive bay 83 2. Lower the front of the hard drive down onto the system board connector (2), and then press down

(3) to connect the hard drive. 3. Replace the hard drive bracket (1). 4. Replace the 2 hard drive bracket screws (2). 5. Align the tabs (1) on the hard drive cover with the notches on the computer. 6. Close the cover (2). 84 Chapter 7 Drives Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

7. Tighten the 3 hard drive cover screws (3). 8. Replace the battery. 9. Turn the computer right-side up, and then reconnect external power and external devices. 10. Turn on the computer. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Replacing the hard drive in the hard drive bay 85 8 External devices Using a USB device Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a hardware interface that can be used to connect an optional external device, such as a USB keyboard, mouse, drive, printer, scanner, or hub. Some USB devices may require additional support software, which is usually included with the device. For more information about device-specific software, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. Your computer model has 3 USB ports, which support USB 1.0, USB 1.1, and USB 2.0 devices. A USB hub provides additional USB ports that can be used with the computer. Connecting a USB device CAUTION: To prevent damage to a USB connector, use minimal force to connect a USB device.

To connect a USB device to the computer, connect the USB cable for the device to the USB port. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected. NOTE: The first time you connect a USB device, a message is displayed in the notification area to let you know the device is recognized by the computer. Stopping and removing a USB device CAUTION: To prevent loss of information or an unresponsive system, stop a USB device before removing it. 86 Chapter 8 External devices Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

CAUTION: To prevent damage to a USB connector, do not pull on the cable to remove the USB device. To stop and remove a USB device:

1. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware icon, click the Show Hidden Icons icon (< or

<<) in the notification area. 2. Click the name of the device in the list. NOTE:

If the USB device is not listed, you do not have to stop the device before you remove it. 3. Click Stop, and then click OK. 4. Remove the device. Using USB legacy support USB legacy support (enabled at the factory) permits the following actions:

Using a USB keyboard, mouse, or hub connected to a USB port on the computer during startup or in an MS-DOS-based program or utility Starting or restarting from an optional external MultiBay or an optional USB bootable device

To disable or reenable USB legacy support in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter the BIOS Setup. 3. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select System Configuration, and then select Device Configurations. 4. 5. To disable USB legacy support, click Disabled next to USB legacy support. To reenable USB legacy support, click Enabled next to USB legacy support. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click Save in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using a USB device 87 Using a 1394 device IEEE 1394 is a hardware interface that connects a high-speed multimedia or data storage device to the computer. Scanners, digital cameras, and digital camcorders often require a 1394 connection. Some 1394 devices may require additional support software, which is usually included with the device. For more information about device-specific software, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. The 1394 port also supports IEEE 1394a devices. Connecting a 1394 device CAUTION: To prevent damage to a 1394 port connector, use minimal force when connecting a 1394 device.

To connect a 1394 device to the computer, connect the 1394 cable for the device to the 1394 port. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected. Stopping and removing a 1394 device CAUTION: To prevent loss of information or an unresponsive system, stop the 1394 device before removing it. CAUTION: To prevent damage to a 1394 connector, do not pull on the cable to remove the 1394 device. 1. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware icon, click the Show Hidden Icons icon (< or

<<) in the notification area. 2. Click the name of the device in the list. NOTE:

If the device is not listed, you do not have to stop the device before you remove it. 3. Click Stop, and then click OK. 4. Remove the device. 88 Chapter 8 External devices Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using external drives Removable external drives expand your options for storing and accessing information. A USB drive can be added by connecting the drive to a USB port on the computer. USB drives include the following types:

1.44-megabyte diskette drive Hard drive module (a hard drive with an adapter attached) DVD-ROM Drive DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive DVDRW/CD-RW Combo Drive Using optional external devices NOTE: For more information about required software and drivers, or to learn which computer port to use, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. To connect an external device to the computer:

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the equipment when connecting a powered device, be sure that the device is turned off and the AC power cord is unplugged. 1. Connect the device to the computer. 2. 3. If you are connecting a powered device, plug the device power cord into a grounded AC outlet. Turn on the device. To disconnect an unpowered external device, turn off the device, and then disconnect it from the computer. To disconnect a powered external device, turn off the device, disconnect it from the computer, and then unplug the AC power cord. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using external drives 89 Using the docking connector The docking connector connects the computer to an optional docking device. An optional docking device provides additional ports and connectors that can be used with the computer. 90 Chapter 8 External devices Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

9 External media cards Using Media Card Reader cards Optional digital cards provide secure data storage and convenient data sharing. These cards are often used with digital mediaequipped cameras and PDAs as well as with other computers. The Digital Media Slot supports the following digital card formats:

Memory Stick (MS)

Memory Stick Pro (MSP)

MultiMediaCard (MMC)

Secure Digital Input/Output (SD I/O) Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card xD-Picture Card (XD) xD-Picture Card (XD) Type H xD-Picture Card (XD) Type M Inserting a digital card CAUTION: To avoid damaging the digital card or the computer, do not insert any type of adapter into the SD Card Reader. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the digital card connectors, use minimal force to insert a digital card. 1. Hold the digital card label-side up, with the connectors facing the computer. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using Media Card Reader cards 91 2. Insert the card into the Media Card Reader, and then push in on the card until it is firmly seated. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected, and a menu of available options may be displayed. Stopping and removing a digital card CAUTION: To prevent loss of data or an unresponsive system, stop a digital card before removing it. 1. Save your information and close all programs associated with the digital card. NOTE: To stop a data transfer, click Cancel in the operating system Copying window. 2. Stop the digital card:

a. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware icon, click the Show Hidden Icons icon

(< or <<) in the notification area. b. Click the name of the digital card in the list. c. Click Stop, and then click OK. 3. Press in on the digital card (1), and then remove the card from the slot (2). 92 Chapter 9 External media cards Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using ExpressCards (select models only) An ExpressCard is a high-performance PC Card that is inserted into the ExpressCard slot. Like standard PC Cards, ExpressCards are designed to conform to the standard specifications of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA). Configuring an ExpressCard Install only the software required for your device. If you are instructed by the ExpressCard manufacturer to install device drivers:

Install only the device drivers for your operating system. Do not install other software, such as card services, socket services, or enablers, supplied by the ExpressCard manufacturer. Inserting an ExpressCard CAUTION: To prevent damage to the computer and external media cards, do not insert a PC Card into an ExpressCard slot. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the connectors:

Use minimal force when inserting an ExpressCard. Do not move or transport the computer when an ExpressCard is in use. The ExpressCard slot may contain a protective insert. To remove the insert:

1. 2. Press in on the insert (1) to unlock it. Pull the insert out of the slot (2). To insert an ExpressCard:

1. Hold the card label-side up, with the connectors facing the computer. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using ExpressCards (select models only) 93 2. Insert the card into the ExpressCard slot, and then push in on the card until it is firmly seated. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected, and a menu of options may be displayed. NOTE: The first time you insert an ExpressCard, a message is displayed in the notification area to let you know the device is recognized by the computer. NOTE: An inserted ExpressCard uses power even when idle. To conserve power, stop or remove an ExpressCard when it is not in use. Stopping and removing an ExpressCard CAUTION: To prevent loss of data or an unresponsive system, stop an ExpressCard before removing it. 1. Save your information and close all programs associated with the ExpressCard. NOTE: To stop a data transfer, click Cancel in the operating system Copying window. 2. Stop the ExpressCard:

a. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware icon, click the Show Hidden Icons icon

(< or <<) in the notification area. b. Click the name of the ExpressCard in the list. c. Click Stop, and then click OK. 3. Release and remove the ExpressCard:

a. Gently press in on the ExpressCard (1) to unlock it. b. Pull the ExpressCard out of the slot (2). 94 Chapter 9 External media cards Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using ExpressCards (select models only) 95 Using Smart Cards (select models only) NOTE: The term smart card is used throughout this chapter to refer to both smart cards and Java Cards. A smart card is a credit cardsized accessory that carries a microchip containing memory and a microprocessor. Like personal computers, smart cards have an operating system to manage input and output, and they include security features to protect against tampering. Industry-standard smart cards are used with the smart card reader (select models only). A PIN is needed to gain access to the contents of the microchip. For more information about smart card security features, refer to Help and Support. NOTE: Your computer may look slightly different from the illustrations in this chapter. Inserting a smart card To insert a smart card:

1. Holding the smart card label-side up, gently slide the card into the smart card reader until the card is seated. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions for logging on to the computer using the smart card PIN. Removing a smart card To remove a smart card:

Grasp the edge of the smart card, and pull it out of the smart card reader. 96 Chapter 9 External media cards Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

10 Memory modules The computer has one memory module compartment located on the bottom of the computer. The memory capacity of the computer can be upgraded by adding a memory module to the vacant expansion memory module slot or by upgrading the existing memory module in the memory module slot. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock and damage to the equipment, unplug the power cord and remove all batteries before installing a memory module. CAUTION: Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage electronic components. Before beginning any procedure, touch a grounded metal object to be sure that you are discharged of static electricity. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

97 Adding or replacing a memory module To add or replace a memory module in the memory module slot, follow these steps:

1. 2. Save your work. Shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by sliding the power switch to the right. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. 6. Remove all batteries from the computer. 7. 8. Loosen the 3 hard drive compartment cover screws (1). Lift the hard drive compartment cover away from the computer (2). 9. If you are replacing a memory module, remove the existing memory module:

a. Pull away the retention clips (1) on each side of the memory module. The memory module tilts up. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module. 98 Chapter 10 Memory modules Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

b. Grasp the edge of the memory module (2), and gently pull the module out of the memory module slot. To protect a memory module after removal, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 10. Insert a memory module:

NOTE:

that you insert the memory module into the primary memory module slot. If you are inserting a memory module and both memory module slots are vacant, be sure a. Align the notched edge (1) of the memory module with the tab in the memory module slot. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module and do not bend the memory module. b. With the memory module at a 45-degree angle from the surface of the memory module compartment, press the module (2) into the memory module slot until it is seated. c. Gently press the memory module (3) down, applying pressure to both the left and right edges of the memory module, until the retention clips snap into place. 11. Align the tabs (1) on the hard drive compartment cover with the notches on the computer. Adding or replacing a memory module 99 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

12. Close the cover (2). 13. Tighten the 3 hard drive compartment cover screws (3). 14. Replace the batteries. 15. Turn the computer right-side up, and then reconnect external power and external devices. 16. Turn on the computer. 100 Chapter 10 Memory modules Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

11 Security Protecting the computer NOTE: Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents may not prevent a product from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE: Your computer supports CompuTrace, which is an online security-based tracking and recovery service available in select regions. If the computer is stolen, CompuTrace can track the computer if the unauthorized user accesses the Internet. You must purchase the software and subscribe to the service in order to use CompuTrace. For information about ordering the CompuTrace software, go to the HP Web site at http://www.hpshopping.com. Security features provided with your computer can protect the computer, personal information, and data from a variety of risks. The way you use your computer will determine which security features you need to use. The Windows operating system offers certain security features. Additional security features are listed in the following table. Most of these additional security features can be configured in the Computer Setup utility (referred to hereafter as Computer Setup). To protect against Unauthorized use of the computer Use this security feature HP ProtectTools Security Manager, in combination with a password, smart card, and/or fingerprint reader Unauthorized access to Computer Setup (f10) BIOS administrator password in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive DriveLock password in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized startup from an optical drive, diskette drive, or internal network adapter Boot options feature in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized access to a Windows user account HP ProtectTools Security Manager Unauthorized access to data Unauthorized access to Computer Setup settings and other system identification information

Firewall software

Windows updates

Drive encryption for HP ProtectTools BIOS administrator password in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized removal of the computer Security cable slot (used with an optional security cable)

*Computer Setup is a preinstalled, ROM-based utility that can be used even when the operating system is not working or will not load. You can use either a pointing device (TouchPad, pointing stick, or USB mouse) or the keyboard to navigate and make selections in Computer Setup. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Protecting the computer 101 Using passwords Most security features use passwords. Whenever you set a password, write down the password and store it in a secure location away from the computer. Note the following password considerations:

Setup and DriveLock passwords are set in Computer Setup and are managed by the system BIOS. The embedded security password, which is an HP ProtectTools Security Manager password, can be enabled in Computer Setup to provide BIOS password protection in addition to their normal HP ProtectTools functions. The embedded security password is used with the optional embedded security chip.

Windows passwords are set only in the Windows operating system.

If you forget the BIOS administrator password set in Computer Setup, you can use HP SpareKey to access the utility. If you forget both the DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password set in Computer Setup, the hard drive that is protected by the passwords is permanently locked and can no longer be used. You can use the same password for a Computer Setup feature and for a Windows security feature. You can also use the same password for more than one Computer Setup feature. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program.

Write down your passwords and store them in a secure place away from the computer. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer.

The following tables list commonly used Windows and BIOS administrator passwords and describe their functions. Setting passwords in Windows Windows passwords Administrator password*

User password*

Function Protects access to a Windows administrator-level account. Protects access to a Windows user account.

*For information about setting a Windows administrator password or a Windows user password, select Start > Help and Support. Setting passwords in Computer Setup BIOS administrator passwords Function BIOS administrator password DriveLock master password Protects access to Computer Setup. Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock. It is also used to remove DriveLock protection. This password is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process. 102 Chapter 11 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

BIOS administrator passwords Function DriveLock user password TPM embedded security password Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock, and is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process. When enabled as a BIOS administrator password, protects access to the computer contents when the computer turns on, restarts, or exits Hibernation. This password requires the optional embedded security chip to support this security feature. BIOS administrator password The Computer Setup BIOS administrator password protects the configuration settings and system identification information in Computer Setup. After this password is set, it must be entered to access Computer Setup and to make changes using Computer Setup. Note the following characteristics of the BIOS administrator password:

It is not interchangeable with a Windows administrator password, although both passwords can be identical. It is not displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. It must be set and entered with the same keys. For example, a BIOS administrator password set with keyboard number keys will not be recognized if you enter it thereafter with embedded numeric keypad number keys. It can include any combination of up to 32 letters and numbers and is not case sensitive unless mandated by the administrator. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using passwords 103 Managing a BIOS administrator password A BIOS administrator password is set, changed, and deleted in Computer Setup. To set or change this password in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. 3. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Security > Change Password, and then press enter. 4. When prompted, type your current password. 5. When prompted, type your new password. 6. When prompted, type your new password again to confirm. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click Save in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. To delete this password in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. 3. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Security > Change Password, and then press enter. 4. When prompted, type your current password. 5. When prompted for the new password, leave the field empty, and then press enter. 6. Read the warning. To continue, select YES. 7. When prompted to type your new password again, leave the field empty, and then press enter. 8. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click Save in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. 104 Chapter 11 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Entering a BIOS administrator password At the BIOS administrator password prompt, type your password (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. After three unsuccessful attempts to enter the BIOS administrator password, you must restart the computer and try again. Using Computer Setup DriveLock CAUTION: To prevent the DriveLock-protected hard drive from becoming permanently unusable, record the DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password in a safe place away from your computer. If you forget both DriveLock passwords, the hard drive will be permanently locked and can no longer be used. DriveLock protection prevents unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive. DriveLock can be applied only to the internal hard drive(s) of the computer. After DriveLock protection is applied to a drive, a password must be entered to access the drive. The drive must be inserted into the computer or an advanced port replicator in order for it to be accessed by the DriveLock passwords. To apply DriveLock protection to an internal hard drive, a user password and a master password must be set in Computer Setup. Note the following considerations about using DriveLock protection:

After DriveLock protection is applied to a hard drive, the hard drive can be accessed only by entering either the user password or the master password. The owner of the user password should be the day-to-day user of the protected hard drive. The owner of the master password may be either a system administrator or the day-to-day user. The user password and the master password can be identical. You can delete a user password or master password only by removing DriveLock protection from the drive. DriveLock protection can be removed from the drive only with the master password. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using passwords 105 Setting a DriveLock password To set a DriveLock password in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. 3. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Security > DriveLock passwords, and then press enter. 4. Use a pointing device to click the hard drive you want to protect. or Use the arrow keys to select the hard drive you want to protect, and then press enter. 5. Read the warning. To continue, select YES. 6. 7. 8. 9. Type your master password in the New password and Verify new password fields, and then press enter. Type your user password in the New password and Verify new password fields, and then press enter. To confirm DriveLock protection on the drive you have selected, type DriveLock in the confirmation field, and then press enter. NOTE: The DriveLock confirmation is case sensitive. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click Save in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Entering a DriveLock password Be sure that the hard drive is inserted into the computer (not into an optional docking device or external MultiBay). At the DriveLock Password prompt, type your user or master password (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. After two incorrect attempts to enter the password, you must shut down the computer and try again. Changing a DriveLock password To change a DriveLock password in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. 106 Chapter 11 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

3. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Security > DriveLock passwords, and then press enter. 4. Use a pointing device to select an internal hard drive. or Use the arrow keys to select an internal hard drive, and then press enter. 5. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select the password you want to change. 6. 7. Type your current password in the Old password field, type a new password in the New password and Verify new password fields, and then press enter. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click Save in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Removing DriveLock protection To remove DriveLock protection in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. 3. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Security > DriveLock password, and then press enter. 4. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select an internal hard drive, and then press enter. 5. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Disable protection. 6. 7. Type your master password, and then press enter. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click Save in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Using Computer Setup Auto DriveLock In a multiple-user environment, you can set an Automatic DriveLock password. When the Automatic DriveLock password is enabled, a random user password and a DriveLock master password will be created for you. When any user passes the password credential, the same random user and DriveLock master password will be used to unlock the drive. NOTE: You must have a BIOS administrator password before you can access the Automatic DriveLock features. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using passwords 107 Entering an Automatic DriveLock password To enable an Automatic DriveLock password in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. 3. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Security > Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. 4. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select an internal hard drive, and then press enter. 5. Read the warning. To continue, select YES. 6. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click Save in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit, and then press enter. Removing Automatic DriveLock protection To remove DriveLock protection in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. 3. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Security > Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. 4. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select an internal hard drive, and then press enter. 5. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Disable protection. 6. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click Save in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit, and then press enter. 108 Chapter 11 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using Computer Setup security features Securing system devices You can disable or enable system devices from the following menus in Computer Setup:

Boot Options Device Configurations Built-In Device Options Port Options

To disable or reenable system devices in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. 3. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select System Configuration > Boot Options, or System Configuration > Device Configurations or, System Configuration > Built-In Device Options, or System Configuration > Port Options. 4. 5. Press enter. To disable an option, use a pointing device to click Disabled next to the option. or Use the arrow keys to select Disabled next to the option, and then press enter. 6. To reenable an option, use a pointing device to click Enabled next to the option. or Use the arrow keys to select Enabled next to the option, and then press enter. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click Save in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Viewing Computer Setup System Information The System Information feature in Computer Setup provides two types of system information:

Identification information about the computer model and the batteries Specification information about the processor, cache, memory, ROM, video revision, and keyboard controller revision Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using Computer Setup security features 109 To view this general system information in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. 3. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select File > System Information, and then press enter. NOTE: To prevent unauthorized access to this information, you must create a BIOS administrator password in Computer Setup. Using Computer Setup System IDs The System IDs feature in Computer Setup allows you to display or enter the computer asset tag and ownership tag. NOTE: To prevent unauthorized access to this information, you must create a BIOS administrator password in Computer Setup. To manage this feature in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. 3. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Security > System IDs, and then press enter. 4. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Notebook Asset Tag or Notebook Ownership Tag, and then enter the information. 5. 6. Press enter when finished. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click Save in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. 110 Chapter 11 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using antivirus software When you use the computer to access e-mail, a network, or the Internet, you expose the computer to computer viruses. Computer viruses can disable the operating system, programs, or utilities, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. McAfee Total Protection antivirus software is either preinstalled or preloaded on the computer. If the antivirus software is preinstalled, select Start > All Programs > McAfee > Managed Services > Total Protection. If the software is preloaded, select Start > All Programs > HP Software Setup, and then follow the instructions on the screen to load the McAfee Total Protection software. For more information about computer viruses, type viruses in the Search box in Help and Support. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using antivirus software 111 Using firewall software When you use the computer to access e-mail, a network, or the Internet, unauthorized persons may be able to gain access to the computer, your personal files, and information about you. Use the firewall software preinstalled on the computer to protect your privacy. McAfee Total Protection antivirus software is preinstalled on the computer. To access your software, select Start > All Programs > McAfee >

Managing Services > Total Protection. Firewall features include logging and reporting of network activity, and automatic monitoring of all incoming and outgoing traffic. For more information, refer to the software manufacturers instructions. These instructions may be provided with the software, on disc, or on the manufacturers Web site. NOTE: Under some circumstances a firewall can block access to Internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a network, or block authorized e-mail attachments. To temporarily resolve the problem, disable the firewall, perform the task that you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall as necessary, and adjust the policies and settings of other intrusion detection systems. For additional information, contact your network administrator or IT department. 112 Chapter 11 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Installing critical updates CAUTION: Microsoft sends alerts regarding critical updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all critical updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. Updates to the operating system and other software may have become available after the computer was shipped. To be sure that all available updates are installed on the computer, observe these guidelines:

Run Windows Update monthly to install the latest software from Microsoft. Obtain updates, as they are released, from the Microsoft Web site and through the updates link in Help and Support. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Installing critical updates 113 Using HP ProtectTools Security Manager (select models only) HP ProtectTools Security Manager software is preinstalled on select computer models. This software can be accessed through Windows Control Panel. It provides security features that help protect against unauthorized access to the computer, networks, and critical data. For more information, refer to the HP ProtectTools online Help. 114 Chapter 11 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Installing a security cable NOTE: A security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. 1. 2. 3. Loop the security cable around a secured object. Insert the key (1) into the cable lock (2). Insert the cable lock into the security cable slot on the computer (3), and then lock the cable lock with the key. NOTE: The location of the security cable slot varies by computer model. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Installing a security cable 115 12 Software updates Updating software Updated versions of the software provided with your computer are available either through the HP Assistant utility or on the HP Web site. HP Assistant automatically checks for updates from HP. The utility runs at a specified interval and provides a list of support alerts, such as security enhancements, and optional software and driver updates. You can manually check for updates at any time by selecting Start > Help and Support > Maintain, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Most software on the HP Web site is packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some BIOS updates may be packaged in compressed files called ROMPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. (Readme.txt files included with ROMPaqs are provided in English only.) You can also access software updates by obtaining the Support Software disc (purchased separately). This disc includes device drivers, BIOS updates, and utilities. To purchase the current Support Software disc or a subscription that provides both the current version and future versions of the disc, follow these steps:

1. Open your Internet browser, and go to http://www.hp.com/support. 2. Select your country or region. 3. Click the option for software and driver downloads, and then type your computer model number in the product box. 4. 5. Press enter. Follow the on-screen instructions. To update the software using a Support Software disc, follow these steps:

1. 2. Insert the Support Software disc into the optical drive. Follow the on-screen instructions. 116 Chapter 12 Software updates Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

To update the software using the HP Web site, follow these steps:

1. Identify your computer model, product category, and series or family. Prepare for a system BIOS update by identifying the BIOS version currently installed on the computer. For details, refer to the

"Determining the BIOS version" section. If your computer is connected to a network, consult the network administrator before installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. NOTE: The computer system BIOS is stored on the system ROM. The BIOS initializes the operating system, determines how the computer will interact with the hardware devices, and provides for data transfer among hardware devices, including the time and date. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. 2. Open your Internet browser, and go to http://www.hp.com/support. 3. Select your country or region. 4. Click the option for software and driver downloads, and then type your computer model number in the product box. 5. 6. Press enter. Follow the on-screen instructions. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Updating software 117 Updating the BIOS To update the BIOS, first determine what BIOS version you currently have, and then download and install the new BIOS. Determining the BIOS version BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be displayed by pressing fn+esc (if you are already in Windows) or by using Computer Setup. To use Computer Setup for displaying BIOS information, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. 3. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select File > System Information. 4. Press esc to return to the File menu. 5. Click Exit in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select File > Ignore changes and exit, and then press enter. 118 Chapter 12 Software updates Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To prevent damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these guidelines:

Do not disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep or Hibernation. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. To download a BIOS update:

NOTE: BIOS updates are posted as needed. A newer BIOS update may not be available for your computer. It is recommended that you check the HP Web site periodically for BIOS updates. 1. Open your Internet browser, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and then select your country or region. 2. Click the option for software and driver downloads, type your computer model number in the product box, and then press enter. 3. Click your specific product from the models listed. 4. Click your operating system. 5. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions to access the BIOS update you want to download. Make a note of the download date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. At the download area, perform these steps:

a. b. Identify the BIOS update that is newer than the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. Follow the instructions on the screen to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update will be downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. NOTE:

any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before installing BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are displayed, follow these steps:

1. Open Windows Explorer by selecting Start > Computer. 2. Double-click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Updating the BIOS 119 NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. 5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you may delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. 120 Chapter 12 Software updates Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Updating programs and drivers 1. Open your Internet browser, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and then select your country or region. 2. Click the option for software and driver downloads, type your computer model number in the product box, and then press enter. or If you want a specific SoftPaq, type the SoftPaq number in the Search box, at the top-right corner of the screen. Then press enter, and follow the instructions provided. Proceed to step 6. 3. Click your specific product from the models listed. 4. Click your operating system. 5. When the list of updates is displayed, click an update to open a window containing additional information. 6. Click Download. 7. Click Run to install the updated software without downloading the file. or Click Save to save the file to your computer. When prompted, select a storage location on your hard drive. After the file is downloaded, navigate to the folder where the file was stored, and then double-click the file to install the update. 8. If prompted to do so, restart your computer after the installation is complete. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Updating programs and drivers 121 Using SoftPaq Download Manager HP SoftPaq Download Manager (SDM) is a tool that provides quick access to SoftPaq information for HP business computers without requiring the SoftPaq number. Using this tool, you can easily search for SoftPaqs and then download and unpack them. SoftPaq Download Manager works by reading and downloading, from the HP FTP site, a published database file containing computer model and SoftPaq information. SoftPaq Download Manager allows you to specify one or more computer models to determine which SoftPaqs are available for download. SoftPaq Download Manager checks the HP FTP site for updates to the database and software. If updates are found, they are downloaded and applied automatically. SoftPaq Download Manager is available on the HP Web site. To use SoftPaq Download Manager to download SoftPaqs, you must first download and install the program. Go to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/sdm, and follow the instructions to download and install SoftPaq Download Manager. To download SoftPaqs:

1. Click Start > All Programs > HP > HP SoftPaq Download Manager. 2. When the SoftPaq Download Manager opens for the first time, a window is displayed asking if you want to show only software for the computer you are using or to show the software for all supported models. Select Show software for all supported models. If you have used HP SoftPaq Download Manager previously, go to Step 3. a. b. Select your operating system and language filters in the Configuration Options window. The filters limit the number of options that are listed in the Product Catalog pane. For example, if only Windows 7 Professional is selected in the operating system filter, the only operating system that is displayed in the Product Catalog is Windows 7 Professional. To add other operating systems, change the filter settings in the Configuration Options window. Refer to the HP SoftPaq Download Manager software Help for more information. 3. In the left pane, click the (+) sign to expand the model list, and then select the model or models of the products you want to update. 4. Click Find Available SoftPaqs to download a list of available SoftPaqs for the selected computer. 5. Select from the list of available SoftPaqs, and then click Download Only if you have many SoftPaqs to download, because the SoftPaq selection and Internet connection speed determine how long the download process will take. If you want to download only one or two SoftPaqs and have a high-speed Internet connection, click Download & Unpack. 6. Right-click Install SoftPaq in the SoftPaq Download Manager software to install the selected SoftPaqs on the computer. 122 Chapter 12 Software updates Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

13 Backup and recovery To protect your information, use Windows Backup and Restore to back up individual files and folders, back up your entire hard drive (select models only), create system repair discs (select models only), or create system restore points. In case of system failure, you can use the backup files to restore the contents of your computer. Windows Backup and Restore provides the following options:

Creating a system repair disc (select models only) Backing up individual files and folders Creating a system image (select models only) Scheduling automatic backups (select models only) Creating system restore points Recovering individual files Restoring the computer to a previous state Recovering information using recovery tools

NOTE: For detailed instructions, perform a search for these topics in Help and Support. NOTE:

them for later use. In case of system instability, HP recommends that you print the recovery procedures and save Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

123 Backing up your information Recovery after a system failure is as complete as your most current backup. You should create system repair discs (select models only) and your initial backup immediately after software setup. As you add new software and data files, you should continue to back up your system on a regular basis to maintain a reasonably current backup. The system repair discs (select models only) are used to start up (boot) the computer and repair the operating system in case of system instability or failure. Your initial and subsequent backups allow you to restore your data and settings if a failure occurs. You can back up your information to an optional external hard drive, a network drive, or discs. Note the following when backing up:

Store personal files in the Documents library, and back it up regularly. Back up templates that are stored in their associated programs. Save customized settings that appear in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your settings. The screen shot can be a time-saver if you have to reset your preferences. To create a screen shot:

1. Display the screen you want to save. 2. Copy the screen image:

To copy only the active window, press alt+fn+prt sc. To copy the entire screen, press fn+prt sc. 3. Open a word-processing document, and then select Edit > Paste. The screen image is added to the document. 4. Save the document.

When backing up to discs, use any of the following types of discs (purchased separately): CD-R, CD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R DL, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, or DVDRW. The discs you use will depend on the type of optical drive installed in your computer. NOTE: DVDs and DVDs with double-layer (DL) support store more information than CDs, so using them for backup reduces the number of recovery discs required.

When backing up to discs, number each disc before inserting it into the optical drive of the computer. To create a backup using Backup and Restore, follow these steps:

NOTE: Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you start the backup process. NOTE: The backup process may take over an hour, depending on file size and the speed of the computer. 1. 2. Select Start > All Programs > Maintenance > Backup and Restore. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up your backup, create a system image (select models only), or create a system repair disc (select models only). 124 Chapter 13 Backup and recovery Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Backing up your information 125 Performing a recovery In case of system failure or instability, the computer provides the following tools to recover your files:

Windows recovery tools: You can use Windows Backup and Restore to recover information you have previously backed up. You can also use Windows Startup Repair to fix problems that might prevent Windows from starting correctly.

f11 recovery tools: You can use the f11 recovery tools to recover your original hard drive image. The image includes the Windows operating system and software programs installed at the factory. NOTE:

If you are unable to boot (start up) your computer and you cannot use the system repair discs you previously created (select models only), you must purchase a Windows 7 operating system DVD to reboot the computer and repair the operating system. For additional information, refer to the Using a Windows 7 operating system DVD (purchased separately) section in this guide. Using the Windows recovery tools To recover information you previously backed up, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > All Programs > Maintenance > Backup and Restore. Follow the on-screen instructions to recover your system settings, your computer (select models only), or your files. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. To recover your information using Startup Repair, follow these steps:

CAUTION: Using Startup Repair completely erases hard drive contents and reformats the hard drive. All files you have created and any software installed on the computer are permanently removed. When reformatting is complete, the recovery process restores the operating system, as well as the drivers, software, and utilities from the backup used for recovery. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. If possible, back up all personal files. If possible, check for the presence of the Windows partition and the HP Recovery partition. To check for the Windows partition, select Start > Computer. To check for the HP Recovery partition, select Start, right-click Computer, click Manage, and then click Disk Management. NOTE:

If the Windows partition and the HP Recovery partition are not listed, you must recover your operating system and programs using the Windows 7 operating system DVD and the Driver Recovery disc (both purchased separately). For additional information, refer to the Using a Windows 7 operating system DVD (purchased separately) section in this guide. If the Windows partition and the HP Recovery partition are listed, restart the computer, and then press f8 before the Windows operating system loads. Select Startup Repair. Follow the on-screen instructions. 126 Chapter 13 Backup and recovery Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

NOTE: For additional information on recovering information using the Windows tools, perform a search for these topics in Help and Support. Using f11 CAUTION: Using f11 completely erases hard drive contents and reformats the hard drive. All files you have created and any software installed on the computer are permanently removed. The f11 recovery tool reinstalls the operating system and HP programs and drivers that were installed at the factory. Software not installed at the factory must be reinstalled. To recover the original hard drive image using f11, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. If possible, back up all personal files. If possible, check for the presence of the HP Recovery partition: select Start, right-click Computer, click Manage, and then click Disk Management. If the HP Recovery partition is not listed, you must recover your operating system and NOTE:

programs using the Windows 7 operating system DVD and the Driver Recovery disc (both purchased separately). For additional information, refer to the Using a Windows 7 operating system DVD (purchased separately) section in this guide. If the HP Recovery partition is listed, restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f11 while the Press <F11> for recovery message is displayed on the screen. Follow the on-screen instructions. Using a Windows 7 operating system DVD (purchased separately) If you are unable to boot (start up) your computer and you cannot use the system repair discs you previously created (select models only), you must purchase a Windows 7 operating system DVD to reboot the computer and repair the operating system. Make sure that your most recent backup (stored on discs or on an external drive) is easily accessible. To order a Windows 7 operating system DVD, go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. You can also order the DVD by calling technical support. For contact information, refer to the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. CAUTION: Using a Windows 7 operating system DVD completely erases hard drive contents and reformats the hard drive. All files you have created and any software installed on the computer are permanently removed. When reformatting is complete, the recovery process helps you restore the operating system, as well as drivers, software, and utilities. To initiate recovery using a Windows 7 operating system DVD, follow these steps:

NOTE: This process takes several minutes. 1. If possible, back up all personal files. 2. Restart the computer, and then insert the Windows 7 operating system DVD into the optical drive before the Windows operating system loads. 3. When prompted, press any keyboard key. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 5. Click Next. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Performing a recovery 127 6. 7. Select Repair your computer. Follow the on-screen instructions. 128 Chapter 13 Backup and recovery Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

14 Computer Setup Starting Computer Setup Computer Setup is a preinstalled, ROM-based utility that can be used even when the operating system is not working or will not load. NOTE: Some of the Computer Setup menu items listed in this guide may not be supported by your computer. NOTE: An external keyboard or mouse connected to a USB port can be used with Computer Setup only if USB legacy support is enabled. To start Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. Using Computer Setup Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup The information and settings in Computer Setup are accessed from the File, Security, Diagnostics, and System Configuration menus. To navigate and select in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

To select a menu or a menu item, use the tab key and the keyboard arrow keys, and then press enter, or use a pointing device to click the item. To scroll up and down, click the up arrow or the down arrow in the upper-right corner of the screen, or use the up arrow key or the down arrow key. To close open dialog boxes and return to the main Computer Setup screen, press esc, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE: You can use either a pointing device (TouchPad, pointing stick, or USB mouse) or the keyboard to navigate and make selections in Computer Setup. 2. 3. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. Select the File, Security, Diagnostics, or System Configuration menu. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Starting Computer Setup 129 To exit Computer Setup menus, choose one of the following methods:

To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes, click the Exit icon in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the tab key and the arrow keys to select File > Ignore changes and exit, and then press enter. or

To save your changes and exit Computer Setup menus, click the Save icon in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the tab key and the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup NOTE: Restoring defaults will not change the hard drive mode. To return all settings in Computer Setup to the values that were set at the factory, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. 3. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select File > Restore defaults. 4. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. To save your changes and exit, click the Save icon in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. NOTE: Your password settings and security settings are not changed when you restore the factory settings. Computer Setup menus The menu tables in this section provide an overview of Computer Setup options. NOTE: Some of the Computer Setup menu items listed in this chapter may not be supported by your computer. 130 Chapter 14 Computer Setup Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

File menu Select System Information Set System Date and Time Restore defaults Ignore changes and exit Save changes and exit Security menu To do this

View identification information for the computer and the batteries in the system. View specification information for the processor, cache and memory size, system ROM, video revision, and keyboard controller version. Set or change the date and time on the computer. Replace the configuration settings in Computer Setup with the original factory settings. (Hard drive mode, password settings, and security settings are not changed when you restore the factory settings.) Cancel any changes entered during the current session. Then exit and restart the computer. Save any changes entered during the current session. Then exit and restart the computer. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. NOTE: Some of the menu items listed in this section may not be supported by your computer. Select To do this Setup BIOS Administrator Password Set up a BIOS administrator password. User Management (requires a BIOS administrator password)

Create a new BIOS user account. View a list of ProtectTools users. Password Policy (requires a BIOS administrator password) Revise password policy criteria. HP SpareKey Enable/disable HP SpareKey (enabled by default). Always Prompt for HP SpareKey Enrollment Enable/disable HP SpareKey enrollment (enabled by default). Fingerprint Reset on Reboot (if present) Reset/clear the fingerprint reader ownership (select models only; disabled by default). Allow Reset of HP ProtectTools security keys Enable/disable reset of HP ProtectTools security keys. Change Password HP SpareKey Enrollment DriveLock Passwords Enter, change, or delete a BIOS administrator password. Enroll or reset HP SpareKey, which is a set of security questions and answers used if you forget your password.

Enable/disable DriveLock on any computer hard drive

(enabled by default). Change a DriveLock user password or master password. NOTE: DriveLock settings are accessible only when you enter Computer Setup by turning on (not restarting) the computer. Computer Setup menus 131 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Select TPM Embedded Security Automatic DriveLock Disk Sanitizer System IDs Diagnostics menu Select System Diagnostics menu To do this Enable/disable support for Trusted Platform Module (TPM) Embedded Security, which protects the computer from unauthorized access to owner functions available in Embedded Security for ProtectTools. For more information, refer to the ProtectTools software Help. NOTE: You must have a setup password to change this setting. Enable/disable Automatic DriveLock support. Run Disk Sanitizer to destroy all existing data on the primary hard drive or the drive in the upgrade bay. CAUTION:

drive is destroyed permanently. If you run Disk Sanitizer, the data on the selected Enter a user-defined computer asset tracking number and ownership tag. To do this Displays the following information:

System Information

Identification information for the computer and the batteries in the system. Specification information for the processor, cache and memory size, system ROM, video revision, and keyboard controller version.

Start-up TestVerifies the system components needed for starting the computer. Run-In TestRuns a comprehensive check on system memory. Hard Disk TestRuns a comprehensive self-test on any hard drive in the system.

Memory TestRuns a comprehensive test on any memory installed in the computer.

Battery TestRuns a comprehensive test on any batteries installed in the computer. Error LogDisplays a log file if any errors have occurred. 132 Chapter 14 Computer Setup Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

System Configuration menu NOTE: Some of the listed System Configuration options may not be supported by your computer. Select Language Boot Options Device Configurations To do this Change the Computer Setup language.

Set a Startup Menu delay (in seconds). Enable/disable Custom Logo (disabled by default). Enable/disable Display Diagnostic URL (enabled by default). Enable/disable CD-ROM boot (enabled by default). Enable/disable SD Card boot (enabled by default). Enable/disable floppy boot (enabled by default). Enable/disable PXE Internal NIC boot (enabled by default). Set the Express Boot Popup delay in seconds. Set the boot order. Enable/disable USB legacy support (enabled by default). When enabled, USB legacy support allows the following:

Use of a USB keyboard in Computer Setup even when a Windows operating system is not running. Startup from bootable USB devices, including a hard drive, diskette drive, or optical drive connected by a USB port to the computer. Select a parallel port mode: ECP (Enhanced Capabilities Port), standard, bidirectional, or EPP (Enhanced Parallel Port). Enable/disable fan always on while connected to an AC outlet (enabled by default). Enable/disable LAN Power Save (select models only). When enabled, saves power by turning off the LAN when not in use (enabled by default). Enable/disable Data Execution Prevention. When enabled, the processor can disable some virus code execution, which helps to improve computer security. SATA (Serial Advanced Technology Attachment) device mode. The following options are available:

AHCI (Advanced Host Controller Interface) IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks)

(select models only) Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Computer Setup menus 133 Select To do this NOTE: Availability of the options above varies by computer model. Enable/disable secondary battery fast charge (enabled by default). Enable/disable HP QuickLook 2 (enabled by default). Enable/disable Virtualization Technology (select models only; disabled by default). Enable/disable TXT (Intel Trusted Execution Technology) (select models only; disabled by default). Enable/disable Dual Core CPU (select models only;

enabled by default). Enable/Disable Unified Extensible Firmware Interface

(UEFI) mode (disabled by default). Enable/disable the wireless button state (enabled by default). Enable/disable embedded WWAN device radio (select models only; enabled by default). Enable/disable embedded Bluetooth device radio

(enabled by default). Enable/disable the Network Interface Controller (LAN)

(enabled by default). Set the wake on LAN state. Options include the following:

Disabled Boot to Network (set by default) Follow Boot Order Enable/disable the fingerprint device (enabled by default). Enable/disable a modem device (enabled by default). Enable/disable the embedded WLAN device (enabled by default). Enable/disable LAN/WLAN switching (disabled by default). Enable the ambient light sensor (enabled by default). Enable/disable the Notebook Multibay device (enabled by default). Enable/disable the integrated camera (select models only; enabled by default).

Built-In Device Options 134 Chapter 14 Computer Setup Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Select Port Options To do this NOTE: All port options are enabled by default.

Enable/disable the Smart Card slot. Enable/disable the ExpressCard slot. Enable/disable the serial port. Enable/disable the parallel port. Enable/disable the flash media reader. Enable/disable the USB port. CAUTION: Disabling the USB port also disables MultiBay devices and ExpressCard devices on the advanced port replicator. Enable/disable the 1394 port. AMT Options NOTE: All AMT options are disabled by default.

Enable/disable Firmware Verbosity. Enable/disable AMT Setup Prompt (CTRL-P). Enable/disable USB Key Provisioning Support. Enable/disable Unconfigure AMT on Next Boot. Enable/disable Terminal Emulation Mode Enable/disable Firmware Progress Event Support. Enable/disable include TYPE-131 in SMBIOS. Set Security Level Restore Security Defaults Change, view, or hide security levels for all BIOS menu items. Restore the default security settings. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Computer Setup menus 135 15 MultiBoot About the boot device order As the computer starts, the system attempts to boot from enabled boot devices. The MultiBoot utility, which is enabled at the factory, controls the order in which the system selects a boot device. Boot devices can include optical drives, diskette drives, a network interface card (NIC), hard drives, and USB devices. Boot devices contain bootable media or files that the computer needs to start and operate properly. NOTE: Some boot devices must be enabled in Computer Setup before they can be included in the boot order. The factory setting is for the computer to select the boot device by searching enabled boot devices and drive bay locations in the following order:

NOTE: Some of the boot devices and drive bay locations listed may not be supported on your computer.

Notebook MultiBay Internal hard drive USB diskette drive USB CD-ROM USB hard drive Notebook Ethernet Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card Docking station MultiBay External SATA drive

You can change the order in which the computer searches for a boot device by changing the boot order in Computer Setup. You can also press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen, and then press f9. Pressing f9 displays a menu that shows the current boot devices and allows you to select a boot device. Or, you can use MultiBoot Express to set the computer to prompt you for a boot location each time the computer turns on or restarts. If MultiBoot is disabled, the computer uses a fixed boot order that consists of first searching for a drive A boot device. If none is found, the computer looks for a drive C boot device. Drive A boot devices include optical drives and diskette drives. Drive C boot devices include optical drives and hard drives. The NIC does not have an assigned drive letter. 136 Chapter 15 MultiBoot Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

NOTE: An optical drive (such as a CD-ROM drive) can boot either as drive A or drive C, depending on the format of the boot CD. The following list describes the factory setting for boot order in which drive letters A and C are assigned when MultiBoot is disabled. (The actual order varies by configuration.)

Boot order for drive A boot devices:

1. Optical drive in an optional docking device or in an optional external MultiBay that contains a disc formatted as drive A 2. Optical drive in the internal MultiBay (select models only) that contains a disc formatted as drive A 3. Diskette drive in an optional docking device or in an optional external MultiBay

Boot order for drive C boot devices:

1. Optical drive in an optional docking device or in an optional external MultiBay that contains a disc formatted as drive C 2. Optical drive in the internal MultiBay (select models only) that contains a disc formatted as drive C 3. Hard drive in the computer hard drive bay 4. Hard drive in an optional docking device or in an optional external MultiBay NOTE: Because no drive letter is associated with the NIC, changing the boot order of a NIC does not affect the drive letters of the other devices. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

About the boot device order 137 Enabling boot devices in Computer Setup The computer will boot to a USB device or a NIC device only if the device has first been enabled in Computer Setup. To start Computer Setup and enable a USB device or a NIC device as a boot device, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. To enable bootable media in USB drives or in drives inserted into an optional docking device (select models only), use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select System Configuration > Device Configurations. Confirm that Enabled is selected next to USB legacy support. NOTE: The USB Port option must be enabled in order to use USB legacy support. It is enabled at the factory. If the port becomes disabled, reenable it by selecting System Configuration > Port Options, and then clicking Enabled next to USB Port. or To enable a NIC device, select System Configuration > Boot Options, and then click Enabled next to PXE Internal NIC boot. 4. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click Save in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. NOTE: To connect a NIC to a Preboot eXecution Environment (PXE) or Remote Program Load (RPL) server without using MultiBoot, press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen, and then quickly press f12. 138 Chapter 15 MultiBoot Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Considering boot order changes Before changing the boot order, note the following considerations:

When the computer restarts after the boot order has been changed, the computer attempts to start using the new boot order.

If there is more than one type of boot device, the computer attempts to boot using the first of each type of boot device (except for optical devices). For example, if the computer is connected to an optional docking device (select models only) that contains a hard drive, this hard drive will be shown in the boot order as a USB hard drive. If the system attempts to boot from this USB hard drive and fails, it will not attempt to boot to the hard drive in the hard drive bay. Instead, it will try to boot to the next type of device in the boot order. However, if there are two optical devices, and the first optical device does not boot (either because it does not contain media or the media is not a boot disc), the system will try to boot to the second optical device. Changing the boot order also changes the logical drive designations. For example, if you start up from a CD-ROM drive with a disc formatted as drive C, that CD-ROM drive becomes drive C and the hard drive in the hard drive bay becomes drive D. The computer will boot from a NIC device only if the device has been enabled in the Built-In Device Options menu of Computer Setup and if booting from the device has been enabled in the Boot Options menu of Computer Setup. Booting from a NIC does not affect logical drive designations because no drive letter is associated with the NIC. Drives in an optional docking device (select models only) are treated like external USB devices in the boot order. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Considering boot order changes 139 Choosing MultiBoot preferences You can use MultiBoot in the following ways:

To set a new boot order that the computer uses each time it is turned on, by changing the boot order in Computer Setup. To dynamically choose the boot device, by pressing esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen, and then pressing f9 to enter the Boot Device Options menu. To use MultiBoot Express to set variable boot orders. This feature prompts you for a boot device each time the computer is turned on or restarted. Setting a new boot order in Computer Setup To start Computer Setup and set a boot device order that the computer uses each time it is turned on or restarted, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. 3. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select System Configuration > Boot Options. Confirm that Enabled is selected next to MultiBoot. NOTE: MultiBoot is enabled at the factory. 4. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select a device in the list. 5. To move the device up in the boot order, use a pointing device to click the plus sign (+) or press the + key. or To move the device down in the boot order, click the minus sign (-) or press the - key. 6. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click Save in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Dynamically choosing a boot device using the F9 prompt To dynamically choose a boot device for the current startup sequence, follow these steps:

1. Open the Select Boot Device menu by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. 2. Press f9. 3. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select a boot device, and then press enter. 140 Chapter 15 MultiBoot Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Your changes go into effect immediately. Setting a MultiBoot Express prompt To start Computer Setup and set the computer to display the MultiBoot startup location menu each time the computer is started or restarted, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. 3. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select System Configuration > Boot Options, and then press enter. 4. 5. In the Express Boot Popup Delay (Sec) field, enter the length of time in seconds that you want the computer to display the startup location menu before it defaults to the current MultiBoot setting.

(When 0 is selected, the Express Boot startup location menu is not displayed). To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, click Save in the lower-left corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Entering MultiBoot Express preferences When the Express Boot menu displays during startup, you have the following choices:

To specify a boot device from the Express Boot menu, select your preference within the allotted time, and then press enter. To prevent the computer from defaulting to the current MultiBoot setting, press any key before the allotted time expires. The computer will not start until you select a boot device and press enter. To allow the computer to start according to the current MultiBoot settings, wait for the allotted time to expire. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Choosing MultiBoot preferences 141 16 Management and printing Using Client Management Solutions Client Management Solutions software provides standards-based solutions for managing client (user) desktop, workstation, notebook, and tablet computers in a networked environment. Client management includes the following key capabilities and features:

Initial software image deployment Remote system software installation Software management and updates ROM updates Tracking and security of computer assets (the hardware and software installed on the computer) Fault notification and recovery of certain system software and hardware components

NOTE: Support for specific features described in this section may vary, depending on computer model and/or version of management software installed on the computer. Configuring and deploying a software image The computer is shipped with a preinstalled system software image. The initial software image is configured during the first-time setup of the computer. After a brief software "unbundling" occurs, the computer is ready to be used. A customized software image can be deployed (distributed) in one of the following ways:

Installing additional software applications after unbundling the preinstalled software image Using software deployment tools, such as Altiris Deployment Solutions, to replace the preinstalled software with a customized software image Using a disk-cloning process to copy the contents from one hard drive to another

The deployment method you use depends on your organization's technology environment and processes. NOTE: The Computer Setup utility and other system features provide further assistance with configuration management and troubleshooting, power management, and the recovery of system software. 142 Chapter 16 Management and printing Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Managing and updating software HP provides several tools for managing and updating software on client computers:

HP Client Manager for Altiris (select models only) NOTE: To download HP Client Manager for Altiris or to obtain more information about HP Client Manager for Altiris, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com. HP CCM (Client Configuration Manager) (select models only) HP SSM (System Software Manager) HP Client Manager for Altiris (select models only) HP Client Manager for Altiris integrates Intelligent Manageability technology into Altiris software. HP Client Manager for Altiris provides superior hardware management capabilities for HP devices:

Detailed views of hardware inventory for asset management System Checkup monitoring and diagnostics

Web-accessible reporting of business-critical details such as thermal warnings and memory alerts Remote updating of system software such as device drivers and the system BIOS

NOTE: Additional functionality can be added when HP Client Manager for Altiris is used with optional Altiris Solutions software (purchased separately). When HP Client Manager for Altiris (installed on a client computer) is used with Altiris Solutions software

(installed on an administrator computer), HP Client Manager for Altiris provides increased management functionality and centralized hardware management of client devices for the following IT life-cycle areas:

Inventory and asset management

Software license compliance Computer tracking and reporting Computer lease contract information and fixed asset tracking

System software deployment and migration

Windows migration System deployment

Personality (personal user settings) migration Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using Client Management Solutions 143

Help desk and problem resolution

Management of help desk tickets Remote troubleshooting Remote problem resolution Client disaster recovery

Software and operations management

Ongoing client management HP system software deployment Application self-healing (the ability to identify and repair certain application problems) Altiris Solutions software provides easy-to-use software distribution capabilities. HP Client Manager for Altiris enables communication with the Altiris Solutions software, which can be used to complete new hardware deployment or personality migration to a new operating system using easy-to-follow wizards. HP Client Manager for Altiris is available for download from the HP Web site. When Altiris Solutions software is used in conjunction with HP System Software Manager or HP Client Manager for Altiris, administrators can also update the system BIOS and device driver software from a central console. HP CCM (Client Configuration Manager) (select models only) HP CCM (Client Configuration Manager) automates the management of software such as operating systems, programs, software updates, and content and configuration settings to ensure that each computer is maintained in the correct configuration. With these automated management solutions, you can manage software throughout the life cycle of the computer. CCM enables you to perform the following tasks:

Collect hardware and software inventory across multiple platforms Prepare a software package and conduct impact analysis prior to distribution Target individual computers, workgroups, or entire populations of computers for deployment and maintenance of software and content according to policies Provision and manage operating systems, applications, and content on distributed computers from any location Integrate CCM with help desks and other system management tools for seamless operations Leverage a common infrastructure for management of software and content on standard computing devices across any network for all enterprise users Scale to meet enterprise needs HP SSM (System Software Manager) HP SSM (System Software Manager) lets you remotely update system-level software on multiple systems simultaneously. When executed on a client computer, SSM detects versions of both hardware and software, and then updates designated software from a central repository, known as a file store. Driver versions that are supported by SSM are denoted with a special icon on the HP driver download 144 Chapter 16 Management and printing Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Web site and on the Support Software CD. To download the SSM utility or to obtain more information on SSM, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/ssm (English only). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using Client Management Solutions 145 Using Intel Active Management Technology (select models only) Intel Active Management Technology (iAMT) allows discovery, repair, and protection of networked computing assets. With iAMT, computers can be managed whether they are on or off. The iAMT solution is available on computers with Intel Centrino with vPro mobile technology. Features of iAMT include:

Hardware inventory information Event notification Power management Remote diagnosis and repair Hardware-based isolation and recoverylimit or cut off computer network access if virus-like activity is detected Enabling the iAMT solution To configure iAMT settings:

NOTE: The ctrl+p prompt is visible only if the AMT Setup Prompt option is enabled in Computer Setup. 1. 2. 3. Turn on or restart the computer. Before Windows starts up, press ctrl+p. NOTE:

the MEBx setup utility. If you do not press ctrl+p at the appropriate time, you must repeat steps 1 and 2 to access Enter the ME password. The factory setting for the password is admin. The MEBx setup utility opens. Use the arrow keys to navigate. 4. Choose to configure Intel ME, configure iAMT, or change the Intel ME password. 5. When you have made your selections, select Exit to close the MEBx setup utility. Using the MEBx setup utility menus NOTE: For more information on iAMT, go to the Intel Web site at http://www.intel.com, and then search for iAMT. Intel ME Configuration Select Intel ME State Control To do this Disable/enable the management engine. Intel ME Firmware Local Update Disable/enable local management of firmware updates. LAN Controller Intel ME Features Control Intel ME Power Control Disable/enable the integrated network controller. Enable AMT or none. Configure the management engine power policies. 146 Chapter 16 Management and printing Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

iAMT Configuration Select Host Name TCP/IP Provision Model Setup and Configuration Un-Provision SOL/IDE-R Password Policy To do this Assign a host name to the computer. Disable/enable network interface or DHCP (assigns an IP address if DHCP has been disabled) or change the domain name. Assign Enterprise or Small Business iAMT model. Set options to control remote configuration of AMT. Reset the AMT configuration to factory defaults. Enable remote boot control to IDE diskette or CD-ROM and assign a user name and password. Set options to control requirements for the network password and the MEBx password. Secure Firmware Update Enable or disable updating firmware remotely. Set PRTC Idle Timeout Set the real-time clock. Set a time-out value. Change Intel ME Password Select Change ME Password To do this Change the password. NOTE: The default password is admin. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using Intel Active Management Technology (select models only) 147 Using the HP Universal Print Driver (select models only) The HP Universal Print Driver Series for Windows is a single intelligent driver that replaces individual drivers for HP networked printers. NOTE: The HP Universal Print Driver is preinstalled on select computer models only. To download the HP Universal Print Driver or obtain more information about using it, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/universalprintdriver (English only). To print using the HP Universal Print Driver:

1. 2. Select File > Print from any application. Select HP Universal Printing PS from the list of printers. 3. Click Print. 4. Enter the printer's IP address or network path. NOTE:

administrator for help. If you cannot identify the printer's IP address or network path, contact your IT 5. Select the Make a permanent instance of this printer in my Printers folder check box. 6. Click Print. 148 Chapter 16 Management and printing Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index Symbols/Numerics 1394 cable, connecting 88 1394 devices connecting 88 stopping 88 1394 port identifying 8 using 88 A AC adapter connecting 65 identifying 13 accessory battery connector, identifying 10 Active Management Technology, Intel 146 administrator password 102 airport security devices 78 Altiris Deployment Solutions 142 ambient light sensor hotkey 44 identifying 11 AMT options AMT setup prompt

(CTRL-P) 135 firmware progress event support 135 firmware verbosity 135 terminal emulation mode 135 TYPE-131 in SMBIOS 135 unconfigure AMT on next antennas boot 135 USB key provisioning support 135 external WWAN 12 WLAN 12 WWAN 12 applications key, Windows 5 audio devices, connecting external 56 audio functions, checking 56 audio-in (microphone) jack, audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 7 identifying 7 Automatic DriveLock password entering 108 removing 108 B backing up files 124 Backup and Restore 123, 124 battery calibrating 71 charging 68, 71 conserving power 73 disposing 74 identifying 13 inserting 67 low battery levels 69 recharging 73 removing 67 replacing 74 storing 74 battery bay 10, 14 battery charge information 44 battery charge, maximizing 69 battery light 3, 68, 69 battery power 66 battery release latch, identifying 10, 67 battery temperature 74 battery test 132 bays battery 10, 14 hard drive 10 BIOS administrator password 131 BIOS update downloading 119 installing 119 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 6 Bluetooth device 20, 30 Bluetooth label 14 boot devices, enabling 138 boot options 133 boot order 133 built-in device ambient light sensor 134 Bluetooth device radio 134 embedded WLAN 134 fingerprint reader 134 integrated camera 134 LAN/WLAN switching 134 modem 134 Network Interface Controller

(LAN) 134 Notebook Multibay 134 Wake on LAN 134 wireless button 134 WWAN device radio 134 built-in device options 134 business card reader software 60 business card slot 6 buttons ctrl+alt+del 9, 15 esc 9, 15 external WWAN antenna 6, 12 keyboard light 11 pointing stick 2 Quick Launch 46 QuickLook 7, 46 QuickWeb 7, 46 rotate 9, 15 TouchPad 2 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index 149 volume down 4 volume mute 4, 53 volume up 4 C cables 1394 88 LAN 39 modem 34 USB 86 calibrating battery 71 caps lock light, identifying 3 CD protecting 55 writing to 55 Computer Setup utility 142 configuring ExpressCards 93 connecting to a LAN 39 connecting to a WLAN 25 Connection Manager icon 21 connection, external power 65 connector, power 9 conservation, power 73 convertible hinge, identifying 11, 15 cord, power 13 corporate WLAN connection 25 country- or region-specific modem cable adapter, identifying 13 country-specific modem cable CD drive 89 Certificate of Authenticity label 14 changing boot order 140 charge level indicator, adapter 34 creating a backup 124 critical battery level 70 ctrl+alt+del button 9, 15 identifying 10 charging batteries 68, 71 checking audio functions 56 components additional hardware 13 bottom 10 display 11 front 6 left-side 8 rear 9 right-side 7 top 1 composite video 43 computer information 118 Computer Setup BIOS administrator password 103 device security 109 Diagnostics menu 132 DriveLock password 105 enabling bootable devices 138 File menu 131 navigating and selecting 129 restoring factory settings 130 Security menu 131 setting boot order 140 setting MultiBoot Express prompt 141 System Configuration menu 133 D deployment, software 142 device configurations 133 device security 109 Diagnostics menu 132 digital card inserting 91 removing 92 stopping 92 Disk Cleanup software 79 Disk Defragmenter software 79 Disk Sanitizer 132 diskette drive 89 display image, switching 43 notebook mode 18 rotating 16 screen brightness hotkeys 44 tablet mode 16 display release latch, identifying 6 display switch, identifying 4 docking connector identifying 10 using 90 drive light identifying 3 status 80 drive media 62 DriveLock password changing 106 description 105 entering 106 removing 107 setting 106 DriveLock, automatic 132 drives boot order 133, 136 caring for 78 diskette 89 external 89 hard 82, 83, 89 optical 89 Dual Core CPU 134 DVD protecting 55 writing to 55 DVD drive 89 E encryption 25 error log 132 esc button 9, 15 esc key, identifying 5 Execution Disable 133 ExpressCard configuring 93 inserting 93 removing 94 removing insert 93 stopping 94 ExpressCard slot 8 external audio devices, connecting 56 external drive 89 external monitor port identifying 9 using 58 external WWAN antenna button, identifying 6 F f11 recovery 127 File menu 131 fingerprint reader, identifying 7, 11 firewall 25 150 Index Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

fn key identifying 5 using 2 function keys identifying 5 using 42 H hard disk drive HP 3D DriveGuard 80 installing 83 replacing 82 hard disk test 132 hard drive external 89 HP 3D DriveGuard 80 installing 83 replacing 82 hard drive bay, identifying 10 hard drive recovery 127 HDMI 43 headphone (audio-out) combo jack 7 Hibernation exiting 63 initiated during critical battery level 70 initiating 63 hinge, convertible 11, 15 holder, pen 16 hotkeys ambient light sensor 44 battery charge information 44 decreasing screen brightness 44 description 42 displaying system information 42 enabling/disabling the TouchPad 42 increasing screen brightness 44 initiating Sleep 43 switching screen image 43 using 42 HP 3D DriveGuard 80 HP Client Configuration Manager 143, 144 HP Client Manager for Altiris 143 HP Connection Manager software 22 HP Mobile Broadband Module 27 HP QuickLook 2 134 HP SpareKey enrollment 131 HP System Software Manager 143, 144 HP Universal Print Driver, using 148 hubs 86 I icons Connection Manager 21 network 32 network status 21 wireless 21 IEEE 1394 port, identifying 8 image, computer 142 inserting a memory module 99 Intel Centrino Pro technology 146 interference, minimizing 33 internal display switch, identifying 4 internal microphone, identifying 11 Internet connection setup 24 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 7 audio-out (headphone) 7 RJ-11 (modem) 7 RJ-45 (network) 9 Java Card defined 96 inserting 96 removing 96 jog dial 9, 15 K keyboard hotkeys, identifying 42 keyboard light using 40 keyboard light button, identifying 11 keypad keys, identifying 5 keypad, embedded enabling and disabling 51 switching key functions 51 using 51 keys esc 5 fn 5 function 5 keypad 5 Windows applications 5 Windows logo 5 L labels Bluetooth 14 HP Mobile Broadband Module 14 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 14 modem approval 14 regulatory 14 service tag 14 SIM 14 wireless certification 14 WLAN 14 LAN Power Save 133 LAN, connecting 39 language, changing in Computer Setup 133 latch, battery release 10 legacy support, USB 129, 133 lights battery 3 caps lock 3 drive 3, 80 keyboard 40 mute 3 num lock 4 power 3 TouchPad 1, 3 volume down 3 volume mute 3 volume up 4 webcam 6, 11 wireless 8 local area network (LAN) cable required 39 connecting cable 39 logical drive designations 139 low battery level 69 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index 151 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 79 Disk Defragmenter 79 McAfee Total Protection 111, 112 Media Card Reader, identifying 8 memory module adding 98 inserting 99 removing 98 replacing 98 memory test 132 microphone (audio-in) combo jack 7 microphone, internal 11 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 14 minimizing interference 33 modem approval label 14 modem cable connecting 34 country-specific cable adapter 34 noise suppression circuitry 34 modem cable adapter, identifying 13 modem cable, identifying 13 modem software setting/adding location 35 travel connection problems 37 monitor port, external 9 monitor, connecting 58 mouse, external connecting 40 setting preferences 40 MultiBoot Express 136, 141 multimedia software accessing 55 mute button, identifying 4, 53 mute light, identifying 3 N network cable connecting 39 noise suppression circuitry 39 network icon 32 network key 32 network security codes network key 32 SSID 32 Network Service Boot 138 network status icon 21 NIC boot device 136, 138 noise suppression circuitry modem cable 34 network cable 39 num lock light, identifying 4 O operating system Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 14 Product Key 14 optical disc writing to 55 optical drive protecting 55 Smart Card slot 135 USB port 135 ports 1394 8, 88 external monitor 9, 58 USB 7, 86 power connecting 65 conserving 73 power connector, identifying 9 power cord, identifying 13 power light, identifying 3 power plans 63 power switch, identifying 6 Product Key 14 product name and number, computer 14 projector, connecting 58 public WLAN connection 25 PXE server 138 P parallel port mode 133 passwords administrator 102 BIOS administrator 103 DriveLock 105 user 102 pen calibrating 50 identifying 48 setting preferences 51 using 48 pen holder identifying 8, 16 using 50 pointing devices setting preferences 40 using 40 pointing stick identifying 2 using 40 pointing stick buttons, identifying 2 port options 1394 port 135 ExpressCard slot 135 flash media reader 135 parallel port 135 serial port 135 Q Quick Launch Buttons 46 Quick Launch Buttons control panel 46 QuickLook button, identifying 7, QuickWeb button, identifying 7, 46 46 R RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks) devices 133 readable media 62 reader, fingerprint 7, 11 recovery partition 127 regulatory information modem approval label 14 regulatory label 14 wireless certification labels 14 release latch, battery 10, 67 replacing a memory module 98 restore security defaults 135 restore the factory settings 131 restoring the hard drive 127 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 7 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 9 152 Index Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

rotate button 9, 15 run-in test 132 S S-Video 43 SATA (Serial Advanced Technology Attachment) devices AHCI (Advanced Host Controller Interface) 133 IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) 133 screen brightness hotkeys 44 screen image, switching 43 scroll zone, TouchPad 2 Secondary Battery Fast Charge 134 security cable slot, identifying 7 Security menu allow reset of HP ProtectTools security keys 131 always prompt for HP SpareKey enrollment 131 Automatic DriveLock 132 change password 131 Disk Sanitizer 132 DriveLock 131 fingerprint reader reset 131 HP Sparekey 131 HP Sparekey enrollment 131 password policy 131 set up BIOS administrator password 131 System IDs 132 user management 131 security, wireless 24 serial number, computer 14 service tag 14 set security level 135 setup of WLAN 24 setup utility Diagnostics menu 132 File menu 131 navigating and selecting 129 restoring factory settings 130 Security menu 131 System Configuration menu 133 setup, computer 1 shutdown 75 shutting down 75 SIM inserting 27 removing 28 SIM slot, identified 10 Sleep exiting 62 initiating 62 Sleep hotkey 43 slots business card 6 ExpressCard 8 Media Card Reader 8 memory 97 memory module 10 security cable 7 SIM 10 smart card reader 7 smart card defined 96 inserting 96 removing 96 smart card reader, identifying 7 SoftPaqs, downloading 121, 122 software BIOS update 119 business card reader 60 deployment 142 Disk Cleanup 79 Disk Defragmenter 79 HP Connection Manager 22 recovery 142 updates 143 updating programs and drivers 121 Wireless Assistant 22 start-up test 132 storing battery 74 switches internal display 4 power 6 wireless 8 System Configuration menu 133 system date and time 131 System Diagnostics menu 132 system fan 133 system IDs 132 system information 131 system information hotkey 42 T tablet display components 15 temperature 74 tips, webcam 59 TouchPad buttons 2 enabling/disabling 42 identifying 2 scroll zone 2 using 40 TouchPad light 1, 3 TouchPad on/off control 1 TPM Embedded Security 132 traveling with the computer modem approval label 14 troubleshooting 31 troubleshooting modem 37 turning off the computer 75 TXT (Intel Trusted Execution Technology) 134 U Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) mode 134 Universal Print Driver, using 148 unresponsive system 75 updates, software 143 USB cable, connecting 86 USB devices connecting 86 description 86 removing 86 stopping 86 USB hubs 86 USB legacy support 87, 129, 133 USB port, powered 8 USB ports, identifying 7, 86 user password 102 using the webcam 59 V vents, identifying 6, 8, 10 video transmission types 43 Virtualization Technology 134 volume buttons 53 volume down button, identifying 4 volume down light, identifying 3 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index 153 functional range 26 public WLAN connection 25 security 24 using 24 wireless switch, identifying 8 wireless wide area network

(WWAN) 27 WLAN antennas, identifying 12 WLAN device 14, 20, 24 WLAN label 14 writable media 62 WWAN antenna button, external 12 WWAN antenna, external 6, 12 WWAN antennas, identifying 12 WWAN device 20, 27 volume mute button, identifying 4, 53 volume mute light, identifying 3 volume up button, identifying 4 volume up light, identifying 4 volume, adjusting 53 W Web sites HP System Software Manager 145 HP Universal Print Driver 148 Intel Centrino Pro 146 Intel Pro technology for AMT 146 webcam capturing business cards 60 identifying 11 tips 59 using 59 webcam light, identifying 6, 11 webcam properties, adjusting 59 Windows 7 operating system DVD 127 Windows applications key, identifying 5 Windows logo key, identifying 5 wireless antennas 12 Wireless Assistant software 21, 22 wireless button 21 wireless certification label 14 wireless controls button 21 Connection Manager software 21 operating system 21 Wireless Assistant software 21 wireless devices location 10 types 20 wireless icon 21 wireless light, identifying 8, 21 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 25 corporate WLAN connection 25 described 20 equipment needed 24 154 Index Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

 

 

OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMG FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1030; IC: 4324A-BRCM1030 Conditions on using BRCM regulatory approvals:

Customer must ensure that its product (the CUSTOMER Product) is electrically A. identical to Broadcoms reference designs. Customer acknowledges that any modifications to Broadcoms reference designs may invalidate regulatory approvals in relation to the CUSTOMER Product, or may necessitate notifications to the relevant regulatory authorities. Customer is responsible for ensuring that antennas used with the product are of B. the same type, with same or lower gains as approved and providing antenna reports to Broadcom. Customer is responsible for regression testing to accommodate changes to C. Broadcoms reference designs, new antennas, and portable RF exposure safety testing/approvals. Appropriate labels must be affixed to the CUSTOMER Product that comply with D. applicable regulations in all respects. E. product that contains the text as required by applicable law. Without limitation of the foregoing, an example (for illustration purposes only) of possible text to include is set forth below:

A users manual or instruction manual must be included with the customer 1. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. INFORMATION TO USER:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the Page 1 of 1 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMG FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1030; IC: 4324A-BRCM1030 user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. CAUTION: (this only applicable to 5GHz device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. System integrators must include the FCC ID on the end product. FCC Radio-Frequency Exposure & Approval Conditions:

1. Antennas must be installed in the display section of Netbook/notebook/laptop computer to provide at least 16cm separation distance from the transmitting antenna to the body of user during normal operating condition. 2. Transmitting antenna(s) can only be installed at the display section of computer. When this device is installed other than notebook computers, at least 20 cm separation distance shall be maintained between the transmitting antenna(s) to the body of user or nearby person. 3. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. 4. Only those antennas with same type and lesser gain filed under this FCC ID number can be used with this device. 5. The regulatory label on the final system must include the statement: Contains FCC Page 2 of 2 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMG FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1030; IC: 4324A-BRCM1030 ID: QDS-BRCM1030 and/or IC: 4324A-BRCM1030 or using electronic labeling method as documented in KDB 784748. 6. The final system integrator must ensure there is no instruction provided in the user manual or customer documentation indicating how to install or remove the transmitter module except such device has implemented two-ways authentication between module and the host system. 7. The final host manual shall include the following regulatory statement:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2. Canada - Industry Canada (IC) Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter Page 3 of 3 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMG FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1030; IC: 4324A-BRCM1030 tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. Caution: (this only applicable to UNII device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RSS 102 RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. System integrators must include the IC ID on the end product. 3. Europe - EU Restrictions This equipment needs to be marked with the throughout the European community. 0984 symbol and can be used Marking by the symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. Information to be supplied to the users:

802.11a Restrictions:

- This product is for indoor use only when using channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, or 64 (5150 5350 MHz).

- DFS and TPC must remain enabled to ensure product compliance with EC regulations.

- To ensure compliance with local regulations, be sure to select the country in which the access point is installed. Page 4 of 4 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMG FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1030; IC: 4324A-BRCM1030

- This product can be used as shown in the table below:

5 GHz wireless LAN IEEE 802.11a Indoor Use Only A, AND, B, CH, D, CY, CZ, DK, ES, EST, F, FIN, FL, FR, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, IS, L, LT, M, MC, N, NL, P, PL, RSM, S, SK, SLO, V Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Czech:

User's Manual in Czech language and a statement of conformity with Directive 1999/5/EC in Czech language must be enclosed to each product. France:

2.4GHz for Metropolitan France:

In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:

Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power (EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band Note for system integrators:

- The module is tested to comply with the requirement of the R&TTE Directive. System integrators are responsible for compliance of the final device with the R&TTE Directive.

- Packaging: CE Marking must also be on the outer packaging of the product. The outer packaging must also provide an indication as to where the device is intended to be used and OR conversely, where there may be restrictions for use. 4. Taiwan - NCC Statement to be included in the user guide Statement- For general products Page 5 of 5 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMG FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1030; IC: 4324A-BRCM1030 Additional Statement - For 5G Band products 5.25G ~5.35G Translation:

Article 12 Without permission, any company, firm or user shall not alter the frequency, increase the power, or change the characteristics and functions of the original design of the certified lower power frequency electric machinery. Article 14 The application of low power frequency electric machineries shall not affect the navigation safety nor interfere a legal communication, if an interference is found, the service will be suspended until improvement is made and the interference no longer exists. The foregoing legal communication refers to the wireless telecommunication operated according to the telecommunications laws and regulations. The low power frequency electric machinery should be able to tolerate the interference of the electric wave radiation electric machineries and equipments for legal communications or industrial and scientific applications. Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Appendix:

(ID):

CCXXxxLPyyyZz

,, Page 6 of 6 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMG FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1030; IC: 4324A-BRCM1030 CCXXxxLPyyyZz . 5. Korea Include the following statement either on the label or in the User Guide.

"

"

6. Argentina The current approval is in the name of Broadcoms local representative. It may be necessary to obtain regulatory approval in the name of the local distributor or importer. We suggest manufacturers check with their local distributors and importers in Argentina. 7. Brazil - Anatel Before using Broadcom Anatel approvals, 1. PC- OEM must make arrangement for its local offices or distributors to provide maintenance, technical assistance or replace any faulty products sold in Brazil. 2. All warranty services will be provided by the distributors or PC-OEM sales support in Brazil. An official agreement stating warranty responsibilities must be signed and made available to Broadcom. Interference statement to be included in the Users Guide

"Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio."

Translation:

"This equipment operates in secondary character. It can be affected by harmful interference. However, it cannot cause interference to systems operating in primary character."

8. South Africa ICASA PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to supply spare parts and carry out repairs in South Africa. Page 7 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMG FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1030; IC: 4324A-BRCM1030 9. Indonesia - POSTEL PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to provide product warranty and after sales services. 10. Japan MIC Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Page 8 of 8

 

 

OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMG FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1030; IC: 4324A-BRCM1030 Conditions on using BRCM regulatory approvals:

Customer must ensure that its product (the CUSTOMER Product) is electrically A. identical to Broadcoms reference designs. Customer acknowledges that any modifications to Broadcoms reference designs may invalidate regulatory approvals in relation to the CUSTOMER Product, or may necessitate notifications to the relevant regulatory authorities. Customer is responsible for ensuring that antennas used with the product are of B. the same type, with same or lower gains as approved and providing antenna reports to Broadcom. Customer is responsible for regression testing to accommodate changes to C. Broadcoms reference designs, new antennas, and portable RF exposure safety testing/approvals. Appropriate labels must be affixed to the CUSTOMER Product that comply with D. applicable regulations in all respects. E. product that contains the text as required by applicable law. Without limitation of the foregoing, an example (for illustration purposes only) of possible text to include is set forth below:

A users manual or instruction manual must be included with the customer 1. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. INFORMATION TO USER:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the Page 1 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMG FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1030; IC: 4324A-BRCM1030 user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. CAUTION: (this only applicable to 5GHz device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. System integrators must include the FCC ID on the end product. FCC Radio-Frequency Exposure & Approval Conditions:

1. Antennas must be installed in the display section of Netbook/notebook/laptop computer to provide at least 16cm separation distance from the transmitting antenna to the body of user during normal operating condition. 2. Transmitting antenna(s) can only be installed at the display section of computer. When this device is installed other than notebook computers, at least 20 cm separation distance shall be maintained between the transmitting antenna(s) to the body of user or nearby person. 3. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. 4. Only those antennas with same type and lesser gain filed under this FCC ID number can be used with this device. 5. The regulatory label on the final system must include the statement: Contains FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1030 and/or IC: 4324A-BRCM1030 or using electronic labeling method as documented in KDB 784748. 6. The final system integrator must ensure there is no instruction provided in the user manual or customer documentation indicating how to install or remove the transmitter Page 2 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMG FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1030; IC: 4324A-BRCM1030 module except such device has implemented two-ways authentication between module and the host system. 7. The final host manual shall include the following regulatory statement:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2. Canada - Industry Canada (IC) Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. Caution: (this only applicable to UNII device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for frequency Page 3 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMG FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1030; IC: 4324A-BRCM1030 range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RSS 102 RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. System integrators must include the IC ID on the end product. 3. Europe - EU Restrictions This equipment needs to be marked with the throughout the European community. 0984 symbol and can be used Marking by the symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. Information to be supplied to the users:

802.11a Restrictions:

- This product is for indoor use only when using channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, or 64 (5150 5350 MHz).

- DFS and TPC must remain enabled to ensure product compliance with EC regulations.

- To ensure compliance with local regulations, be sure to select the country in which the access point is installed.

- This product can be used as shown in the table below:

5 GHz wireless LAN IEEE 802.11a Indoor Use Only A, AND, B, CH, D, CY, CZ, DK, ES, EST, F, FIN, FL, FR, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, IS, L, LT, M, MC, N, NL, P, PL, RSM, S, SK, SLO, V Page 4 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMG FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1030; IC: 4324A-BRCM1030 Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Czech:

User's Manual in Czech language and a statement of conformity with Directive 1999/5/EC in Czech language must be enclosed to each product. France:

2.4GHz for Metropolitan France:

In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:

Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power (EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band Note for system integrators:

- The module is tested to comply with the requirement of the R&TTE Directive. System integrators are responsible for compliance of the final device with the R&TTE Directive.

- Packaging: CE Marking must also be on the outer packaging of the product. The outer packaging must also provide an indication as to where the device is intended to be used and OR conversely, where there may be restrictions for use. 4. Taiwan - NCC Statement to be included in the user guide Statement- For general products Page 5 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMG FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1030; IC: 4324A-BRCM1030 Additional Statement - For 5G Band products 5.25G ~5.35G Translation:

Article 12 Without permission, any company, firm or user shall not alter the frequency, increase the power, or change the characteristics and functions of the original design of the certified lower power frequency electric machinery. Article 14 The application of low power frequency electric machineries shall not affect the navigation safety nor interfere a legal communication, if an interference is found, the service will be suspended until improvement is made and the interference no longer exists. The foregoing legal communication refers to the wireless telecommunication operated according to the telecommunications laws and regulations. The low power frequency electric machinery should be able to tolerate the interference of the electric wave radiation electric machineries and equipments for legal communications or industrial and scientific applications. Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Appendix:

(ID):

CCXXxxLPyyyZz

,, CCXXxxLPyyyZz . 5. Korea Include the following statement either on the label or in the User Guide.

"

"

Page 6 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMG FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1030; IC: 4324A-BRCM1030 6. Argentina The current approval is in the name of Broadcoms local representative. It may be necessary to obtain regulatory approval in the name of the local distributor or importer. We suggest manufacturers check with their local distributors and importers in Argentina. 7. Brazil - Anatel Before using Broadcom Anatel approvals, 1. PC- OEM must make arrangement for its local offices or distributors to provide maintenance, technical assistance or replace any faulty products sold in Brazil. 2. All warranty services will be provided by the distributors or PC-OEM sales support in Brazil. An official agreement stating warranty responsibilities must be signed and made available to Broadcom. Interference statement to be included in the Users Guide

"Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio."

Translation:

"This equipment operates in secondary character. It can be affected by harmful interference. However, it cannot cause interference to systems operating in primary character."

8. South Africa ICASA PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to supply spare parts and carry out repairs in South Africa. 9. Indonesia - POSTEL PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to provide product warranty and after sales services. 10. Japan MIC Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Page 7 of 7

 

 

OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMG FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1030; IC: 4324A-BRCM1030 Conditions on using BRCM regulatory approvals:

Customer must ensure that its product (the CUSTOMER Product) is electrically A. identical to Broadcoms reference designs. Customer acknowledges that any modifications to Broadcoms reference designs may invalidate regulatory approvals in relation to the CUSTOMER Product, or may necessitate notifications to the relevant regulatory authorities. Customer is responsible for ensuring that antennas used with the product are of B. the same type, with same or lower gains as approved and providing antenna reports to Broadcom. Customer is responsible for regression testing to accommodate changes to C. Broadcoms reference designs, new antennas, and portable RF exposure safety testing/approvals. Appropriate labels must be affixed to the CUSTOMER Product that comply with D. applicable regulations in all respects. E. product that contains the text as required by applicable law. Without limitation of the foregoing, an example (for illustration purposes only) of possible text to include is set forth below:

A users manual or instruction manual must be included with the customer 1. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. INFORMATION TO USER:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the Page 1 of 1 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMG FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1030; IC: 4324A-BRCM1030 user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. CAUTION: (this only applicable to 5GHz device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. System integrators must include the FCC ID on the end product. FCC Radio-Frequency Exposure & Approval Conditions:

1. Antennas must be installed in the display section of Netbook/notebook/laptop and tablet computer to provide at least 1.8cm and 4mm separation distance from the transmitting antenna to the body of user during normal operating condition. 2. Transmitting antenna(s) can only be installed at the display section of computer. When this device is installed other than notebook computers, at least 20 cm separation distance shall be maintained between the transmitting antenna(s) to the body of user or nearby person. 3. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. 4. Only those antennas with same type and lesser gain filed under this FCC ID number can be used with this device. 5. The regulatory label on the final system must include the statement: Contains FCC Page 2 of 2 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMG FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1030; IC: 4324A-BRCM1030 ID: QDS-BRCM1030 and/or IC: 4324A-BRCM1030 or using electronic labeling method as documented in KDB 784748. 6. The final system integrator must ensure there is no instruction provided in the user manual or customer documentation indicating how to install or remove the transmitter module except such device has implemented two-ways authentication between module and the host system. 7. The final host manual shall include the following regulatory statement:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2. Canada - Industry Canada (IC) Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter Page 3 of 3 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMG FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1030; IC: 4324A-BRCM1030 tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. Caution: (this only applicable to UNII device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RSS 102 RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. System integrators must include the IC ID on the end product. 3. Europe - EU Restrictions This equipment needs to be marked with the throughout the European community. 0984 symbol and can be used Marking by the symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. Information to be supplied to the users:

802.11a Restrictions:

- This product is for indoor use only when using channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, or 64 (5150 5350 MHz).

- DFS and TPC must remain enabled to ensure product compliance with EC regulations.

- To ensure compliance with local regulations, be sure to select the country in which the access point is installed. Page 4 of 4 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMG FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1030; IC: 4324A-BRCM1030

- This product can be used as shown in the table below:

5 GHz wireless LAN IEEE 802.11a Indoor Use Only A, AND, B, CH, D, CY, CZ, DK, ES, EST, F, FIN, FL, FR, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, IS, L, LT, M, MC, N, NL, P, PL, RSM, S, SK, SLO, V Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Czech:

User's Manual in Czech language and a statement of conformity with Directive 1999/5/EC in Czech language must be enclosed to each product. France:

2.4GHz for Metropolitan France:

In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:

Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power (EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band Note for system integrators:

- The module is tested to comply with the requirement of the R&TTE Directive. System integrators are responsible for compliance of the final device with the R&TTE Directive.

- Packaging: CE Marking must also be on the outer packaging of the product. The outer packaging must also provide an indication as to where the device is intended to be used and OR conversely, where there may be restrictions for use. 4. Taiwan - NCC Statement to be included in the user guide Statement- For general products Page 5 of 5 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMG FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1030; IC: 4324A-BRCM1030 Additional Statement - For 5G Band products 5.25G ~5.35G Translation:

Article 12 Without permission, any company, firm or user shall not alter the frequency, increase the power, or change the characteristics and functions of the original design of the certified lower power frequency electric machinery. Article 14 The application of low power frequency electric machineries shall not affect the navigation safety nor interfere a legal communication, if an interference is found, the service will be suspended until improvement is made and the interference no longer exists. The foregoing legal communication refers to the wireless telecommunication operated according to the telecommunications laws and regulations. The low power frequency electric machinery should be able to tolerate the interference of the electric wave radiation electric machineries and equipments for legal communications or industrial and scientific applications. Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Appendix:

(ID):

CCXXxxLPyyyZz

,, Page 6 of 6 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMG FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1030; IC: 4324A-BRCM1030 CCXXxxLPyyyZz . 5. Korea Include the following statement either on the label or in the User Guide.

"

"

6. Argentina The current approval is in the name of Broadcoms local representative. It may be necessary to obtain regulatory approval in the name of the local distributor or importer. We suggest manufacturers check with their local distributors and importers in Argentina. 7. Brazil - Anatel Before using Broadcom Anatel approvals, 1. PC- OEM must make arrangement for its local offices or distributors to provide maintenance, technical assistance or replace any faulty products sold in Brazil. 2. All warranty services will be provided by the distributors or PC-OEM sales support in Brazil. An official agreement stating warranty responsibilities must be signed and made available to Broadcom. Interference statement to be included in the Users Guide

"Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio."

Translation:

"This equipment operates in secondary character. It can be affected by harmful interference. However, it cannot cause interference to systems operating in primary character."

8. South Africa ICASA PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to supply spare parts and carry out repairs in South Africa. Page 7 of 7 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN Module, BCM94312HMG FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1030; IC: 4324A-BRCM1030 9. Indonesia - POSTEL PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to provide product warranty and after sales services. 10. Japan MIC Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Page 8 of 8

 

 

Contents:

Broadcom 802.11g WLAN PCI-E Mini Card, BCM94312HMG User Manual Introduction Completing the Setup Utility Functions Specifications Regulatory Information Company Copyright Statement Company Trademark Statement. Microsoft and Windows are trademarks owned by Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. WLCARD-UG200-D2 01.30.03 file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/index.htm [1/30/03 10:11:15 PM]

Introduction:

Back to Contents Introduction: Broadcom 802.11g PCI-E Mini Card User Manual Broadcom 802.11g WLAN Solution Using the Broadcom 802.11g WLAN Features and Requirements Broadcom 802.11g WLAN Solution The Broadcom 802.11g WLAN solution accesses wireless local area networks (LANs), enables the sharing of a local printer and files with others in the network, accesses the Internet, and enables roaming about the officewire-free. This wireless LAN solution is designed for both the home user and small businessesand it is scalable so that users can be added and new network features can be enabled as networking needs grow. WEP is a security protocol for wireless local area networks (defined in IEEE Std 802.11, 1999 Edition) that encrypts data sent over radio waves. The use of the WEP key is optional and can be enabled or disabled. If the network being connecting to has enabled WEP, WEP must also be enabled in the network profile and the WEP key must be set to match the WEP key used by the network. Otherwise, it is impossible to connect to the network. The Broadcom 802.11g enabled notebook makes a wireless connection to a network, as illustrated on the following figure. Networks 1 and 2 are infrastructure type of networks. The two notebook computers connected by radio waves form an ad hoc type of network. Enterprise Users file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/intro.htm (1 of 3) [1/30/03 10:11:16 PM]

Introduction:

Obtain the following information from the network administrator:

l Network names (SSID) of the specific wireless networks to connect to l WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) key information (if any) for the networks to connect to l For Microsoft Windows networking, the customer name and workgroup name l For a network account, a user name and password l An IP address (if not using a DHCP server) Home Users The access point (AP) that communicates with the Broadcom 802.11g enabled notebook has a preassigned network name

(SSID) that the notebook recognizes upon startup. To enable WEP, use any string of numbers for the WEP key. Upon startup, the Broadcom 802.11g enabled notebook detects certain wireless networks (WLANs) that are within range. Before connecting to these and other wireless networks, configure a profile for each network.See Completing the setup. Using the Broadcom 802.11g WLAN The Broadcom 802.11g enabled notebook is an IEEE 802.11g based wireless LAN device. A LAN is composed of two or more computers that are connected to each other to share files or common equipment such as a printer or an Internet connection. A wireless LAN provides the same functionality of a wired network, but it eliminates the need to install networking cables and other networking equipment. Not only is a wireless LAN easier to deploy, but it also allows for roaming. For example, when using the WLAN enabled notebook, it is possible to roam from a conference room to an office without being disconnected from the network. Features and Requirements An IEEE 802.11 based wireless LAN includes the following features:

l Support for IEEE 802.11g draft specification l Support for IEEE 802.11b standard l 2.4-GHz band operation l Network data rate of up to 54 Mbit/s l Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption The following items are needed for participating in a wireless LAN:

l Broadcom 802.11g enabled notebook computer running on a Microsoft Windows XP operating system l Software compact disc containing the drivers, software reference guide, and Help file The Broadcom 802.11g enabled notebook works with any Wi-Fi CERTIFIED base station or wireless client adapter. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/intro.htm (2 of 3) [1/30/03 10:11:16 PM]

Introduction:

Back to top Back to Contents Ccopyright and Trademark Information. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/intro.htm (3 of 3) [1/30/03 10:11:16 PM]

Completing the Setup:

Back to Contents Completing the Setup: Broadcom 802.11g WLAN User Manual NOTEBefore starting, obtain the required network information from the network administrator or the wireless access point installer (see The Broadcom 802.11g WLAN Solution in Introduction). Modes of Operation Configuring a Network Profile Modes of Operation A wireless LAN can be configured for two different modes of operation: infrastructure network and computer-to-computer

(ad hoc) network. Whereas each mode has its advantages, one mode may be more appropriate than the other, depending on the location and type of network connection. Infrastructure Mode The key difference between the infrastructure type of network and an ad hoc network is that the infrastructure network includes a base station (host) computer that has a built-in wireless network adapter and is connected to a wireless access point (AP). This functionality allows computers on the infrastructure wireless LAN to access the resources and tools of the wired LAN, including Internet access, e-mail, file transfers, and printer sharing. Characteristics Networked computers communicate with each other through a dedicated AP. All data transmitted between the computers on this wireless LAN passes through the AP. Advantages l Extended range. The access point extends the range of the wireless LAN. Each computer can communicate with other computers equipped by wireless networks that are within the range of the access point. l Roaming. As the user moves around the home or office, the 802.11g enabled notebook determines the best access point to use to ensure continuous communication with the network. l Network connectivity. An access point can provide wireless LAN access to an existing wired network by bridging the two networks together. This gives users of the wireless LAN access to all the functions of a wired networkfrom file server access to e-mail and the Internet. Disadvantages Because the infrastructure mode offers more features, it requires additional components and setup time to deploy. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (1 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup:

Requirements A base station computer having a wired connection to the Internet, a wireless network adapter, and a connection to an AP. Computer-to-Computer Mode A peer-to-peer (ad hoc) network is the easiest to deploy and is ideal for home use or in small offices. This mode allows the sharing of files with other employees, printing to a shared office printer, and access to the Internet through a shared modem. With ad hoc networking, however, the computer is only able to communicate with other wireless networks that are within a certain range and are in the same wireless workgroup. Characteristics Networked computers send data directly to each other. Advantages l Simple setup l Cost efficiency Disadvantages Communication is limited to those who are located within a certain range. Configuring a Network Profile To connect to a wireless network, a network profile for that network must be configured on the 802.11g enabled notebook. If the 802.11g enabled notebook computer came with the 802.11g WLAN card already installed and set up at the factory, follow the network profile configuration instructions provided below. NOTEFor more information on how to configure a network profile and IEEE 802.1x authentication, click Learn about setting up wireless network configuration at the bottom of the Wireless Networks tab of Wireless Network Connection Properties. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection you want to configure by doing the following. 1. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (2 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup:

4. Click the Wireless Networks tab. You can configure a network profile for networks that are listed under Available networks as well as those that are not listed. When you have completed configuring a network profile, the network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. The computer automatically connects to the network at the top of the list. Follow the applicable instruction set below, based on whether or not the network is listed and whether or not the network requires a WEP key (check with your network administrator to see if a WEP key is required). NOTEBoth the network name and the network key are case-sensitive. l Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key l Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires a WEP key l Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Does Not Require a WEP Key l Configuring a Profile for a Network That is Not Listed and Requires a WEP Key Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key 1. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection to configure by file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (3 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup:

doing the following. a. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. 2. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Under Available networks, click the network name, and then click Configure. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (4 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup:

4. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (5 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup:

5. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that wireless network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. for that Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires a WEP Key 1. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection to configure by doing the following. a. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (6 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup:

2. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Under Available networks, click the network name, and then click Configure. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (7 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup:

4. Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) box. 5. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically box. 6. Type the network key in the Network key box and again in the Confirm network key box. NOTEIt is not necessary to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as the network key is typed. 7. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (8 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup:

8. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that wireless network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. for that Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Does Not Require a WEP Key 1. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection to configure by doing the following. a. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (9 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup:

2. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Click Add. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (10 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box. 5. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (11 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup:l 6. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. for that network. If the Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Requires a WEP Key 1. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection to configure by doing the following. a. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (12 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup:

2. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Click Add. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (13 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup:

4. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box and again in the Confirm network key box. 5. Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) box. 6. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically box. 7. Type the network key in the Network key box and again in the Confirm network key box. NOTEIt is not necessary to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as the network key is typed. 8. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (14 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup:

9. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that wireless network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. for that Back to top Back to Contents Copyright and Trademark Information. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (15 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Utility Functions:

Back to Contents Utility Functions: 802.11g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Running Utility Functions Adding a New Network to the List of Preferred Networks Viewing or Modifying the Wireless Network Properties Setting Up an Ad Hoc (Peer-to-Peer) Group Network for Connecting to the Internet Adding an Ad Hoc Network Disabling the Radio Running Utility Functions The utility functions and details for the wireless network connection are available in Control Panel. These functions include Disabling the network device, Renaming the connection, View status of this connection, and Change settings of this connection. Changing Settings 1. Click Start, then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Click Wireless Network Connections, and then click Change settings of this connection. l Click the Wireless Network tab to configure available networks, add and remove networks, and change network properties. l Click the General tab, then click Configure m To change the properties of the network adapter, click the Advanced tab. m To view details about the driver files, update the driver for the device, roll back to the previous driver, or to uninstall the driver, click the Driver tab. m To view resource settings, click the Resources tab. m To change power management settings, click the Power Management tab. The Advanced tab in Network Adapter Properties lists the properties for the Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) adapter. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (1 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual l IBSS Channel Number selects the independent basic service set (IBSS) channel number on which to operate. The Company 54g enabled notebook comes preset for use on channels 113. This setting is acceptable in most countries. Some countries allow use on more channels. If you travel to a country that allows the use of other channels, change the IBSS Channel Number to that number. l Locale selects the adapter properties that comply with the operating regulations for that locale. The Locale settings include USA, Israel, Japan, Jordan, Thailand, and Worldwide. This wireless LAN device is normally preset by default for the country in which the device is sold. Before operating this WLAN device, verify that the locale selection is correct by following the steps described in Changing Settings above. On the Advanced tab of HP WLAN 54g W450 Network Adapter Properties, m Click Locale m In the Value list, select the appropriate regional location If you travel to other countries with the Company 54g enabled notebook, follow the same steps to change the locale setting to match the destination country. Reset the locale setting back to the appropriate home setting after returning. If the destination country is not listed, change the Locale setting to Worldwide. l Radio Enable/Disable allows you to turn the radio on or off as necessary to comply with restrictions prohibiting the emission of radio signals, such as during takeoff and landing onboard a commercial aircraft. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (2 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: 802.11g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual l Rate sets the transmission rate. The default setting is Use best rate. This automatically adjusts the data rate to the optimal rate based on the capabilities of the other clients and access points. The default values for the properties listed below are set for maximum performance. Therefore, It is not recommended for home users to change the settings for any of these properties. Only network administrators or persons having technical wireless LAN experience should attempt to change any of the settings. frames. available:

adapter. l Fragmentation Threshold is the threshold at which the IEEE 802.11 adapter break the packet into multiple l IBSS 54g (TM) Mode is used to set the connection type in an ad hoc network. The following options are m 54g - 802.11b compatible links at the best rate with an IEEE 802.11b and an IEEE 802.11g network m 54g - Performance links only with IEEE 802.11g networks at the highest rate. In addition it excludes m 802.11b Mode links only with IEEE 802.11b networks at the highest rate. In addition it excludes IEEE

(recommended setting). IEEE 802.11b networks. 802.11g networks. l Locally Administered MAC Address is used to override the MAC address of the Company 54g Wireless LAN l PLCP Header is used to set the header type used for CCK rates. Can be long, auto (short/long). l Power Output is used for putting out a percentage of the maximum output power. l Power Save Mode is used to put the Company 54g enabled notebook into the IEEE 802.11 Power Save mode. In Power Save mode, the radio is periodically powered down to conserve power. When in Power Save mode, packets are stored in the AP until the STA comes on. Adding a New Network to the List of Preferred Networks If the 802.11g enabled notebook is running at a location in which a wireless LAN is operating, and it is within range of the access point, the computer automatically connects to the network at the top of the list under Preferred networks. A network profile must be configured for each network to add to the list To add a new network to the list of preferred networks, first check to see if the new network is listed on the Wireless Networks tab under Available networks. If it is, follow the applicable instructions below according to which operating system your computer is running and whether or not the network requires a WEP key. NOTESee the network administrator or the wireless access point installer to obtain a WEP key, as necessary. l See Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key in Completing the Setup l See Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires a WEP Key in Completing the Setup. If the network being added to the Preferred networks list is not listed in the Available networks list, follow the applicable instructions below according to which operating system the computer is running and whether or not the network requires a WEP key. l See Configuring a Profile for a Network That is Not Listed and Does Not Require a WEP Key in Completing the Setup l See Configuring a Profile for a Network That is Not Listed and Requires a WEP Key in Completing the Setup. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (3 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions:

Viewing or Modifying the Wireless Network Properties 1. Click Start, then click Control Panel. 2. Click Wireless Network Connection, then click Change settings of this connection. 3. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 4. Verify that the Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings box is selected. If it is not, select it. 5. Under Preferred networks click the network name and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (4 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions:

It is possible to enable or disable WEP data encryption and change the network name and the network key (see Completing the setup for instructions). Setting Up an Ad Hoc (Peer-to-Peer) Group Network for Connecting to the Internet To connect the computers in an ad hoc group network to the Internet, the Windows Internet connection sharing (ICS) component must be installed. ICS installation is not required, however, for communication among a group of computers that have a Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) installed in each computer. An ad hoc network must be added under Preferred networks. See Running Utility Functions. Select a desktop computer to serve as the host computer; all other computers are called clients. The host computer must be running the Windows XP operating system. The host computer is the only computer that connects directly to the Internet. Company recommends using the desktop computer having the fastest microprocessor and the most memory as the host computer. NOTEInternet connection sharing requires that the host computer have either a modem or another network adapter in addition to a wireless network adapter. The modem or the additional network adapter is used to access the Internet. The file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (5 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions:

802.11g enabled notebook is used to share the Internet connections with other clients. Setting Up Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) on the Host Computer 1. Connect the host computer to the Internet. 2. From the host computer Start menu, select Help and Support. 3. Perform a search on Internet Connection Sharing. 4. From the Pick a task list, select Enable Internet Connection Sharing on a Network Connection. 5. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete setting up ICS

. Adding an Ad Hoc Network An ad hoc network (for peer-to-peer communicating) can either require a WEP key or not. Instructions for adding and configuring an ad hoc network for both types of ad hoc networks are provided below:

l Adding an Ad Hoc Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key l Adding an Ad Hoc Network That Requires a WEP Key Adding an Ad Hoc Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key 1. Click Start, then click Control Panel. 2. Click Wireless Network Connection, then click Change settings of this connection. 3. Click the Wireless Networks tab. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (6 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions:

4. Click Add. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (7 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions:

5. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box. 6. Select the This is a computer-to-computer (ad hoc) network; wireless access points are not used box. 7. Clear the Data encryption (WEP enabled) and the The Key is provided for me automatically boxes if they are selected. 8. Click OK. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (8 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions:

9. Click Advanced. 10. Select Computer-to-computer (ad hoc) networks only, and click Close. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (9 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions:

11. Click OK. The added ad hoc network appears at the top of the list under Preferred networks. 12. To verify that the computer is connected to the added ad hoc network, reopen the Network Properties window and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the added network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon for the ad hoc network. Adding an Ad Hoc Network That Requires a WEP Key 1. Click Start, then click Control Panel. 2. Click Wireless Network Connection, then click Change settings of this connection. 3. Click the Wireless Networks tab. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (10 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions:

4. Verify that the Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings box is selected. If it is not, select it. 5. Click Add. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (11 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]

Utility Functions:

6. Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) box. 7. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box and again in the Confirm network key box. 8. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically box. 9. Type the network key in the Network key box. NOTEIt is not necessary to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as the network key is typed. 10. Select the This is a computer-to-computer (ad hoc) network; wireless access points are not used box. 11. Click OK. 12. Click Advanced file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (12 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]

Utility Functions:

13. Select Computer-to-computer (ad hoc) networks only, and click Close. 14. Click OK. The added ad hoc network appears at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (13 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]

Utility Functions:

15. To verify that the computer is connected to the added ad hoc network, reopen the Network Properties window and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the added network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon for that network. Disabling the Radio l To disable the radio on the Company 54g enabled notebook, right-click the wireless network connection icon in the system tray and click Disable. Back to top Back to Contents Copyright and Trademark Information file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (14 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]

Regulatory Statements for BCM94312HMG USA-Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Canada Industry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. The term "IC" before the equipment certification number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Pour empecher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit etre utilize a l'interieur et devrait etre place loin des fenetres afin de Fournier un ecram de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'emission) est installe a l'exterieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canadas website www.hc-

sc.gc.ca/rpb. EuropeEU Declaration of Conformity and Restrictions Hereby, Broadcom Corp, declares that this equipment complies with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. 0984 symbol and can be used throughout the This equipment is marked with the European community. This indicates compliance with the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC and meets the relevant parts of following technical specifications:

EN 300 328 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Wideband Transmission Systems; Data transmission equipment operating in the 2,4GHz ISM band and using spread spectrum modulation techniques; Harmonized EN covering essential requirements under article 3.2 of the R&TTE directive. EN 301 893 - Broadband Radio Access Networks (BRAN); 5 GHz high performance RLAN;

Harmonized EN covering essential requirements of article 3.2 of the R&TTE Directive EN 301 489-17 - Electromagnetic Compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM); Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 17 Specific Conditions for Wideband Data and HIPERLAN Equipment. EN 60950 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment. EN 50385 Product standard to demonstrate the compliances of radio base stations and fixed terminal stations for wireless telecommunication systems with the basic restrictions or the reference levels related to human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic fields. Marking by the symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. France - 2.4GHz for Metropolitan France :

In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:

Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power (EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Taiwan DGT warning statement Appendix:

(ID):

CCXXxxLPyyyZz

,, CCXXxxLPyyyZz .

 

 

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 20082010 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. ENERGY STAR is a registered mark owned by the U.S. government. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Seventh Edition: March 2010 First Edition: August 2008 Document Part Number: 506242-007 Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission notice ...................................................................................... 2 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ..................................................................................................................................... 3 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................. 3 Brazil notice .......................................................................................................................................... 4 Canada notices .................................................................................................................................... 4 Avis Canadien ...................................................................................................................................... 4 European Union Regulatory notices ..................................................................................................... 4 Products with HP Mobile Broadband Modules .................................................................... 5 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................... 6 Germany ............................................................................................................. 6 Japan notices ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11g devices ............................................................................................ 7 Bluetooth devices ................................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................... 8 South Korea notice ............................................................................................................................... 8 Mexico notice ....................................................................................................................................... 8 Singapore wireless notice .................................................................................................................... 8 Thailand WWAN wireless notice .......................................................................................................... 9 Taiwan notices ..................................................................................................................................... 9 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ............................................................................................ 9 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 9 Airline travel notice ............................................................................................................................... 9 Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 10 ENERGY STAR compliance .............................................................................................................. 10 Laser compliance ............................................................................................................................... 11 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 11 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 11 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 12 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................. 12 iii Canada modem statements ............................................................................................... 15 Japan modem statements ................................................................................................. 15 New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 15 Voice support .................................................................................................... 16 Power cord notice ............................................................................................................................... 16 Japan power cord notice .................................................................................................... 16 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................... 16 2 Safety notices Heat-related safety warning notice ..................................................................................................... 17 Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................... 17 Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 17 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................... 18 Power cord notices ............................................................................................................................. 19 Cleaning the keyboard ....................................................................................................................... 19 Travel notice ....................................................................................................................................... 19 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................... 19 3 Environmental notices Electronic hardware and battery recycling ......................................................................................... 20 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ....................... 20 Chemical substances ......................................................................................................................... 21 China material content declarations ................................................................................................... 21 Japan material content declaration .................................................................................................... 24 Turkey EEE regulation ....................................................................................................................... 25 United States mercury disposal .......................................................................................................... 25 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................ 25 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 26 iv 1 Regulatory notices This guide provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply on-board airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device, choose the procedure below that corresponds to the operating system running on your computer. For Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Home, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > My Computer. If the left pane, select View System Information > Hardware tab > Device Manager. For Windows Vista, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. For later Windows operating systems, such as Windows 7, follow these steps:

Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Device Manager. For non-Windows operating systems, follow the instructions provided by your operating system to identify a hardware device such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device. Regulatory markings for your country or region may be located on the bottom of the product, either under the battery, under a user-removable door (or some other user-accessible location), or on the wireless or modem module. To view the FCC IDs for any radio modules in your notebook (Bluetooth, WLAN, or WWAN), follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the "Press the ESC key for Startup Menu"

message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. Select the System Configuration menu. The FCC IDs are displayed at the bottom of the screen. CAUTION: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not have an FCC ID. 1 Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 12 inches: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides. To access the user guides, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 12 inches: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides. To access the user guides, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-

channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-

GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Canada notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Wireless operation is subject to 2 conditions. The first is that the wireless device may not cause interference. The second is that the wireless device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25-

to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union Regulatory notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 2004/108/EC Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC where applicable CE compliance of this product is valid if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has wired and/or wireless telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of EU Directive R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC. Compliance with these directives implies conformity to applicable harmonized European standards

(European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family and available (in English only) either within the product documentation or at the following Web site: www.hp.eu/certificates (type the product number in the search box). The compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product:

4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices For non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth, within power class below 10 mW. For EU non-harmonized telecommunications products (if applicable, a 4-digit notified body number is inserted between CE and ! (the exclamation mark). Please refer to the regulatory label provided on the product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. The telephone connector (not available for all products) is intended for connection to analog telephone networks. NOTE: For products with wireless LAN devices, some countries may have specific obligations or special requirements about the operation of wireless LAN networks such as indoor use only or restrictions of the channels available. Be sure that the country settings of the wireless network are correct. In France, certain restrictions apply for the 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product. This product may be used indoors for the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 to 13). For outdoor use, only the 2400-MHz to 2454-MHz frequency band (channels 1 to 7) may be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.arcep.fr. The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS: HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, GERMANY. Products with HP Mobile Broadband Modules THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO FREQUENCY RADIATION. The HP Mobile Broadband Module in your notebook is a radio transmitter and receiver. The device is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines that establish permitted levels of RF radiation for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The device also meets the European Union Regulatory notices 5 European R&TTE directives, including the protection of the health and the safety of the user and any other person. The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR).* The SAR was obtained by testing the device at standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value, because the device operates at multiple power levels and uses only the power required to reach the network. When installed in the notebook computer, this device meets RF exposure guidelines when the antennas are positioned at a minimum distance from the body. In order to transmit data or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data or messages may be delayed until such a connection becomes available. Be sure that the recommended distance is observed until the transmission is complete.

*The non-FCC, international guidelines state that the SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. Ergonomics notice Germany Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the ergonomic requirements and are suitable only for short-time use of VDU tasks. When a mobile computer is used for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit (VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000:2008 This device is intended for use at visual display workplaces in compliance with BildscharbV, only with external keyboard and adequate external monitor. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sun light) reflections may occur which result in reduced readability. Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000:2008 Das Gert ist fr die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gem BildscharbV nur mit externer Tastatur und geeignetem Monitor vorgesehen. Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Japan notices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Wireless LAN 802.11g devices Bluetooth devices Japan notices 7 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. South Korea notice Mexico notice La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) este equipo puede que no cause interferencia y (2) este equipo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo interferencia que pueda ser causada por la operacin no deseada. Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Thailand WWAN wireless notice This telecom equipment has complied with NTC regulations. Taiwan notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Thailand WWAN wireless notice 9 Battery notices WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. For information about removing a battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. ENERGY STAR compliance HP computers marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are qualified with the applicable U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR specifications for computers. The EPA ENERGY STAR logo does not imply endorsement by the EPA. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-

Packard Company has determined that the products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR qualified as per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. The following logo will appear on all ENERGY STAR qualified computers:

The ENERGY STAR program for computers was created by the EPA to promote energy efficiency and reduce air pollution through more energy-efficient equipment in homes, offices, and factories. One way that products achieve this goal is by using the Microsoft Windows power management feature to reduce power consumption when the product is not in use. The power management feature allows the computer to initiate a low-power or Sleep mode after a period of user inactivity. When used with an external ENERGY STAR qualified monitor, this feature also supports similar power management features of the monitor. To take advantage of these potential energy savings, the power management feature has been preset to behave in the following ways when the system is operating on AC power:

Turn off the display after 15 minutes Initiate Sleep after 30 minutes The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site at http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site at http://www.energystar.gov. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007. Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/

laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. Laser compliance 11 U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Modem notices 13 14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. Modem notices 15 c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japan power cord notice Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. 16 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices 2 Safety notices Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). Potential safety conditions notice If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer: crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. Battery notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Heat-related safety warning notice 17 Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING! Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. If the computer includes a headset or earphones, this combination is in compliance to EN 50332-1. 18 Chapter 2 Safety notices Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Cleaning the keyboard WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system. Power cord notices 19 3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service. 20 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. China material content declarations The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Chemical substances 21 Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Flash memory card reader Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external TV tuner USB flash memory drive USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Union's RoHS Legislation Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment and its amendments. 22 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Part Name Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity. China material content declarations 23 Japan material content declaration A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide material content declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. 24 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Turkey EEE regulation In Conformity with the EEE regulation EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur United States mercury disposal This HP product contains the following materials that might require special handling at end-of-life:

Mercury in the fluorescent lamp in the display LCD Disposal of mercury can be regulated because of environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) http://www.eiae.org. NOTE: Notebook computers configured with LED backlights do not contain mercury lamps. Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. Turkey EEE regulation 25 Index A airline travel notice 9 B battery notice 10, 17, 25 battery recycling 20 Brazil notice 4 C cable grounding notice 19 Canada modem statement 15 Canada notices 4 Canadian French notices 4 China Material Content Declarations 21 D Declaration of Conformity 3 disposal notices battery 10, 25 equipment 20 mercury 25 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 20 ENERGY STAR compliance 10 environmental notices 20 equipment disposal notice 20 ergonomics notice 6 European Union notices 4 F Federal Communications Commission cables 2 modifications 2 notice 2 26 Index G GS Notice 6 H hardware device, identifying 1 headset and earphone volume level notice 18 J Japan material content declaration 24 Japan modem statement 15 Japan notice 7 Japan power cord notice 16 K keyboard notice 19 L laser safety notice 11 M Macrovision Corporation notice 16 mercury disposal notice 25 Mexico wireless notice 8 modem notices 11 modem statements Canada 15 Japan 15 New Zealand 15 U.S. 12 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 2 N New Zealand modem statement 15 notices airline travel 9 battery 10, 17, 25 Brazil 4 Canada 4 Canadian French 4 environmental 20 equipment disposal 20 ergonomics 6 European Union 4 Federal Communications Commission 2 headset and earphone volume level 18 Japan 7 Japan power cord 16 keyboard 19 laser safety 11 Macrovision Corporation 16 mercury disposal 25 Mexico 8 modem 11 perchlorate material 25 power cords 16, 19 Singapore 8 South Korea 8 Taiwan 9 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 9 travel 19 P power cord notice 16, 19 R recycling, electronic hardware and battery 20 S Singapore wireless notice 8 South Korea notice 8 T Taiwan notice 9 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 9 travel notice 19 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 19 U U.S. modem statement 12 V voice support 16 volume level notice, headset and earphone 18 W wireless LAN devices 3 Index 27

 

 

HP MINI User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. Copyright 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: July 2009 Document Part Number: 537596-001 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

iii Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review iv Safety warning notice Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Table of contents 1 Features Identifying hardware ............................................................................................................................. 1 Top components .................................................................................................................. 1 TouchPad ............................................................................................................ 1 Lights ................................................................................................................... 3 Buttons ................................................................................................................ 4 Keys .................................................................................................................... 5 Front components ................................................................................................................ 5 Right-side components ........................................................................................................ 6 Left-side components .......................................................................................................... 7 Display components ........................................................................................................... 7 Bottom components ............................................................................................................. 8 Wireless antennas ............................................................................................................... 8 Additional hardware components ........................................................................................ 9 Identifying the labels ........................................................................................................................... 10 2 Power management Setting power options ......................................................................................................................... 11 Using power-saving states ................................................................................................. 11 Initiating and exiting Sleep ................................................................................ 11 Initiating and exiting Hibernation ....................................................................... 12 Using the battery meter ..................................................................................................... 12 Using power plans ............................................................................................................. 12 Viewing the current power plan ......................................................................... 12 Selecting a different power plan ........................................................................ 13 Customizing power plans .................................................................................. 13 Setting password protection on wakeup ............................................................................ 13 Using external AC power .................................................................................................................... 13 Connecting the AC adapter ............................................................................................... 14 Using battery power ........................................................................................................................... 15 Finding battery information in Help and Support ............................................................... 15 Using Battery Check .......................................................................................................... 15 Displaying the remaining battery charge ........................................................................... 16 Inserting or removing the battery ....................................................................................... 16 v Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Charging a battery ............................................................................................................. 17 Maximizing battery discharge time .................................................................................... 18 Managing low battery levels .............................................................................................. 18 Identifying low battery levels ............................................................................. 18 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................. 19 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ....... 19 Resolving a low battery level when a charged battery is available ........................................................................................... 19 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ........................................................................................... 19 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ....................................................................................... 19 Calibrating a battery ........................................................................................................... 19 Step 1: Fully charge the battery ........................................................................ 19 Step 2: Disable Hibernation and Sleep ............................................................. 20 Step 3: Discharge the battery ............................................................................ 20 Step 4: Fully recharge the battery ..................................................................... 22 Step 5: Reenable Hibernation and Sleep .......................................................... 22 Conserving battery power .................................................................................................. 22 Storing a battery ................................................................................................................ 22 Disposing of a used battery ............................................................................................... 23 Replacing the battery ........................................................................................................ 23 Testing an AC adapter ....................................................................................................................... 24 Shutting down the computer ............................................................................................................... 24 3 Wireless Using wireless devices (select models only) ...................................................................................... 25 Identifying wireless and network icons .............................................................................. 25 Using the wireless controls ................................................................................................ 26 Using the wireless switch ................................................................................................... 26 Using operating system controls ........................................................................................ 26 Using a WLAN .................................................................................................................................... 27 Setting up a WLAN ............................................................................................................ 27 Protecting your WLAN ....................................................................................................... 27 Connecting to a WLAN ...................................................................................................... 29 Roaming to another network .............................................................................................. 29 Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select models only) ...................................................................... 30 Bluetooth and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) ............................................................. 30 4 Multimedia Multimedia features ............................................................................................................................ 31 Identifying your multimedia components ........................................................................... 31 Adjusting the volume ......................................................................................................... 32 Multimedia software ........................................................................................................................... 33 vi Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using preinstalled multimedia software ............................................................................. 34 Installing multimedia software from a disc ......................................................................... 34 Sharing optical drives ........................................................................................................ 34 Audio .................................................................................................................................................. 35 Connecting external audio devices .................................................................................... 35 Checking your audio functions ........................................................................................... 35 Video .................................................................................................................................................. 37 Connecting an external monitor or projector ...................................................................... 37 Optical drive (select models only) ...................................................................................................... 38 Identifying the external optical drive .................................................................................. 38 Using optical discs ............................................................................................................. 38 Selecting the right disc ....................................................................................................... 38 CD-R discs ........................................................................................................ 39 CD-RW discs ..................................................................................................... 39 DVDR discs ..................................................................................................... 39 DVDRW discs ................................................................................................. 39 Playing music ..................................................................................................................... 39 Watching a movie .............................................................................................................. 40 Changing DVD region settings .......................................................................................... 41 Creating or burning a CD or DVD .................................................................................... 42 Removing an optical disc (CD or DVD) ............................................................................. 42 Webcam ............................................................................................................................................. 44 Adjusting webcam properties ............................................................................................. 44 5 Security Protecting the computer ..................................................................................................................... 45 Using passwords ................................................................................................................................ 46 Setting passwords in Windows .......................................................................................... 46 Setting passwords in Computer Setup .............................................................................. 46 Setup password ................................................................................................................. 47 Managing a setup password ............................................................................. 48 Entering a setup password ................................................................................ 49 Power-on password ........................................................................................................... 49 Managing a power-on password ....................................................................... 50 Entering a power-on password ......................................................................... 51 Requiring a power-on password at restart ........................................................ 52 Using Computer Setup DriveLock ..................................................................................... 52 Setting a DriveLock password ........................................................................... 53 Entering a DriveLock password ........................................................................ 54 Changing a DriveLock password ...................................................................... 55 Removing DriveLock protection ........................................................................ 56 Using Computer Setup security features ............................................................................................ 57 Securing system devices ................................................................................................... 57 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

vii Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using Computer Setup stringent security .......................................................................... 57 Setting stringent security ................................................................................... 58 Removing stringent security .............................................................................. 59 Viewing Computer Setup System Information ................................................................... 59 Using antivirus software ..................................................................................................................... 60 Using firewall software ....................................................................................................................... 61 Installing critical updates .................................................................................................................... 62 Installing a security cable ................................................................................................................... 63 6 External devices Using a USB device ........................................................................................................................... 64 Connecting a USB device .................................................................................................. 64 Stopping and removing a USB device ............................................................................... 64 Using USB legacy support ................................................................................................. 65 Using external drives .......................................................................................................................... 66 Using optional external devices ......................................................................................... 66 Using an optional external MultiBay II ............................................................................... 66 Using an optional external optical drive (select models only) ............................................................. 67 Inserting an optical disc (CD or DVD) ................................................................................ 67 Removing an optical disc (CD or DVD) ............................................................................. 68 When the disc tray opens .................................................................................. 68 When the disc tray does not open ..................................................................... 69 7 External media cards Using SD Card Reader cards ............................................................................................................. 70 Inserting a digital card ........................................................................................................ 70 Stopping and removing a digital card ................................................................................ 71 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Using pointing devices ....................................................................................................................... 72 Setting pointing device preferences ................................................................................... 72 Using the TouchPad .......................................................................................................... 72 Connecting an external mouse .......................................................................................... 72 Using the keyboard ............................................................................................................................ 72 Using hotkeys .................................................................................................................... 72 Displaying system information (fn+esc) ............................................................ 73 Initiating Sleep (fn+f1) ....................................................................................... 73 Switching the screen image (fn+f2) ................................................................... 75 Decreasing screen brightness (fn+f3) ............................................................... 75 Increasing screen brightness (fn+f4) ................................................................. 75 Initiating QuickLock (fn+f6) ................................................................................ 75 Muting speaker sound (fn+f8) ........................................................................... 75 Decreasing speaker sound (fn+f10) .................................................................. 76 viii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Increasing speaker sound (fn+f11) .................................................................... 76 Using keypads .................................................................................................................................... 76 Using the embedded numeric keypad ............................................................................... 76 Enabling and disabling the embedded numeric keypad .................................... 76 Switching key functions on the embedded numeric keypad ............................. 77 Using an optional external numeric keypad ....................................................................... 77 Cleaning the TouchPad and keyboard ............................................................................................... 78 9 Drives Identifying installed drives .................................................................................................................. 79 Handling drives ................................................................................................................................... 79 Improving HD performance ................................................................................................................ 81 Using Disk Defragmenter ................................................................................................... 81 Using Disk Cleanup ........................................................................................................... 81 Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select models only) .................................................................................. 82 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status ................................................................................. 82 Using HP 3D DriveGuard software .................................................................................... 83 Replacing a hard drive ....................................................................................................................... 84 10 Memory modules 11 Computer Setup Starting Computer Setup .................................................................................................................... 91 Using Computer Setup ....................................................................................................................... 91 Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup ..................................................................... 91 Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup ................................................................... 92 Computer Setup menus ..................................................................................................................... 92 File menu ........................................................................................................................... 92 Security menu .................................................................................................................... 93 Diagnostics menu .............................................................................................................. 93 System Configuration menu .............................................................................................. 94 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 96 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ix Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review x Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 1 Features Identifying hardware Components included with the computer may vary by region and model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features on most computer models. To see a list of hardware installed in the computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing applications, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. Top components TouchPad Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying hardware 1 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) TouchPad*

Left TouchPad button*

Right TouchPad button*

TouchPad scroll zone Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Scrolls up or down.

*This table describes factory settings. To view or change pointing device preferences, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Mouse. 2 Chapter 1 Features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Lights Component

(1)

(2) Caps lock light QuickWeb light

(3) QuickLook light

(4) Power light Description On: Caps lock is on. On: The Internet browser is being launched. Off: The computer is off or in the Sleep or Hibernation state. On: QuickLook is being launched. Off: The computer is off or in the Sleep or Hibernation state. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying hardware 3 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Buttons Component

(1)

(2)

(3) QuickWeb button QuickLook button Power button Description Opens the Internet browser. Opens QuickLook when the computer is on. When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button to shut down the computer. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start >

Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. 4 Chapter 1 Features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Keys Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key or the esc key. Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Embedded numeric keypad keys Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. Function keys Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. Front components Component

(1) Drive light Description Blinking: The hard drive is being accessed. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying hardware 5 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Component

(2) Wireless light

(3) Wireless switch Description Blue: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Amber: All wireless devices are off. NOTE: The wireless light turns amber when the computer turns on and all wireless devices are off. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not create a wireless connection. NOTE: To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must already be set up.

(4) Speakers (2) Produce sound. Right-side components Component

(1) SD Card Reader

(2) Audio-out (headphone) jack

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Audio-in (microphone) jack Powered USB port RJ-45 (network) jack Security cable slot Description Supports the following optional digital card formats:

MultiMediaCard (MMC) Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, ear buds, a headset, or television audio. NOTE: When a device is connected to the headphone jack, the computer speakers are disabled. Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo array microphone, or monaural microphone. Provides power to a USB device, such as an optional external optical drive, if used with a powered USB cable. Connects a network cable. Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. 6 Chapter 1 Features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Left-side components Component

(1) Power light

(2)

(3)

(4) Power connector External monitor port Vent Description Blue: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Connects an AC adapter. Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation.

(5) USB ports (2) Connect optional USB devices. Display components Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying hardware 7 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Component Webcam light Webcam

(1)

(2)

(3) Description On: The webcam is in use. Records audio and video and captures still photographs. Internal microphones (2) Record sound. NOTE:

opening, your computer has internal microphones. If there is a microphone icon next to each microphone

(4) Speakers (2) Produce sound. Bottom components Component Battery bay Service tag

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Description Holds the battery. Provides the product brand and series name, serial number (s/n), and product number (p/n) of your computer. Have this information available when you contact technical support. Battery release latches (2) Release the battery from the battery bay. Vents (3) Enable airflow to cool internal components.

(5) Memory module compartment Contains the memory module slot. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Wireless antennas On select computer models, at least 2 antennas send and receive signals from one or more wireless devices. These antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. 8 Chapter 1 Features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review NOTE: For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. To see wireless regulatory notices, refer to the section of the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. These notices are located in Help and Support. Additional hardware components Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Power cord*

AC adapter Battery*

Description Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Converts AC power to DC power. Powers the computer when the computer is not plugged into external power.

*Batteries and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying hardware 9 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Identifying the labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service tagProvides important information including:

Product Name (1). This is the product name affixed to the front of your computer. Serial Number (s/n) (2). This is an alphanumeric identifier that is unique to each product. Part Number/Product Number (p/n) (3). This number provides specific information about the product's hardware components. The part number helps a service technician to determine what components and parts are needed. Model Description (4). This is the alphanumeric identifier (mix of text and numbers) you need to locate documents, drivers, and support for your computer. Warranty period (5). This number describes the duration (in years) of the warranty period for this computer. Have this information available when you contact technical support. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Microsoft Certificate of AuthenticityContains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer. The regulatory label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Wireless certification label(s) (select models only)Provide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device or an optional Bluetooth device. If your computer model includes one or more wireless devices, one or more certification labels are included with your computer. You may need this information when traveling internationally. Wireless certification labels are affixed to the bottom of the computer. 10 Chapter 1 Features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 2 Power management Setting power options Using power-saving states The computer has two power-saving states enabled at the factory: Sleep and Hibernation. When Sleep is initiated, the power light blinks and the screen clears. Your work is saved to memory, letting you exit Sleep faster than exiting Hibernation. If the computer is in the Sleep state for an extended period or if the battery reaches a critical battery level while in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. When Hibernation is initiated, your work is saved to a hibernation file on the hard drive and the computer turns off. CAUTION: To prevent possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep or Hibernation while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. NOTE: You cannot initiate any type of networking connection or perform any computer functions while the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation. Initiating and exiting Sleep The system is set at the factory to initiate Sleep after 15 minutes of inactivity when running on battery power and 30 minutes of inactivity when running on external power. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. With the computer on, you can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Press fn+f1. Click Start, and then click the Power button. Click Start, click the arrow next to the Lock button, and then click Sleep. To exit Sleep:

Briefly slide the power switch. When the computer exits Sleep, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:

Windows password before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required when the computer exits Sleep, you must enter your Setting power options 11 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Initiating and exiting Hibernation The system is set at the factory to initiate Hibernation after 120 minutes of inactivity when running on battery power, 1080 minutes (18 hours) of inactivity when running on external power, or when the battery reaches a critical battery level. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. To initiate Hibernation:

1. Click Start, and then click the arrow next to the Lock button. 2. Click Hibernate. To exit Hibernation:

Briefly slide the power switch. The power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:

your Windows password before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required when the computer exits Hibernation, you must enter Using the battery meter The battery meter is located in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. The battery meter allows you to quickly access power settings, view remaining battery charge, and select a different power plan. To display the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, move the pointer over the battery meter icon. To access Power Options, or to change the power plan, click the battery meter icon and select an item from the list. Different battery meter icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. The icon also displays a message if the battery has reached a critical battery level. To hide or display the battery meter icon:

1. Right-click the taskbar, and then click Properties. 2. Click the Notification Area tab. 3. Under System icons, clear the Power check box to hide the battery meter icon, or select the Power check box to display the battery meter icon. 4. Click OK. Using power plans A power plan is a collection of system settings that manages how the computer uses power. Power plans can help you conserve power or maximize performance. You can change power plan settings or create your own power plan. Viewing the current power plan

Move the pointer over the battery meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 12 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. Selecting a different power plan

Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then select a power plan from the list. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options, and then select a power plan from the list. Customizing power plans 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. 2. Select a power plan, and then click Change plan settings. 3. Change the Turn off the display and Put the computer to sleep timeout settings, as needed. 4. To change additional settings, click Change advanced power settings and make your changes. Setting password protection on wakeup To set the computer to prompt for a password when the computer exits Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. In the left pane, click Require a password on wakeup. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. Click Require a password (recommended). 5. Click Save changes. Using external AC power External AC power is supplied through one of the following devices:

WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. Approved AC adapter Optional docking device or optional expansion product Connect the computer to external AC power under any of the following conditions:

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using external AC power 13 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. When you are charging or calibrating a battery When you are installing or modifying system software When you are writing information to a CD or DVD When you connect the computer to external AC power, the following events occur:

The battery begins to charge. If the computer is turned on, the battery meter icon in the notification area changes appearance. When you disconnect external AC power, the following events occur:

The computer switches to battery power. The display brightness is automatically decreased to save battery life. To increase display brightness, press the fn+f4 hotkey or reconnect the AC adapter. Connecting the AC adapter WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. To connect the computer to external AC power, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector (1) on the computer. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter (2). Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet (3). 14 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using battery power When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is plugged into external AC power, the computer runs on AC power. If the computer contains a charged battery and is running on external AC power supplied through the AC adapter, the computer switches to battery power if the AC adapter is disconnected from the computer. NOTE: The display brightness is decreased to save battery life when you disconnect AC power. To increase display brightness, use the fn+f4 hotkey or reconnect the AC adapter. You can keep a battery in the computer or in storage, depending on how you work. Keeping the battery in the computer whenever the computer is plugged into AC power charges the battery and also protects your work in case of a power outage. However, a battery in the computer slowly discharges when the computer is off and unplugged from external power. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, display brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Finding battery information in Help and Support The Battery information section of the Help and Support Learning Center provides the following tools and information:

Battery Check tool to test battery performance Information on calibration, power management, and proper care and storage to maximize battery life Information on battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity To access battery information:

Select Start > Help and Support > Learning Center > HP Power and Battery Learning Center. Using Battery Check Battery Check, a part of the Total Care Advisor, provides information on the status of the battery installed in the computer. To run Battery Check:

1. Connect the AC adapter to the computer. NOTE: The computer must be connected to external power for Battery Check to function properly. 2. Select Start > Help and Support > Troubleshooting tools > Battery Check. Battery Check examines the battery and its cells to see if they are functioning properly, and then reports the results of the examination. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using battery power 15 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Displaying the remaining battery charge

Move the pointer over the battery meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. or View the estimated number of minutes of battery charge remaining in Windows Mobility Center:

Click the battery meter icon, and then click Windows Mobility Center. or Select Start > Control Panel > Mobile PC > Windows Mobility Center. The time shown indicates the approximate running time remaining on the battery if the battery continues to provide power at the current level. For example, the time remaining will decrease when a DVD is playing and will increase when a DVD stops playing. Inserting or removing the battery CAUTION: Removing a battery that is the sole power source can cause loss of information. To prevent loss of information, initiate Hibernation or shut down the computer through Windows before removing the battery. To insert the battery:

1. 2. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. Insert the battery into the battery bay (1) and push in until it is seated. The battery release latches (2) automatically lock the battery into place. To remove the battery:

1. 2. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. Slide the battery release latches (1) to release the battery. 16 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 3. Remove the battery (2) from the computer. Charging a battery WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. The battery charges whenever the computer is plugged into external power through an AC adapter, an optional power adapter, an optional expansion product, or an optional docking device. The battery charges whether the computer is off or in use, but it charges faster when the computer is off. Charging may take longer if a battery is new, has been unused for 2 weeks or more, or is much warmer or cooler than room temperature. To prolong battery life and optimize the accuracy of battery charge displays, follow these recommendations:

If you are charging a new battery, charge it fully before turning on the computer. Charge the battery until the battery light turns off. NOTE:

area may show 100 percent charge before the battery is fully charged. If the computer is on while the battery is charging, the battery meter in the notification Allow the battery to discharge below 5 percent of a full charge through normal use before charging it. If the battery has been unused for one month or more, calibrate the battery instead of simply charging it. The battery light displays charge status:

On: The battery is charging. Blinking: The battery has reached a low battery level or critical battery level and is not charging. Off: The battery is fully charged, in use, or not installed. Using battery power 17 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Maximizing battery discharge time Battery discharge time varies, depending on the features you use while on battery power. Maximum discharge time gradually shortens as the battery storage capacity naturally degrades. Tips for maximizing battery discharge time:

Lower the brightness on the display. Check the Power saver setting in Power Options. Remove the battery from the computer when it is not being used or charged. Store the battery in a cool, dry location. Managing low battery levels The information in this section describes the alerts and system responses set at the factory. Some low-

battery alerts and system responses can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. Preferences set using Power Options do not affect lights. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low battery level, the battery light blinks. If a low battery level is not resolved, the computer enters a critical battery level, and the battery light blinks rapidly. The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state, and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. 18 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Resolving a low battery level CAUTION: To reduce the risk of losing information when the computer reaches a critical battery level and has initiated Hibernation, do not restore power until the power lights turn off. Resolving a low battery level when external power is available

Connect one of the following devices:

AC adapter Optional expansion product or docking device Optional power adapter Resolving a low battery level when a charged battery is available 1. Turn off the computer or initiate Hibernation. 2. Remove the discharged battery, and then insert a charged battery. 3. Turn on the computer. Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available

Initiate Hibernation. or Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the computer lacks sufficient power to exit Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. 2. Insert a charged battery or plug the computer into external power. Exit Hibernation by briefly sliding the power switch. Calibrating a battery Calibrate a battery under the following conditions:

When battery charge displays seem inaccurate When you observe a significant change in battery run time Even if a battery is heavily used, it should not need to be calibrated more than once a month. It is also not necessary to calibrate a new battery. Step 1: Fully charge the battery WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. NOTE: The battery charges whether the computer is off or in use, but it charges faster when the computer is off. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using battery power 19 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review To fully charge the battery:

1. Insert the battery into the computer. 2. Connect the computer to an AC adapter, optional power adapter, optional expansion product, or optional docking device, and then plug the adapter or device into external power. The battery light on the computer turns on. 3. Leave the computer plugged into external power until the battery is fully charged. The battery light on the computer turns off. Step 2: Disable Hibernation and Sleep 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. 2. Under the current power plan, click Change plan settings. 3. Record the Turn off the display and Put the computer to sleep settings listed in the On battery column so that you can reset them after the calibration. 4. Change the Turn off the display and Put the computer to sleep settings to Never. 5. Click Change advanced power settings. 6. Click the plus sign next to Sleep, and then click the plus sign next to Hibernate after. 7. Record the On battery setting under Hibernate after so that you can reset it after the calibration. 8. Change the On battery setting to Never. 9. Click OK. 10. Click Save changes. Step 3: Discharge the battery The computer must remain on while the battery is being discharged. The battery can discharge whether or not you are using the computer, but the battery will discharge faster while you are using it. If you plan to leave the computer unattended during the discharge, save your information before beginning the discharge procedure. If you use the computer occasionally during the discharge procedure and have set energy-saving timeouts, expect the following performance from the system during the discharge process:

The monitor will not turn off automatically. Hard drive speed will not decrease automatically when the computer is idle. System-initiated Hibernation will not occur. 20 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review To discharge a battery:

1. Unplug the computer from its external power source, but do not turn off the computer. 2. Run the computer on battery power until the battery is discharged. The battery light begins to blink when the battery has discharged to a low battery level. When the battery is discharged, the battery light turns off and the computer shuts down. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using battery power 21 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Step 4: Fully recharge the battery To recharge the battery:

1. 2. Plug the computer into external power and maintain external power until the battery is fully recharged. When the battery is recharged, the battery light on the computer turns off. You can use the computer while the battery is recharging, but the battery will charge faster if the computer is off. If the computer is off, turn it on when the battery is fully charged and the battery light has turned off. Step 5: Reenable Hibernation and Sleep CAUTION: Failure to reenable Hibernation after calibration may result in a full battery discharge and information loss if the computer reaches a critical battery level. 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. 2. Under the current power plan, click Change plan settings. 3. Reenter the settings that you recorded for the items in the On battery column. 4. Click Change advanced power settings. 5. Click the plus sign next to Sleep, and then click the plus sign next to Hibernate after. 6. Reenter the setting that you recorded for On battery. 7. Click OK. 8. Click Save changes. Conserving battery power Select low power-use settings through Power Options in Windows Control Panel. Turn off wireless and local area network (LAN) connections and exit modem applications when you are not using them. Disconnect external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, when you are not using them. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Use the fn+f3 and fn+f4 hotkeys to adjust screen brightness as needed. If you leave your work, initiate Sleep or Hibernation, or shut down the computer. Storing a battery CAUTION: To prevent damage to a battery, do not expose it to high temperatures for extended periods of time. 22 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review If a computer will be unused and unplugged from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately. To prolong the charge of a stored battery, place it in a cool, dry place. NOTE: A stored battery should be checked every 6 months. If the capacity is less than 50 percent, recharge the battery before returning it to storage. Calibrate a battery before using it if it has been stored for one month or more. Disposing of a used battery WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. Refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices for battery disposal information. Replacing the battery Computer battery life varies, depending on the power management settings, programs running on the computer, display brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Battery Check notifies you to replace the battery when an internal cell is not charging properly, or when the battery storage capacity has reached a weak condition. A message refers you to the HP Web site for more information about ordering a replacement battery. If the battery is possibly covered by an HP warranty, instructions include a warranty ID. NOTE: To ensure that you always have battery power when you need it, HP recommends purchasing a new battery when the storage capacity indicator turns green-yellow. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using battery power 23 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Testing an AC adapter Test the AC adapter if the computer exhibits any of the following symptoms:

The computer will not turn on when connected to the AC adapter. The display does not turn on when the computer is connected to the AC adapter. The power light is off when the computer is connected to the AC adapter. To test the AC adapter:

1. Remove the battery from the computer. 2. Connect the AC adapter. 3. Turn on the computer. If the power light turns on, the AC adapter is functioning properly. If the power light remains off, the AC adapter is not functioning and should be replaced. Contact technical support for information on obtaining a replacement AC power adapter by selecting Start > Help and Support > Contact support. Shutting down the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information will be lost when the computer is shut down. The Shut Down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and computer. Shut down the computer under any of the following conditions:

When you need to replace the battery or access components inside the computer When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB port When the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period To shut down the computer, follow these steps:

NOTE:

before shutdown is possible. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, you must first exit Sleep or Hibernation 1. Save your work and close all open programs. 2. Click Start, and then click the arrow next to the Lock button. 3. Click Shut Down. If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, and then slide the power switch. Slide and hold the power switch for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. 24 Chapter 2 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 3 Wireless Using wireless devices (select models only) Wireless technology transfers data across radio waves instead of wires. Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

Wireless local area network (WLAN) deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, each mobile wireless device communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close together typically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. Computers with WLAN devices support one or more of the following IEEE industry standards:

802.11b, the first popular standard, supports data rates of up to 11 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. 802.11g supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. An 802.11g WLAN device is backward compatible with 802.11b devices, so they can operate on the same network. 802.11a supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 5 GHz. NOTE: 802.11a is not compatible with 802.11b and 802.11g. Wi-Fi CERTIFIED 802.11n draft 2.0 supports data rates of up to 300 Mbps and may operate at 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz, making it backward compatible with 802.11a, b, and g. NOTE: The specifications for the 802.11n WLAN are draft specifications and are not final. If the final specifications differ from the draft specifications, it may affect the ability of the computer to communicate with other 802.11n WLAN devices. For more information on wireless technology, refer to the information and Web site links provided in Help and Support. Identifying wireless and network icons Icon Name Description Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using wireless devices (select models only) 25 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Wireless (connected) Identifies the location of the wireless light and the wireless switch on the computer. Wireless

(disconnected) Indicates that all of the wireless devices are off. Network status

(connected) Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed and one or more network devices are connected to the network. Network status

(disconnected) Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed but no network devices are connected to the network. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using these features:

Wireless switch Operating system controls Using the wireless switch The computer has a wireless switch, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights, depending on the model. All of the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory, so the wireless light is on (blue) when you turn on the computer. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. If the wireless light is blue, at least one wireless device is on. If the wireless light is amber, all wireless devices are off. Because the wireless devices are enabled at the factory, you can use the wireless switch to turn on or turn off the wireless devices simultaneously. Individual wireless devices can be controlled through Computer Setup. NOTE:

you reenable your devices. If the wireless devices are disabled by Computer Setup, the wireless switch will not work until Using operating system controls Some operating systems also offer a way to manage integrated wireless devices and the wireless connection. For more information, refer to the operating system documentation. 26 Chapter 3 Wireless Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using a WLAN With a WLAN device, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other computers and accessories that are linked by a wireless router or a wireless access point. NOTE: The terms wireless router and wireless access point are often used interchangeably. A large-scale WLAN, such as a corporate or public WLAN, typically uses wireless access points that can accommodate a large number of computers and accessories and can separate critical network functions. A home or small office WLAN typically uses a wireless router, which allows several wireless and wired computers to share an Internet connection, a printer, and files without requiring additional pieces of hardware or software. NOTE: To use the WLAN device in your computer, you must connect to a WLAN infrastructure

(provided through a service provider or a public or corporate network). Setting up a WLAN To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet, you need the following equipment:

A broadband modem (either DSL or cable) (1) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider (ISP) A wireless router (purchased separately) (2) The wireless computer (3) The illustration below shows an example of a wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet. As your network grows, additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to the network to access the Internet. For help in setting up your WLAN, refer to the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. Protecting your WLAN Because the WLAN standard was designed with only limited security capabilitiesbasically to foil casual eavesdropping rather than more powerful forms of attackit is essential to understand that WLANs are vulnerable to well-known and well-documented security weaknesses. WLANs in public areas, or hotspots, like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. New technologies are being developed by wireless manufacturers and hotspot service providers that make the public environment more secure and anonymous. If you are concerned about the security of your computer in a hotspot, limit your network activities to noncritical e-mail and basic Internet surfing. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using a WLAN 27 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. The common security levels are Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) and Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). Because wireless radio signals travel outside the network, other WLAN devices can pick up unprotected signals and either connect to your network (uninvited) or capture information being sent across it. However, you can take precautions to protect your WLAN:

Use a wireless transmitter with built-in security Many wireless base stations, gateways, and routers provide built-in security features such as wireless security protocols and firewalls. With the correct wireless transmitter, you can protect your network from the most common wireless security risks. Work behind a firewall A firewall is a barrier that checks both data and requests for data that are sent to your network and then discards any suspicious items. Firewalls are available in many varieties, both software and hardware. Some networks use a combination of both types. Use wireless encryption A variety of sophisticated encryption protocols is available for your WLAN. Find the solution that works best for your network security:

Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a wireless security protocol that uses a WEP key to encode or encrypt all network data before it is transmitted. Usually, you can allow the network to assign the WEP key. Alternatively, you can set up your own key, generate a different key, or choose other advanced options. Without the correct key, others will not be able to use the WLAN. WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access), like WEP, uses security settings to encrypt and decrypt data that is transmitted over the network. However, instead of using one static security key for encryptions as WEP does, WPA uses temporal key integrity protocol (TKIP) to dynamically generate a new key for every packet. It also generates different sets of keys for each computer on the network. Close your network If possible, prevent your network name (SSID) from being broadcast by the wireless transmitter. Most networks initially broadcast the name, telling any computer nearby that your network is available. By closing the network, other computers are less likely to know that your network exists. If your network is closed and the SSID is not broadcast, you will need to know or remember NOTE:

the SSID to connect new devices to the network. Write down the SSID and store it in a secure place before closing the network. 28 Chapter 3 Wireless Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Connecting to a WLAN To connect to the WLAN, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. If it is on, the wireless light is on. If the wireless light is amber, slide the wireless switch. Select Start > Connect To. Select your WLAN from the list, and then type the network security key, if required. If the network is unsecured, meaning that anyone can access the network, a warning is displayed. Click Connect Anyway to accept the warning and complete the connection. If the network is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a network security key, which is a security code. Type the code, and then click Connect to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you are out of range of a wireless router or access point. If you do not see the network you want to connect to, click Show all connections. A list NOTE:

of options will appear that includes creating a new network connection, as well as troubleshooting connection issues. After the connection is made, place the mouse pointer over the network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. More information about using a WLAN is available through the following resources:

Information from your ISP and the manufacturer's instructions included with your wireless router and other WLAN equipment Information and Web site links provided in Help and Support For a list of public WLANs near you, contact your ISP or search the Web. Web sites that list public WLANs include Cisco Internet Mobile Office Wireless Locations, Hotspotlist, and Geektools. Check with each public WLAN location for cost and connection requirements. For additional information on connecting your computer to a corporate WLAN, contact your network administrator or IT department. Roaming to another network When you move your computer within range of another WLAN, Windows attempts to connect to that network. If the attempt is successful, your computer is automatically connected to the new network. If Windows does not recognize the new network, follow the same procedure you used initially to connect to your WLAN. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using a WLAN 29 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select models only) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Computers (desktop, notebook, PDA) Phones (cellular, cordless, smart phone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Bluetooth devices provide peer-to-peer capability that allows you to set up a personal area network

(PAN) of Bluetooth devices. For information on configuring and using Bluetooth devices, refer to the Bluetooth software Help. Bluetooth and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) HP does not recommend setting up one computer with Bluetooth as a host and using it as a gateway through which other computers may connect to the Internet. When two or more computers are connected using Bluetooth, and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) is enabled on one of the computers, the other computers may not be able to connect to the Internet using the Bluetooth network. The strength of Bluetooth is in synchronizing information transfers between your computer and wireless devices including cellular phones, printers, cameras, and PDAs. The inability to consistently connect two or more computers to share the Internet through Bluetooth is a limitation of Bluetooth and the Windows operating system. 30 Chapter 3 Wireless Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 4 Multimedia Multimedia features Your computer includes multimedia features that allow you to listen to music and view pictures. Your computer may include the following multimedia components:

Integrated speakers for listening to music Integrated microphones for recording your own audio Integrated webcam that allows you to capture and share video Preinstalled multimedia software that allows you to play and manage your music, movies, and pictures Hotkeys that provide fast access to volume control NOTE: Your computer may not include all of the components listed. The following sections explain how to identify and use the multimedia components included with your computer. Identifying your multimedia components The following illustration and table describe the multimedia features of the computer. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Multimedia features 31 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Webcam light Webcam Internal microphones (2) Audio-in (microphone) jack Audio-out (headphone) jack Description On: The webcam is in use. Records audio and video and captures still photographs. Record sound. Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo array microphone, or monaural microphone. Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, ear buds, or a headset. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. NOTE: When a device is connected to the headphone jack, the computer speakers are disabled.

(5) Speakers (2) Produce sound. Adjusting the volume You can adjust the volume using the following controls:

Computer volume hotkeyA combination of the fn key (1) and either the f8 (2), f10 (3), or f11 (4) function key:

To mute or restore volume, press fn+f8. To decrease volume, press fn+f10. 32 Chapter 4 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review To increase volume, press fn+f11. Windows volume control:

a. Click the Volume icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. b. Increase or decrease the volume by moving the slider up or down. Click the Mute icon to mute the volume. or a. Right-click the Volume icon in the notification area, and then click Open Volume Mixer. b. In the Speakers column, you can increase or decrease the volume by moving the Volume slider up or down. You can also mute the volume by clicking the Mute icon. If the Volume icon is not displayed in the notification area, follow these steps to add it:

a. Right-click in the notification area, and then click Properties. b. Click the Notification Area tab. c. Under System icons, select the Volume check box. d. Click OK. Program volume control:

Volume can also be adjusted within some programs. Multimedia software Your computer includes preinstalled multimedia software that allows you to play music and view pictures. The following sections provide details about preinstalled multimedia software and installing multimedia software from a disc. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Multimedia software 33 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using preinstalled multimedia software To locate preinstalled multimedia software:

Select Start > All Programs, and then open the multimedia program you want to use. NOTE: Some programs may be located in subfolders. Installing multimedia software from a disc NOTE: To install multimedia software from a disc, you must have an external optical drive connected to the computer. The computer provides one powered USB port on the left side of the computer. This port provides power to the external optical drive when used with a powered USB cable. An external optical drive connected to the other USB port on the computer must be connected to AC power. To install any multimedia software from a CD or DVD, follow these steps:

1. Insert the disc into a connected external optical drive. 2. When the installation wizard opens, follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Restart the computer if prompted to do so. NOTE: For details about using software included with the computer, refer to the software manufacturers instructions, which may be provided with the software, on disc, or on the manufacturers Web site. Sharing optical drives Although your computer does not have an installed optical drive, you can easily access software, as well as install applications and access data by sharing an optical drive from another computer that has an optical drive and is on the same wired or wireless network. Sharing drives is a feature of the Windows operating system that allows a drive on another computer to be made available for other people to use on a network. NOTE: For information on setting up a home network and sharing a drive, refer to Help and Support. NOTE: Some discs, such as DVD movies and game discs, may be copy-protected and therefore unusable through DVD or CD sharing. 34 Chapter 4 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Audio Your computer enables you to use a variety of audio features:

Play music using your computer speakers and/or connected external speakers Record sound using the internal microphones or connect an external microphone Download music from the Internet Create multimedia presentations using audio and images Transmit sound and images with instant messaging programs Stream radio programs (select models only) or receive FM radio signals Create or burn audio CDs using an external optical drive Connecting external audio devices WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To connect external devices such as external speakers, headphone, or a microphone, refer to the information provided with the device. For best results, remember the following tips:

Be sure that the device cable is securely connected to the correct jack on your computer. (Cable connectors are normally color-coded to match the corresponding jacks on the computer.) Be sure to install any drivers required by the external device. NOTE: A driver is a required program that acts like a translator between the device and the programs that use the device. Checking your audio functions To check the system sound on your computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Control Panel. 2. Click Hardware and Sound. 3. Click Sound. 4. When the Sound window opens, click the Sounds tab. Under Program, select any sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and click the Test button. You should hear sound through the speakers or through connected headphones. To check the record functions of the computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Sound Recorder. 2. Click Start Recording and speak into the microphone. Save the file to the desktop. 3. Open Windows Media Player and play back the sound. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Audio 35 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review NOTE: For best results when recording, speak directly into the microphone and record sound in a setting free of background noise.

To confirm or change the audio settings on your computer, right-click the Sound icon on the taskbar, or select Start > Control Panel > Audio. 36 Chapter 4 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Video Your computer enables you to use a variety of video features:

Play games over the Internet Edit pictures and video to create presentations Connect external video devices Connecting an external monitor or projector The external monitor port connects an external display device such as an external monitor or a projector to the computer.

To connect a display device, connect the device cable to the external monitor port. If a properly connected external display device does not display an image, press fn+f2 to NOTE:

transfer the image to the device. Repeatedly pressing fn+f2 alternates the screen image between the computer display and the device. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Video 37 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Optical drive (select models only) Your computer may come with an external optical drive that expands the functionality of the computer. The external optical drive allows you to read data discs, play music, and watch movies. Identifying the external optical drive

Select Start > Computer. You will see a list of all the devices installed on your computer, including the connected external optical drive. You may have one of the following types of drives:

DVD-ROM Drive DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive DVDRW/CD-RW Combo Drive NOTE: Some of the drives listed above may not be supported by your computer. Using optical discs An optical drive, such as a DVD-ROM drive, supports optical discs (CDs and DVDs). These discs store information, such as music, photos, and movies. DVDs have a higher storage capacity than CDs. The external optical drive can read standard CD and DVD discs. NOTE: Some of the optical drives listed may not be supported by your computer. The listed drives are not necessarily all of the supported optical drives. Some optical drives can also write to optical discs as described in the following table. Optical drive type Read from CD and DVD-ROM media Write to CD-R/RW media Write to DVD (includes DVD+R DL, DVDRW/

R, and DVD-ROM media) Write label to LightScribe CD or DVD DVD-ROM Drive DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive DVDRW/CD-RW Combo Drive Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes No No No CAUTION: To prevent possible audio and video degradation, loss of information, or loss of audio or video playback functionality, do not initiate Sleep or Hibernation while reading or writing to a CD or DVD. Selecting the right disc An optical drive supports optical discs (CDs and DVDs). CDs, used to store digital data, are also used for commercial audio recordings and are convenient for your personal storage needs. DVDs are used primarily for movies, software, and data backup purposes. DVDs are the same form factor as CDs but have 6 to 7 times the storage capacity. NOTE: The external optical drive connected to your computer may not support all the types of optical discs discussed in this section. 38 Chapter 4 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review CD-R discs Use CD-R (write-once) discs to create permanent archives and to share files with virtually anyone. Typical uses include the following:

Distributing large presentations Sharing scanned and digital photos, video clips, and written data Making your own music CDs Keeping permanent archives of computer files and scanned home records Offloading files from your hard drive to free up disk space After data is recorded, it cannot be erased or written over. CD-RW discs Use a CD-RW disc (a rewritable version of a CD) to store large projects that must be updated frequently. Typical uses include the following:

Developing and maintaining large documents and project files Transporting work files Making weekly backups of hard drive files Updating photos, video, audio, and data continuously DVDR discs Use blank DVDR discs to permanently store large amounts of information. After data is recorded, it cannot be erased or written over. DVDRW discs Use DVDRW discs if you want to be able to erase or write over data that you saved earlier. This type of disc is ideal for testing audio or video recordings before you burn them to a CD or DVD that cannot be changed. Playing music NOTE: Be sure that the external optical drive is connected to your computer before beginning these steps. 1. 2. 3. Turn on the computer. Press the release button (1) on the external optical drive bezel to release the disc tray. Pull out the tray (2). 4. Hold the disc by the edges and position the disc label-side up over the tray spindle. NOTE:

If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully to position it over the spindle. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Optical drive (select models only) 39 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 5. Gently press the disc (3) down onto the tray spindle until the disc snaps into place. 6. Close the disc tray. 7. If you have not yet configured AutoPlay, the AutoPlay dialog box opens and asks how you want to use the media content. Choose Windows Media Player, which is preinstalled on your computer. NOTE: After you insert a disc, a short pause is normal. If Sleep or Hibernation is accidentally initiated during playback of a disc:

Your playback may be interrupted. You may see a warning message asking if you want to continue. If this message is displayed, click No. You may need to restart the CD or DVD to resume playback. Watching a movie An external optical drive allows you to watch movies from a disc. NOTE: Be sure that the external optical drive is connected to your computer before beginning these steps. 1. 2. 3. Turn on the computer. Press the release button (1) on the external optical drive bezel to release the disc tray. Pull out the tray (2). 4. Hold the disc by the edges and position the disc label-side up over the tray spindle. NOTE:

If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully to position it over the spindle. 40 Chapter 4 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 5. Gently press the disc (3) down onto the tray spindle until the disc snaps into place. 6. Close the disc tray. NOTE: After you insert a disc, a short pause is normal. If you have not selected a media player, an AutoPlay dialog box opens. It prompts you to select how you want to use the media content. Changing DVD region settings Most DVDs that contain copyrighted files also contain region codes. The region codes help protect copyrights internationally. You can play a DVD containing a region code only if the region code on the DVD matches the region setting on your DVD drive. CAUTION: The region settings on your DVD drive can be changed only 5 times. The region setting you select the fifth time becomes the permanent region setting on the DVD drive. The number of region changes remaining is displayed on the DVD Region tab. To change settings through the operating system:

1. 2. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing applications, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Windows Help and Support for more information. 3. Click the "+" sign next to DVD/CD-ROM drives. 4. Right-click the DVD drive for which you want to change region settings, and then click Properties. 5. Make the desired changes on the DVD Region tab. 6. Click OK. Optical drive (select models only) 41 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Creating or burning a CD or DVD If your external optical drive is a CD-RW, DVD-RW, or DVDRW optical drive, you can use software such as Windows Media Player to burn data and audio files, including MP3 and WAV music files. To burn video files to a CD or DVD, use MyDVD. Observe the following guidelines when burning a CD or DVD:

Before burning a disc, save and close any open files and close all programs. A CD-R or DVD-R is usually best for burning audio files because after the information is copied, it cannot be changed. Because some home and car stereos will not play CD-RWs, use CD-Rs to burn music CDs. A CD-RW or DVD-RW is generally best for burning data files or for testing audio or video recordings before you burn them to a CD or DVD that cannot be changed. DVD players used in home systems usually do not support all DVD formats. Refer to the user guide that came with your DVD player for a list of supported formats. An MP3 file uses less space than other music file formats, and the process for creating an MP3 disc is the same as the process for creating a data file. MP3 files can be played only on MP3 players or on computers with MP3 software installed. To burn a CD or DVD, follow these steps:

1. Download or copy the source files into a folder on your hard drive. 2. 3. 4. Insert a blank CD or DVD into the external optical drive. Select Start > All Programs and the name of the software you want to use. Select the kind of CD or DVD you want to createdata, audio, or video. 5. Right-click Start, click Explore, and navigate to the folder where the source files are stored. 6. Open the folder, and then drag the files to the drive that contains the blank optical disc. 7. Initiate the burning process as directed by the program you have selected. For specific instructions, refer to the software manufacturer's instructions, which may be provided with the software, on disc, or on the manufacturer's Web site. CAUTION: Observe the copyright warning. It is a criminal offense, under applicable copyright laws, to make unauthorized copies of copyright-protected material, including computer programs, films, broadcasts, and sound recordings. Do not use this computer for such purposes. Removing an optical disc (CD or DVD) 1. Press the release button (1) on the drive bezel to release the disc tray, and then gently pull out the tray (2) until it stops. 42 Chapter 4 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 2. Remove the disc (3) from the tray by gently pressing down on the spindle while lifting the outer edges of the disc. Hold the disc by the edges and avoid touching the flat surfaces. NOTE:

If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully as you remove it. 3. Close the disc tray and place the disc in a protective case. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Optical drive (select models only) 43 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Webcam Your computer model includes an integrated webcam, located at the top of the display. The webcam can be used with a variety of software for the following functions:

Capturing video Streaming video with instant message software Taking still photos NOTE: For information about using software designed for use with the integrated webcam, refer to the online Help for that software. For optimum performance, observe the following guidelines while using the integrated webcam:

Be sure that you have the latest version of an instant message program before attempting a video conversation. The webcam may not work properly across some network firewalls. If you are having trouble viewing or sending multimedia files to someone on another LAN NOTE:

or outside your network firewall, temporarily disable the firewall, perform the task you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall as necessary, and adjust the policies and settings of other intrusion detection systems. For additional information, contact your network administrator or IT department. Whenever possible, place bright light sources behind the webcam and out of the picture area. Adjusting webcam properties You can adjust webcam properties using the Properties dialog box, which is accessible from various programs that use the integrated webcam, usually from a configuration, settings, or properties menu:

BrightnessControls the amount of light that is incorporated into the image. A higher brightness setting creates a brighter image; a lower brightness setting creates a darker image. ContrastControls the difference between lighter and darker areas on the image. A higher contrast setting intensifies the image; a lower contrast setting maintains more of the original informations dynamic range but leads to a flatter image. HueControls the aspect of color that distinguishes it from another color (what makes a color red, green, or blue). Hue is distinct from saturation, which measures the intensity of the hue. SaturationControls the strength of color in the final image. A higher saturation setting creates a bolder image; a lower saturation setting creates a more subtle image. SharpnessControls the definition of edges in an image. A higher sharpness setting creates a more defined image; a lower sharpness setting creates a softer image. GammaControls the contrast affecting the mid-level grays or midtones of an image. Adjusting the gamma of an image allows you to change the brightness values of the middle range of gray tones without dramatically altering the shadows and highlights. A lower gamma setting makes grays look black, and makes dark colors even darker. For information about using the webcam, select Start > Help and Support. 44 Chapter 4 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 5 Security Protecting the computer NOTE: Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents may not prevent a product from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE:

In some countries or regions, the computer supports CompuTrace, which is an online-security-

based tracking and recovery service. If the computer is stolen, CompuTrace can track the computer if the unauthorized user accesses the Internet. You must purchase the software and subscribe to the service in order to use CompuTrace. For information about ordering the CompuTrace software, see the HP Web site at http://www.hpshopping.com. Security features provided with your computer can protect the computer, personal information, and data from a variety of risks. The way you use your computer will determine which security features you need to use. The Windows operating system offers certain security features. Additional security features are listed in the following table. Most of these additional security features can be configured in the Computer Setup utility. To protect against Use this security feature Unauthorized use of the computer Power-on authentication using passwords or smart cards Unauthorized access to Computer Setup (f10) Setup password in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive DriveLock password in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized reset of Computer Setup (f10) passwords Stringent security feature in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized startup from an optical drive, diskette drive, or internal network adapter Boot options feature in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized access to data Firewall software Windows updates Unauthorized access to Computer Setup settings and other system identification information Setup password in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized removal of the computer Security cable slot (used with an optional security cable)

*Computer Setup is a non-Windows utility accessed by pressing f10 when the computer is turned on or restarted. When using Computer Setup, you must use the keys on your computer to navigate and make selections. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Protecting the computer 45 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information. Several types of passwords can be set, depending on how you want to control access to your information. Passwords can be set in Windows or in the non-Windows Computer Setup utility that is preinstalled on the computer. CAUTION: To prevent being locked out of the computer, record each password you set. Because most passwords are not displayed as they are set, changed, or deleted, it is essential to record each password immediately and store it in a secure place. You can use the same password for a Computer Setup feature and for a Windows security feature. You can also use the same password for more than one Computer Setup feature. Use the following guidelines when setting a password in Computer Setup:

A password can be any combination of up to 8 letters and numbers and is case sensitive. A password set in Computer Setup must be entered at a Computer Setup prompt. A password set in Windows must be entered at a Windows prompt. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Write down your passwords and store them in a secure place away from the computer. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. Do not use your name or other personal information that could be easily discovered by an outsider. The following sections list Windows and Computer Setup passwords and describe their functions. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords, select Start > Help and Support. Setting passwords in Windows Windows passwords Administrator password*

User password*

Function Protects access to a Windows administrator-level account. Protects access to a Windows user account.

*For information about setting a Windows administrator password or a Windows user password, select Start > Help and Support. Setting passwords in Computer Setup Computer Setup passwords Function Setup password Power-on password Protects access to Computer Setup. Protects access to the computer contents when the computer turns on, restarts, or exits Hibernation. 46 Chapter 5 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Computer Setup passwords DriveLock master password DriveLock user password Setup password Function Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock. It is also used to remove DriveLock protection. This password is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process. Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock, and is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process. The Computer Setup setup password protects the configuration settings and system identification information in Computer Setup. After this password is set, it must be entered to access Computer Setup and to make changes using Computer Setup. Note the following characteristics of the setup password:

It is not interchangeable with a Windows administrator password, although both passwords can be identical. It is not displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. It must be set and entered with the same keys. For example, a setup password set with keyboard number keys will not be recognized if you enter it thereafter with embedded numeric keypad number keys. It can include any combination of up to 32 letters and numbers and is not case sensitive. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using passwords 47 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Managing a setup password A setup password is set, changed, and deleted in Computer Setup. To manage, set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Setup Password, and then press enter. To set a setup password, type your password in the New password and Verify new password fields, and then press f10. To change a setup password, type your current password in the Old password field, type a new password in the New password and Verify new password fields, and then press f10. To delete a setup password, type your current password in the Old password field, and then press f10. 3. To save your preferences, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences go into effect when the computer restarts. 48 Chapter 5 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Entering a setup password At the Setup password prompt, type your setup password (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the setup password, you must restart the computer and try again. Power-on password The Computer Setup power-on password prevents unauthorized use of the computer. After this password is set, it must be entered each time the computer is turned on. Note the following characteristics of a power-on password:

It is not displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. It must be set and entered with the same keys. For example, a power-on password set with keyboard number keys will not be recognized if you enter it thereafter with embedded numeric keypad number keys. It can include any combination of up to 32 letters and numbers and is not case sensitive. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using passwords 49 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Managing a power-on password A power-on password is set, changed, and deleted in Computer Setup. To manage, set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Power-On password, and then press enter. To set a power-on password, type the password in the New password and Verify new password fields, and then press f10. To change a power-on password, type the current password in the Old password field, type the new password in the New password and Verify new password fields, and then press f10. To delete a power-on password, type the current password in the Old password field, and then press f10. 3. To save your preferences, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences go into effect when the computer restarts. 50 Chapter 5 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Managing a power-on password A power-on password is set, changed, and deleted in Computer Setup. To manage, set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Power-On password, and then press enter. To set a power-on password, type the password in the New password and Verify new password fields, and then press f10. To change a power-on password, type the current password in the Old password field, type the new password in the New password and Verify new password fields, and then press f10. To delete a power-on password, type the current password in the Old password field, and then press f10. 3. To save your preferences, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences go into effect when the computer restarts. 50 Chapter 5 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Entering a power-on password At the Power-on Password prompt, type your password (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the password, you must turn off the computer, turn it back on, and then try again. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using passwords 51 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Requiring a power-on password at restart In addition to requiring that a power-on password be entered each time the computer is turned on, you can also require that a power-on password be entered each time the computer is restarted. To enable and disable this feature in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Password options, and then press enter. 3. Use the arrow keys to select Enable or Disable in the Require password on restart field, and then press f10. 4. To save your preferences, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Using Computer Setup DriveLock CAUTION: To prevent the DriveLock-protected hard drive from becoming permanently unusable, record the DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password in a safe place away from your computer. If you forget both DriveLock passwords, the hard drive will be permanently locked and can no longer be used. DriveLock protection prevents unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive. DriveLock can be applied only to the internal hard drive(s) of the computer. After DriveLock protection is applied to a drive, a password must be entered to access the drive. The drive must be inserted into the computer, not into an optional docking device or external MultiBay, in order for it to be accessed by the DriveLock passwords. To apply DriveLock protection to an internal hard drive, a user password and a master password must be set in Computer Setup. Note the following considerations about using DriveLock protection:

After DriveLock protection is applied to a hard drive, the hard drive can be accessed only by entering either the user password or the master password. The owner of the user password should be the day-to-day user of the protected hard drive. The owner of the master password may be either a system administrator or the day-to-day user. The user password and the master password can be identical. You can delete a user password or master password only by removing DriveLock protection from the drive. DriveLock protection can be removed from the drive only with the master password. NOTE: When your power-on password and DriveLock user password are identical, you will be prompted to enter only a power-on password instead of both a power-on password and a DriveLock user password. 52 Chapter 5 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Setting a DriveLock password To access the DriveLock settings in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > DriveLock passwords, and then press enter. 3. Select the location of the hard drive you want to protect, and then press f10. 4. Use the arrow keys to select Enable in the Protection field, and then press f10. 5. Read the warning. To continue, press f10. 6. 7. 8. 9. Type your user password in the New password and Verify new password fields, and then press f10. Type your master password in the New password and Verify new password fields, and then press f10. To confirm DriveLock protection on the drive you have selected, type DriveLock in the confirmation field, and then press f10. To exit DriveLock settings, use the arrow keys to select Esc. 10. To save your preferences, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences go into effect when the computer restarts. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using passwords 53 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Entering a DriveLock password Be sure that the hard drive is inserted into the computer (not into an optional docking device or external MultiBay). At the DriveLock Password prompt, type your user or master password (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. After 2 incorrect attempts to enter the password, you must shut down the computer and try again. 54 Chapter 5 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Changing a DriveLock password To access the DriveLock settings in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > DriveLock passwords, and then press enter. 3. Use the arrow keys to select the location of the internal hard drive, and then press f10. 4. Use the arrow keys to select the field for the password you want to change. Type your current password in the Old password field, and then type the new password in the New password field and in the Verify new password field. Then press f10. 5. To save your preferences, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences go into effect when the computer restarts. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using passwords 55 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Removing DriveLock protection To access the DriveLock settings in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > DriveLock passwords, and then press enter. 3. Use the arrow keys to select the location of the internal hard drive, and then press f10. 4. Use the arrow keys to select Disable in the Protection field, and then press f10. 5. 6. Type your master password in the Old password field. Then press f10. To save your preferences, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences go into effect when the computer restarts. 56 Chapter 5 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using Computer Setup security features Securing system devices From the Boot options menu or the Port options menu in Computer Setup, you can disable or enable system devices. To disable or reenable system devices in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select System Configuration > Boot options or System Configuration

> Port options. Then press enter and use the arrow keys to select the options you want. 3. 4. To confirm your preferences, press f10. To save your preferences, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences go into effect when the computer restarts. Using Computer Setup stringent security CAUTION: To prevent the computer from becoming permanently unusable, record your configured setup password, power-on password, or smart card PIN in a safe place away from your computer. Without these passwords or PIN, the computer cannot be unlocked. The stringent security feature enhances power-on security by forcing user authentication with your configured setup password, power-on password, or smart card PIN before granting access to the system. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using Computer Setup security features 57 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Setting stringent security To enable stringent security in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Password options, and then press enter. 3. Use the arrow keys to select Enable in the Stringent security field. 4. Read the warning. To continue, press f10. 5. 6. To enable the feature each time the computer is turned on, press f10. To save your preferences, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences go into effect when the computer restarts. 58 Chapter 5 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Removing stringent security To remove stringent security in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Password options and then press enter. 3. Use the arrow keys to select Disable in the Stringent security field, and then press f10. 4. To save your preferences, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences go into effect when the computer restarts. Viewing Computer Setup System Information The System Information feature in Computer Setup provides 2 types of system information:

Identification information about the computer model. Specification information for the processor, cache and memory size, and system ROM. To view this general system information, follow these steps:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select File > System Information, and then press enter. NOTE: To prevent unauthorized access to this information, you must create a setup password in Computer Setup. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using Computer Setup security features 59 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using antivirus software When you use the computer to access e-mail, a network, or the Internet, you expose the computer to computer viruses. Computer viruses can disable the operating system, applications, or utilities, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be updated. Norton Internet Security is preinstalled on the computer. For information about using the Norton Internet Security software, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security > Help and Support. For more information about computer viruses, type viruses in the Search box in Help and Support. 60 Chapter 5 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using firewall software When you use the computer to access e-mail, a network, or the Internet, unauthorized persons may be able to gain access to information about you, the computer, and your personal files. Use the firewall software preinstalled on the computer to protect your privacy. Firewall features include information on logging and reporting, and automatic alarms to monitor all incoming and outgoing traffic. Refer to the firewall documentation or contact your firewall manufacturer for more information. NOTE: Under some circumstances a firewall can block access to Internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a network, or block authorized e-mail attachments. To temporarily solve the problem, disable the firewall, perform the task that you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using firewall software 61 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Installing critical updates CAUTION: To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install the online critical updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. Updates to the operating system and other software may have become available after the computer was shipped. To be sure that all available updates are installed on the computer, observe these guidelines:

Run Windows Update monthly to install the latest software from Microsoft. Obtain updates, as they are released, from the Microsoft Web site and through the updates link in Help and Support. 62 Chapter 5 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Installing a security cable NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. 1. 2. 3. Loop the security cable around a secured object. Insert the key (1) into the cable lock (2). Insert the cable lock into the security cable slot on the computer (3), and then lock the cable lock with the key. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Installing a security cable 63 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 6 External devices Using a USB device Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a hardware interface that can be used to connect an optional external device, such as a USB keyboard, mouse, drive, printer, scanner, or hub. Some USB devices may require additional support software, which is usually included with the device. For more information about device-specific software, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. Your computer model has 2 USB ports, which support USB 1.0, USB 1.1, and USB 2.0 devices. A USB hub provides additional USB ports that can be used with the computer. Connecting a USB device CAUTION: To prevent damage to a USB connector, use minimal force to connect a USB device.

To connect a USB device to the computer, connect the USB cable for the device to the USB port. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected. NOTE: The first time you connect a USB device, a message is displayed in the notification area to let you know the device is recognized by the computer. Stopping and removing a USB device CAUTION: To prevent loss of information or an unresponsive system, stop a USB device before removing it. 64 Chapter 6 External devices Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review CAUTION: To prevent damage to a USB connector, do not pull on the cable to remove the USB device. To stop and remove a USB device:

1. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware icon, click the Show Hidden Icons icon (< or

<<) in the notification area. 2. Click the name of the device in the list. NOTE:

If the USB device is not listed, you do not have to stop the device before you remove it. 3. Click Stop, and then click OK. 4. Remove the device. Using USB legacy support USB legacy support (enabled by default) permits the following actions:

Using a USB keyboard, mouse, or hub connected to a USB port on the computer during startup or in an MS-DOS-based program or utility Starting or restarting from an optional external MultiBay or an optional USB bootable device USB legacy support is enabled at the factory. To disable or enable USB legacy support:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select System Configuration > Device configurations, and then press enter. 3. Use the arrow keys to enable or disable USB legacy support, and then press f10. 4. To save your preferences and exit Computer Setup, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences go into effect when the computer restarts. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using a USB device 65 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using external drives Removable external drives expand your options for storing and accessing information. A USB drive can be added by connecting the drive to a USB port on the computer. NOTE: HP external USB optical drives should be connected to the powered USB port on the left side of the computer. USB drives include the following types:

1.44-megabyte diskette drive Hard drive module (a hard drive with an adapter attached) DVD-ROM Drive DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive DVDRW/CD-RW Combo Drive MultiBay device Using optional external devices NOTE: For more information about required software and drivers, or to learn which computer port to use, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. To connect an external device to the computer:

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the equipment when connecting a powered device, be sure that the device is turned off and the AC power cord is unplugged. 1. Connect the device to the computer. 2. 3. If you are connecting a powered device, plug the device power cord into a grounded AC outlet. Turn on the device. To disconnect an unpowered external device, turn off the device, and then disconnect it from the computer. To disconnect a powered external device, turn off the device, disconnect it from the computer, and then unplug the AC power cord. Using an optional external MultiBay II An external MultiBay II connects to a USB port on the computer and enables you to use MultiBay II devices. The computer provides one powered USB port on the left side of the computer. This port provides power to the external MultiBay when used with a powered USB cable. An external MultiBay connected to the other USB port on the computer must be connected to AC power. For more information about the external MultiBay II, refer to the user guide that is included with the device. 66 Chapter 6 External devices Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using an optional external optical drive (select models only) An external optical drive connects to a USB port on the computer and enables you to use optical discs

(CDs and DVDs). The computer provides one powered USB port on the left side of the computer. This port provides power to the external optical drive when used with a powered USB cable. An external optical drive connected to the other USB port on the computer must be connected to AC power. An external optical drive, such as a DVD-ROM drive, supports optical discs (CDs and DVDs). These discs store or transport information and play music and movies. DVDs have a higher storage capacity than CDs. All optical drives can read from optical discs and some drives can also write to optical discs as described in the following table. Optical drive type Read from CD and DVD-ROM media Write to CD-R/RW media Write to DVD

(includes DVD+R DL, DVDRW/R, and DVD-

RAM media) Write label to LightScribe CD or DVD DVD-ROM Drive DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive DVDRW/CD-RW Combo Drive Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes No No No NOTE: Some of the optical drives listed may not be supported by your computer. The listed drives are not necessarily all of the supported optical drives. CAUTION: To prevent possible audio and video degradation, or loss of audio or video playback functionality, do not initiate Sleep or Hibernation while reading from or writing to a CD or DVD. To prevent loss of information, do not initiate Sleep or Hibernation when writing to a CD or DVD. If Sleep or Hibernation is initiated during playback of a disc, you may experience the following behaviors:

Your playback may be interrupted. You may see a warning message asking if you want to continue. If this message is displayed, click No. You may need to restart the CD or DVD to resume audio and video playback. Inserting an optical disc (CD or DVD) 1. 2. 3. Turn on the computer. Press the release button (1) on the drive bezel to release the disc tray. Pull out the tray (2). 4. Hold the disc by the edges to avoid touching the flat surfaces and position the disc label-side up over the tray spindle. NOTE:

If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully to position it over the spindle. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using an optional external optical drive (select models only) 67 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 5. Gently press the disc (3) down onto the tray spindle until the disc snaps into place. 6. Close the disc tray. Removing an optical disc (CD or DVD) There are 2 ways to remove a disc, depending on whether the disc tray opens normally or not. When the disc tray opens 1. Press the release button (1) on the drive bezel to release the disc tray, and then gently pull out the tray (2) until it stops. 2. Remove the disc (3) from the tray by gently pressing down on the spindle while lifting the outer edges of the disc. Hold the disc by the edges and avoid touching the flat surfaces. NOTE:

If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully as you remove it. 3. Close the disc tray and place the disc in a protective case. 68 Chapter 6 External devices Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review When the disc tray does not open 1. 2. Insert the end of a paper clip (1) into the release access in the front bezel of the drive. Press in gently on the paper clip until the tray is released, and then pull out the tray (2) until it stops. 3. Remove the disc (3) from the tray by gently pressing down on the spindle while lifting the outer edges of the disc. Hold the disc by the edges and avoid touching the flat surfaces. NOTE:

If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully as you remove it. 4. Close the disc tray and place the disc in a protective case. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using an optional external optical drive (select models only) 69 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 7 External media cards Using SD Card Reader cards Optional digital cards provide secure data storage and convenient data sharing. These cards are often used with digital mediaequipped cameras and PDAs as well as with other computers. The SD Card Reader supports the following formats:

MultiMediaCard (MMC) Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card Inserting a digital card CAUTION: To avoid damaging the digital card or the computer, do not insert any type of adapter into the SD Card Reader. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the digital card connectors, use minimal force to insert a digital card. 1. Hold the digital card label-side up, with the connectors facing the computer. 2. Insert the card into the SD Card Reader, and then push in on the card until it is firmly seated. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected, and a menu of available options may be displayed. 70 Chapter 7 External media cards Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Stopping and removing a digital card CAUTION: To prevent loss of data or an unresponsive system, stop a digital card before removing it. 1. Save your information and close all programs associated with the digital card. NOTE: To stop a data transfer, click Cancel in the operating system Copying window. 2. Stop the digital card:

a. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware icon, click the Show Hidden Icons icon

(< or <<) in the notification area. b. Click the name of the digital card in the list. c. Click Stop, and then click OK. 3. Press in on the digital card (1), and then remove the card from the slot (2). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using SD Card Reader cards 71 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Using pointing devices Setting pointing device preferences Use Mouse Properties in Windows to customize settings for pointing devices, such as button configuration, click speed, and pointer options. To access Mouse Properties, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Mouse. Using the TouchPad To move the pointer, slide your finger across the TouchPad surface in the direction you want the pointer to go. Use the TouchPad buttons like the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To scroll up and down using the TouchPad vertical scroll zone, slide your finger up or down over the lines. NOTE:

If you are using the TouchPad to move the pointer, you must lift your finger off the TouchPad before moving it to the scroll zone. Simply sliding your finger from the TouchPad to the scroll zone will not activate the scrolling function. Connecting an external mouse You can connect an external USB mouse to the computer using one of the USB ports on the computer. A USB mouse can also be connected to the system using the ports on an optional docking device or expansion product. Using the keyboard Using hotkeys Hotkeys are combinations of the fn key (1) and either the esc key (2) or one of the function keys (3). The icons on the f1 through f4 and f6, f8, f10, and f11 keys represent the hotkey functions. Hotkey functions and procedures are discussed in the following sections. 72 Chapter 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Function Display system information. Initiate Sleep. Alternate between computer display and external display. Decrease screen brightness. Increase screen brightness. Initiate QuickLock. Mute or restore computer sound. Decrease computer sound. Increase computer sound. Hotkey fn+esc fn+f1 fn+f2 fn+f3 fn+f4 fn+f6 fn+f8 fn+f10 fn+f11 To use a hotkey command on the computer keyboard, follow either of these steps:

Briefly press the fn key, and then briefly press the second key of the hotkey command. or Press and hold down the fn key, briefly press the second key of the hotkey command, and then release both keys at the same time. Displaying system information (fn+esc) Press fn+esc to display information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number. In the Windows fn+esc display, the version of the system BIOS (basic input-output system) is displayed as the BIOS date. On some computer models, the BIOS date is displayed in decimal format. The BIOS date is sometimes called the system ROM version number. Initiating Sleep (fn+f1) CAUTION: To reduce the risk of information loss, save your work before initiating Sleep. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the keyboard 73 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Press fn+f1 to initiate Sleep. When Sleep is initiated, your information is stored in system memory, the screen is cleared, and power is conserved. While the computer is in the Sleep state, the power lights blink. The computer must be on before you can initiate Sleep. If a critical battery level occurs while the computer is in the Sleep state, the computer initiates NOTE:

Hibernation and the information stored in memory is saved to the hard drive. The factory setting for critical battery action is Hibernate, but this setting can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. To exit Sleep, briefly slide the power switch or press any key on the keyboard. The function of the fn+f1 hotkey can be changed. For example, you can set the fn+f1 hotkey to initiate Hibernation instead of Sleep. NOTE:

hotkey. In all Windows operating system windows, references to the sleep button apply to the fn+f1 74 Chapter 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Switching the screen image (fn+f2) Press fn+f2 to switch the screen image among display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, pressing fn+f2 alternates the screen image from computer display to monitor display to simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Most external monitors receive video information from the computer using the external VGA video standard. The fn+f2 hotkey can also alternate images among other devices receiving video information from the computer. The following video transmission types, with examples of devices that use them, are supported by the fn+f2 hotkey:

LCD (computer display) External VGA (most external monitors) S-Video (televisions, camcorders, DVD players, VCRs, and video capture cards with S-Video-in jacks) HDMI (televisions, camcorders, DVD players, VCRs, and video capture cards with HDMI ports) Composite video (televisions, camcorders, DVD players, VCRs, and video capture cards with composite-video-in jacks) NOTE: Composite devices and S-Video devices can be connected to the system only by using an optional docking device. Decreasing screen brightness (fn+f3) Press fn+f3 to decrease screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to decrease the brightness level incrementally. Increasing screen brightness (fn+f4) Press fn+f4 to increase screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to increase the brightness level incrementally. Initiating QuickLock (fn+f6) Press fn+f6 to initiate the QuickLock security feature. QuickLock protects your information by displaying the operating system Log On window. While the Log On window is displayed, the computer cannot be accessed until a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password is entered. NOTE: Before you can use QuickLock, you must set a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password. For instructions, refer to Help and Support. To use QuickLock, press fn+f6 to display the Log On window and lock the computer. Then follow the instructions on the screen to enter your Windows user password or your Windows administrator password and access the computer. Muting speaker sound (fn+f8) Press fn+f8 to mute speaker sound. Press the hotkey again to restore speaker sound. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the keyboard 75 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Decreasing speaker sound (fn+f10) Press fn+f10 to decrease speaker sound. Hold down the hotkey to decrease speaker sound incrementally. Increasing speaker sound (fn+f11) Press fn+f11 to increase speaker sound. Hold down the hotkey to increase speaker sound incrementally. Using keypads The computer has an embedded numeric keypad and also supports an optional external numeric keypad or an optional external keyboard that includes a numeric keypad. Component

(1) fn key Description Alternates the functions of the keys on the embedded numeric keypad when pressed in combination with a keypad key or the shift key.

(2)

(3) Embedded numeric keypad Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. num lk key Enables the embedded numeric keypad. Using the embedded numeric keypad The 15 keys of the embedded numeric keypad can be used like the keys on an external keypad. When the embedded numeric keypad is turned on, each key on the keypad performs the function indicated by the icon in the upper-right corner of the key. Enabling and disabling the embedded numeric keypad Press fn+num lk to enable the embedded numeric keypad. Press fn+num lk again to return the keys to their standard keyboard functions. 76 Chapter 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review NOTE: The embedded numeric keypad will not function while an external keyboard or numeric keypad is connected to the computer, an optional docking device, or an optional expansion product. Switching key functions on the embedded numeric keypad You can temporarily alternate the functions of keys on the embedded numeric keypad between their standard keyboard functions and their keypad functions by using the fn key or the fn+shift key combination. To change the function of a keypad key to keypad functions while the keypad is off, press and hold the fn key while pressing the keypad key. To use the keypad keys temporarily as standard keys while the keypad is on:

Press and hold the fn key to type in lowercase. Press and hold fn+shift to type in uppercase. Using an optional external numeric keypad Keys on most external numeric keypads function differently according to whether num lock is on or off.

(Num lock is turned off at the factory.) For example:

When num lock is on, most keypad keys type numbers. When num lock is off, most keypad keys function like the arrow, page up, or page down keys. When num lock on an external keypad is turned on, the num lock light on the computer is turned on. When num lock on an external keypad is turned off, the num lock light on the computer is turned off. To turn num lock on or off on an external keypad as you work:

Press the num lk key on the external keypad, not on the computer. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using keypads 77 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Cleaning the TouchPad and keyboard Dirt and grease on the TouchPad can cause the pointer to jump around on the screen. To avoid this, clean the TouchPad with a damp cloth, and wash your hands frequently when using the computer. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. 78 Chapter 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 9 Drives Identifying installed drives To view the drives installed on the computer, select Start > Computer. On models with a secondary hard drive (drive D), the optical drive becomes drive E. The next drive added to the system, such as a new USB drive, will be assigned the next available drive letter. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing applications, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. Handling drives Drives are fragile computer components that must be handled with care. Refer to the following cautions before handling drives. Additional cautions are included with the procedures to which they apply. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying installed drives 79 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

Before you move a computer that is connected to an external hard drive, initiate Sleep and allow the screen to clear, or properly disconnect the external hard drive. Before handling a drive, discharge static electricity by touching the unpainted metal surface of the drive. Do not touch the connector pins on a removable drive or on the computer. Handle a drive carefully; do not drop a drive or place items on it. Before removing or inserting a drive, shut down the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off, in the Sleep state, or in Hibernation, turn the computer on and then shut it down through the operating system. Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive into a drive bay. Do not type on the keyboard or move the computer while an optional optical drive is writing to a disc. The write process is sensitive to vibration. When the battery is the only source of power, be sure that the battery is sufficiently charged before writing to media. Avoid exposing a drive to temperature or humidity extremes. Avoid exposing a drive to liquids. Do not spray the drive with cleaning products. Remove media from a drive before removing the drive from the drive bay, or traveling with, shipping, or storing a drive. If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-

through devices and security wands. The airport security devices that check carry-on luggage, such as conveyor belts, use X-rays instead of magnetism and will not damage a drive. 80 Chapter 9 Drives Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Improving HD performance Using Disk Defragmenter As you use the computer, files on the hard drive become fragmented. Disk Defragmenter consolidates the fragmented files and folders on the hard drive so that the system can run more efficiently. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Defragmenter. 2. Click Defragment now. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing applications, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Disk Cleanup searches the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer to run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. 2. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Cleanup. Follow the on-screen instructions. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Improving HD performance 81 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select models only) HP 3D DriveGuard protects the hard drive by parking the drive and halting I/O requests under either of the following conditions:

You drop the computer. You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power. A short time after the end of one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Hard drives that are in an optional docking device or are connected to a USB port are not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. For more information, refer to the HP 3D DriveGuard software Help. Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status The drive light on the computer changes to an amber color to show that the drive is parked. To determine whether drives are currently protected or whether a drive is parked, use Mobility Center:

If the software is enabled, a green check mark is superimposed over the hard drive icon. If the software is disabled, a red X is superimposed over the hard drive icon. If the drives are parked, a yellow moon is superimposed over the hard drive icon. NOTE: The icon in the Mobility Center may not show the most up-to-date status for the drive. For immediate updates after a change in status, you need to enable the notification area icon. To enable the notification area icon:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > HP 3D DriveGuard. 2. Next to Icon in System Tray, click Show. 3. Click OK. If HP 3D DriveGuard has parked the drive, the computer will behave in the following ways:

The computer will not shut down. The computer will not initiate Sleep or Hibernation, except as described in the following Note. NOTE:

DriveGuard allows the computer to initiate Hibernation. If the computer is running on battery power and reaches a critical battery level, HP 3D The computer will not activate battery alarms set on the Alarms tab in Power Options properties. Before you move the computer, HP recommends that you either shut it down or initiate Sleep or Hibernation. 82 Chapter 9 Drives Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Using HP 3D DriveGuard software The HP 3D DriveGuard software enables you to perform the following tasks:

Enable and disable HP 3D DriveGuard. NOTE: Depending on your user privileges, you may not be able to enable or disable HP 3D DriveGuard. Additionally, members of an Administrator group can change the privileges for non-

Administrator users. Determine whether a drive in the system is supported. To open the software and change settings, follow these steps:

1. In Mobility Center, click the hard drive icon to open the HP 3D DriveGuard window. or Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > HP 3D DriveGuard. 2. Click the appropriate button to change settings. 3. Click OK. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select models only) 83 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Replacing a hard drive CAUTION: To prevent information loss or an unresponsive system:

Shut down the computer before removing the hard drive from the hard drive bay. Do not remove the hard drive while the computer is on, in the Sleep state, or in Hibernation. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by briefly sliding the power switch. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. To remove a hard drive:

1. 2. Save your work. Shut down the computer and close the display. 3. Disconnect all external hardware devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 6. Remove the battery from the computer. 7. Remove the 3 screws from the back edge of the computer. 8. Turn the computer display-side up, with the front toward you, and open the display. 84 Chapter 9 Drives Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 9. Lift the keyboard up and remove the keyboard from the computer to expose the hard drive. 10. Loosen the hard drive screw (1). 11. Pull the hard drive tab (2) to the right to disconnect the hard drive, and then lift the hard drive out of the hard drive bay (3). To install a hard drive:

1. 2. Insert the hard drive into the hard drive bay (1). Pull the hard drive tab (2) to the left to connect the hard drive. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Replacing a hard drive 85 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 3. Tighten the hard drive screw (3). 4. Insert the front edge of the keyboard into the keyboard tray, and then press the keyboard into place. 5. Close the computer display and turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. 86 Chapter 9 Drives Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 6. Replace the 3 screws on the back edge of the computer. 7. Replace the battery. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Replacing a hard drive 87 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 10 Memory modules The computer has one memory module compartment, which is located under the keyboard. The memory capacity of the computer can be upgraded by replacing the existing memory module in the memory module slot. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock and damage to the equipment, unplug the power cord and remove all batteries before installing a memory module. CAUTION: Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage electronic components. Before beginning any procedure, be sure that you are discharged of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. To add or replace a memory module:

1. 2. Save your work. Shut down the computer and close the display. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by briefly sliding the power switch. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. 6. 7. 8. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. Press the battery latch (1) to release the battery from the computer. Press the battery latch again, and the memory module compartment cover pops open. Lift the memory module compartment cover (2). 88 Chapter 10 Memory modules Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 9. Remove the existing memory module:

a. Pull away the retention clips (1) on each side of the memory module. The memory module tilts up. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module. b. Grasp the edge of the memory module (2), and gently pull the module out of the memory module slot. To protect a memory module after removal, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 10. Insert a new memory module:

CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module. a. Align the notched edge (1) of the memory module with the tab in the memory module slot. b. With the memory module at a 45-degree angle from the surface of the memory module compartment, press the module (2) into the memory module slot until it is seated. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, do not bend the memory module. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

89 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review c. Gently press the memory module (3) down, applying pressure to the left and right edges of the memory module, until the retention clips snap into place. 11. Align the tabs (1) on the memory module compartment cover with the notches on the computer. 12. Close the cover (2). 13. Replace the battery. 14. Turn the computer right-side up, and then reconnect external power and external devices. 15. Turn on the computer. 90 Chapter 10 Memory modules Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review 11 Computer Setup Starting Computer Setup Computer Setup is a preinstalled, ROM-based utility that can be used even when the operating system is not working or will not load. NOTE: Some of the Computer Setup menu items listed in this guide may not be supported by your computer. NOTE: Pointing devices are not supported in Computer Setup. You must use the keyboard to navigate and make selections. NOTE: An external keyboard connected by USB can be used with Computer Setup only if USB legacy support is enabled. To start Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer. Before your operating system opens and while the F10=ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen, press f10. Using Computer Setup Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup The information and settings in Computer Setup are accessed from the File, Security, Diagnostics, and System Configuration menus. 1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the

"F10 = ROM Based Setup" message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. Because Computer Setup is not operating system based, it does not support the TouchPad. Navigation and selection are by keystroke:

To choose a menu or a menu item, use the arrow keys. To select an item, press enter. To close open dialog boxes and return to the main Computer Setup screen, press esc. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Starting Computer Setup 91 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review To view navigation information, press f1. To change the language, press f2. Select the File, Security, Diagnostics, or System Configuration menu. To exit Computer Setup, choose one of the following methods:

2. 3. To exit Computer Setup without saving your preferences, use the arrow keys to select File

> Ignore changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. To save your preferences and exit Computer Setup, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences go into effect when the computer restarts. Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup To return all settings in Computer Setup to the values that were set at the factory, follow these steps:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the

"F10 = ROM Based Setup" message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select File > Restore defaults, and then press enter. 3. When the confirmation dialog box opens, press f10. 4. To save your preferences and exit Computer Setup, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences go into effect when the computer restarts. NOTE: Your password settings and security settings are not changed when you restore the factory settings. Computer Setup menus The menu tables in this section provide an overview of the Computer Setup options. NOTE: Some of the Computer Setup menu items listed in this chapter may not be supported by your computer. File menu Select System information Restore defaults To do this View identification information for the computer. View specification information for the processor, cache and memory size, and system ROM. Replace the configuration settings in Computer Setup with the original factory settings. (Password settings and security settings are not changed when you restore the factory settings.) 92 Chapter 11 Computer Setup Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Select Ignore changes and exit Save changes and exit Security menu To do this Cancel any changes entered during the current session. Then exit and restart the computer. Save any changes entered during the current session. Then exit and restart the computer. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. NOTE: Some of the menu items listed in this section may not be supported by your computer. Select Setup password Power-on password Password options DriveLock passwords System IDs Disk Sanitizer Diagnostics menu Select HDD Self-Test Options Memory Check To do this Enter, change, or delete a setup password. Enter, change, or delete a power-on password. Enable/disable stringent security. Enable/disable the password requirement on computer restart. Enable, change, or disable DriveLock on any computer hard drive. Enter, change, or disable DriveLock on an optional MultiBay hard drive. NOTE: DriveLock settings are accessible only when you enter Computer Setup by turning on (not restarting) the computer. Enter a user-defined computer asset tracking number and ownership tag. Run Disk Sanitizer to destroy all existing data on the primary hard drive. The following options are available:

Fast: Runs the Disk Sanitizer erase cycle once. Optimum: Runs the Disk Sanitizer erase cycle 3 times. Custom: Allows you to select the desired number of Disk Sanitizer erase cycles from a list. CAUTION:

hard drive is destroyed permanently. If you run Disk Sanitizer, the data on the primary To do this Run a comprehensive self-test on any hard drive in the system or on any optional MultiBay hard drive. Run a comprehensive check on system memory. Computer Setup menus 93 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review System Configuration menu NOTE: Some of the listed System Configuration options may not be supported by your computer. Select Language Boot options Device configurations To do this Change the Computer Setup language. Set an f9, f10, and f12 delay when starting up. Enable/disable CD-ROM boot. Enable/disable floppy boot. Enable/disable internal network adapter boot. Enable/disable MultiBoot, which sets a boot order that can include most boot devices in the system. Set the Express Boot Popup delay in seconds. Set the boot order. 1st boot device: USB CD-ROM 2nd boot device: USB floppy 3rd boot device: USB SuperDisk 4th boot device: Notebook hard drive 5th boot device: USB hard disk 6th boot device: Network controller Swap the functions of the fn key and left ctrl key. Enable/disable USB legacy support. When enabled, USB legacy support allows the following:

Use of a USB keyboard in Computer Setup even when a your operating system is not running. Startup from bootable USB devices, including a hard drive, diskette drive, or optical drive connected by a USB port to the computer. Enable/disable BIOS DMA data transfers. Enable/disable fan always on while connected to an AC outlet. Enable/disable data execution prevention. Enable/disable LAN power saving mode. Enable/disable SATA Native Mode. Enable/disable Dual Core CPU. Enable/disable HDD translation mode. 94 Chapter 11 Computer Setup Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Select Built-in device options Port options To do this Enable/disable embedded WLAN Device Radio. Enable/disable embedded Bluetooth Device Radio. Enable/disable Network Interface Controller (NIC) Enable/disable LAN/WLAN Switching. Enable/disable Wake on LAN. Enable/disable the integrated camera (webcam) Enable/disable USB port. Enable/disable ExpressCard slot. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Computer Setup menus 95 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Index A AC adapter connecting 14 identifying 9 administrator password 46 airport security devices 80 antennas 8 applications key, Windows 5 audio devices, connecting external 35 audio functions, checking 35 audio-in (microphone) jack 6, 32 audio-out (headphone) jack 6, 32 B battery calibrating 19 charging 17, 19 conserving power 22 disposing 23 inserting 16 low battery levels 18 recharging 22 removing 16 replacing 23 storing 22 battery bay 8, 10 battery charge maximizing 18 battery light 17, 18 battery power 15 battery release latches 16 battery release latches, identifying 8 battery temperature 22 battery, identifying 9 bays, battery 10 Bluetooth device 25 Bluetooth label 10 boot options 94 boot order 94 button, volume mute 32 buttons power 4 QuickLook 4 QuickWeb 4 buttons, TouchPad 2 C cables USB 64 calibrating battery 19 caps lock light, identifying 3 CD inserting 39, 67 removing 42, 68 CD drive 38, 66 Certificate of Authenticity label 10 charging batteries 17, 19 checking audio functions 35 components additional hardware 9 bottom 8 display 7 front 5 left-side 7 right-side 6 top 1 composite video 75 Computer Setup device security 57 Diagnostics menu 93 DriveLock password 52 File menu 92 navigating and selecting 91 power-on password 49 restoring factory settings 92 Security menu 93 setup password 47 stringent security 57 System Configuration menu 94 connecting to a WLAN 29 connection, external power 14 connector, power 7 conservation, power 22 cord, power 9 corporate WLAN connection 29 critical battery level 18 D device security 57 Diagnostics menu 93 digital card inserting 70 removing 71 stopping 71 Disk Cleanup software 81 Disk Defragmenter software 81 diskette drive 66 display image, switching 75 screen brightness hotkeys 75 display components 7 drive light 5, 82 drive media 11 DriveLock password drives changing 55 description 52 entering 54 removing 56 setting 53 diskette 66 external 66 hard 66, 85 MultiBay 66 optical 66 drives, boot order 94 96 Index Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review drives, optical drive 38 DVD changing region setting 41 inserting 39, 67 removing 42, 68 DVD drive 38, 66 DVD region settings 41 E earbuds 32 embedded numeric keypad keys, identifying 5 encryption 28 esc key, identifying 5 external audio devices, connecting 35 external drive 66 external monitor port 37 external monitor port, identifying 7 F File menu 92 firewall 28 fn key 72 fn key, identifying 5 function keys 72 function keys, identifying 5 H hard disk drive external 66 HP 3D DriveGuard 82 installing 85 hard drive external 66 HP 3D DriveGuard 82 installing 85 hardware, identifying 1 HDMI 75 headphone (audio-out) jacks 32 headphones 32 Hibernation exiting 12 initiated during critical battery level 18 initiating 12 hotkeys decreasing screen brightness 75 decreasing speaker sound 76 description 72 displaying system information 73 increasing screen brightness 75 increasing speaker volume 76 initiating QuickLock 75 initiating Sleep 74 muting speaker sound 75 switching screen image 75 using 73 HP 3D DriveGuard 82 hubs 64 I icons network status 25 wireless 25 internal microphone, identifying 32 internal microphones, identifying 8 Internet connection setup 27 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 6, 32 audio-out (headphone) 6, 32 RJ-45 (network) 6 K keyboard hotkeys, identifying 72 keypad, embedded enabling and disabling 76 identifying 76 switching key functions 77 using 76 keypad, external num lock 77 using 77 keys esc 5 fn 5 function 5 keypad 5 Windows applications 5 Windows logo 5 L labels Bluetooth 10 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 10 regulatory 10 service tag 8, 10 wireless certification 10 WLAN 10 latches, battery release 8 legacy support, USB 91, 94 light, drive 82 lights caps lock 3 drive 5 power 3, 7 QuickLook 3 QuickWeb 3 webcam 8, 32 wireless 6 low battery level 18 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 81 Disk Defragmenter 81 memory module inserting 89 removing 89 memory module compartment, identifying 8 microphones, internal 8, 32 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 10 monitor port, external 7 monitor, connecting 37 mouse, external connecting 72 setting preferences 72 movie, watching 40 MultiBay 66 multimedia components, identifying 31 multimedia software 34 MultiMediaCard 70 mute button 32 N network status icon 25 num lock, external keypad 77 Index 97 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review O operating system Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 10 Product Key 10 optical disc inserting 39, 67 removing 42, 68 optical discs, using 38 optical drive 38, 66 P passwords administrator 46 DriveLock 52 power-on 49 setup 47 user 46 pointing devices setting preferences 72 external monitor 7, 37 USB 6, 7, 64 ports power connecting 14 conserving 22 power button, identifying 4 power connector, identifying 7 power cord, identifying 9 power light 7 power light, identifying 3 power plans 12 Product Key 10 product name and number, computer 8, 10 projector, connecting 37 public WLAN connection 29 Q QuickLock hotkey 75 QuickLook button, identifying 4 QuickLook light, identifying 3 QuickWeb button, identifying 4 QuickWeb light, identifying 3 R readable media 11 region codes, DVD 41 regulatory information regulatory label 10 wireless certification labels 10 98 Index release latches, battery 8 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 6 S S-Video 75 screen brightness hotkeys 75 screen image, switching 75 scrolling regions, TouchPad 2 SD Card 70 SD Card Reader 6, 70 security cable slot, identifying 6 Security menu 93 security, wireless 27 serial number, computer 8, 10 service tag 8, 10 setup of WLAN 27 setup utility Diagnostics menu 93 File menu 92 navigating and selecting 91 restoring factory settings 92 Security menu 93 System Configuration menu 94 setup, computer 1 shut down 24 Sleep exiting 11 initiating 11 Sleep hotkey 74 slots security cable 6 software Disk Cleanup 81 Disk Defragmenter 81 speakers 32 speakers, identifying 6, 8 storing battery 22 stringent security 57, 93 switches wireless 6 System Configuration menu 94 system fan 94 system information 92 system information hotkey 73 T temperature 22 TouchPad buttons 2 identifying 2 scrolling regions 2 using 72 traveling with the computer 10, 22 turning off the computer 24 U unresponsive system 24 USB cable, connecting 64 USB devices connecting 64 description 64 removing 64 stopping 64 USB hubs 64 USB legacy support 65, 91, 94 USB port, powered 66, 67 USB ports, identifying 6, 7, 64 user password 46 V vents, identifying 7, 8 video transmission types 75 video, recording 8 volume hotkeys 32 volume mute button 32 volume, adjusting 32 W webcam 8, 32 webcam light, identifying 8, 32 webcam properties, adjusting 44 Windows applications key, identifying 5 Windows logo key, identifying 5 wireless antennas 8 wireless certification label 10 wireless controls button 26 operating system 26 wireless icon 25 wireless light 6, 26 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 29 corporate WLAN connection 29 equipment needed 27 functional range 29 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review public WLAN connection 29 security 27 wireless switch 6, 26 WLAN device 10, 25, 27 WLAN label 10 writable media 11 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index 99 Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Gucci 1.0 Vista User Guide 537596-001--Final Review

 

 

Mini User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your device. To obtain the latest information in the Mini User Guide, go to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/support. Copyright 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: September 2009 Document Part Number: 574399-001 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the device, do not place the device directly on your lap or obstruct the device air vents. Use the device only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The device and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

iii iv Safety warning notice Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents 1 Hardware features Identifying the hardware ....................................................................................................................... 1 Top components .................................................................................................................. 1 TouchPad ............................................................................................................ 1 Lights ................................................................................................................... 2 Keys .................................................................................................................... 3 Front components ................................................................................................................ 3 Right-side components ........................................................................................................ 4 Left-side components .......................................................................................................... 5 Display components ............................................................................................................ 6 Bottom components ............................................................................................................. 7 Wireless antennas ............................................................................................................... 8 Additional hardware components ........................................................................................ 8 Identifying the labels ............................................................................................................................. 9 2 Wireless and local area network Using wireless devices ....................................................................................................................... 10 Identifying wireless and network status icons .................................................................... 10 Using the wireless controls ................................................................................................ 11 Using the wireless button ................................................................................................... 11 Using Wireless Assistant software (select models only) .................................................... 12 Using HP Connection Manager (select models only) ........................................................ 12 Using operating system controls ........................................................................................ 12 Using a WLAN .................................................................................................................................... 13 Setting up a WLAN ............................................................................................................ 13 Protecting your WLAN ....................................................................................................... 13 Connecting to a WLAN ...................................................................................................... 14 Roaming to another network .............................................................................................. 15 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) ............................................................................. 15 Inserting a SIM ................................................................................................................... 16 Removing a SIM ................................................................................................................ 16 Using Bluetooth wireless devices ....................................................................................................... 17 Bluetooth and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) ............................................................. 17 Troubleshooting wireless connection problems ................................................................................. 18 Cannot connect to a WLAN ............................................................................................... 18 Cannot connect to a preferred WLAN network .................................................................. 18 Network icon for WLAN is not displayed ............................................................................ 19 Current WLAN network security codes are unavailable .................................................... 19 v Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

WLAN connection is very weak ......................................................................................... 20 Cannot connect to the wireless router ............................................................................... 20 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) .......................................................................................... 20 3 Multimedia Multimedia features ............................................................................................................................ 22 Identifying your multimedia components ........................................................................... 22 Adjusting the volume ......................................................................................................... 23 Multimedia software ........................................................................................................................... 24 Using other preinstalled multimedia software .................................................................... 25 Installing multimedia software from the Internet ................................................................ 25 Audio .................................................................................................................................................. 25 Connecting external audio devices .................................................................................... 25 Checking your audio functions ........................................................................................... 25 Video .................................................................................................................................................. 26 Connecting an external monitor or projector ...................................................................... 26 Connecting an HDMI device .............................................................................................. 27 Configuring audio for HDMI (select models only) .............................................. 27 Webcam ............................................................................................................................................. 27 4 Digital cards Inserting a digital card ........................................................................................................................ 29 Stopping and Removing a digital card ................................................................................................ 30 5 USB devices Using a USB device ........................................................................................................................... 31 Connecting a USB device .................................................................................................. 31 Stopping and Removing a USB device .............................................................................. 31 Using the HP Mobile Drive (select models only) ................................................................................ 32 Inserting the HP Mini Mobile Drive .................................................................................... 32 Stopping and removing the HP Mini Mobile Drive ............................................................. 32 6 Drives Identifying installed drives .................................................................................................................. 34 Handling drives ................................................................................................................................... 34 Using external drives .......................................................................................................................... 34 Using optional external devices ......................................................................................... 35 7 Memory modules 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Setting pointing device preferences ................................................................................................... 39 vi Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using pointing devices ....................................................................................................................... 39 Using the TouchPad .......................................................................................................... 39 Connecting an external mouse .......................................................................................... 39 Using the keyboard ............................................................................................................................ 39 Using hotkeys .................................................................................................................... 39 Initiating Standby (fn+f1) ................................................................................... 40 Switching the screen image (fn+f2) ................................................................... 41 Decreasing screen brightness (fn+f7) ............................................................... 41 Increasing screen brightness (fn+f8) ................................................................. 41 Initiating QuickLock (fn+f6) ................................................................................ 41 Muting speaker sound (fn+f8) ........................................................................... 41 Decreasing speaker sound (fn+f10) .................................................................. 42 Increasing speaker sound (fn+f11) .................................................................... 42 9 Power management Setting power options ......................................................................................................................... 43 Using power-saving states ................................................................................................. 43 Initiating and exiting Sleep ................................................................................ 43 Initiating and exiting Hibernation ....................................................................... 44 Using the battery meter ..................................................................................................... 44 Using power plans ............................................................................................................. 44 Viewing the current power plan ......................................................................... 44 Selecting a different power plan ........................................................................ 45 Customizing power plans .................................................................................. 45 Setting password protection on wakeup ............................................................................ 45 Using external AC power .................................................................................................................... 45 Connecting the AC adapter ............................................................................................... 46 Testing an AC adapter ....................................................................................................... 46 Using battery power ........................................................................................................................... 47 Finding battery information in Help and Support ............................................................... 47 Using Battery Check .......................................................................................................... 47 Displaying the remaining battery charge ........................................................................... 48 Inserting or removing the battery ....................................................................................... 48 Charging a battery ............................................................................................................. 49 Maximizing battery discharge time .................................................................................... 50 Managing low battery levels .............................................................................................. 50 Identifying low battery levels ............................................................................. 50 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................. 51 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ....... 51 Resolving a low battery level when a charged battery is available ........................................................................................... 51 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ........................................................................................... 51 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

vii Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ....................................................................................... 51 Calibrating a battery ........................................................................................................... 51 Step 1: Fully charge the battery ........................................................................ 51 Step 2: Disable Hibernation and Sleep ............................................................. 52 Step 3: Discharge the battery ............................................................................ 52 Step 4: Fully recharge the battery ..................................................................... 53 Step 5: Reenable Hibernation and Sleep .......................................................... 53 Conserving battery power .................................................................................................. 53 Storing a battery ................................................................................................................ 53 Disposing of a used battery ............................................................................................... 54 Shutting down the device ................................................................................................................... 54 10 Security Protecting the device .......................................................................................................................... 55 Using passwords ................................................................................................................................ 55 Setting passwords in Windows .......................................................................................... 56 Setting passwords in Setup Utility ..................................................................................... 56 Administrator password ..................................................................................... 57 Managing an administrator password ............................................... 57 Entering an administrator password ................................................. 57 Power-on password .......................................................................................... 57 Managing a power-on password ...................................................... 58 Entering a power-on password ......................................................... 58 Using antivirus software ..................................................................................................................... 58 Using firewall software ....................................................................................................................... 58 Installing critical updates .................................................................................................................... 59 11 Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs ...................................................................................................................... 60 Backing up your information ............................................................................................................... 61 When to back up ................................................................................................................ 61 Backup suggestions ........................................................................................................... 61 Using system restore points .............................................................................................. 62 When to create restore points ........................................................................... 62 Create a system restore point ........................................................................... 62 Restore to a previous date and time ................................................................. 62 Performing a recovery ........................................................................................................................ 63 Recovering from the recovery discs .................................................................................. 63 Recovering from the dedicated recovery partition (select models only) ............................ 63 12 Software updates Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 64 viii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................... 64 Downloading a BIOS update ............................................................................................. 65 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................... 66 13 Setup Utility Starting the Setup Utility ..................................................................................................................... 67 Using the Setup Utility ........................................................................................................................ 67 Changing the language of the Setup Utility ....................................................................... 67 Navigating and selecting in the Setup Utility ...................................................................... 67 Displaying system information ........................................................................................... 68 Restoring default settings in the Setup Utility .................................................................... 68 Exiting the Setup Utility ...................................................................................................... 68 Setup Utility menus ............................................................................................................................ 68 Main menu ......................................................................................................................... 69 Security menu .................................................................................................................... 69 System Configuration menu .............................................................................................. 69 Diagnostics menu .............................................................................................................. 70 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 71 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ix x Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 Hardware features Identifying the hardware Components included with the device may vary by region and model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features on most device models. To see a list of hardware installed in the device:

1. 2. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. Select Start > Control panel > System and Security. In the System area, click Device Manager. Top components TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) TouchPad*

Left TouchPad button*

Right TouchPad button*

TouchPad scroll zone Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Scrolls up or down.

*This table describes factory settings. To view or change pointing device preferences, select Start > Devices and Printers. Then, right-click the device representing your device, and select Mouse. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying the hardware 1 Lights Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Caps lock light Power light*

Wireless light Description On: Caps lock is on. On: The device is on. Blinking: The device is in Standby. Off: The device is off. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. 2 Chapter 1 Hardware features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Keys Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key. Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Function keys Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. Front components Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying the hardware 3 Component

(1) Battery light Description On: A battery is charging. Blinking: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the device is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the device are fully charged. If the device is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking: The hard drive or flash drive is being accessed. Drive light

(2)

(3) Speakers (2) Produce sound. Right-side components Component Description

(1) SD Card Reader Supports the following optional digital card formats:

(2) Audio-out (headphone) jack/Audio-in (microphone) jack MultiMediaCard (MMC) Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or television audio. Also connects an optional headset microphone. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the device speakers are disabled.

(3)

(4)

(5) HP Mobile Drive (select models only) Connects an optional HP Mini Mobile Drive. External monitor port RJ-45 (network) jack Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. Connects a network cable. 4 Chapter 1 Hardware features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Left-side components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Security cable connector Attaches an optional security cable to the device. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the device from being mishandled or stolen. Power connector Connects an AC adapter. Vent USB port HDMI port Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The device fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connects an optional USB device. Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, or any compatible digital or audio component. NOTE: Depending on your computer model, the computer may include an HDMI port or a USB port at this location. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying the hardware 5 Display components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Internal display switch Webcam light Webcam Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. On: The webcam is in use. Captures still photographs and videos. NOTE: To capture videos, you will need to install additional webcam software. Internal microphone Records and captures sound. 6 Chapter 1 Hardware features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Bottom components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Battery release latches (2) Release the battery from the battery bay. Battery bay Vents (3) Memory module compartment Holds the battery. Enable airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The device fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Contains the memory module slot and a wireless LAN module slot. Also Holds the hard drive. CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, replace the WLAN module with only a module authorized for use in the computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you replace the module and then receive a warning message, remove the module to restore computer functionality, and then contact technical support through Help and Support. Identifying the hardware 7 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Wireless antennas NOTE: For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. To see wireless regulatory notices, refer to the section of the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. These notices are located in Help and Support. Additional hardware components Component

(1)

(2) Power cord*

Battery*

Description Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Powers the device when the device is not plugged into external power. 8 Chapter 1 Hardware features Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Component

(3) AC adapter Description Converts AC power to DC power.

*Batteries and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. Identifying the labels The labels affixed to the device provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the device. Service tagProvides important information including the following:

Product name (1). This is the product name affixed to the front of your device. Serial number (s/n) (2). This is an alphanumeric identifier that is unique to each product. Part Number/Product number (p/n) (3). This number provides specific information about the hardware components of the product. The part number helps a service technician to determine what components and parts are needed. Model description (4). This is the alphanumeric identifier you use to locate documents, drivers, and support for your device. Warranty period (5). This number describes the duration (in years) of the warranty period for this device. Have this information available when you contact technical support. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the device. Microsoft Certificate of AuthenticityContains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the device. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the device, including the following:

Information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The serial number of your HP Mobile Broadband Module (select models only). The regulatory label is affixed inside the battery bay. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Identifying the labels 9 2 Wireless and local area network Using wireless devices Wireless technology transfers data across radio waves instead of wires. Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

Wireless local area network (WLAN) deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, each mobile wireless device communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband ModuleA wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that provides access to information wherever mobile network operator service is available. In a WWAN, each mobile device communicates to a mobile network operators base station. Mobile network operators install networks of base stations (similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close together typically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. Computers with WLAN devices support one or more of the following IEEE industry standards:

802.11b, the first popular standard, supports data rates of up to 11 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. 802.11g supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. An 802.11g WLAN device is backward compatible with 802.11b devices, so they can operate on the same network. 802.11a supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 5 GHz. NOTE: 802.11a is not compatible with 802.11b and 802.11g. 802.11n supports data rates of up to 450 Mbps and may operate at 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz, making it backward compatible with 802.11a, b, and g. For more information on wireless technology, refer to the information and Web site links provided in Help and Support. Identifying wireless and network status icons Icon Name Description Wireless (connected) Wireless (disconnected) Identifies the location of the wireless light and the wireless function key on the computer. Also identifies the Wireless Assistant software on the computer and indicates that one or more of the wireless devices are on. Identifies the Wireless Assistant software on the computer and indicates that all of the wireless devices are off. 10 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

HP Connection Manager Wired network (connected) Wired network (disabled/disconnected) Network (disabled/disconnected) Network (connected) Network (disconnected) Opens HP Connection Manager, which enables you to create a connection with an HP Mobile Broadband device (select models only). Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed and one or more network devices are connected to the network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed, all network devices or all wireless devices are disabled in Windows Control Panel, and no network devices are connected to a wired network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed, no wireless connections are available or all wireless network devices are disabled by the wireless button or Wireless Assistant, and no network devices are connected to a wired network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed, one or more network devices are connected to a wireless network, and one or more network devices are connected to a wired network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed and wireless connections are available, but no network devices are connected to a wired or wireless network. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using these features:

Wireless button or wireless switch (referred to in this guide as the wireless button) Wireless Assistant software HP Connection Manager software (select models only) Operating system controls Using the wireless button The computer has a wireless button, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights, depending on the model. All of the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory, so the wireless light is on (blue) when you turn on the computer. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. If the wireless light is blue, at least one wireless device is on. If the wireless light is off, all wireless devices are off. NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. Because the wireless devices are enabled at the factory, you can use the wireless button to turn on or turn off the wireless devices simultaneously. Individual wireless devices can be controlled through Wireless Assistant software (select models only). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using wireless devices 11 Using Wireless Assistant software (select models only) A wireless device can be turned on or off using the Wireless Assistant software. If a wireless device is disabled in the Setup Utility, it must be reenabled in the Setup Utility before it can be turned on or off using Wireless Assistant. NOTE: Enabling or turning on a wireless device does not automatically connect the computer to a network or a Bluetooth-enabled device. To view the state of the wireless devices, click the Show hidden icons icon, the arrow at the left of the notification area, and position the mouse pointer over the wireless icon. If the wireless icon is not displayed in the notification area, complete the following steps to change Wireless Assistant properties:

1. 2. Click the wireless icon in the Wireless Assistant tile, which is located in the bottom row of Windows Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Windows Mobility Center. Mobility Center. Select the check box next to HP Wireless Assistant icon in notification area. 3. Click Properties. 4. 5. Click Apply. 6. Click Close. For more information, refer to the Wireless Assistant software Help:

1. Open Wireless Assistant by clicking the wireless icon in Windows Mobility Center. 2. Click the Help button. Using HP Connection Manager (select models only) You can use HP Connection Manager to connect to WWANs using the HP Mobile Broadband device in your computer (select models only). To start Connection Manager, click the Connection Manager icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. or Select Start > All Programs > HP Connection Manager > HP Connection Manager. For more details about using Connection Manager, refer to the Connection Manager software Help. Using operating system controls Some operating systems also offer a way to manage integrated wireless devices and the wireless connection. For example, Windows provides the Network and Sharing Center that allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, manage wireless networks, and diagnose and repair network problems. To access the Network and Sharing Center, select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet >

Network and Sharing Center. For more information, select Start > Help and Support. 12 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using a WLAN With a WLAN device, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other computers and accessories that are linked by a wireless router or a wireless access point. NOTE: The terms wireless router and wireless access point are often used interchangeably. A large-scale WLAN, such as a corporate or public WLAN, typically uses wireless access points that can accommodate a large number of computers and accessories and can separate critical network functions. A home or small office WLAN typically uses a wireless router, which allows several wireless and wired computers to share an Internet connection, a printer, and files without requiring additional pieces of hardware or software. To use the WLAN device in your computer, you must connect to a WLAN infrastructure (provided through a service provider or a public or corporate network). Setting up a WLAN To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet, you need the following equipment:

A broadband modem (either DSL or cable) (1) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider (ISP) A wireless router (purchased separately) (2) The wireless computer (3) The illustration below shows an example of a wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet. As your network grows, additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to the network to access the Internet. For help in setting up your WLAN, refer to the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. Protecting your WLAN Because the WLAN standard was designed with only limited security capabilitiesbasically to foil casual eavesdropping rather than more powerful forms of attackit is essential to understand that WLANs are vulnerable to well-known and well-documented security weaknesses. WLANs in public areas, or hotspots, like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. New technologies are being developed by wireless manufacturers and hotspot service providers that make the public environment more secure and anonymous. If you are concerned about the security of your computer in a hotspot, limit your network activities to noncritical e-mail and basic Internet surfing. When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. The common security levels are Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)-

Personal and Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). Because wireless radio signals travel outside the Using a WLAN 13 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

network, other WLAN devices can pick up unprotected signals and either connect to your network

(uninvited) or capture information being sent across it. However, you can take precautions to protect your WLAN:

Use a wireless transmitter with built-in security Many wireless base stations, gateways, or routers provide built-in security features such as wireless security protocols and firewalls. With the correct wireless transmitter, you can protect your network from the most common wireless security risks. Work behind a firewall A firewall is a barrier that checks both data and requests for data that are sent to your network, and discards any suspicious items. Firewalls are available in many varieties, both software and hardware. Some networks use a combination of both types. Use wireless encryption A variety of sophisticated encryption protocols is available for your WLAN. Find the solution that works best for your network security:

Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a wireless security protocol that encodes or encrypts all network data before it is transmitted using a WEP key. Usually, you can allow the network to assign the WEP key. Alternatively, you can set up your own key, generate a different key, or choose other advanced options. Without the correct key, others will not be able to use the WLAN. WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access), like WEP, uses security settings to encrypt and decrypt data that is transmitted over the network. However, instead of using one static security key for encryptions as WEP does, WPA uses temporal key integrity protocol (TKIP) to dynamically generate a new key for every packet. It also generates different sets of keys for each computer on the network. Connecting to a WLAN To connect to the WLAN, follow these steps:

1. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. If it is on, the wireless light is on. If the wireless light is amber, press the wireless button. 2. Click the network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 3. 4. Click Connect. Select your WLAN from the list. If the network is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a network security key, which is a security code. Type the code, and then click OK to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you are out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE:

If you do not see the network you want to connect to, click Open Network and Sharing Center, and then click Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed. You can choose to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. After the connection is made, place the mouse pointer over the network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. 14 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

More information about using a WLAN is available through the following resources:

Information from your ISP and the manufacturer's instructions included with your wireless router and other WLAN equipment Information and Web site links provided in Help and Support For a list of public WLANs near you, contact your ISP or search the Web. Web sites that list public WLANs include Cisco Internet Mobile Office Wireless Locations, Hotspotlist, and Geektools. Check with each public WLAN location for cost and connection requirements. For additional information on connecting your computer to a corporate WLAN, contact your network administrator or IT department. Roaming to another network When you move your computer within range of another WLAN, Windows attempts to connect to that network. If the attempt is successful, your computer is automatically connected to the new network. If Windows does not recognize the new network, follow the same procedure you used initially to connect to your WLAN. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) HP Mobile Broadband enables your computer to use wireless wide area networks (WWANs) to access the Internet from more places and over larger areas than it can by using WLANs. Using HP Mobile Broadband requires a network service provider (called a mobile network operator), which in most cases is a mobile phone network operator. Coverage for HP Mobile Broadband is similar to mobile phone voice coverage. When used with mobile network operator service, HP Mobile Broadband gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road or outside the range of Wi-Fi hotspots. HP Mobile Broadband supports the following technologies:

HSPA (High Speed Packet Access), which provides access to networks based on the Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) telecommunications standard. EV-DO (Evolution Data Optimized), which provides access to networks based on the code division multiple access (CDMA) telecommunications standard. You may need the HP Mobile Broadband Module serial number to activate mobile broadband service. The serial number is printed on a label inside the battery bay of your computer. Some mobile network operators require the use of a subscriber identity module (SIM). A SIM contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM that is preinstalled in the battery bay. If the SIM is not preinstalled, it may be provided in the HP Mobile Broadband information provided with your computer, or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information on inserting and removing the SIM, refer to the Inserting a SIM and Removing a SIM sections in this chapter. For information on HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, refer to the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. For additional information, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/mobilebroadband (US only). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) 15 Inserting a SIM CAUTION: To prevent damage to the connectors, use minimal force when inserting a SIM. To insert a SIM:

1. Shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. 2. Close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. 6. Remove the battery. 7. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. Insert the SIM into the SIM slot, and gently push the SIM into the slot until it is firmly seated. 8. Replace the battery. NOTE: HP Mobile Broadband will be disabled if the battery is not replaced. 9. Reconnect external power. 10. Reconnect external devices. 11. Turn on the computer. Removing a SIM To remove a SIM:

1. Shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. 2. Close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 16 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 5. 6. Remove the battery. 7. Press in on the SIM (1), and then remove it from the slot (2). 8. Replace the battery. 9. Reconnect external power. 10. Reconnect external devices. 11. Turn on the computer. Using Bluetooth wireless devices A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Computers (desktop, notebook, PDA) Phones (cellular, cordless, smart phone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Bluetooth devices provide peer-to-peer capability that allows you to set up a personal area network

(PAN) of Bluetooth devices. For information on configuring and using Bluetooth devices, refer to the Bluetooth software Help. Bluetooth and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) HP does not recommend setting up one computer with Bluetooth as a host and using it as a gateway through which other computers may connect to the Internet. When two or more computers are connected using Bluetooth, and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) is enabled on one of the computers, the other computers may not be able to connect to the Internet using the Bluetooth network. The strength of Bluetooth is in synchronizing information transfers between your computer and wireless devices including cellular phones, printers, cameras, and PDAs. The inability to consistently connect two or more computers to share the Internet through Bluetooth is a limitation of Bluetooth and the Windows operating system. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using Bluetooth wireless devices 17 Troubleshooting wireless connection problems Some possible causes for wireless connection problems include the following:

Network configuration (SSID or security) has been changed. Wireless device is not installed correctly or has been disabled. Wireless device or router hardware has failed. Wireless device encountered interference from other devices. NOTE: Wireless networking devices are included with select computer models only. If wireless networking is not listed in the feature list on the side of the original computer package, you may add wireless networking capability to the computer by purchasing a wireless networking device. Before working your way through the sequence of possible solutions to your network connection problem, be sure that device drivers are installed for all wireless devices. Use the procedures in this chapter to diagnose and repair a computer that does not connect to the network you want to use. Cannot connect to a WLAN If you have a problem connecting to a WLAN, confirm that the integrated WLAN device is properly installed on your computer:

NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. 1. 2. 3. Click the arrow next to Network adapters to expand the list and show all adapters. 4. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security. In the System area, click Device Manager. Identify the WLAN device from the Network adapters list. The listing for a WLAN device may include the terms wireless, wireless LAN, WLAN, Wi-Fi, or 802.11. If no WLAN device is listed, either your computer does not have an integrated WLAN device, or the driver of the WLAN device is not properly installed. For more information on troubleshooting WLANs, refer to the Web site links provided in Help and Support. Cannot connect to a preferred WLAN network Windows can automatically repair a corrupted WLAN connection:

If there is a network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, right-click the icon, and then click Troubleshoot problems. Windows resets your network device and attempts to reconnect to one of the preferred networks. If there is no network icon in the notification area, follow these steps:

1. 2. Click Troubleshoot problems and select the network you wish to repair. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 18 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Network icon for WLAN is not displayed If the network status icon is not displayed in the notification area after you configure the WLAN, the software driver is either missing or corrupted. A Windows Device not Found error message may also be displayed. The driver must be reinstalled. Get the latest version of the WLAN device software and drivers for your computer from the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com. If the WLAN device you are using was purchased separately, consult the manufacturer's Web site for the latest software. To get the latest version of the WLAN device software for your computer, follow these steps:

1. Open your Internet browser and go to http://www.hp.com/support. 2. 3. Click the option for software and driver downloads, and then type your computer model number in Select your country or region. the search box. Press enter, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 4. NOTE:

site for the latest software. If the WLAN device you are using was purchased separately, consult the manufacturer's Web Current WLAN network security codes are unavailable If you are prompted for a network key or a name (SSID) when connecting to a WLAN, the network is protected by security. You must have the current codes to make a connection on a secure network. The SSID and network key are alphanumeric codes that you enter into your computer to identify your computer to the network. For a network connected to your personal wireless router, review the router user guide for instructions on setting up the same codes on both the router and the WLAN device. For a private network, such as a network in an office or at a public Internet chat room, contact the network administrator to obtain the codes, and then enter the codes when prompted to do so. Some networks change the SSID or network keys used in their routers or access points on a regular basis to improve security. You must change the corresponding code in your computer accordingly. If you are provided with new wireless network keys and SSID for a network, and if you have previously connected to that network, follow the steps below to connect to the network:

1. 2. Click Manage wireless networks in the left panel. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 3. A list showing the available WLANs is displayed. If you are in a hotspot where several WLANs are active, several will be displayed. Select the network in the list, right-click the network, and then click Properties. NOTE:

the router or access point is operating. If the network you want is not listed, check with the network administrator to be sure that 4. Click the Security tab and enter the correct wireless encryption data into the Network security key box. 5. Click OK to save these settings. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Troubleshooting wireless connection problems 19 WLAN connection is very weak If the connection is very weak, or if your computer cannot make a connection to a WLAN, minimize interference from other devices, as follows:

Move your computer closer to the wireless router or access point. Temporarily disconnect devices such as a microwave, cordless phone, or cellular phone to be sure that other wireless devices are not interfering. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 1. 2. Click Manage wireless networks in the left panel. A list showing the available WLANs is displayed. If you are in a hotspot where several WLANs are active, several will be displayed. 3. Click a network, and then click Remove. Cannot connect to the wireless router If you are trying to connect to the wireless router and are unsuccessful, reset the wireless router by removing power from the router for 10 to 15 seconds. If the computer still cannot make a connection to a WLAN, restart the wireless router. For details, refer to the router manufacturer's instructions. Connecting to a local area network (LAN) Connecting to a local area network (LAN) requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 network cable (purchased separately). If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (1), which prevents interference from TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable (2) toward the device. To connect the network cable:

WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a modem cable or telephone cable into an RJ-45 (network) jack. 1. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. 20 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

2. Plug the other end of the cable into a network wall jack (2). Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Connecting to a local area network (LAN) 21 3 Multimedia Multimedia features Your device includes multimedia features that allow you to listen to music, watch movies, and view pictures. Your device may include the following multimedia components:

Integrated speakers for listening to music Integrated webcam that allows you to capture photographs and videos Preinstalled multimedia software that allows you to play and manage your music, movies, and pictures NOTE: Your device may not include all of the components listed. The following sections explain how to identify and use the multimedia components included with your device. Identifying your multimedia components The following illustration and table describe the multimedia features of the device. 22 Chapter 3 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8) Internal microphone Webcam Webcam light Speakers (2) Volume up hotkey Volume down hotkey Volume mute hotkey Audio-out (headphone) jack/Audio-in

(microphone) jack Records and captures sound. Captures still photographs and videos. NOTE: To capture videos, you will need to install additional webcam software. On: The webcam is in use. Produce sound. Increases device sound when pressed in combination with the fn key. Decreases device sound when pressed combination with the fn key. Mutes device sound when pressed in combination with the fn key. Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or television audio. Also connects an optional headset microphone. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the device speakers are disabled. Adjusting the volume You can adjust the volume using the following controls:

Device volume hotkeyA combination of the fn key (1) and either the f8 (2), f10 (3), or f11 (4) function key:

To mute or restore volume, press fn+f8. To decrease volume, press fn+f10. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Multimedia features 23 To increase volume, press fn+f11. Windows volume control:

a. Click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. b. Increase or decrease the volume by moving the slider up or down. Click the Mute Speakers icon to mute the volume. or a. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, and then click Open Volume Mixer. b. In the Volume Control column, you can increase or decrease the volume by moving the slider up or down. You can also mute the volume by clicking the Mute Speakers icon. If the Speakers icon is not displayed in the notification area, follow these steps to add it:

a. Right-click the Show hidden icons icon (the arrow at the left side of the notification area. b. Click Customize notification icons. c. Under Behaviors, select Show icon and notifications for the Volume icon. d. Click OK. Program volume control:

Volume can also be adjusted within some programs. Multimedia software Your device includes preinstalled multimedia software that allows you to play music, watch movies, and view pictures. 24 Chapter 3 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using other preinstalled multimedia software To locate other preinstalled multimedia software:

Select Start > All Programs, and then open the multimedia program you want to use. For example, if you want to use Windows Media Player (select models only), click Windows Media Player. NOTE: Some programs may be located in subfolders. Installing multimedia software from the Internet To install multimedia software from the Internet, go to the software manufacturers Web site and follow the instructions. NOTE: Software downloaded from the Internet may contain viruses. Refer to the Security chapter for more information. Audio Your device has a variety of audio features that allow you to:

Play music using your device speakers and/or connected external speakers. Record sound using an optional external headset microphone. Download music from the Internet. Create multimedia presentations using audio and images. Transmit sound and images with instant messaging programs. Connecting external audio devices WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To connect external devices such as external speakers, headphones, or a headset microphone, refer to the information provided with the device. For best results, remember the following tips:

Be sure that the device cable is securely connected to the correct jack on your device. (Cable connectors are normally color-coded to match the corresponding jacks on the device.) Be sure to install any drivers required by the external device. NOTE: A driver is a required program that acts like a translator between the device and the programs that use the device. Checking your audio functions To check the system sound on your device, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Control Panel. 2. Click Hardware and Sound. 3. Click Sound. 4. When the Sound and Audio Device Properties window opens, click the Sounds tab. Under Program Events, select any sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and click the arrow button to check the sound. Audio 25 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

You should hear sound through the speakers or through connected headphones. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Sound Recorder. To check the record functions of the device, follow these steps:

1. 2. Click Start Recording and speak into the microphone. Save the file to your desktop. 3. Open a multimedia program and play back the sound. NOTE: For best results when recording, speak directly into the microphone and record sound in a setting free of background noise. To confirm or change the audio settings on your device, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Sound. Video Your device enables you to use a variety of video features:

Watch movies Play games over the Internet Edit pictures and video to create presentations Connect external video devices Connecting an external monitor or projector Use a VGA cable (purchased separately) to connect an external display, such as a monitor or projector, to the expansion port on the device. To connect an external monitor or projector:

1. Connect the optional VGA cable to the expansion port on the device. 2. Connect the external monitor or projector to the other end of the cable. NOTE:

fn+f2 to transfer the image to the external display. Repeatedly pressing fn+f2 alternates the screen image between the external display and the device. If a properly connected external monitor or projector does not display a screen image, press 26 Chapter 3 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Connecting an HDMI device The device includes an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) port. The HDMI port connects the device to an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, or any compatible digital or audio component. NOTE: To transmit video signals through the HDMI port, you need an HDMI cable (purchased separately). The device can support one HDMI device connected to the HDMI port, while simultaneously supporting an image on the device display or any other supported external display. To connect a video or audio device to the HDMI port:

1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the device. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the video device, according to the device manufacturers instructions. Press fn+f4 on the device to switch the image between the display devices connected to the device. 3. Configuring audio for HDMI (select models only) To configure HDMI audio, first connect an audio or video device, such as a high-definition TV, to the HDMI port on your device. Then configure the default audio playback device as follows:

1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click either Digital Output or Digital Output Device (HDMI). 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. To return audio to the device speakers, follow these steps:

1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click Speakers. 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. Webcam Your device includes an integrated webcam, located at the top of the display. The webcam is an input device that allows you to capture still photographs and videos. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Webcam 27 NOTE: To capture videos, you will need to install additional webcam software. For optimum performance, observe the following guidelines while using the webcam:

If you are having trouble viewing or sending multimedia files to someone on another LAN or outside your network firewall, temporarily disable the firewall, perform the task you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall as necessary, and adjust the policies and settings of other intrusion detection systems. Whenever possible, place bright light sources behind the camera and out of the picture area. 28 Chapter 3 Multimedia Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

4 Digital cards Optional digital cards provide secure data storage and convenient data sharing. These cards are often used with digital mediaequipped cameras and PDAs as well as with other devices. The SD Card Reader supports the following formats:

MultiMediaCard (MMC) Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card Inserting a digital card CAUTION: To avoid damaging the digital card or the device, do not insert any type of adapter into the SD Card Reader. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the digital card connectors, use minimal force to insert a digital card. 1. Hold the digital card label-side up, with the connectors facing the device. 2. Insert the card into the SD Card Reader, and then push in on the card until it is firmly seated. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected, and a menu of options may be displayed. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Inserting a digital card 29 Stopping and Removing a digital card CAUTION: To prevent loss of data or an unresponsive system, use the following procedure to safely remove the digital card. 1. Save your information and close all programs associated with the digital card. NOTE: To stop a data transfer, click Cancel in the operating system Copying window. 2. 3. To remove a digital card:

a. Click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon, click the Show hidden icons icon (the arrow at the left side of the notification area). b. Click the name of the digital card in the list. NOTE: You are prompted that it is safe to remove the hardware device. Press in on the digital card (1), and then remove the card from the slot (2). 30 Chapter 4 Digital cards Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

5 USB devices Using a USB device Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a hardware interface that can be used to connect an optional external device, such as a USB keyboard, mouse, drive, printer, scanner, or hub. Devices can be connected to the system, an optional docking device, or an optional expansion product. Some USB devices may require additional support software, which is usually included with the device. For more information about device-specific software, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. The device has 2 USB ports, which support USB 1.0, USB 1.1, and USB 2.0 devices. Depending on the model, the device may also have an HP Mobile Drive, which supports an optional HP Mini Mobile Drive. An optional USB hub, optional docking device, or an optional expansion product provides additional USB ports that can be used with the device. Connecting a USB device CAUTION: To prevent damage to a USB connector, use minimal force to connect a USB device. To connect a USB device, connect the USB cable for the device to the USB port. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected. NOTE: When you connect a USB device, you may see a message in the notification area to let you know that the device is recognized by the system. Stopping and Removing a USB device CAUTION: To prevent loss of information or an unresponsive system, use the following procedure to safely remove the USB device. CAUTION: To prevent damage to a USB connector, do not pull on the cable to remove the USB device. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using a USB device 31 To remove a USB device:

1. Click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon, click the Show hidden icons icon (the arrow at the left of the notification area). 2. Click the name of the device in the list. NOTE: You are prompted that it is safe to remove the hardware device. 3. Remove the device. Using the HP Mobile Drive (select models only) The HP Mobile Drive is a USB port that allows you to add more storage to your device. The HP Mobile Drive can only be used with the HP Mini Mobile Drive (purchased separately). Inserting the HP Mini Mobile Drive Insert the HP Mini Mobile Drive into the HP Mobile Drive, and then push in until the mini drive is firmly seated and flush with the outside of the device. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected. NOTE: When you connect a USB device, you may see a message in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to let you know that the device is recognized by the system. Stopping and removing the HP Mini Mobile Drive CAUTION: To prevent loss of information or an unresponsive system, stop the HP Mini Mobile Drive before removing it. To stop and remove the HP Mini Mobile Drive:

1. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware icon, click the Show Hidden Icons icon (< or

<<) in the notification area. 2. Click the name of the device in the list. 32 Chapter 5 USB devices Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

3. Click Stop, and then click OK. 4. Remove the HP Mini Mobile Drive. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the HP Mobile Drive (select models only) 33 6 Drives Identifying installed drives To view the drives installed on the device, select Start > Computer. Handling drives Drives are fragile device components that must be handled with care. Refer to the following cautions before handling drives. Additional cautions are included with the procedures to which they apply. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the device, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

Before you move a device that is connected to an external hard drive, initiate Standby and allow the screen to clear, or properly disconnect the external hard drive. Before handling a drive, discharge static electricity by touching the unpainted metal surface of the drive. Do not touch the connector pins on a removable drive or on the device. Handle a drive carefully; do not drop a drive or place items on it. Before removing or inserting a drive, shut down the device. If you are unsure whether the device is off, in Standby, or in Hibernation, turn the device on and then shut it down through the operating system. Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive into a drive bay. Do not type on the keyboard or move the device while an optional optical drive is writing to a disc. The write process is sensitive to vibration. When the battery is the only source of power, be sure that the battery is sufficiently charged before writing to media. Avoid exposing a drive to temperature or humidity extremes. Avoid exposing a drive to liquids. Do not spray the drive with cleaning products. Remove media from a drive before removing the drive from the drive bay, or traveling with, shipping, or storing a drive. If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-

through devices and security wands. The airport security devices that check carry-on luggage, such as conveyor belts, use X-rays instead of magnetism and will not damage a drive. Using external drives Removable external drives expand your options for storing and accessing information. 34 Chapter 6 Drives Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

USB drives include the following types:

1.44-megabyte diskette drive Hard drive module (a hard drive with an adapter attached) DVD-ROM Drive DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive DVD+RW/R and CD-RW Combo Drive DVDRW/R and CD-RW Combo Drive Using optional external devices NOTE: For more information about required software and drivers, or to learn which device port to use, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. To connect an external device:

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the equipment when connecting a powered device, be sure that the device is turned off and the AC power cord is unplugged. 1. Connect the device. 2. 3. To disconnect an unpowered external device, turn off the device, and then disconnect it. To disconnect a powered external device, turn off the device, disconnect it, and then unplug the AC power cord. If you are connecting a powered device, plug the device power cord into a grounded AC outlet. Turn on the device. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using external drives 35 7 Memory modules The device has one memory module compartment, which is located on the bottom of the device. The memory capacity of the device can be upgraded by replacing the existing memory module in the primary memory module slot. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock and damage to the equipment, unplug the power cord and remove all batteries before installing a memory module. CAUTION: Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage electronic components. Before beginning any procedure, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. To add or replace a memory module:

1. 2. Save your work. Shut down the device and close the display. If you are not sure whether the device is off or in Hibernation, turn the device on by sliding the power switch. Then shut down the device through the operating system. Turn the device upside down on a flat surface. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the device. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. 6. Remove the battery from the device. 7. Using a small Phillips screwdriver, loosen the 2 cover screws (1). 8. Lift the memory module compartment cover (2) away from the device. 36 Chapter 7 Memory modules Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

9. Remove the existing memory module:

a. Pull away the retention clips (1) on each side of the memory module. The memory module tilts up. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module. b. Grasp the edge of the memory module (2), and gently pull the module out of the memory module slot. To protect a memory module after removal, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 10. Insert a new memory module:

CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module, and do not bend the memory module. a. b. With the memory module at a 45-degree angle from the surface of the memory module Align the notched edge (1) of the memory module with the tab in the memory module slot. compartment, press the module (2) into the memory module slot until it is seated. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

37 c. Gently press the memory module (3) down, applying pressure to both the left and right edges of the memory module, until the retention clips snap into place. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, be sure that you do not bend the memory module. 11. Align the tabs on the memory module compartment cover with the notches on the device, and then close the cover (1). 12. Tighten the 2 cover screws (2). 13. Replace the battery. 14. Turn the device right-side up, and then reconnect external power and external devices. 15. Turn on the device. 38 Chapter 7 Memory modules Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

8 Pointing devices and keyboard Setting pointing device preferences Use Mouse Properties in Windows to customize settings for pointing devices, such as button configuration, click speed, and pointer options. To access Mouse Properties, select Start > Devices and Printers. Then, right-click the device representing your device, and select Mouse Using pointing devices Using the TouchPad To move the pointer, slide your finger across the TouchPad surface in the direction you want the pointer to go. Use the TouchPad buttons like the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To scroll up and down using the TouchPad vertical scroll zone, slide your finger up or down over the lines. NOTE:

If you are using the TouchPad to move the pointer, you must lift your finger off the TouchPad before moving it to the scroll zone. Simply sliding your finger from the TouchPad to the scroll zone will not activate the scrolling function. Connecting an external mouse You can connect an external USB mouse to the device using one of the USB ports on the device. Using the keyboard Using hotkeys Hotkeys are combinations of the fn key (1) and one of the function keys (2). The icons on the f1 through f4, and f6, f8, f10, and f11 keys represent the hotkey functions. Hotkey functions and procedures are discussed in the following sections. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Setting pointing device preferences 39 Function Initiate Standby. Switch the image. Decrease screen brightness. Increase screen brightness. Initiate QuickLock. Mute device sound. Decrease device sound. Increase device sound. Hotkey fn+f1 fn+f2 fn+f3 fn+f4 fn+f6 fn+f8 fn+f10 fn+f11 To use a hotkey command on the device keyboard, follow either of these steps:

Briefly press the fn key, and then briefly press the second key of the hotkey command. or Press and hold down the fn key, briefly press the second key of the hotkey command, and then release both keys at the same time. Initiating Standby (fn+f1) Press fn+f1 to initiate Standby. When Standby is initiated, your information is stored in memory, the screen is cleared, and power is conserved. While the device is in Standby, the power light blinks. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of information loss, save your work before initiating Standby. 40 Chapter 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The device must be on before you can initiate Standby. NOTE:

If a critical battery level occurs while the device is in Standby, the device initiates Hibernation and the information stored in memory is saved to the hard drive. The factory setting for critical battery action is Hibernate, but this setting can be changed in advanced power settings. To exit Standby, briefly slide the power switch. The function of the fn+f1 hotkey can be changed. For example, you can set the fn+f1 hotkey to initiate Hibernation instead of Standby. NOTE:

hotkey. In all Windows operating system windows, references to the sleep button apply to the fn+f1 Switching the screen image (fn+f2) Press fn+f2 to switch the screen image among display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the device, pressing fn+f2 alternates the screen image from device display to monitor display to simultaneous display on both the device and the monitor. Most external monitors receive video information from the device using the external VGA video standard. The fn+f2 hotkey can also alternate images among other devices receiving video information from the device. The following video transmission types, with examples of devices that use them, are supported by the fn+f2 hotkey:

LCD (device display) External VGA (most external monitors) Decreasing screen brightness (fn+f7) Press fn+f7 to decrease screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to decrease the brightness level incrementally. Increasing screen brightness (fn+f8) Press fn+f8 to increase screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to increase the brightness level incrementally. Initiating QuickLock (fn+f6) Press fn+f6 to initiate the QuickLock security feature. QuickLock protects your information by displaying the operating system Log On window. While the Log On window is displayed, the device cannot be accessed until a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password is entered. NOTE: Before you can use QuickLock, you must set a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password. For instructions, refer to Help and Support. To use QuickLock, press fn+f6 to display the Log On window and lock the device. Then follow the instructions on the screen to enter your Windows user password or your Windows administrator password and access the device. Muting speaker sound (fn+f8) Press fn+f8 to mute speaker sound. Press the hotkey again to restore speaker sound. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using the keyboard 41 Decreasing speaker sound (fn+f10) Press fn+f10 to decrease speaker sound. Hold down the hotkey to decrease speaker sound incrementally. Increasing speaker sound (fn+f11) Press fn+f11 to increase speaker sound. Hold down the hotkey to increase speaker sound incrementally. 42 Chapter 8 Pointing devices and keyboard Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

9 Power management Setting power options Using power-saving states The computer has two power-saving states enabled at the factory: Sleep and Hibernation. When Sleep is initiated, the power lights blink and the screen clears. Your work is saved to memory, letting you exit Sleep faster than exiting Hibernation. If the computer is in the Sleep state for an extended period or if the battery reaches a critical battery level while in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. When Hibernation is initiated, your work is saved to a hibernation file on the hard drive and the computer turns off. CAUTION: To prevent possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep or Hibernation while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. NOTE: You cannot initiate any type of networking connection or perform any computer functions while the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation. Initiating and exiting Sleep The system is set at the factory to initiate Sleep after 15 minutes of inactivity when running on battery power and 30 minutes of inactivity when running on external power. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. With the device on, you can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Press fn+f5. Briefly press the power button. Close the display. Click Start, click the arrow next to the Shut down button, and then click Sleep. You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly press the power button. If the display is closed, open the display. Press a key on the keyboard or button on the remote control (select models only). Activate the TouchPad. When the device exits Sleep, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:

before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows password Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Setting power options 43 Initiating and exiting Hibernation The system is set at the factory to initiate Hibernation after 1,080 minutes (18 hours) of inactivity when running on both battery power and external power, or when the battery reaches a critical battery level. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. To initiate Hibernation:

Click Start, click the arrow next to the Shut down button, and then click Hibernate. To exit Hibernation:

Briefly press the power button. The power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:

before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows password Using the battery meter The battery meter is located in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. The battery meter allows you to quickly access power settings, view remaining battery charge, and select a different power plan. To display the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, move the pointer over the battery meter icon. To access Power Options, or to change the power plan, click the battery meter icon and select an item from the list. Different battery meter icons indicate whether the device is running on battery or external power. The icon also displays a message if the battery has reached a low battery level, critical battery level, or reserve battery level. To hide or display the battery meter icon:

1. Right-click the Show hidden icons icon (the arrow at the left side of the notification area). 2. Click Customize notification icons. 3. Under Behaviors, select Show icons and notifications for the Power icon. 4. Click OK. Using power plans A power plan is a collection of system settings that manages how the computer uses power. Power plans can help you conserve power or maximize performance. You can change power plan settings or create your own power plan. Viewing the current power plan Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. 44 Chapter 9 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Selecting a different power plan Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then select a power plan from the list. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options, and then select a power plan from the list. Customizing power plans 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. Select a power plan, and then click Change plan settings. 2. 3. Change the settings as needed. 4. To change additional settings, click Change advanced power settings and make your changes. Setting password protection on wakeup To set the device to prompt for a password when the device exits Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:

Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. 1. In the left pane, click Require a password on wakeup. 2. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. Click Require a password (recommended). If you need to create a user account password or change your current user account NOTE:

password, click Create or change your user account password, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you do not need to create or change a user account password, go to step 5. 5. Click Save changes. Using external AC power External AC power is supplied through one of the following devices:

WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the device, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. Approved AC adapter Optional docking device or expansion product Connect the device to external AC power under any of the following conditions:

WARNING! Do not charge the device battery while you are onboard aircraft. When you are charging or calibrating a battery When you are installing or modifying system software When you are writing information to a CD or DVD Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using external AC power 45 When you connect the device to external AC power, the following events occur:

The battery begins to charge. If the device is turned on, the battery meter icon in the notification area changes appearance. When you disconnect external AC power, the following events occur:

The device switches to battery power. The display brightness is automatically decreased to save battery life. To increase display brightness, press the fn+f8 hotkey or reconnect the AC adapter. Connecting the AC adapter WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the device by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the device). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. To connect the device to external AC power:

1. 2. 3. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector (1) on the device. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter (2). Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet (3). Testing an AC adapter Test the AC adapter if the device exhibits any of the following symptoms when it is connected to AC power:

The device will not turn on. The display does not turn on. The power light is off. 46 Chapter 9 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

To test the AC adapter:

1. Remove the battery from the device. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the device, and then plug it into an AC outlet. 3. Turn on the device. If the power light turns on, the AC adapter is working properly. Contact technical support for information on obtaining a replacement AC power adapter. Using battery power When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is plugged into external AC power, the computer runs on AC power. If the computer contains a charged battery and is running on external AC power supplied through the AC adapter, the computer switches to battery power if the AC adapter is disconnected from the computer. NOTE: The display brightness is decreased to save battery life when you disconnect AC power. To increase display brightness, use the fn+f8 hotkey or reconnect the AC adapter. You can keep a battery in the computer or in storage, depending on how you work. Keeping the battery in the computer whenever the computer is plugged into AC power charges the battery and also protects your work in case of a power outage. However, a battery in the computer slowly discharges when the computer is off and unplugged from external power. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, display brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Finding battery information in Help and Support The Help and Support Power and Battery Learning Center provides the following tools and information:

Battery Check tool to test battery performance Information on calibration, power management, and proper care and storage to maximize battery life Information on battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity To access battery information:

Select Start > Help and Support > Learn > Power and Battery Learning Center. Using Battery Check Battery Check, a part of the HP Support Assistant, provides information on the status of the battery installed in the computer. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using battery power 47 To run Battery Check:

1. Connect the AC adapter to the computer. NOTE: The computer must be connected to external power for Battery Check to function properly. Select Start > Help and Support > Troubleshoot > Power, Thermal and Mechanical >Battery Check. 2. Battery Check examines the battery and its cells to see if they are functioning properly, and then reports the results of the examination. Displaying the remaining battery charge Move the pointer over the battery meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Inserting or removing the battery CAUTION: Removing a battery that is the sole power source may cause loss of information. To prevent loss of information, save your work and initiate Hibernation or shut down the device through Windows before removing the battery. To insert the battery:

1. Disconnect all external devices. 2. 3. 4. If the device is connected to AC power, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Turn the device upside down on a flat surface. Align the tabs on the battery with the notches on the device (1), and then insert the battery into the battery bay. The battery release latches (2) automatically lock the battery into place. To remove the battery:

1. Disconnect all external devices. 2. 3. If the device is connected to AC power, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Turn the device upside down on a flat surface. 48 Chapter 9 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

4. Slide the battery release latches (1) to release the battery, and then remove the battery (2). Charging a battery WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. The battery charges whenever the computer is plugged into external power through an AC adapter, an optional power adapter, an optional expansion product, or an optional docking device. The battery charges whether the computer is off or in use, but it charges faster when the computer is off. Charging may take longer if a battery is new, has been unused for 2 weeks or more, or is much warmer or cooler than room temperature. To prolong battery life and optimize the accuracy of battery charge displays, follow these recommendations:

If the computer is on while the battery is charging, the battery meter in the notification If you are charging a new battery, charge it fully before turning on the computer. Charge the battery until the battery light turns off. NOTE:

area may show 100 percent charge before the battery is fully charged. Allow the battery to discharge below 5 percent of a full charge through normal use before charging it. If the battery has been unused for one month or more, calibrate the battery instead of simply charging it. The battery light displays charge status:

On: The battery is charging. Blinking: The battery has reached a low battery level or critical battery level and is not charging. Off: The battery is fully charged, in use, or not installed. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using battery power 49 Maximizing battery discharge time Battery discharge time varies depending on the features you use while on battery power. Maximum discharge time gradually shortens, as the battery storage capacity naturally degrades. Tips for maximizing battery discharge time:

Lower the brightness on the display. Check the Power saver setting in Power Options. Remove the battery from the device when it is not being used or charged. Store the battery in a cool, dry location. Managing low battery levels The information in this section describes the alerts and system responses set at the factory. Some low-

battery alerts and system responses can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. Preferences set using Power Options do not affect lights. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low battery level, the battery light blinks. If a low battery level is not resolved, the device enters a critical battery level, and the battery light begins blinking rapidly. The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is enabled and the device is on or in the Sleep state, the device initiates Hibernation. If Hibernation is disabled and the device is on or in the Sleep state, the device remains briefly in the Sleep state, and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. 50 Chapter 9 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Resolving a low battery level CAUTION: To reduce the risk of losing information when the computer reaches a critical battery level and has initiated Hibernation, do not restore power until the power lights turn off. Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect one of the following devices:

AC adapter Optional expansion product or docking device Optional power adapter Resolving a low battery level when a charged battery is available Turn off the computer or initiate Hibernation. 1. 2. Remove the discharged battery, and then insert a charged battery. 3. Turn on the computer. Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Initiate Hibernation. or Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the computer lacks sufficient power to exit Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. 2. Insert a charged battery or plug the computer into external power. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. Calibrating a battery Calibrate a battery under the following conditions:

When battery charge displays seem inaccurate When you observe a significant change in battery run time Even if a battery is heavily used, it should not need to be calibrated more than once a month. It is also not necessary to calibrate a new battery. Step 1: Fully charge the battery WARNING! Do not charge the device battery while you are onboard aircraft. NOTE: The battery charges whether the device is off or in use, but it charges faster when the device is off. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using battery power 51 To fully charge the battery:

1. 2. Connect the device to an AC adapter, optional power adapter, optional expansion product, or Insert the battery into the device. optional docking device, and then plug the adapter or device into external power. The battery light on the device turns on. Leave the device plugged into external power until the battery is fully charged. The battery light on the device turns off. 3. Step 2: Disable Hibernation and Sleep 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. 2. Under the current power plan, click Change plan settings. 3. Record the Turn off the display settings listed in the On battery column so that you can reset them after the calibration. 4. Change the Turn off the display settings to Never. 5. Click Change advanced power settings. 6. Click the plus sign next to Sleep, and then click the plus sign next to Hibernate after. 7. Record the On battery setting under Hibernate after so that you can reset it after the calibration. 8. Change the On battery setting to Never. 9. Click OK. 10. Click Save changes. Step 3: Discharge the battery The device must remain on while the battery is being discharged. The battery can discharge whether or not you are using the device, but the battery will discharge faster while you are using it. If you plan to leave the device unattended during the discharge, save your information before beginning the discharge procedure. If you use the device occasionally during the discharge procedure and have set energy-saving timeouts, expect the following performance from the system during the discharge process:

The monitor will not turn off automatically. Hard drive speed will not decrease automatically when the device is idle. System-initiated Hibernation will not occur. To discharge a battery:

1. Unplug the device from its external power source, but do not turn off the device. 2. Run the device on battery power until the battery is discharged. The battery light begins to blink when the battery has discharged to a low battery level. When the battery is discharged, the battery light turns off and the device shuts down. 52 Chapter 9 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Step 4: Fully recharge the battery To recharge the battery:

1. Plug the device into external power and maintain external power until the battery is fully recharged. When the battery is recharged, the battery light on the device turns off. You can use the device while the battery is recharging, but the battery will charge faster if the device is off. If the device is off, turn it on when the battery is fully charged and the battery light has turned off. 2. Step 5: Reenable Hibernation and Sleep CAUTION: Failure to reenable Hibernation after calibration may result in a full battery discharge and information loss if the device reaches a critical battery level. 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. 2. Under the current power plan, click Change plan settings. 3. Reenter the settings that you recorded for the items in the On battery column. 4. Click Change advanced power settings. 5. Click the plus sign next to Sleep, and then click the plus sign next to Hibernate after. 6. Reenter the setting that you recorded for On battery. 7. Click OK. 8. Click Save changes. Conserving battery power Select the Power saver power plan through Power Options under System and Security in Windows Control Panel. Turn off wireless and local area network (LAN) connections and exit modem applications when you are not using them. Disconnect external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, when you are not using them. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Use the fn+f7 and fn+f8 hotkeys to adjust screen brightness as needed. If you leave your work, initiate Sleep or Hibernation, or shut down the device. Storing a battery CAUTION: To prevent damage to a battery, do not expose it to high temperatures for extended periods of time. If a computer will be unused and unplugged from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately. To prolong the charge of a stored battery, place it in a cool, dry place. Using battery power 53 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Calibrate a battery before using it if it has been stored for one month or more. Disposing of a used battery WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. For additional information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices included with this device. Shutting down the device CAUTION: Unsaved information will be lost when the device is shut down. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and device. Shut down the device under any of the following conditions:

When you need to replace the battery or access components inside the device When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB port When the device will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period Although you can shut down the device with the power button, the recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. To shut down the device:

NOTE:

before shutdown is possible. 1. 2. Click Start. 3. Click Shut down. If the device is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, and then click the Power button. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the device from external power and remove the battery. If the device is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, you must first exit Sleep or Hibernation Save your work and close all open programs. 54 Chapter 9 Power management Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

10 Security Protecting the device Standard security features provided by the Windows operating system and the non-Windows Setup Utility can protect your personal settings and data from a variety of risks. Follow the procedures in this chapter to use the following features:

Passwords Firewall software Critical security updates NOTE: Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents, but they may not deter software attacks or prevent the device from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE: Before you send your device for service, remove all password settings. Device risk Unauthorized use of the device Unauthorized access to data Unauthorized access to Setup Utility, BIOS settings, and other system identification information Security feature QuickLock Power-on password Firewall software Windows updates Administrator password Ongoing or future threats to the device Critical security updates from Microsoft Unauthorized access to a Windows user account User password Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your device information. Several types of passwords can be set, depending on how you want to control access to your information. Passwords can be set in Windows or in the non-Windows Setup Utility preinstalled on the device. CAUTION: To prevent being locked out of the device, record each password you set. Because most passwords are not displayed as they are set, changed, or deleted, it is essential to record each password immediately and store it in a secure place. You can use the same password for a Setup Utility feature and for a Windows security feature. You can also use the same password for more than one Setup Utility feature. Use the following guidelines when setting a password in Setup Utility:

A password can be any combination of up to 8 letters and numbers and is case sensitive. A password set in the Setup Utility must be entered at a Setup Utility prompt. A password set in Windows must be entered at a Windows prompt. Protecting the device 55 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Write down your passwords and store them in a secure place away from the device. Do not store passwords in a file on the device. Do not use your name or other personal information that could be easily discovered by an outsider. The following sections list Windows and Setup Utility passwords and describe their functions. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords, select Start > Help and Support. Setting passwords in Windows Password Administrator password User password QuickLock Setting passwords in Setup Utility Password Administrator password*

Power-on password*

Function Protects administrator-level access to device contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility contents. Protects access to a Windows user account. It also protects access to the device contents and must be entered when you exit Standby or Hibernation. Protects the device by requiring a password to be entered in the Windows Log On dialog box before you access the device. After you set a user or administrator password, follow these steps:

1. 2. Initiate QuickLock by pressing fn+f6. Exit QuickLock by entering your Windows user or administrator password. Function Protects access to Setup Utility. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you access Setup Utility. CAUTION:

cannot access Setup Utility. If you forget your administrator password, you Protects access to the device contents. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you turn on or restart the device, or exit Hibernation. CAUTION:

If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the device, or exit Hibernation.

*For details about each of these passwords, refer to the following topics. 56 Chapter 10 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Administrator password Your administrator password protects the configuration settings and system identification information in Setup Utility. After this password is set, you must enter it each time you access Setup Utility. Your administrator password is not interchangeable with an administrator password set in Windows, nor is it displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. Be sure that you record your password and store it in a safe place. Managing an administrator password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:

1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Set Administrator Password, and then press enter. To set an administrator password, type your password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To change an administrator password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, type a new password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To delete an administrator password, type your current password in the Enter Password field, and then press enter 4 times. 3. To save your changes and exit the Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes. Your changes go into effect when the device restarts. Entering an administrator password At the Enter Password prompt, type your administrator password, and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the administrator password, you must restart the device and try again. Power-on password Your power-on password prevents unauthorized use of the device. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you turn on or restart the device, or exit Hibernation. A power-on password is not displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Using passwords 57 Managing a power-on password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:

1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Set Power-On Password, and then press enter. To set a power-on password, type your password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To change a power-on password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, type a new password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To delete a power-on password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, and then press enter 4 times. 3. To save your changes and exit the Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes. Your changes go into effect when the device restarts. Entering a power-on password At the Enter Password prompt, type your password, and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the password, you must restart the device and try again. Using antivirus software When you use the device for e-mail or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses that can disable the operating system, programs, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally. NOTE: HP recommends that you install antivirus software to help protect your device. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. NOTE: For more information about computer viruses, type viruses in the Search field in Help and Support. Using firewall software When you use the device for e-mail, network, or Internet access, unauthorized persons may be able to gain access to the device, your personal files, and information about you. Use the firewall software preinstalled on the device to protect your privacy. Firewall features include logging and reporting of network activity, and automatic monitoring of all incoming and outgoing traffic. Refer to the firewall user guide or contact your firewall manufacturer for more information. NOTE: Under some circumstances a firewall can block access to Internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a network, or block authorized e-mail attachments. To temporarily resolve the problem, disable the firewall, perform the task that you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall. 58 Chapter 10 Security Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Installing critical updates CAUTION: Microsoft sends alerts regarding critical updates. To protect the device from security breaches and device viruses, install all critical updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. Updates to the operating system and other software may have become available after the device was shipped. To be sure that all available updates are installed on the device, observe these guidelines:

Run Windows Update as soon as possible after you set up your device. Use the update link at Start > All Programs > Windows Update. Run Windows Update at regular intervals, such as once a month. Obtain updates to Windows and other Microsoft programs, as they are released, from the Microsoft Web site and through the updates link in Help and Support. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Installing critical updates 59 11 Backup and recovery Recovery after a system failure is as complete as your most current backup. HP recommends that you create recovery discs immediately after software setup. As you add new software and data files, you should continue to back up your system on a regular basis to maintain a reasonably current backup. Tools provided by the operating system and HP Recovery Manager software are designed to help you with the following tasks for safeguarding your information and restoring it in case of a system failure:

Creating a set of recovery discs (Recovery Manager software feature). Recovery discs are used to start up (boot) your computer and restore the operating system and software programs to factory settings in case of system failure or instability. Backing up your information regularly to protect your important system files. Creating system restore points (operating system feature). System restore points allow you to reverse undesirable changes to your computer by restoring the computer to an earlier state. Recovering a program or driver (Recovery Manager software feature). This feature helps you reinstall a program or driver without performing a full system recovery. Performing a full system recovery (Recovery Manager software feature). With Recovery Manager, you can recover your full factory image if you experience system failure or instability. Recovery Manager works from a dedicated recovery partition (select models only) on the hard drive or from recovery discs you create. NOTE:

If your computer includes a solid-state drive (SSD), you may not have a recovery partition. Recovery discs have been included for computers that do not have a partition. Use these discs to recover your operating system and software. To check for the presence of a recovery partition, select Start > Computer. If the partition is present, an HP Recovery drive is listed in the Hard Disk Drives section of the window. Creating recovery discs HP recommends that you create recovery discs to be sure that you can restore your system to its original factory state if you experience serious system failure or instability. Create these discs after setting up the computer for the first time. Handle these discs carefully and keep them in a safe place. The software allows the creation of only one set of recovery discs. NOTE:

If your computer does not include an internal optical drive, you can use an optional external optical drive (purchased separately) to create recovery discs, or you can purchase recovery discs for your computer from the HP Web site. 60 Chapter 11 Backup and recovery Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Note the following guidelines before creating recovery discs:

You will need high-quality DVD-R, double-layer DVD-R, DVD+R, double-layer DVD+R, BD-R

(writable Blu-ray), or CD-R discs. All these discs are purchased separately. DVDs and BDs have a much higher capacity than CDs. If you use CDs, up to 20 discs may be required, whereas only a few DVDs or BDs are required. NOTE: Read-write discs, such as CD-RW, DVDRW, double-layer DVDRW, and BD-RE

(rewritable Blu-ray) discs, are not compatible with the Recovery Manager software. The computer must be connected to AC power during this process. Only one set of recovery discs can be created per computer. Number each disc before inserting it into the optical drive. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating the recovery discs. The next time you open Recovery Manager, you will be prompted to continue the disc creation process. To create a set of recovery discs:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Recovery Manager > Recovery Manager. Recovery Manager opens. 2. Click Advanced Options. NOTE:

AC power before you can go to the next step. If you are operating the computer on battery power, you will be prompted to connect to 3. Click Recovery disc creation, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up your information When to back up On a regularly scheduled basis NOTE: Set reminders to back up your information periodically. Before the computer is repaired or restored Before you add or modify hardware or software Backup suggestions Create a set of recovery discs using Recovery Manager. Create system restore points using the Windows System Restore feature, and periodically copy them to disc. Store personal files in the Documents folder and back up this folder periodically. Back up templates stored in their associated programs. Save customized settings in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your settings. The screen shot can be a time-saver if you have to reset your preferences. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Backing up your information 61 To copy the screen and paste it into a word-processing document, follow these steps:

a. Display the screen. b. Copy the screen:

To copy only the active window, press alt+fn+prt sc. To copy the entire screen, press fn+prt sc. c. Open a word-processing document, and then select Edit > Paste. Using system restore points When you back up your system, you are creating a system restore point. A system restore point allows you to save and name a snapshot of your hard drive at a specific point in time. You can then recover back to that point if you want to reverse subsequent changes made to your system. NOTE: Recovering to an earlier restore point does not affect data files saved or e-mails created since the last restore point. You also can create additional restore points to provide increased protection for your system files and settings. When to create restore points Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally NOTE:

If you revert to a restore point and then change your mind, you can reverse the restoration. Create a system restore point Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > System. In the left pane, click System Protection. 1. 2. 3. Click the System Protection tab. 4. Under Protection Settings, select the disk for which you want to create a restore point. 5. Click Create. The System Protection window opens. Follow the on-screen instructions. 6. Restore to a previous date and time Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > System. In the left pane, click System protection. To revert to a restore point (created at a previous date and time), when the computer was functioning optimally, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Click the System Protection tab. 4. Click the System Restore button, and then click Next. The System Restore window opens. Follow the on-screen instructions. 5. 62 Chapter 11 Backup and recovery Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Performing a recovery NOTE: You can recover only files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. Recovery Manager software allows you to repair or restore the system if you experience system failure or instability. Recovery Manager works from recovery discs or from a dedicated recovery partition (select models only) on the hard drive. However, if your computer includes a solid-state drive (SSD), you may not have a recovery partition. If that is the case, recovery discs have been included with your computer. Use these discs to recover your operating system and software. NOTE: Windows has its own built-in repair features, such as System Restore and driver roll-back capabilities. If you have not already tried these features, try them before using Recovery Manager. NOTE: Recovery Manager recovers only software that was preinstalled at the factory. Software not provided with this computer must be downloaded from the manufacturer's Web site or reinstalled from the disc provided by the manufacturer. Recovering from the recovery discs To restore the system from the recovery discs:

1. 2. 3. Back up all personal files. Insert the first recovery disc into the optical drive and restart the computer. Follow the on-screen instructions. Recovering from the dedicated recovery partition (select models only) NOTE:

If your computer includes an SSD, you may not have a recovery partition. You will not be able to recover using this procedure. Recovery discs have been included for computers that do not have a partition. Use these discs to recover your operating system and software. On some models, you can perform a recovery from the partition on the hard drive from either the Start button or f11. This restores the computer to it's factory condition. To restore the system from the partition, follow these steps:

1. Access Recovery Manager in either of the following ways:

Select Start > All Programs > Recovery Manager > Recovery Manager. or Restart the computer and press f11 while the Press <F11> for recovery message is displayed on the screen. Then select Recovery Manager. Recovery Manager opens. 2. Click Advanced Options. 3. Click System recovery, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Performing a recovery 63 12 Software updates Updated versions of the software provided with your device may be available on the HP Web site. Most software and BIOS updates on the HP Web site are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. To update the software, follow these steps, which are explained in the remainder of this guide:

1. Identify your device model, product category, and series or family. Prepare for a system BIOS update by identifying the BIOS version currently installed on the device. If your device is connected to a network, consult the network administrator before installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. NOTE: The device system BIOS is stored on the system ROM. The BIOS initializes the operating system, determines how the device will interact with the hardware devices, and provides for data transfer among hardware devices, including the time and date. Access the updates on the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com. Install the updates. Updating the BIOS 2. 3. To update the BIOS, first determine what BIOS version you currently have and then download and install the new BIOS. Determining the BIOS version To determine whether available BIOS updates contain later BIOS versions than those currently installed on the device, you need to know the version of the system BIOS currently installed. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be displayed by opening the Setup Utility. To display the BIOS information:

1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. If the Setup Utility does not open with the system information displayed, use the arrow keys to select the Main menu. When the Main menu is selected, BIOS and other system information is displayed. To exit the Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. 2. 3. 64 Chapter 12 Software updates Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To prevent damage to the device or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the device is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the device is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the device by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the device or initiate Standby or Hibernation. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. To download a BIOS update:

1. Access the page on the HP Web site that provides software for your device:

Select Start > Help and Support > Maintain, and then select the software and drivers update. Follow the instructions on the screen to identify your device and access the BIOS update you want to download. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. Identify the BIOS update that is later than the BIOS version currently installed on your device. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. Follow the instructions on the screen to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update will be downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. 2. 3. b. NOTE:

any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If you connect your device to a network, consult the network administrator before installing BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are displayed, follow these steps:

1. Open Windows Explorer by selecting Start > Computer. 2. Double-click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the instructions on the screen. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Updating the BIOS 65 Updating programs and drivers 2. 3. To download and install software other than a BIOS update, follow these steps:

1. Access the page on the HP Web site that provides software for your device:

Select Start > Help and Support, and then select the software and drivers update. Follow the instructions on the screen to find the software you want to update. At the download area, select the software you want to download and follow the instructions on the screen. NOTE: Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the software will be downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the software. 4. When the download is complete, open Windows Explorer by selecting Start > Computer. 5. Double-click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 6. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 7. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The installation begins. 8. Complete the installation by following the instructions on the screen. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. 66 Chapter 12 Software updates Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

13 Setup Utility Starting the Setup Utility The Setup Utility is a ROM-based information and customization utility that can be used even when your Windows operating system is not working. The utility reports information about the device and provides settings for startup, security, and other preferences. To start the Setup Utility:

Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. Using the Setup Utility Changing the language of the Setup Utility The following procedure explains how to change the language of the Setup Utility. If the Setup Utility is not already running, begin at step 1. If the Setup Utility is already running, begin at step 2. 1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select System Configuration > Language, and then press enter. 3. Use the arrow keys to select a language, and then press enter. 4. When a confirmation prompt with your language selected is displayed, press enter. 5. To save your change and exit the Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. Your change goes into effect immediately. Navigating and selecting in the Setup Utility Because the Setup Utility is not Windows based, it does not support the TouchPad. Navigation and selection are by keystroke. To choose a menu or a menu item, use the arrow keys. To choose an item in a list or to toggle a field, for example an Enable/Disable field, use either the arrow keys or f5 or f6. To select an item, press enter. To close a text box or return to the menu display, press esc. To display additional navigation and selection information while the Setup Utility is open, press f1. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Starting the Setup Utility 67 Displaying system information The following procedure explains how to display system information in the Setup Utility. If the Setup Utility is not open, begin at step 1. If the Setup Utility is open, begin at step 2. 1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10 2. 3.

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. Select the Main menu. System information such as the system time and date, and identification information about the device is displayed. To exit the Setup Utility without changing any settings, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. Restoring default settings in the Setup Utility The following procedure explains how to restore the Setup Utility default settings. If the Setup Utility is not already running, begin at step 1. If the Setup Utility is already running, begin at step 2. 1. Open the Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the device, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Exit > Load Setup Defaults, and then press enter. 3. When the Setup Confirmation is displayed, press enter. 4. To save your change and exit the Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. The Setup Utility default settings go into effect when the device restarts. NOTE: Your password, security, and language settings are not changed when you restore the factory default settings. Exiting the Setup Utility You can exit the Setup Utility with or without saving changes. To exit the Setup Utility and save your changes from the current session:

If the Setup Utility menus are not visible, press esc to return to the menu display. Then use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. To exit the Setup Utility without saving your changes from the current session:

If the Setup Utility menus are not visible, press esc to return to the menu display. Then use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. After either choice, the device restarts in Windows. Setup Utility menus The menu tables in this section provide an overview of Setup Utility options. NOTE: Some of the Setup Utility menu items listed in this chapter may not be supported by your device. 68 Chapter 13 Setup Utility Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Main menu Select System information Security menu Select Administrator password Power-On Password System Configuration menu To do this View and change the system time and date. View identification information about the device. View specification information about the processor, memory size, and system BIOS. To do this Enter, change, or delete an administrator password. Enter, change, or delete a power-on password. Select Language Support Processor C4 State Boot Options To do this Change the Setup Utility language. Enable/disable the processor C4 sleep state. Set the following boot options:

f10 and f12 Delay (sec.)Set the delay for the f10 and f12 functions of the Setup Utility in intervals of 5 seconds each (0, 5, 10, 15, 20). Internal Network Adapter bootEnable/disable boot from Internal Network Adapter. Boot OrderSet the boot order for:

Internal hard drive (select models only) USB Floppy USB CD/DVD ROM Drive USB Diskette on Key USB Hard drive USB Card Reader Network adapter NOTE: Only the devices attached to the system will appear in the boot order menu. Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Setup Utility menus 69 Diagnostics menu Select To do this Hard Disk Self Test (select models only) Run a comprehensive self-test on the hard drive. Memory Test Run a diagnostic test on the system memory. 70 Chapter 13 Setup Utility Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index A AC adapter administrator password connecting 46 identifying 9 testing 46 creating 57 entering 57 managing 57 airport security devices 34 antennas 8 applications key, Windows 3 audio devices, connecting external 25 audio functions, checking 25 audio-in (microphone) jack 4, 23 audio-out (headphone) jack 4, 23 B backing up customized window, toolbar, and menu bar settings 61 personal files 61 templates 61 backup suggestions 61 battery calibrating 51 charging 49, 51 conserving power 53 discharging 50 disposing 54 identifying 8 inserting 48 low battery levels 50 recharging 53 removing 48 storing 53 battery bay, identifying 7 Battery Check 47 battery light 4, 49, 50 battery power 47 battery release latches 7, 48 battery temperature 53 bay, battery 7 BIOS, updating 64 Bluetooth device 10 boot options 69 boot order 69 button, volume mute 23 buttons left TouchPad 1 right TouchPad 1 C cables LAN 20 USB 31 VGA 26 caps lock light, identifying 2 CD drive 35 changing the Setup Utility language 67 charging batteries 49, 51 checking audio functions 25 compartments, memory module 7 components additional hardware 8 bottom 7 display 6 front 3 left-side 5 right-side 4 TouchPad 1 connecting to a WLAN 14 connection, external power 46 connector, security cable 5 conservation, power 53 cord, power 8 corporate WLAN connection 14 critical battery level 50 D Diagnostics menu 70 digital card inserting 29 removing 30 stopping 30 diskette drive 35 display image, switching 41 screen brightness hotkeys 41 display switch, identifying 6 displaying system information 68 drive light, identifying 4 drive media 43 drives diskette 35 external 34 hard 34 optical 35 drives, boot order 69 DVD drive 35 E earbuds 4, 23 encryption 14 entering a power-on password 58 entering an administrator password 57 esc key 3 exiting the Setup Utility 68 expansion port 26 external audio devices, connecting 25 external drive 34 external monitor port, identifying 4 F f11 63 f11 recovery 63 firewall 14 fn key 3, 39 full system recovery 60 function keys 3, 39 H hard disk drive, external 34 Index 71 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

hard drive 7 hard drive self test 70 hard drive, external 34 hardware, identifying 1 HDMI port 27 HDMI port, identifying 5 HDMI, connecting 27 headphone (audio-out) jack 4, 23 headphones 4, 23 Hibernation exiting 44 initiated during critical battery level 50 initiating 44 high-definition devices, connecting 27 hotkeys decreasing screen brightness 41 internal display switch, identifying 6 internal microphone, identifying 6, 23 Internet connection setup 13 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 4, 23 audio-out (headphone) 4, 23 RJ-45 (network) 4 K keyboard hotkeys, identifying 39 keys esc 3 fn 3 function 3 Windows applications 3 Windows logo 3 decreasing speaker sound 42 description 39 increasing screen brightness 41 increasing speaker volume 42 initiating QuickLock 41 initiating Standby 40 muting speaker sound 41 switching screen image 41 using 40 L labels Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 9 regulatory 9 service tag 9 language support 69 latches, battery release 7 left TouchPad button, HP Connection Manager software 12 HP Mini Mobile Drive inserting 32 removing 32 stopping 32 HP Mobile Broadband Module 15, 16 HP Mobile Drive identifying 4 using 32 HP USB Ethernet Adapter, connecting 20 hubs 31 I icons network 10, 19 wireless 10 interference, minimizing 20 identifying 1 lights battery 4 caps lock 2 drive 4 power 2 webcam 6 wireless 2 local area network (LAN) cable required 20 connecting cable 20 low battery level 50 M Main menu 69 managing a power-on password 58 managing an administrator password 57 memory module compartment memory module inserting 37 removing 37 cover removing 36 replacing 38 memory module compartment, identifying 7 memory test 70 microphone (audio-in) jack 4, 23 minimizing interference 20 monitor port, external 4 monitor, connecting 26 mouse, external connecting 39 setting preferences 39 multimedia components, identifying 22 multimedia software installing 25 using 25 mute button 23 mute hotkey, identifying 23 N navigating in the Setup Utility 67 network cable connecting 20 noise suppression circuitry 20 network cable, connecting 20 network icon 10, 19 network jack, identifying 4 network key 19 network security codes network key 19 SSID 19 noise suppression circuitry, network cable 20 O operating system 54 optical drive 35 P passwords administrator 57 power-on 57 set in Setup Utility 56 set in Windows 56 72 Index Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ports expansion 26 external monitor 4 HDMI 5, 27 USB 5, 31 power connecting 46 conserving 53 power connector, identifying 5 power cord, identifying 8 power light, identifying 2 power-on password creating 58 entering 58 managing 58 Processor C4 State 69 product name and number, device 9 programs, updating 66 projector, connecting 26 public WLAN connection 14 Q QuickLock 56 QuickLock hotkey 41 R readable media 43 recovering a program or driver 60 recovering from the dedicated recovery partition 63 recovering from the recovery discs 63 recovery discs 60 Recovery Manager 60, 63 recovery partition 60 recovery, system 63 regulatory information HP Mobile Broadband Module serial number 9 regulatory label 9 wireless 9 release latches battery 7, 49 restore points 62 restoring default settings 68 right TouchPad button, identifying 1 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 4 S screen brightness hotkeys 41 screen image, switching 41 SD Card Reader, identifying 4 security cable connector, identifying 5 Security menu 69 security, wireless 13 selecting in the Setup Utility 67 serial number, device 9 service tag 9 setup of WLAN 13 Setup Utility, passwords set in 56 setup, device 1 shutdown 54 shutting down 54 SIM inserting 16 removing 16 Sleep exiting 43 initiating 43 software HP Connection Manager 12 installing 25 multimedia 25 Windows Media Player 25 Wireless Assistant 12 solid-state drive (SSD) 60, 63 speakers, identifying 4, 23 Standby hotkey 40 storing battery 53 supported discs 61 System Configuration menu 69 system failure or instability 60 system information 69 system recovery 63 system restore points 60, 62 T temperature 53 TouchPad buttons 1 identifying 1 using 39 TouchPad scroll zone, identifying 1 traveling with the computer 53 turning off the device 54 U unresponsive system 54 USB cable, connecting 31 USB devices connecting 31 description 31 removing 31 stopping 31 USB hubs 31 USB ports, identifying 5, 31 V vents, identifying 5, 7 video transmission types 41 volume down hotkey, identifying 23 volume mute button 23 volume up hotkey, identifying 23 volume, adjusting 23 W webcam light, identifying 6, 23 webcam, identifying 6, 23 Windows applications key, identifying 3 Windows logo key, identifying 3 Windows, passwords set in 56 wireless antennas 8 Wireless Assistant software 11, 12 wireless controls button 11 HP Connection Manager 11 operating system 11 Wireless Assistant software 11 wireless function key 11 wireless icon 10 wireless light 11 wireless light, identifying 2 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 14 corporate WLAN connection 14 equipment needed 13 functional range 14 public WLAN connection 14 security 13 WLAN 7 WLAN device 10 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index 73 writable media 43 WWAN device 15 74 Index Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

 

 

Back to Contents Page Regulatory: Dell(TM) Wireless WLAN Card User Guide Operational Information Regulatory information Operational Information NOTE:

EIRP = effective isotropic radiated power (including antenna gain) Your Dell wireless WLAN card transmits less than 100 mW of power, but more than 10 mW. Wireless Interoperability Dell wireless WLAN card products are designed to be interoperable with any wireless LAN product that is based on direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) radio technology and orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) and to comply with the following standards:

IEEE 802.11a Standard on 5-GHz Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11b-1999 Standard on 2.4-GHz Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11g Standard on 2.4-GHz Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11n Draft Standard on 2.4-GHz and 5-GHz Wireless LAN Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) certification, as defined by the Wi-Fi Alliance Safety Dell wireless WLAN cards, like other radio devices, emit radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by these devices, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. Dell wireless WLAN card devices operate within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of these devices may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations include the following:

Using the Dell wireless WLAN card equipment on board airplanes, or Using the Dell wireless WLAN card equipment in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or environment (an airport, for example), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use the Dell wireless WLAN card device before you turn it on. Regulatory information Dell wireless WLAN card devices must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. For country-specific approvals, see Radio Approvals. Dell Inc. is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with a Dell wireless WLAN card kit, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than that specified by Dell Inc. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment is the responsibility of the user. Dell Inc. and its authorized resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from the user failing to comply with these guidelines. USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) FCC radiation exposure statement CAUTION The radiated output power of Dell wireless WLAN card devices is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, you should keep a distance of at least 20 cm between you (or any other person in the vicinity) and the antenna that is built into the device.To determine the location of the antenna within your portable computer, check the information posted on the general Dell support site at http://support.dell.com/. These devices have also been evaluated and shown to comply with the FCC RF exposure limits under portable exposure conditions (antennas are within 20 cm of a person's body) when installed in certain specific OEM configurations. Details of the authorized configurations can be found at http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea by entering the FCC ID number on the device. Radio Frequency Interference Requirements NOTICE: Dell Wireless 1450, Dell Wireless 1470, Dell Wireless 1490, and Dell Wireless 1500/1505/1510 products. These devices are restricted to indoor use because they operate in the 5.15 to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires such products to be used indoors for the frequency range 5.15 GHz to 5.25-

GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High-power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35-GHz and 5.65 to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with or damage to these devices, or both. Interference Statement These devices comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation of the devices is subject to the following two conditions: (1) The devices may not cause harmful interference, and (2) The devices must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, the equipment may cause harmful interference to radio communications. There is no guarantee, however, that such interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by taking one or more of the following measures:

Relocate this device. Increase the separation between the device and the receiver. Connect the device into an outlet on a circuit different from that of other electronics. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician for help. NOTE: Dell wireless WLAN cards must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. Any other installation or use will violate FCC Part 15 regulations. Modifications not expressly approved by Dell could void your authority to operate the equipment. The radio(s) inside the laptop platform in this user guide are approved to be co-located. No other radio(s) can be co-located in this laptop platform without FCC approval. Brazil Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Canada. Industry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L'utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes: (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l'utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. The term "IC" before the equipment certification number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met. To reduce the potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and gain should be chosen so that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Pour empecher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit etre utilze a l'interieur et devrait etre place lin des fenetres afin de Fournier un ecram de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'emission) est installe a l'exterieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. CAUTION: Exposure to radio frequency radiation. The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit an RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's website http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb. NOTICE: Dell Wireless 1450, Dell Wireless 1470, Dell Wireless 1490, and Dell Wireless 1500/1505/1510 products. These devices are restricted to indoor use because they operate in the 5.15 to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires such products to be used indoors to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High-power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35-GHz and 5.65 to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with or damage to these devices, or both. Europe EU declaration of conformity and restrictions This equipment is marked with either the symbol throughout the European Community. This mark indicates compliance with the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC and the relevant parts of the following technical specifications:

and can be used or the symbol EN 300 328. Electromagnetic Compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM). Wideband transmission systems, data transmission equipment operating in the 2.4 GHz industrial, scientific, and medical (ISM)band and using spread spectrum modulation techniques, harmonized EN standards covering essential requirements under article 3.2 of the R&TTE directive EN 301 893. Broadband Radio Access Networks (BRAN). 5 GHz high-performance RLAN, harmonized EN standards covering essential requirements of article 3.2 of the R&TTE directive EN 301 489-17. Electromagnetic Compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM). Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Standard for Radio Equipment and Services, Part 17 Specific Conditions for Wideband Data and HIPERLAN Equipment EN 60950-1. Safety of Information Technology Equipment EN 50385. Product standard to demonstrate the compliances of radio base stations and fixed terminal stations for wireless telecommunication systems with the basic restrictions or the reference levels related to human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic fields Marking by the alert symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. Bulgarian Dell Inc. , 1999/5/EC. Czech Dell Inc. tmto prohlauje, e tento Wireless Device je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi prslunmi ustanovenmi smernice 1999/5/ES. Danish Undertegnede Dell Inc. erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr Wireless Device overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Dutch Hierbij verklaart Dell Inc. dat het toestel Wireless Device in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG. English Hereby, Dell Inc. declares that this Wireless Device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Estonian Kesolevaga kinnitab Dell Inc. seadme Wireless Device vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. Finnish Dell Inc. vakuuttaa tten ett Wireless Device tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. French Par la prsente Dell Inc. dclare que l'appareil Wireless Device est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE. German Hiermit erklrt Dell Inc., dass sich das Gert Wireless Device in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet. Greek Dell Inc. Wireless Device 1999/5/. Hungarian Alulrott, Dell Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a Wireless Device megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EC irnyelv egyb elrsainak. Italian Con la presente Dell Inc. dichiara che questo Wireless Device conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Latvian Ar o Dell Inc. deklar, ka Wireless Device atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. Lithuanian iuo Dell Inc. deklaruoja, kad is Wireless Device atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Maltese Hawnhekk, Dell Inc., jiddikjara li dan Wireless Device jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC. Polish Niniejszym Dell Inc. owiadcza, e Wireless Device jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC. Portuguese Dell Inc. declara que este Wireless Device est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/CE. Romanian Prin aceasta, Dell Inc.declar c acest Dispozitiv Wireless este n conformitate cu cerinele eseniale i alte dispoziii relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/CE. Slovak Dell Inc. tmto vyhlasuje, e Wireless Device spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES. Slovenian Dell Inc. izjavlja, da je ta Wireless Device v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili direktive 1999/5/ES. Spanish Por medio de la presente Dell Inc. declara que el Wireless Device cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. Swedish Hrmed intygar Dell Inc. att denna Wireless Device str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EG. Icelandic Hr me lsir Dell Inc. yfir v a Wireless Device er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og arar krfur, sem gerar eru tilskipun 1999/5/EC. Norwegian Dell Inc. erklrer herved at utstyret Wireless Device er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. This product is intended to be used in all countries of the European Economic Area with the following restrictions:

Restrictions on IEEE 802.11a or Draft IEEE 802.11n operation:

Dell Wireless 1450, Dell Wireless 1470, Dell Wireless 1490, and Dell Wireless 1500/1505/1510 products, which are capable of IEEE 802.11a or Draft IEEE 802.11n operation, are for indoor use only when they are using channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, or 64 (51505350 MHz). Dynamic frequency selection (DFS) and transmit power control (TPC) must remain enabled to ensure product compliance with EC regulations. To ensure compliance with local regulations, be sure to set your computer to the country in which you are using a wireless network adapter (see Radio Approvals). Dell Wireless 1450, Dell Wireless 1470, Dell Wireless 1490, and Dell Wireless 1500/1505/1510 products can be used only indoors in the following countries: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Czech Republic, Germany, Cyprus, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, The Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Poland, Romania, Spain, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Sweden, Switzerland, Turkey, and United Kingdom. There may be restrictions on using 5-GHz, 40-MHz wide channels in some EU countries. Please check with local authorities. France In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:

Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP) of 100 mW for the entire 24002483.5 MHz frequency band. Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP) of 100 mW for the 24002454 MHz band and with maximum power (EIRP) of 10 mW for the 24542483.5 MHz band. Korea Radio Notice This radio equipment may cause interference during operation. Therefore, this radio equipment cannot be operated in an area that is providing services related to human safety. Taiwan DGT/NCC General WLAN Products Article 12 Unless granted permission by Taiwan DGT/NCC, no company, firm, or user shall alter the frequency, increase the power, or change the characteristics and functions of the original design of an approved low-power radio frequency device. Article 14 Low-power radio frequency devices shall not affect navigation safety nor interfere with legal communications. If an interference is found, the service will be suspended until improvement is made and the interference no longer exists. Legal communications refers to the wireless telecommunication operations that comply with telecommunications laws and regulations. Low-power radio frequency devices should be able to tolerate any interference from legal communications or industrial and scientific applications. 5.25-GHz to 5.35-GHz Band Products Radio devices using the 5.25-GHz to 5.35-GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Radio Approvals It is important to ensure that you use your Dell wireless WLAN card only in countries where it is approved for use. To determine whether you are allowed to use your Dell wireless WLAN card in a specific country, check to see if the radio type number that is printed on the identification label of your device is listed on the radio approval list posted on the Dell support site at http://support.dell.com/. In countries other than the United States and Japan, verify that the location setting on the Location tab in Regional and Language Options (from Control Panel) has been set to the country in which you are using your Dell wireless WLAN card. This ensures compliance with local regulatory restrictions on transmit power and optimizes network performance. Any deviation from the permissible power and frequency settings for the country of use is an infringement of national law and may be punished as such. Back to Contents Page

 

 

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Energy Star is a U.S. registered mark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Second Edition: January 2007 Document Part Number: 437312-002 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission notice ...................................................................................... 2 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ..................................................................................................................................... 3 Products with wireless LAN devices .................................................................................... 3 Brazilian notice ..................................................................................................................................... 4 Wireless LAN certification markings .................................................................................... 4 Canadian notices .................................................................................................................................. 4 Avis Canadien ...................................................................................................................................... 5 European Union notices ....................................................................................................................... 5 Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices ...................................................................... 6 France ................................................................................................................. 6 Italy ...................................................................................................................... 6 Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices ......................................................................... 6 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................... 6 Germany ............................................................................................................. 6 Indian notice ......................................................................................................................................... 7 Japanese notices ................................................................................................................................. 7 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11g devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN certification markings .................................................................................... 7 Bluetooth devices ................................................................................................................ 9 Certification markings for Bluetooth devices ........................................................................ 9 Korean notice ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Singaporean wireless notice .............................................................................................................. 10 Taiwan notice ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Airline travel notice ............................................................................................................................. 10 Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 10 Energy Star compliance ..................................................................................................................... 11 Laser compliance ............................................................................................................................... 11 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 12 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 12 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 13 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................. 14 Canadian modem statements ............................................................................................ 20 Japanese modem statements ............................................................................................ 20 New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 21 ENWW iii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Voice support .................................................................................................... 21 Power cord notice ............................................................................................................................... 22 Japanese power cord notice .............................................................................................. 22 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................... 22 2 Safety notices Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 23 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................... 23 Power cord notices ............................................................................................................................. 23 Travel notice ....................................................................................................................................... 24 3 Environmental notices Battery disposal .................................................................................................................................. 25 Electronic hardware and battery recycling ......................................................................................... 25 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ....................... 25 Chinese material content declarations ............................................................................................... 26 Japanese material content declaration ............................................................................................... 28 United States mercury disposal .......................................................................................................... 28 Perchlorate material - special handling may apply ............................................................................. 28 Index ................................................................................................................................................................. 29 iv ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 Regulatory notices This guide provides country-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device, such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device, installed on the computer, open the Device Manager utility. In Windows Vista, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. In Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Home, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > My Computer. If the left pane, select View System Information > Hardware tab > Device Manager. ENWW 1 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebooks. During normal operation of tablet PCs: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Tablet PC Tour user guide included with the computer. During normal operation of notebooks: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm

(8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Notebook Tour user guide included with the computer. CAUTION When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. ENWW Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Brazilian notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Unless the computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN radio or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN radio, the Brazilian certification mark is located on the bottom of the computer. Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

Canadian notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Wireless operation is subject to 2 conditions. The first is that the wireless device may not cause interference. The second is that the wireless device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennae for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. For radio devices in the 5250- to 5350-MHz and 5470- to 5725-MHz bands, the maximum gain as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limit is noted below:

Broadcom 802.11a/b/g WLAN = 5.6 dBi Broadcom 4321AG 802.11a/b/g/draft-n Wi-Fi Adapter = 5.6 dBi 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi For radio devices in the 5725- to 5825-MHz band, the maximum gain permitted, as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limits for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation, is noted below:

Broadcom 802.11a/b/g WLAN = 5.8 dBi Broadcom 4321AG 802.11a/b/g/draft-n Wi-Fi Adapter = 5.8 dBi Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC EMC Directive 89/336/EEC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. The following CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Germany ENWW Avis Canadien 5 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The following CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices France L'utilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis l'interieur d'un batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5-MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy E'necessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per l'uso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management (Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices Frequency availability for 802.11a or 802.11h wireless LAN is not currently harmonized throughout the European Union. For compliance requirements, users should verify compliance with their supplier, local HP office, or telecommunications authority. Ergonomics notice Germany Computers bearing the GS approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements when used in conjunction with docking bases, keyboards, and monitors that bear the GS approval mark. Computers in a stand-alone mode are not intended for continuous use in an office environment. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Indian notice The India Telegraph Act of 1885 requires that an IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN end user obtain a license. To obtain this license, please contact The Wireless Planning & Coordination Wing, Ministry of Communications, Sanchar Ghavan New Delhi. Japanese notices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Wireless LAN 802.11g devices Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

ENWW Indian notice 7 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2915a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 3945a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311BG 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311AG 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

Bluetooth devices Certification markings for Bluetooth devices The HP integrated module with Bluetooth has the certification mark below:

The HP integrated module with Bluetooth 2.0 has the certification mark below:

ENWW Japanese notices 9 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Korean notice Singaporean wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antenna during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Taiwan notice Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Battery notices CAUTION Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. For information about removing a battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Energy Star compliance Computers bearing the Energy Star logo are compliant with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

(EPA) Energy Star Computers Program 3.0. The EPA Energy Star logo does not imply endorsement by the EPA. As an Energy Star Partner, HP has determined that the product meets the Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency. Laser compliance This product may be provided with a device containing a laser that is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with US FDA regulations and the IEC 60825-1. The product does not emit hazardous laser radiation. Each laser product complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated May 27, 2001; and with IEC 60825-1:1993/A2:2001. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. ENWW Energy Star compliance 11 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country in which the product is located. Selecting a country other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country selection is not made. If, when you select a country, a message appears that states that the country is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country and thus should not be used. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. ENWW Modem notices 13 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 15 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

16 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 17 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

18 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 19 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems AC'97 modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems HDA modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

20 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. ENWW Modem notices 21 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japanese power cord notice Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. 22 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

2 Safety notices Battery notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture a battery;

short the external contacts on a battery; or dispose of a battery in fire or water. Do not expose a battery to temperatures above 60C (140F). WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Headset and earphone volume level notice Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in clause 7 of EN 50332-2. If a headset or earphones are shipped with this product, they are in compliance to EN 50332-1. Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. ENWW Battery notices 23 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 24 Chapter 2 Safety notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Battery disposal WARNING! When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. Electronic hardware and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service, or the shop where you purchased the product. ENWW Battery disposal 25 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Chinese material content declarations The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products 26 Chapter 3 Environmental notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Chinese material content declarations 27 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Japanese material content declaration A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2005, mandates that manufacturers provide material content declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. United States mercury disposal This computer contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the computer display, which may require special handling when the computer has reached the end of its useful life. Because of environmental considerations, local authorities may regulate the disposal of the mercury. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) at http://www.eiae.org. Perchlorate material - special handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. 28 Chapter 3 Environmental notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index Symbols/Numerics 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 A airline travel notice 10 B battery disposal notice 25 battery notice 10, 23 Brazilian notice 4 C Canadian modem statement 20 Canadian notices 4 Chinese Material Content Declarations 26 D Declaration of Conformity 3 disposal notices battery 25 equipment 25 mercury 28 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 25 Energy Star compliance 11 environmental notices 25 equipment disposal notice 25 ergonomics notice 6 European Union notices 5 F Federal Communications Commission cables 2 modifications 2 notice 2 ENWW France, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 2 G GS Notice 6 H hardware device, identifying 1 headset and earphone volume level notice 23 I Indian notice 7 Italy, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 J Japanese material content declaration 28 Japanese modem statement 20 Japanese notice 7 Japanese power cord notice 22 K Korean notice 10 L laser safety notice 11 M Macrovision Corporation notice 22 mercury disposal notice 28 modem notices 12 modem statements Canadian 20 Japanese 20 New Zealand 21 U.S. 13 N New Zealand modem statement 21 notices airline travel 10 battery 10, 23, 25 Brazilian 4 Canadian 4 environmental 25 equipment disposal 25 ergonomics 6 European Union 5 Federal Communications Commission 2 headset and earphone volume level 23 Indian 7 Japanese 7 Japanese power cord 22 Korean 10 laser safety 11 Macrovision Corporation 22 mercury disposal 28 modem 12 perchlorate material 28 power cords 22, 23 Singaporean 10 Taiwan 10 travel 24 P power cord notice 22, 23 S Singaporean wireless notice 10 Index 29 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

T Taiwan notice 10 travel notice 24 U U.S. modem statement 13 V voice support 21 W wireless LAN devices 3 30 Index ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

 

 

Regulatory Statement

(to be included in the portable notebook PCs with WLAN radios) 1. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. INFORMATION TO USER:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. CAUTION: (this only applicable to 5GHz device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Page 1 of 2 Regulatory Statement

(to be included in the portable notebook PCs with WLAN radios) If the module is installed in portable hosts, where the separation distance between radiating elements and the user is less than 20cm, additional equipment authorization procedure to address RF exposure compliance shall apply. If the module is installed with other transmitting devices which can transmit simultaneously with this device and antenna-to-antenna distance is less 20cm, assessing RF exposure compliance with multiple transmitters within a host device shall be performed based upon FCC requirements. 2. Canada - Industry Canada (IC) Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. Caution: (this only applicable to UNII device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RSS 102 RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Page 2 of 2

 

 

Computer User Guide Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. To obtain the latest information in the Computer User Guide, go to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/support. Copyright 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: September 2009 Document Part Number: 574399-001 Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). iii iv Safety warning notice Table of contents 1 Hardware features Identifying the hardware ....................................................................................................................... 1 Top components .................................................................................................................. 1 TouchPad ............................................................................................................ 1 Lights ................................................................................................................... 2 Buttons ................................................................................................................ 3 Keys .................................................................................................................... 4 Front components ................................................................................................................ 4 Right-side components ........................................................................................................ 5 Left-side components .......................................................................................................... 6 Display components ............................................................................................................ 7 Bottom components ............................................................................................................. 8 Wireless antennas ............................................................................................................... 9 Additional hardware components ...................................................................................... 10 Identifying the labels ........................................................................................................................... 10 2 Wireless and local area network Using wireless devices ....................................................................................................................... 13 Identifying wireless and network status icons .................................................................... 13 Using the wireless controls ................................................................................................ 14 Using the wireless button ................................................................................................... 14 Using Wireless Assistant software (select models only) .................................................... 15 Using HP Connection Manager (select models only) ........................................................ 15 Using operating system controls ........................................................................................ 15 Using a WLAN .................................................................................................................................... 17 Setting up a WLAN ............................................................................................................ 17 Protecting your WLAN ....................................................................................................... 17 Connecting to a WLAN ...................................................................................................... 18 Roaming to another network .............................................................................................. 19 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) ............................................................................. 20 Inserting a SIM ................................................................................................................... 20 Removing a SIM ................................................................................................................ 21 Using Bluetooth wireless devices ....................................................................................................... 23 Bluetooth and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) ............................................................. 23 v Troubleshooting wireless connection problems ................................................................................. 24 Cannot connect to a WLAN ............................................................................................... 24 Cannot connect to a preferred WLAN network .................................................................. 25 Network icon for WLAN is not displayed ............................................................................ 25 Current WLAN network security codes are unavailable .................................................... 25 WLAN connection is very weak ......................................................................................... 26 Cannot connect to the wireless router ............................................................................... 26 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) .......................................................................................... 27 3 Multimedia Multimedia features ............................................................................................................................ 29 Identifying your multimedia components ........................................................................... 29 Adjusting the volume ......................................................................................................... 31 Multimedia software ........................................................................................................................... 32 Using preinstalled multimedia software ............................................................................. 32 Installing multimedia software from the Internet ................................................................ 32 Audio .................................................................................................................................................. 33 Connecting external audio devices .................................................................................... 33 Checking your audio functions ........................................................................................... 33 Video .................................................................................................................................................. 35 Connecting an external monitor or projector ...................................................................... 35 Connecting an HDMI device .............................................................................................. 35 Configuring audio for HDMI (select models only) .............................................. 36 Webcam ............................................................................................................................................. 37 4 Drives and external devices Drives ................................................................................................................................................. 40 Identifying installed drives .................................................................................................. 40 Handling drives .................................................................................................................. 40 Improving hard drive performance ..................................................................................... 41 Using Disk Defragmenter .................................................................................. 41 Using Disk Cleanup ........................................................................................... 41 Replacing the hard drive in the hard drive bay .................................................................. 41 Using external drives ......................................................................................................... 43 Connecting optional external drives .................................................................. 44 Sharing optical drives ........................................................................................................ 44 External devices ................................................................................................................................. 45 Using a USB device ........................................................................................................... 45 Connecting a USB device ................................................................................. 45 Removing a USB device ................................................................................... 45 Using Digital Media Slot cards ........................................................................................... 46 Inserting a digital card ....................................................................................... 46 Removing a digital card ..................................................................................... 47 vi 5 Memory modules 6 Pointing devices and keyboard Setting pointing device preferences ................................................................................................... 53 Using pointing devices ....................................................................................................................... 53 Using the TouchPad .......................................................................................................... 53 Connecting an external mouse .......................................................................................... 53 Using the keyboard ............................................................................................................................ 53 Using hotkeys .................................................................................................................... 53 Initiating Sleep ................................................................................................... 54 Switching the screen image .............................................................................. 55 Decreasing screen brightness ........................................................................... 55 Increasing screen brightness ............................................................................ 55 Initiating QuickLock ........................................................................................... 55 Muting speaker sound ....................................................................................... 56 Decreasing speaker volume .............................................................................. 56 Increasing speaker volume ............................................................................... 56 7 Power management Setting power options ......................................................................................................................... 57 Using power-saving states ................................................................................................. 57 Initiating and exiting Sleep ................................................................................ 57 Initiating and exiting Hibernation ....................................................................... 58 Using the battery meter ..................................................................................................... 58 Using power plans ............................................................................................................. 59 Viewing the current power plan ......................................................................... 59 Selecting a different power plan ........................................................................ 59 Customizing power plans .................................................................................. 59 Setting password protection on wakeup ............................................................................ 59 Using external AC power .................................................................................................................... 59 Connecting the AC adapter ............................................................................................... 60 Testing an AC adapter ....................................................................................................... 61 Using battery power ........................................................................................................................... 61 Finding battery information in Help and Support ............................................................... 62 Using Battery Check .......................................................................................................... 62 Displaying the remaining battery charge ........................................................................... 62 Inserting or removing the battery ....................................................................................... 62 Charging a battery ............................................................................................................. 63 Maximizing battery discharge time .................................................................................... 64 Managing low battery levels .............................................................................................. 64 Identifying low battery levels ............................................................................. 64 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................. 66 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ....... 66 vii Resolving a low battery level when a charged battery is available ........................................................................................... 66 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ........................................................................................... 66 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ....................................................................................... 66 Calibrating a battery ........................................................................................................... 66 Step 1: Fully charge the battery ........................................................................ 66 Step 2: Disable Hibernation and Sleep ............................................................. 67 Step 3: Discharge the battery ............................................................................ 67 Step 4: Fully recharge the battery ..................................................................... 69 Step 5: Reenable Hibernation and Sleep .......................................................... 69 Conserving battery power .................................................................................................. 69 Storing a battery ................................................................................................................ 69 Disposing of a used battery ............................................................................................... 70 Shutting down the computer ............................................................................................................... 70 8 Security Protecting the computer ..................................................................................................................... 71 Using passwords ................................................................................................................................ 71 Setting passwords in Windows .......................................................................................... 72 Setting passwords in Setup Utility ..................................................................................... 72 Administrator password ..................................................................................... 73 Managing an administrator password ............................................... 73 Entering an administrator password ................................................. 73 Power-on password .......................................................................................... 73 Managing a power-on password ...................................................... 74 Entering a power-on password ......................................................... 74 Using antivirus software ..................................................................................................................... 75 Using firewall software ....................................................................................................................... 76 Installing critical updates .................................................................................................................... 77 9 Software updates Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 80 Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................... 80 Downloading a BIOS update ............................................................................................. 80 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................... 82 10 Setup Utility Starting Setup Utility ........................................................................................................................... 83 Using Setup Utility .............................................................................................................................. 83 Changing the language of Setup Utility ............................................................................. 83 Navigating and selecting in Setup Utility ............................................................................ 83 viii Displaying system information ........................................................................................... 84 Restoring default settings in Setup Utility .......................................................................... 84 Exiting Setup Utility ............................................................................................................ 84 Setup Utility menus ............................................................................................................................ 85 Main menu ......................................................................................................................... 85 Security menu .................................................................................................................... 85 System Configuration menu .............................................................................................. 85 Diagnostics menu .............................................................................................................. 86 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 87 ix x 1 Hardware features Identifying the hardware Components included with the computer may vary by region and model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features on most computer models. To see a list of hardware installed in the computer:

1. 2. Select Start > Control panel > System and Security. In the System area, click Device Manager. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. Top components TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3) TouchPad*

Left TouchPad button*

Right TouchPad button*

Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Identifying the hardware 1

(4) TouchPad scroll zone Scrolls up or down.

*This table describes factory settings. To view or change pointing device preferences, select Start > Devices and Printers. Then, right-click the device representing your computer, and select Mouse. Lights Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Caps lock light Power light Wireless light Description On: Caps lock is on. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. 2 Chapter 1 Hardware features Buttons Component

(1) Power button*

(2) Wireless button Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. Turns the wireless feature on or off but does not create a wireless connection. NOTE: To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must already be set up.

*This table describes factory settings. For information about changing factory settings, refer to the user guides located in Help and Support. Identifying the hardware 3 Keys Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key. Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Function keys Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. Front components Component

(1) Speakers (2) Description Produce sound. 4 Chapter 1 Hardware features Component

(2) Battery light

(3) Drive light Right-side components Description On: A battery is charging. Blinking: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking: The hard drive or flash drive is being accessed. Component Description

(1) Digital Media Slot Supports the following optional digital card formats:

(2) Audio-out (headphone) jack/Audio-in (microphone) jack Memory Stick (MS) Memory Stick Pro (MS/Pro) MultiMediaCard (MMC) Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card xD-Picture card Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or television audio. Also connects an optional headset microphone. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. The audio component cable must have a 4-conductor connector.

(3) USB ports (2) Connect optional USB devices. Identifying the hardware 5 Component

(4)

(5) External monitor port RJ-45 (network) jack Description Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. Connects a network cable. Left-side components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. Power connector Connects an AC adapter. Vent USB port HDMI port Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connects an optional USB device. Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, or any compatible digital or audio component. NOTE: Depending on your computer model, the computer may include an HDMI port or a USB port at this location. 6 Chapter 1 Hardware features Display components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Internal display switch Webcam light Webcam Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. On: The webcam is in use. Captures still photographs and videos. NOTE: To capture videos, you must install additional webcam software. Internal microphone Records sound. Identifying the hardware 7 Bottom components Component Description Battery release latches (2) Release the battery from the battery bay.

(1)

(2)

(3) Battery bay Vents (4)

(4) Hard drive bay 8 Chapter 1 Hardware features Holds the battery. Enable airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Contains the hard drive, the wireless LAN module slot, and the memory module slot. CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system, replace the wireless module only with a wireless module authorized for use in the computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country or region. If you replace the module and then receive a warning message, remove the module to restore computer functionality, and then contact technical support through Help and Support. Wireless antennas Component Description

(1)

(2) WLAN antennas (2)*

WWAN antennas (2) (select models only)*

Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs). Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide-area networks (WWANs).

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. To see wireless regulatory notices, refer to the section of the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. These notices are located in Help and Support. Identifying the hardware 9 Additional hardware components Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Power cord*

Battery*

AC adapter Description Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Powers the computer when the computer is not plugged into external power. Converts AC power to DC power.

*Batteries and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. Identifying the labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service tagProvides important information including the following:

Product name (1). This is the product name affixed to the front of your computer. Serial number (s/n) (2). This is an alphanumeric identifier that is unique to each product. Part Number/Product number (p/n) (3). This number provides specific information about the hardware components of the product. The part number helps a service technician to determine what components and parts are needed. 10 Chapter 1 Hardware features Model description (4). This is the alphanumeric identifier you use to locate documents, drivers, and support for your computer. Warranty period (5). This number describes the duration (in years) of the warranty period for this computer. Have this information available when you contact technical support. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Microsoft Certificate of AuthenticityContains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer, including the following:

Information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The serial number of your HP Mobile Broadband Module. The regulatory label is affixed inside the battery bay. Identifying the labels 11 12 Chapter 1 Hardware features 2 Wireless and local area network Using wireless devices Wireless technology transfers data across radio waves instead of wires. Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

Wireless local area network (WLAN) deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, each mobile wireless device communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband ModuleA wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that provides access to information wherever mobile network operator service is available. In a WWAN, each mobile device communicates to a mobile network operators base station. Mobile network operators install networks of base stations (similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close together typically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. Computers with WLAN devices support one or more of the following IEEE industry standards:

802.11b, the first popular standard, supports data rates of up to 11 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. 802.11g supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. An 802.11g WLAN device is backward compatible with 802.11b devices, so they can operate on the same network. 802.11a supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 5 GHz. NOTE: 802.11a is not compatible with 802.11b and 802.11g. 802.11n supports data rates of up to 450 Mbps and may operate at 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz, making it backward compatible with 802.11a, b, and g. For more information on wireless technology, refer to the information and Web site links provided in Help and Support. Identifying wireless and network status icons Icon Name Description Using wireless devices 13 Wireless (connected) Wireless (disconnected) HP Connection Manager Wired network (connected) Wired network (disabled/disconnected) Network (disabled/disconnected) Network (connected) Network (disconnected) Identifies the location of the wireless light and the wireless function key on the computer. Also identifies the Wireless Assistant software on the computer and indicates that one or more of the wireless devices are on. Identifies the Wireless Assistant software on the computer and indicates that all of the wireless devices are off. Opens HP Connection Manager, which enables you to create a connection with an HP Mobile Broadband device (select models only). Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed and one or more network devices are connected to the network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed, all network devices or all wireless devices are disabled in Windows Control Panel, and no network devices are connected to a wired network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed, no wireless connections are available or all wireless network devices are disabled by the wireless button or Wireless Assistant, and no network devices are connected to a wired network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed, one or more network devices are connected to a wireless network, and one or more network devices are connected to a wired network. Indicates that one or more of your network drivers are installed and wireless connections are available, but no network devices are connected to a wired or wireless network. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using these features:

Wireless button or wireless switch Wireless Assistant software (select models only) HP Connection Manager software (select models only) Operating system controls Using the wireless button The computer has a wireless button, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights, depending on the model. All of the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory, so the wireless light is on (blue) when you turn on the computer. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. If the wireless light is blue, at least one wireless device is on. If the wireless light is off, all wireless devices are off. 14 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. Because the wireless devices are enabled at the factory, you can use the wireless button to turn on or turn off the wireless devices simultaneously. Individual wireless devices can be controlled through Wireless Assistant software (select models only). Using Wireless Assistant software (select models only) A wireless device can be turned on or off using the Wireless Assistant software. If a wireless device is disabled in Setup Utility, it must be reenabled in Setup Utility before it can be turned on or off using Wireless Assistant. NOTE: Enabling or turning on a wireless device does not automatically connect the computer to a network or a Bluetooth-enabled device. To view the state of the wireless devices, click the Show hidden icons icon, the arrow at the left of the notification area, and position the mouse pointer over the wireless icon. If the wireless icon is not displayed in the notification area, complete the following steps to change Wireless Assistant properties:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Windows Mobility Center. 2. Click the wireless icon in the Wireless Assistant tile, which is located in the bottom row of Windows Mobility Center. 3. Click Properties. 4. Select the check box next to HP Wireless Assistant icon in notification area. 5. Click Apply. 6. Click Close. For more information, refer to the Wireless Assistant software Help:

1. Open Wireless Assistant by clicking the wireless icon in Windows Mobility Center. 2. Click the Help button. Using HP Connection Manager (select models only) You can use HP Connection Manager to connect to WWANs using the HP Mobile Broadband device in your computer (select models only). To start Connection Manager, click the Connection Manager icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. or Select Start > All Programs > HP Connection Manager > HP Connection Manager. For more details about using Connection Manager, refer to the Connection Manager software Help. Using operating system controls Some operating systems also offer a way to manage integrated wireless devices and the wireless connection. For example, Windows provides the Network and Sharing Center that allows you to set up Using wireless devices 15 a connection or network, connect to a network, manage wireless networks, and diagnose and repair network problems. To access the Network and Sharing Center, select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet >

Network and Sharing Center. For more information, select Start > Help and Support. 16 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Using a WLAN With a WLAN device, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other devices and accessories that are linked by a wireless router or a wireless access point. NOTE: The terms wireless router and wireless access point are often used interchangeably. A large-scale WLAN, such as a corporate or public WLAN, typically uses wireless access points that can accommodate a large number of devices and accessories and can separate critical network functions. A home or small office WLAN typically uses a wireless router, which allows several wireless and wired computers to share an Internet connection, a printer, and files without requiring additional pieces of hardware or software. To use the WLAN device in your computer, you must connect to a WLAN infrastructure (provided through a service provider or a public or corporate network). Setting up a WLAN To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet, you need the following equipment:

A broadband modem (either DSL or cable) (1) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider (ISP) A wireless router (purchased separately) (2) The computer, equipped with a wireless device (3) The illustration below shows an example of a wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet. As your network grows, additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to the network to access the Internet. For help in setting up your WLAN, refer to the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. Protecting your WLAN Because the WLAN standard was designed with only limited security capabilitiesbasically to foil casual eavesdropping rather than more powerful forms of attackit is essential to understand that WLANs are vulnerable to well-known and well-documented security weaknesses. WLANs in public areas, or hotspots, like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. New technologies are being developed by wireless manufacturers and hotspot service providers that make the public environment more secure and anonymous. If you are concerned about the security of your computer in a hotspot, limit your network activities to noncritical e-mail and basic Internet surfing. Using a WLAN 17 When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. The common security levels are Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)-

Personal and Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). Because wireless radio signals travel outside the network, other WLAN devices can pick up unprotected signals and either connect to your network

(uninvited) or capture information being sent across it. However, you can take precautions to protect your WLAN:

Use a wireless transmitter with built-in security. Many wireless base stations, gateways, or routers provide built-in security features such as wireless security protocols and firewalls. With the correct wireless transmitter, you can protect your network from the most common wireless security risks. Work behind a firewall. A firewall is a barrier that checks both data and requests for data that are sent to your network, and discards any suspicious items. Firewalls are available in many varieties, both software and hardware. Some networks use a combination of both types. Use wireless encryption. A variety of sophisticated encryption protocols is available for your WLAN. Find the solution that works best for your network security:

Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). is a wireless security protocol that encodes or encrypts all network data before it is transmitted using a WEP key. Usually, you can allow the network to assign the WEP key. Alternatively, you can set up your own key, generate a different key, or choose other advanced options. Without the correct key, others are not able to use the WLAN. WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access)., like WEP, uses security settings to encrypt and decrypt data that is transmitted over the network. However, instead of using one static security key for encryptions as WEP does, WPA uses temporal key integrity protocol (TKIP) to dynamically generate a new key for every packet. It also generates different sets of keys for each computer on the network. Connecting to a WLAN To connect to the WLAN, follow these steps:

1. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. If it is on, the wireless light is blue. If the wireless light is amber, press the wireless button. 2. Click the network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 3. Select your WLAN from the list. 4. Click Connect. If the network is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a network security key, which is a security code. Type the code, and then click OK to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you are out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE:

If you do not see the network you want to connect to, click Open Network and Sharing Center, and then click Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed. You can choose to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. 18 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network After the connection is made, place the mouse pointer over the network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. More information about using a WLAN is available through the following resources:

Information from your ISP and the manufacturer's instructions included with your wireless router and other WLAN equipment Information and Web site links provided in Help and Support For a list of public WLANs near you, contact your ISP or search the Web. Web sites that list public WLANs include Cisco Internet Mobile Office Wireless Locations, Hotspotlist, and Geektools. Check with each public WLAN location for cost and connection requirements. Roaming to another network When you move your computer within range of another WLAN, Windows attempts to connect to that network. If the attempt is successful, your computer is automatically connected to the new network. If Windows does not recognize the new network, follow the same procedure you used initially to connect to your WLAN. Using a WLAN 19 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) HP Mobile Broadband enables your computer to use wireless wide area networks (WWANs) to access the Internet from more places and over larger areas than it can by using WLANs. Using HP Mobile Broadband requires a network service provider (called a mobile network operator), which in most cases is a mobile phone network operator. Coverage for HP Mobile Broadband is similar to mobile phone voice coverage. When used with mobile network operator service, HP Mobile Broadband gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road or outside the range of Wi-Fi hotspots. HP Mobile Broadband supports the following technologies:

HSPA (High Speed Packet Access), which provides access to networks based on the Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) telecommunications standard. EV-DO (Evolution Data Optimized), which provides access to networks based on the code division multiple access (CDMA) telecommunications standard. You may need the HP Mobile Broadband Module serial number to activate mobile broadband service. The serial number is printed on a label inside the battery bay of your computer. Some mobile network operators require the use of a subscriber identity module (SIM). A SIM contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM that is preinstalled in the battery bay. If the SIM is not preinstalled, it may be included with the HP Mobile Broadband information provided with your computer, or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information on inserting and removing the SIM, refer to the Inserting a SIM and Removing a SIM sections in this chapter. For information on HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, refer to the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. For additional information, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/mobilebroadband (US only). Inserting a SIM To insert a SIM:

1. Shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. 2. Close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 6. Remove the battery. 20 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network CAUTION: When inserting a SIM, position the card with the slanted corner as shown in the illustration. If a SIM is inserted backwards or upside down, the battery may not snap into place properly and could damage the SIM and the SIM connector. To prevent damage to the connectors, use minimal force when inserting a SIM. 7. Insert the SIM into the SIM slot, and gently push the SIM into the slot until it is firmly seated. 8. Replace the battery. NOTE: HP Mobile Broadband is disabled if the battery is not replaced. 9. Reconnect external power. 10. Reconnect external devices. 11. Turn on the computer. Removing a SIM To remove a SIM:

1. Shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. 2. Close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 6. Remove the battery. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) 21 7. Press in on the SIM (1), and then remove it from the slot (2). 8. Replace the battery. 9. Reconnect external power. 10. Reconnect external devices. 11. Turn on the computer. 22 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Using Bluetooth wireless devices A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Computers (desktop, notebook, PDA) Phones (cellular, cordless, smart phone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Bluetooth devices provide peer-to-peer capability that allows you to set up a personal area network

(PAN) of Bluetooth devices. For information on configuring and using Bluetooth devices, refer to the Bluetooth software Help. Bluetooth and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) HP does not recommend setting up one computer with Bluetooth as a host and using it as a gateway through which other computers may connect to the Internet. When two or more computers are connected using Bluetooth, and Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) is enabled on one of the computers, the other computers may not be able to connect to the Internet using the Bluetooth network. The strength of Bluetooth is in synchronizing information transfers between your computer and wireless devices including cellular phones, printers, cameras, and PDAs. The inability to consistently connect two or more computers to share the Internet through Bluetooth is a limitation of Bluetooth and the Windows operating system. Using Bluetooth wireless devices 23 Troubleshooting wireless connection problems Some possible causes for wireless connection problems include the following:

Network configuration (SSID or security) has been changed. Wireless device is not installed correctly or has been disabled. Wireless device or router hardware has failed. Wireless device encountered interference from other devices. NOTE: Wireless networking devices are included with select computer models only. If wireless networking is not listed in the feature list on the side of the original computer package, you may add wireless networking capability to the computer by purchasing a wireless networking device. Before working your way through the sequence of possible solutions to your network connection problem, be sure that device drivers are installed for all wireless devices. Use the procedures in this chapter to diagnose and repair a computer that does not connect to the network you want to use. Cannot connect to a WLAN If you have a problem connecting to a WLAN, confirm that the integrated WLAN device is properly installed on your computer:

NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. 1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security. In the System area, click Device Manager. 3. Click the arrow next to Network adapters to expand the list and show all adapters. 4. Identify the WLAN device from the Network adapters list. The listing for a WLAN device may include the terms wireless, wireless LAN, WLAN, Wi-Fi, or 802.11. If no WLAN device is listed, either your computer does not have an integrated WLAN device, or the driver of the WLAN device is not properly installed. For more information on troubleshooting WLANs, refer to the Web site links provided in Help and Support. 24 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Cannot connect to a preferred WLAN network Windows can automatically repair a corrupted WLAN connection:

If there is a network icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, right-click the icon, and then click Troubleshoot problems. Windows resets your network device and attempts to reconnect to one of the preferred networks. If there is no network icon in the notification area, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 2. Click Troubleshoot problems and select the network you wish to repair. Network icon for WLAN is not displayed If the network icon is not displayed in the notification area after you configure the WLAN, the software driver is either missing or corrupted. A Windows Device not Found error message may also be displayed. The driver must be reinstalled. Get the latest version of the WLAN computer software and drivers for your computer from the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com. NOTE:

site for the latest software. If the WLAN device you are using was purchased separately, consult the manufacturer's Web To get the latest version of the WLAN computer software for your computer, follow these steps:

1. Open your Internet browser and go to http://www.hp.com/support. 2. Select your country or region. 3. Click the option for software and driver downloads, and then type your computer model number in the search box. 4. Press enter, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Current WLAN network security codes are unavailable If you are prompted for a network key or a name (SSID) when connecting to a WLAN, the network is protected by security. You must have the current codes to make a connection on a secure network. The SSID and network key are alphanumeric codes that identify your computer to the network. For a network connected to your personal wireless router, review the router user guide for instructions on setting up the same codes on both the router and the WLAN device. For a private network, such as a network in an office or at a public Internet chat room, contact the network administrator to obtain the codes, and then enter the codes when prompted to do so. Some networks change the SSID or network keys used in their routers or access points on a regular basis to improve security. You must change the corresponding code in your computer accordingly. Troubleshooting wireless connection problems 25 If you are provided with new wireless network keys and SSID for a network, and if you have previously connected to that network, follow the steps below to connect to the network:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 2. Click Manage wireless networks in the left panel. A list showing the available WLANs is displayed. If you are in a hotspot where several WLANs are active, several are displayed. 3. Select the network in the list, right-click the network, and then click Properties. NOTE:

the router or access point is operating. If the network you want is not listed, check with the network administrator to be sure that 4. Click the Security tab and enter the correct wireless encryption data into the Network security key box. 5. Click OK to save these settings. WLAN connection is very weak If the connection is very weak, or if your computer cannot make a connection to a WLAN, minimize interference from other devices, as follows:

Move your computer closer to the wireless router or access point. Temporarily disconnect devices such as a microwave, cordless phone, or cellular phone to be sure that other devices are not interfering. If the connection does not improve, try forcing the device to reestablish all connection values:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 2. Click Manage wireless networks in the left panel. A list showing the available WLANs is displayed. If you are in a hotspot where several WLANs are active, several are displayed. 3. Click a network, and then click Remove. Cannot connect to the wireless router If you are trying to connect to the wireless router and are unsuccessful, reset the wireless router by removing power from the router for 10 to 15 seconds. If the computer still cannot make a connection to a WLAN, restart the wireless router. For details, refer to the router manufacturer's instructions. 26 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network Connecting to a local area network (LAN) Connecting to a local area network (LAN) requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 network cable (purchased separately). If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (1), which prevents interference from TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable (2) toward the computer. To connect the network cable:

WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a modem cable or telephone cable into an RJ-45 (network) jack. 1. 2. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. Plug the other end of the cable into a network wall jack (2). Connecting to a local area network (LAN) 27 28 Chapter 2 Wireless and local area network 3 Multimedia Multimedia features Your computer includes multimedia features that allow you to listen to music, watch movies, and view pictures. Your computer may include the following multimedia components:

Integrated speakers for listening to music Integrated microphone for recording your own audio Integrated webcam that allows you to capture photographs and videos Preinstalled multimedia software that allows you to play and manage your music, movies, and pictures NOTE: Your computer may not include all of the components listed. The following sections explain how to identify and use the multimedia components included with your computer. Identifying your multimedia components The following illustration and table describe the multimedia features of the computer. Multimedia features 29 Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Webcam light Webcam Description On: The webcam is in use. Captures still photographs and videos. NOTE: To capture videos, you must install additional webcam software. Internal microphone Records sound. Audio-out (headphone) jack/Audio-in

(microphone) jack Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or television audio. Also connects an optional headset microphone. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. The audio component must have a 4-conductor connector. Speakers (2) Produce sound. Volume mute hotkey Mutes speaker sound when pressed in combination with the fn key. 30 Chapter 3 Multimedia Component

(7)

(8) Volume down hotkey Volume up hotkey Description Decreases speaker sound when pressed in combination with the fn key. Increases speaker sound when pressed in combination with the fn key. Adjusting the volume You can adjust the volume using the following controls:

computer volume hotkeyA combination of the fn key (1) and either the f8 (2), f10 (3), or f11 (4) function key:

To mute or restore volume, press fn+f8. To decrease volume, press fn+f10. To increase volume, press fn+f11. Windows volume control:

a. Click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. b. Increase or decrease the volume by moving the slider up or down. Click the Mute Speakers icon to mute the volume. or a. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, and then click Open Volume Mixer. b. In the Volume Control column, you can increase or decrease the volume by moving the slider up or down. You can also mute the volume by clicking the Mute Speakers icon. Multimedia features 31 If the Speakers icon is not displayed in the notification area, follow these steps to add it:

a. Right-click the Show hidden icons icon (the arrow at the left side of the notification area. b. Click Customize notification icons. c. Under Behaviors, select Show icon and notifications for the Volume icon. d. Click OK. Program volume control:

Volume can also be adjusted within some programs. Multimedia software Your computer includes preinstalled multimedia software that allows you to play music, watch movies, and view pictures. Using preinstalled multimedia software To locate other preinstalled multimedia software:

Select Start > All Programs, and then open the multimedia program you want to use. For example, if you want to use Windows Media Player (select models only), click Windows Media Player. NOTE: Some programs may be located in subfolders. Installing multimedia software from the Internet

To install multimedia software from the Internet, go to the software manufacturers Web site and follow the instructions. NOTE: Software downloaded from the Internet may contain viruses. Refer to the Security chapter for more information. 32 Chapter 3 Multimedia Audio Your computer has a variety of audio features that allow you to:

Play music using your computer speakers and/or connected external speakers. Record sound using the internal microphone or an optional external headset microphone. Download music from the Internet. Create multimedia presentations using audio and images. Transmit sound and images with instant messaging programs. Connecting external audio devices WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To connect external devices such as external speakers, headphones, or a headset microphone, refer to the information provided with the device. For best results, remember the following tips:

Be sure that the device cable has a 4-conductor connector that supports both audio-out

(headphone) and audio-in (microphone). Be sure that the device cable is securely connected to the correct jack on your computer. (Cable connectors are normally color-coded to match the corresponding jacks on the computer.) Be sure to install any drivers required by the external device. NOTE: A driver is a required program that acts like a translator between the device and the programs that use the device. Checking your audio functions To check the system sound on your computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Control Panel. 2. Click Hardware and Sound. 3. Click Sound. 4. When the Sound and Audio Device Properties window opens, click the Sounds tab. Under Program Events, select any sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and click the arrow button to check the sound. You should hear sound through the speakers or through connected headphones. To check the record functions of the computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Sound Recorder. 2. Click Start Recording and speak into the microphone. Save the file to your desktop. 3. Open a multimedia program and play back the sound. Audio 33 NOTE: For best results when recording, speak directly into the microphone and record sound in a setting free of background noise. To confirm or change the audio settings on your computer, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Sound. 34 Chapter 3 Multimedia Video Your computer enables you to use a variety of video features:

Watch movies Play games over the Internet Edit pictures and video to create presentations Connect external video devices Connecting an external monitor or projector Use a VGA cable (purchased separately) to connect an external display, such as a monitor or projector, to the external monitor port on the computer. To connect an external monitor or projector:

1. Connect the optional VGA cable to the external monitor port on the computer. 2. Connect the external monitor or projector to the other end of the cable. If a properly connected external monitor or projector does not display a screen image, press NOTE:

fn+f2 to transfer the image to the external display. Repeatedly pressing fn+f2 alternates the screen image between the external display and the computer. Connecting an HDMI device The computer includes an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) port. The HDMI port connects the computer to an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, or any compatible digital or audio component. NOTE: To transmit video signals through the HDMI port, you need an HDMI cable (purchased separately). The computer can support one HDMI device connected to the HDMI port, while simultaneously supporting an image on the computer display or any other supported external display. Video 35 To connect a video or audio device to the HDMI port:

1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the video device, according to the device manufacturers instructions. 3. Press fn+f2 on the computer to switch the image between the display devices connected to the computer. Configuring audio for HDMI (select models only) To configure HDMI audio, first connect an audio or video device, such as a high-definition TV, to the HDMI port on your computer. Then configure the default audio playback device as follows:

1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click either Digital Output or Digital Output Device (HDMI). 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. To return audio to the computer speakers, follow these steps:

1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click Speakers. 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. 36 Chapter 3 Multimedia Webcam Your computer includes an integrated webcam, located at the top of the display. The webcam is an input device that allows you to capture and share video. To acccess the webcam:

1. Select Start > All programs > ArcSoft WebCam Companion 3 > WebCam Companion 3. 2. Click Capture > Take pictures. NOTE: The picture is automatically saved in the My Documents folder. Webcam 37 38 Chapter 3 Multimedia 4 Drives and external devices 39 Drives Identifying installed drives Your computer includes a hard drive (with a rotating disc) or a solid state-drive (SSD) with solid-state memory. Because an SSD has no moving parts, it does not generate as much heat as a hard drive. To view the drives installed on the computer, select Start > Computer. Handling drives Drives are fragile computer components that must be handled with care. Refer to the following cautions before handling drives. Additional cautions are included with the procedures to which they apply. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

Before you move a computer that is connected to an external hard drive, initiate Sleep and allow the screen to clear, or properly disconnect the external hard drive. Before handling a drive, discharge static electricity by touching the unpainted metal surface of the drive. Do not touch the connector pins on a removable drive or on the computer. Handle a drive carefully; do not drop a drive or place items on it. Before removing or inserting a drive, shut down the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off, in the Sleep state, or in Hibernation, turn the computer on and then shut it down through the operating system. Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive into a drive bay. Do not type on the keyboard or move the computer while the optical drive (select models only) is writing to a disc. The write process is sensitive to vibration. When the battery is the only source of power, be sure that the battery is sufficiently charged before writing to media. Avoid exposing a drive to temperature or humidity extremes. Avoid exposing a drive to liquids. Do not spray the drive with cleaning products. Remove media from a drive before removing the drive from the drive bay, or traveling with, shipping, or storing a drive. If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-

through devices and security wands. The airport security devices that check carry-on luggage, such as conveyor belts, use X-rays instead of magnetism and will not damage a drive. 40 Chapter 4 Drives and external devices Improving hard drive performance Using Disk Defragmenter As you use the computer, files on the hard drive become fragmented. Disk Defragmenter consolidates the fragmented files and folders on the hard drive so that the system can run more efficiently. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Defragmenter. 2. Click Defragment now. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing applications, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support for more information. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Disk Cleanup searches the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer to run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. 2. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Cleanup. Follow the on-screen instructions. Replacing the hard drive in the hard drive bay CAUTION: To prevent information loss or an unresponsive system:

Shut down the computer before removing the hard drive from the hard drive bay. Do not remove the hard drive while the computer is on, in the Sleep state, or in Hibernation. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. To remove the hard drive:

1. 2. Save your work. Shut down the computer and close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. 6. Remove the battery from the computer. 7. With the hard drive bay toward you, loosen the 2 hard drive cover screws (1). Drives 41 8. Lift the hard drive cover away from the computer (2). 9. Disconnect the hard drive cable (1) that secures the hard drive to the computer. 10. Pull the hard drive tab (2) up and lift the hard drive (3) out of the hard drive bay. To install a hard drive:

1. Grasp the hard drive tab (1) and insert the hard drive (2) into the hard drive bay, until the rubber stops slide into place. 42 Chapter 4 Drives and external devices 2. Reconnect the hard drive cable (3). 3. 4. Align the tabs on the hard drive cover with the notches on the computer, and then close the cover

(1). Tighten the 2 hard drive cover screws (2). Using external drives Removable external drives expand your options for storing and accessing information. USB drives include the following types:

1.44-megabyte diskette drive Hard drive module (a hard drive with an adapter attached) DVD-ROM Drive DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive DVDRW and CD-RW Combo Drive Drives 43 DVDRW and CD-RW SuperMulti Double-Layer Combo Drive DVDRW and CD-RW SuperMulti Double-Layer Combo Drive with LightScribe Blu-ray ROM DVDR/RW SuperMulti DL Drive Blu-ray ROM with LightScribe DVDR/RW SuperMulti DL Drive HD DVD drive NOTE: For more information about required software and drivers, or to learn which computer port to use, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. To connect an external drive to the computer:

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the equipment when connecting a powered drive, be sure that the AC power cord is unplugged. 1. Connect the drive to the computer. 2. If you are connecting a powered drive, plug the drive power cord into a grounded AC outlet. To disconnect a powered drive, disconnect it from the computer, and then unplug the AC power cord. Connecting optional external drives NOTE: For more information about required software and drivers, or to learn which computer port to use, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. To connect an external drive to the computer:

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the equipment when connecting a powered drive, be sure that the drive is turned off and the AC power cord is unplugged. 1. Connect the drive to the computer. 2. 3. If you are connecting a powered drive, plug the drive power cord into a grounded AC outlet. Turn on the drive. To disconnect an unpowered external drive, turn off the drive, and then disconnect it from the computer. To disconnect a powered external drive, turn off the drive, disconnect it from the computer, and then unplug the AC power cord. Sharing optical drives Although your computer does not have an installed optical drive, you can easily access software, as well as install applications and access data, by sharing an optical drive from another computer that has an optical drive and is on the same wired or wireless network. Sharing drives is a feature of the Windows operating system that allows a drive on another computer to be made available for other people to use on a network. NOTE: For information on setting up a home network and sharing a drive, refer to Help and Support. NOTE: Some discs, such as DVD movies and game discs, may be copy-protected and therefore unusable through DVD or CD sharing. 44 Chapter 4 Drives and external devices External devices Using a USB device Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a hardware interface that can be used to connect an optional external device, such as a USB keyboard, mouse, drive, printer, scanner, or hub. Devices can be connected to the system, an optional docking device, or an optional expansion product. Some USB devices may require additional support software, which is usually included with the device. For more information about device-specific software, refer to the manufacturer's instructions. The computer has 3 or 4 USB ports, which support USB 1.0, USB 1.1, and USB 2.0 devices. An optional USB hub, optional docking device, or an optional expansion product provides additional USB ports that can be used with the computer. Connecting a USB device CAUTION: To prevent damage to a USB connector, use minimal force to connect a USB device.

To connect a USB device to the computer, connect the USB cable for the device to the USB port. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected. NOTE: When you connect a USB device, you may see a message in the notification area to let you know that the device is recognized by the system. Removing a USB device CAUTION: To prevent loss of information or an unresponsive system, use the following procedure to safely remove the USB device. CAUTION: To prevent damage to a USB connector, do not pull on the cable to remove the USB device. External devices 45 To remove a USB device:

1. Click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon, click the Show hidden icons icon (the arrow at the left of in the notification area. 2. Click the name of the device in the list. NOTE: You are informed that it is safe to remove the hardware device. 3. Remove the device. Using Digital Media Slot cards Optional digital cards provide secure data storage and convenient data sharing. These cards are often used with digital mediaequipped cameras and PDAs as well as with other computers. The Digital Media Slot supports the following digital card formats:

Memory Stick (MS) Memory Stick Pro (MS/Pro) MultiMediaCard (MMC) Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card Secure Digital High Capacity (SDHC) Memory Card xD-Picture Card (XD) xD-Picture Card (XD) Type H xD-Picture Card (XD) Type M Inserting a digital card CAUTION: To avoid damaging the digital card or the computer, do not insert any type of adapter into the Digital Media Slot. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the digital card connectors, use minimal force to insert a digital card. 1. Hold the digital card label-side up, with the connectors facing the computer. 46 Chapter 4 Drives and external devices 2. Insert the card into the Digital Media Slot, and then push in on the card until it is firmly seated. You will hear a sound when the device has been detected, and a menu of options may be displayed. Removing a digital card CAUTION: To prevent loss of data or an unresponsive system, use the following procedure to safely remove the digital card. 1. Save your information and close all programs associated with the digital card. NOTE: To stop a data transfer, click Cancel in the operating system Copying window. 2. To remove a digital card:

a. Click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: To display the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon, click the Show Hidden Icons icon (the arrow at the left of the notification area). b. Click the name of the digital card in the list. NOTE: You are informed that it is safe to remove the hardware device. c. Click Stop, and then click OK. 3. Press in on the digital card (1), and then remove the card from the slot (2). External devices 47 48 Chapter 4 Drives and external devices 5 Memory modules The computer has one memory module slot, which is located inside the hard drive bay. The memory capacity of the computer can be upgraded by replacing the existing memory module. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock and damage to the equipment, unplug the power cord and remove all batteries before installing a memory module. CAUTION: Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage electronic components. Before beginning any procedure, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. To replace a memory module:

1. 2. Save your work. Shut down the computer and close the display. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. 6. Remove the battery from the computer. 7. Using a small Phillips screwdriver, loosen the 2 hard drive cover screws (1). 49 8. Lift the hard drive cover (2) away from the computer. 9. Remove the existing memory module:

a. Pull away the retention clips (1) on each side of the memory module. The memory module tilts up. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module. b. Grasp the edge of the memory module (2), and gently pull the module out of the memory module slot. To protect a memory module after removal, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 10. Insert a new memory module:

50 Chapter 5 Memory modules CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module, and do not bend the memory module. a. Align the notched edge (1) of the memory module with the tab in the memory module slot. b. With the memory module at a 45-degree angle from the surface of the hard drive bay, press the module (2) into the memory module slot until it is seated. c. Gently press the memory module (3) down, applying pressure to both the left and right edges of the memory module, until the retention clips snap into place. 11. Align the tabs on the hard drive cover with the notches on the computer (1), and then close the cover (2). 12. Tighten the 2 hard drive cover screws (3). 51 13. Replace the battery. 14. Turn the computer right-side up, and then reconnect external power and external devices. 15. Turn on the computer. 52 Chapter 5 Memory modules 6 Pointing devices and keyboard Setting pointing device preferences To access Mouse Properties, select Start > Devices and Printers. Then, right-click the device representing your computer, and select Mouse Use Mouse Properties in Windows to customize settings for pointing devices, such as button configuration, click speed, and pointer options. Using pointing devices Using the TouchPad To move the pointer, slide your finger across the TouchPad surface in the direction you want the pointer to go. Use the TouchPad buttons like the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To scroll up and down using the TouchPad vertical scroll zone, slide your finger up or down over the lines. NOTE:

If you are using the TouchPad to move the pointer, you must lift your finger off the TouchPad before moving it to the scroll zone. Simply sliding your finger from the TouchPad to the scroll zone will not activate the scrolling function. Connecting an external mouse You can connect an external USB mouse to the computer using one of the USB ports on the computer. Using the keyboard Using hotkeys Hotkeys are combinations of the fn key (1) and one of the function keys (2). The icons on the f1 through f4, and f6, f8, f10, and f11 keys represent the hotkey functions. Hotkey functions and procedures are discussed in the following sections. Setting pointing device preferences 53 Function Initiate Sleep. Switch the image. Decrease screen brightness. Increase screen brightness. Initiate QuickLock. Mute or restore speaker sound. Decrease device volume. Increase device volume. Hotkey fn+f1 fn+f2 fn+f3 fn+f4 fn+f6 fn+f8 fn+f10 fn+f11 To use a hotkey command on the device keyboard, follow either of these steps:

Briefly press the fn key, and then briefly press the second key of the hotkey command. or Press and hold down the fn key, briefly press the second key of the hotkey command, and then release both keys at the same time. Initiating Sleep CAUTION: To reduce the risk of information loss, save your work before initiating Sleep. Press fn+f1 to initiate Sleep. When Sleep is initiated, your information is stored in memory, the screen is cleared, and power is conserved. While the device is in the Sleep state, the power light blinks. 54 Chapter 6 Pointing devices and keyboard The device must be on before you can initiate Sleep. If a critical battery level occurs while the device is in the Sleep state, the device initiates CAUTION:

Hibernation and the information stored in memory is saved to the hard drive. The factory setting for critical battery action is Hibernate, but this setting can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. To exit Sleep, briefly press the power button. The function of the fn+f1 hotkey can be changed. For example, you can set the fn+f1 hotkey to initiate Hibernation instead of Sleep. NOTE:

hotkey. In all Windows operating system windows, references to the sleep button apply to the fn+f1 Switching the screen image Press fn+f2 to switch the screen image among display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, pressing fn+f2 alternates the screen image from computer display to monitor display to simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. NOTE: You must use a VGA cable (purchased separately) to connect an external display, such as a monitor or projector, to the external monitor port on the computer. Most external monitors receive video information from the computer using the external VGA video standard. The fn+f2 hotkey can also alternate images among other devices receiving video information from the computer. The following video transmission types, with examples of devices that use them, are supported by the fn+f2 hotkey:

LCD (computer display) External VGA (most external monitors) HDMI (televisions, camcorders, DVD players, VCRs, and video capture cards with HDMI ports) Decreasing screen brightness Press fn+f3 to decrease screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to decrease the brightness level incrementally. Increasing screen brightness Press fn+f4 to increase screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to increase the brightness level incrementally. Initiating QuickLock Press fn+f6 to initiate the QuickLock security feature. QuickLock protects your information by displaying the operating system Log On window. While the Log On window is displayed, the computer cannot be accessed until a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password is entered. NOTE: Before you can use QuickLock, you must set a Windows user password or a Windows administrator password. For instructions, refer to Help and Support. Using the keyboard 55 To use QuickLock, press fn+f6 to display the Log On window and lock the computer. Then follow the instructions on the screen to enter your Windows user password or your Windows administrator password and access the computer. Muting speaker sound Press fn+f8 to mute speaker sound. Press the hotkey again to restore speaker sound. Decreasing speaker volume Press fn+f10 to decrease speaker sound. Hold down the hotkey to decrease speaker sound incrementally. Increasing speaker volume Press fn+f11 to increase speaker sound. Hold down the hotkey to increase speaker sound incrementally. 56 Chapter 6 Pointing devices and keyboard 7 Power management Setting power options Using power-saving states The computer has two power-saving states enabled at the factory: Sleep and Hibernation. When Sleep is initiated, the power lights blink and the screen clears. Your work is saved to memory, letting you exit Sleep faster than exiting Hibernation. If the computer is in the Sleep state for an extended period or if the battery reaches a critical battery level while in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. When Hibernation is initiated, your work is saved to a hibernation file on the hard drive and the computer turns off. CAUTION: To prevent possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep or Hibernation while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. NOTE: You cannot initiate any type of networking connection or perform any computer functions while the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation. Initiating and exiting Sleep The system is set at the factory to initiate Sleep after 15 minutes of inactivity when running on battery power and 30 minutes of inactivity when running on external power. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. With the computer on, you can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Press fn+f1. Briefly press the power button. Close the display. Click Start, click the arrow next to the Shut down button, and then click Sleep. You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly press the power button. If the display is closed, open the display. Setting power options 57 Press a key on the keyboard or button on the remote control (select models only). Activate the TouchPad. When the computer exits Sleep, the power light turns on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:

before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows password Initiating and exiting Hibernation The system is set at the factory to initiate Hibernation after 1,080 minutes (18 hours) of inactivity when running on both battery power and external power, or when the battery reaches a critical battery level. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. To initiate Hibernation:

Click Start, click the arrow next to the Shut down button, and then click Hibernate. To exit Hibernation:

Briefly press the power button. The power light turns on and your work returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:

before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows password Using the battery meter The battery meter is located in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. The battery meter allows you to quickly access power settings, view remaining battery charge, and select a different power plan. To display the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, move the pointer over the battery meter icon. To access Power Options, or to change the power plan, click the battery meter icon and select an item from the list. Different battery meter icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. The icon also displays a message if the battery has reached a low battery level, critical battery level, or reserve battery level. To hide or display the battery meter icon:

1. Right-click the Show hidden icons icon (the arrow at the left side of the notification area). 2. Click Customize notification icons. 3. Under Behaviors, select Show icons and notifications for the Power icon. 4. Click OK. 58 Chapter 7 Power management Using power plans A power plan is a collection of system settings that manages how the computer uses power. Power plans can help you conserve power or maximize performance. You can change power plan settings or create your own power plan. Viewing the current power plan

Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. Selecting a different power plan

Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then select a power plan from the list. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options, and then select a power plan from the list. Customizing power plans 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. 2. Select a power plan, and then click Change plan settings. 3. Change the settings as needed. 4. To change additional settings, click Change advanced power settings and make your changes. Setting password protection on wakeup To set the computer to prompt for a password when the computer exits Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. In the left pane, click Require a password on wakeup. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. Click Require a password (recommended). 5. Click Save changes. Using external AC power External AC power is supplied through one of the following devices:

Using external AC power 59 WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. Approved AC adapter Optional docking device or expansion product Connect the computer to external AC power under any of the following conditions:

WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. When you are charging or calibrating a battery When you are installing or modifying system software When you are writing information to a CD or DVD When you connect the computer to external AC power, the following events occur:

The battery begins to charge. If the computer is turned on, the battery meter icon in the notification area changes appearance. When you disconnect external AC power, the following events occur:

The computer switches to battery power. The display brightness is automatically decreased to save battery life. To increase display brightness, press the fn+f4 hotkey or reconnect the AC adapter. Connecting the AC adapter WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. To connect the computer to external AC power:

1. 2. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector (1) on the computer. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter (2). 60 Chapter 7 Power management 3. Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet (3). Testing an AC adapter Test the AC adapter if the computer exhibits any of the following symptoms when it is connected to AC power:

The computer will not turn on. The display does not turn on. The power light is off. To test the AC adapter:

1. Remove the battery from the computer. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer, and then plug it into an AC outlet. 3. Turn on the computer. If the power light turns on, the AC adapter is working properly. Contact technical support for information on obtaining a replacement AC power adapter. Select Start

> Help and Support > Get assistance. Using battery power When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is plugged into external AC power, the computer runs on AC power. If the computer contains a charged battery and is running on external AC power supplied through the AC adapter, the computer switches to battery power if the AC adapter is disconnected from the computer. NOTE: The display brightness is decreased to save battery life when you disconnect AC power. To increase display brightness, use the fn+f4 hotkey or reconnect the AC adapter. You can keep a battery in the computer or in storage, depending on how you work. Keeping the battery in the computer whenever the computer is plugged into AC power charges the battery and also protects your work in case of a power outage. However, a battery in the computer slowly discharges when the computer is off and unplugged from external power. Using battery power 61 WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, display brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Finding battery information in Help and Support Help and Support provides the following tools and information about the battery:

Battery Check tool to test battery performance Information on calibration, power management, and proper care and storage to maximize battery life Information on battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity To access battery information:

Select Start > Help and Support > Learn > Power Plans: Frequently Asked Questions. Using Battery Check Help and Support provides information on the status of the battery installed in the computer. To run Battery Check:

1. Connect the AC adapter to the computer. NOTE: The computer must be connected to external power for Battery Check to function properly. 2. Select Start > Help and Support > Troubleshoot > Power, Thermal and Mechanical. 3. Click the Power tab, and then click Battery Check. Battery Check examines the battery and its cells to see if they are functioning properly, and then reports the results of the examination. Displaying the remaining battery charge

Move the pointer over the battery meter icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Inserting or removing the battery CAUTION: Removing a battery that is the sole power source may cause loss of information. To prevent loss of information, save your work and initiate Hibernation or shut down the computer through Windows before removing the battery. To insert the battery:

1. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. 62 Chapter 7 Power management 2. Align the tabs on the battery with the notches on the computer (1), and then insert the battery into the battery bay. The battery release latches (2) automatically lock the battery into place. To remove the battery:

1. 2. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. Slide the battery release latches (1) to release the battery, and then remove the battery (2). Charging a battery WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. The battery charges whenever the computer is plugged into external power through an AC adapter, an optional power adapter, or an optional expansion product. Using battery power 63 The battery charges whether the computer is off or in use, but it charges faster when the computer is off. Charging may take longer if a battery is new, has been unused for 2 weeks or more, or is much warmer or cooler than room temperature. To prolong battery life and optimize the accuracy of battery charge displays, follow these recommendations:

If you are charging a new battery, charge it fully before turning on the computer. Charge the battery until the battery light turns off. NOTE:

area may show 100 percent charge before the battery is fully charged. If the computer is on while the battery is charging, the battery meter in the notification Allow the battery to discharge below 5 percent of a full charge through normal use before charging it. If the battery has been unused for one month or more, calibrate the battery instead of simply charging it. The battery light displays charge status:

On: The battery is charging. Blinking: The battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: The battery is fully charged, in use, or not installed. Maximizing battery discharge time Battery discharge time varies depending on the features you use while on battery power. Maximum discharge time gradually shortens, as the battery storage capacity naturally degrades. Tips for maximizing battery discharge time:

Lower the brightness on the display. Check the Power saver setting in Power Options. Remove the battery from the computer when it is not being used or charged. Store the battery in a cool, dry location. Managing low battery levels The information in this section describes the alerts and system responses set at the factory. Some low-

battery alerts and system responses can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. Preferences set using Power Options do not affect lights. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low battery level, the battery light blinks. If a low battery level is not resolved, the computer enters a critical battery level, and the battery light begins blinking rapidly. 64 Chapter 7 Power management The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state, and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. Using battery power 65 Resolving a low battery level CAUTION: To reduce the risk of losing information when the computer reaches a critical battery level and has initiated Hibernation, do not restore power until the power lights turn off. Resolving a low battery level when external power is available

Connect one of the following devices:

AC adapter Optional expansion product or docking device Optional power adapter Resolving a low battery level when a charged battery is available 1. Turn off the computer or initiate Hibernation. 2. Remove the discharged battery, and then insert a charged battery. 3. Turn on the computer. Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available

Initiate Hibernation. or Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the computer lacks sufficient power to exit Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. 2. Insert a charged battery or plug the computer into external power. Exit Hibernation by briefly pressing the power button. Calibrating a battery Calibrate a battery under the following conditions:

When battery charge displays seem inaccurate When you observe a significant change in battery run time Even if a battery is heavily used, it should not need to be calibrated more than once a month. It is also not necessary to calibrate a new battery. Step 1: Fully charge the battery WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. NOTE: The battery charges whether the computer is off or in use, but it charges faster when the computer is off. 66 Chapter 7 Power management To fully charge the battery:

1. Insert the battery into the computer. 2. Connect the computer to an AC adapter, optional power adapter, optional expansion product, or optional docking device, and then plug the adapter or device into external power. The battery light on the computer turns on. 3. Leave the computer plugged into external power until the battery is fully charged. The battery light on the computer turns off. Step 2: Disable Hibernation and Sleep 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. 2. Under the current power plan, click Change plan settings. 3. Record the Turn off the display settings listed in the On battery column so that you can reset them after the calibration. 4. Change the Turn off the display settings to Never. 5. Click Change advanced power settings. 6. Click the plus sign next to Sleep, and then click the plus sign next to Hibernate after. 7. Record the On battery setting under Hibernate after so that you can reset it after the calibration. 8. Change the On battery setting to Never. 9. Click OK. 10. Click Save changes. Step 3: Discharge the battery The computer must remain on while the battery is being discharged. The battery can discharge whether or not you are using the computer, but the battery will discharge faster while you are using it. If you plan to leave the computer unattended during the discharge, save your information before beginning the discharge procedure. If you use the computer occasionally during the discharge procedure and have set energy-saving timeouts, expect the following performance from the system during the discharge process:

The monitor will not turn off automatically. Hard drive speed will not decrease automatically when the computer is idle. System-initiated Hibernation will not occur. Using battery power 67 To discharge a battery:

1. Unplug the computer from its external power source, but do not turn off the computer. 2. Run the computer on battery power until the battery is discharged. The battery light begins to blink when the battery has discharged to a low battery level. When the battery is discharged, the battery light turns off and the computer shuts down. 68 Chapter 7 Power management Step 4: Fully recharge the battery To recharge the battery:

1. 2. Plug the computer into external power and maintain external power until the battery is fully recharged. When the battery is recharged, the battery light on the computer turns off. You can use the computer while the battery is recharging, but the battery will charge faster if the computer is off. If the computer is off, turn it on when the battery is fully charged and the battery light has turned off. Step 5: Reenable Hibernation and Sleep CAUTION: Failure to reenable Hibernation after calibration may result in a full battery discharge and information loss if the computer reaches a critical battery level. 1. Click the battery meter icon in the notification area, and then click More power options. or Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. 2. Under the current power plan, click Change plan settings. 3. Reenter the settings that you recorded for the items in the On battery column. 4. Click Change advanced power settings. 5. Click the plus sign next to Sleep, and then click the plus sign next to Hibernate after. 6. Reenter the setting that you recorded for On battery. 7. Click OK. 8. Click Save changes. Conserving battery power Select the Power saver power plan through Power Options under System and Security in Windows Control Panel. Turn off wireless and local area network (LAN) connections and exit modem applications when you are not using them. Disconnect external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, when you are not using them. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Use the fn+f3 and fn+f4 hotkeys to adjust screen brightness as needed. If you leave your work, initiate Sleep or Hibernation, or shut down the computer. Storing a battery CAUTION: To prevent damage to a battery, do not expose it to high temperatures for extended periods of time. Using battery power 69 If a computer will be unused and unplugged from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately. To prolong the charge of a stored battery, place it in a cool, dry place. Calibrate a battery before using it if it has been stored for one month or more. Disposing of a used battery WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. For additional information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices included with this computer. Shutting down the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information will be lost when the computer is shut down. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and computer. Shut down the computer under any of the following conditions:

When you need to replace the battery or access components inside the computer When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB port When the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period Although you can shut down the computer with the power button, the recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. To shut down the computer:

NOTE:

before shutdown is possible. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, you must first exit Sleep or Hibernation 1. Save your work and close all open programs. 2. Click Start. 3. Click Shut down. If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, and then click the Power button. Press the power button and hold for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. 70 Chapter 7 Power management 8 Security Protecting the computer Standard security features provided by the Windows operating system and the non-Windows Setup Utility can protect your personal settings and data from a variety of risks. Follow the procedures in this chapter to use the following features:

Passwords Firewall software Antivirus support (Norton Internet Security) Critical security updates NOTE: Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents, but they may not deter software attacks or prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE: Before you send your computer for service, remove all password settings. Computer risk Unauthorized use of the computer Unauthorized access to data Unauthorized access to Setup Utility, BIOS settings, and other system identification information Security feature QuickLock Power-on password Firewall software Windows updates Administrator password Ongoing or future threats to the computer Critical security updates from Microsoft Unauthorized access to a Windows user account User password Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information. Several types of passwords can be set, depending on how you want to control access to your information. Passwords can be set in Windows or in the non-Windows Setup Utility preinstalled on the computer. CAUTION: To prevent being locked out of the computer, record each password you set. Because most passwords are not displayed as they are set, changed, or deleted, it is essential to record each password immediately and store it in a secure place. Protecting the computer 71 You can use the same password for a Setup Utility feature and for a Windows security feature. You can also use the same password for more than one Setup Utility feature. Use the following guidelines when setting a password in Setup Utility:

A password can be any combination of up to 8 letters and numbers and is case sensitive. A password set in Setup Utility must be entered at a Setup Utility prompt. A password set in Windows must be entered at a Windows prompt. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Write down your passwords and store them in a secure place away from the computer. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. Do not use your name or other personal information that could be easily discovered by an outsider. The following sections list Windows and Setup Utility passwords and describe their functions. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords, select Start > Help and Support. Setting passwords in Windows Password Administrator password User password QuickLock Setting passwords in Setup Utility Password Administrator password*

72 Chapter 8 Security Function Protects administrator-level access to computer contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility contents. Protects access to a Windows user account. It also protects access to the computer contents and must be entered when you exit Sleep or Hibernation. Protects the computer by requiring a password to be entered in the Windows Log On dialog box before you access the computer. After you set a user or administrator password, follow these steps:

1. 2. Initiate QuickLock by pressing fn+f6. Exit QuickLock by entering your Windows user or administrator password. Function Protects access to Setup Utility. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you access Setup Utility. CAUTION:

cannot access Setup Utility. If you forget your administrator password, you Password Power-on password*

Function Protects access to the computer contents. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer, or exit Hibernation. CAUTION:

cannot turn on or restart the computer, or exit Hibernation. If you forget your power-on password, you

*For details about each of these passwords, refer to the following topics. Administrator password Your administrator password protects the configuration settings and system identification information in Setup Utility. After this password is set, you must enter it each time you access Setup Utility. Your administrator password is not interchangeable with an administrator password set in Windows, nor is it displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. Be sure that you record your password and store it in a safe place. Managing an administrator password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:

1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Set Administrator Password, and then press enter. To set an administrator password, type your password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To change an administrator password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, type a new password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To delete an administrator password, type your current password in the Enter Password field, and then press enter 4 times. 3. To save your changes and exit Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Entering an administrator password At the Enter Password prompt, type your administrator password, and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the administrator password, you must restart the computer and try again. Power-on password Your power-on password prevents unauthorized use of the computer. After this password is set, it must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer, or exit Hibernation. A power-on password is not displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. Using passwords 73 Managing a power-on password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:

1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Set Power-On Password, and then press enter. To set a power-on password, type your password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To change a power-on password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, type a new password in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields, and then press enter. To delete a power-on password, type your current password in the Enter Current Password field, and then press enter 4 times. 3. To save your changes and exit Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Entering a power-on password At the Enter Password prompt, type your password, and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the password, you must restart the computer and try again. 74 Chapter 8 Security Using antivirus software When you use the computer for e-mail or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses that can disable the operating system, programs, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally. NOTE: HP recommends that you install antivirus software to help protect your computer. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Norton Internet Security, an antivirus program, is preinstalled on the computer. Your version of Norton Internet Security includes 60 days of free updates. It is strongly recommended that you protect the computer against new viruses beyond 60 days by purchasing extended update service. Instructions for using and updating Norton Internet Security software and for purchasing extended update service are provided within the program. To access Norton Internet Security, or to get more information about it, click Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security. NOTE: HP recommends that you always update the antivirus software to help protect your computer. NOTE: For more information about computer viruses, type viruses in the Search box in Help and Support. Using antivirus software 75 Using firewall software When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, unauthorized persons may be able to gain access to the computer, your personal files, and information about you. Use the firewall software preinstalled on the computer to protect your privacy. Firewall features include logging and reporting of network activity, and automatic monitoring of all incoming and outgoing traffic. Refer to the firewall user guide or contact your firewall manufacturer for more information. NOTE: Under some circumstances a firewall can block access to Internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a network, or block authorized e-mail attachments. To temporarily resolve the problem, disable the firewall, perform the task that you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall. 76 Chapter 8 Security Installing critical updates CAUTION: Microsoft sends alerts regarding critical updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all critical updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. Updates to the operating system and other software may have become available after the computer was shipped. To be sure that all available updates are installed on the computer, observe these guidelines:

Run Windows Update as soon as possible after you set up your computer. Use the update link at Start > All Programs > Windows Update. Run Windows Update at regular intervals, such as once a month. Obtain updates to Windows and other Microsoft programs, as they are released, from the Microsoft Web site and through the updates link in Help and Support. Installing critical updates 77 78 Chapter 8 Security 9 Software updates Updated versions of the software provided with your computer may be available on the HP Web site. Most software and BIOS updates on the HP Web site are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. To update the software, follow these steps, which are explained in the remainder of this guide:

1. Identify your computer model, product category, and series or family. Prepare for a system BIOS update by identifying the BIOS version currently installed on the computer. If your computer is connected to a network, consult the network administrator before installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. NOTE: The computer system BIOS is stored on the system ROM. The BIOS initializes the operating system, determines how the computer will interact with the hardware devices, and provides for data transfer among hardware devices, including the time and date. 2. 3. Access the updates on the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com. Install the updates. 79 Updating the BIOS To update the BIOS, first determine what BIOS version you currently have and then download and install the new BIOS. Determining the BIOS version To determine whether available BIOS updates contain later BIOS versions than those currently installed on the computer, you need to know the version of the system BIOS currently installed. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be displayed by opening Setup Utility. To display the BIOS information:

1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. 3. If Setup Utility does not open with the system information displayed, use the arrow keys to select the Main menu. When the Main menu is selected, BIOS and other system information is displayed. To exit Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To prevent damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep or Hibernation. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. To download a BIOS update:

1. 2. 3. Access the page on the HP Web site that provides software for your computer:

Select Start > Help and Support > Maintain, and then select the software and drivers update. Follow the instructions on the screen to identify your computer and access the BIOS update you want to download. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. b. Identify the BIOS update that is later than the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. Follow the instructions on the screen to download your selection to the hard drive. 80 Chapter 9 Software updates Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is to be downloaded. you must access this path when you are ready to install the update. NOTE:

installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are displayed, follow these steps:

1. Open Windows Explorer by selecting Start > Computer. 2. Double-click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the instructions on the screen. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Updating the BIOS 81 Updating programs and drivers To download and install software other than a BIOS update, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Access the page on the HP Web site that provides software for your computer:

Select Start > Help and Support, and then select the software and drivers update. Follow the instructions on the screen to find the software you want to update. At the download area, select the software you want to download and follow the instructions on the screen. NOTE: Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the software is to be downloaded. you must access this path when you are ready to install the software. 4. When the download is complete, open Windows Explorer by selecting Start > Computer. 5. Double-click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 6. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 7. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The installation begins. 8. Complete the installation by following the instructions on the screen. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. 82 Chapter 9 Software updates 10 Setup Utility Starting Setup Utility Setup Utility is a ROM-based information and customization utility that can be used even when your Windows operating system is not working. The utility reports information about the computer and provides settings for startup, security, and other preferences. To start Setup Utility:

Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. Using Setup Utility Changing the language of Setup Utility The following procedure explains how to change the language of Setup Utility. If Setup Utility is not already running, begin at step 1. If Setup Utility is already running, begin at step 2. 1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select System Configuration > Language, and then press enter. 3. Use the arrow keys to select a language, and then press enter. 4. When a confirmation prompt with your language selected is displayed, press enter. 5. To save your change and exit Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. Your change goes into effect immediately. Navigating and selecting in Setup Utility Because Setup Utility is not Windows based, it does not support the TouchPad. Navigation and selection are by keystroke. To choose a menu or a menu item, use the arrow keys. To choose an item in a list or to toggle a field, for example an Enable/Disable field, use either the arrow keys or f5 or f6. Starting Setup Utility 83 To select an item, press enter. To close a text box or return to the menu display, press esc. To display additional navigation and selection information while Setup Utility is open, press f1. Displaying system information The following procedure explains how to display system information in Setup Utility. If Setup Utility is not open, begin at step 1. If Setup Utility is open, begin at step 2. 1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. 3. Select the Main menu. System information such as the system time and date, and identification information about the computer is displayed. To exit Setup Utility without changing any settings, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. Restoring default settings in Setup Utility The following procedure explains how to restore Setup Utility default settings. If Setup Utility is not already running, begin at step 1. If Setup Utility is already running, begin at step 2. 1. Open Setup Utility by turning on or restarting the computer, and then pressing f10 while the F10

= BIOS Setup Options message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Exit > Load Setup Defaults, and then press enter. 3. When the Setup Confirmation is displayed, press enter. 4. To save your change and exit Setup Utility, use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. The Setup Utility default settings go into effect when the computer restarts. NOTE: Your password, security, and language settings are not changed when you restore the factory default settings. Exiting Setup Utility You can exit Setup Utility with or without saving changes. To exit Setup Utility and save your changes from the current session:

If the Setup Utility menus are not visible, press esc to return to the menu display. Then use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Saving Changes, and then press enter. To exit Setup Utility without saving your changes from the current session:

If the Setup Utility menus are not visible, press esc to return to the menu display. Then use the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. After either choice, the computer restarts in Windows. 84 Chapter 10 Setup Utility Setup Utility menus The menu tables in this section provide an overview of Setup Utility options. NOTE: Some of the Setup Utility menu items listed in this chapter may not be supported by your computer. Main menu Select System information Security menu Select Administrator password Power-On Password System Configuration menu To do this View and change the system time and date. View identification information about the computer. View specification information about the processor, memory size, and system BIOS. To do this Enter, change, or delete an administrator password. Enter, change, or delete a power-on password. Select Language Support Processor C4 State Boot Options To do this Change the Setup Utility language. Enable/disable the processor C4 sleep state. Set the following boot options:

f10 and f12 Delay (sec.)Set the delay for the f10 and f12 functions of Setup Utility in intervals of 5 seconds each (0, 5, 10, 15, 20). Internal Network Adapter bootEnable/disable boot from Internal Network Adapter. Boot OrderSet the boot order for:

Internal hard drive (select models only) USB Floppy USB CD/DVD ROM Drive USB Diskette on Key USB Hard drive USB Card Reader Network adapter Setup Utility menus 85 Select To do this NOTE: Only the devices attached to the system appear in the boot order menu. Diagnostics menu Select To do this Hard Disk Self Test (select models only) Run a comprehensive self-test on the hard drive. Memory Test Run a diagnostic test on the system memory. 86 Chapter 10 Setup Utility Index A AC adapter administrator password connecting 60 identifying 10 testing 61 creating 73 entering 73 managing 73 airport security devices 40 antennas 9 applications key, Windows 4 audio devices, connecting external 33 audio functions, checking 33 audio-in (microphone) jack 5, 30 audio-out (headphone) jack 5, 30 B battery calibrating 66 charging 63, 66 conserving power 69 discharging 64 disposing 70 identifying 10 inserting 62 low battery levels 64 recharging 69 removing 62 storing 69 battery bay, identifying 8 Battery Check 62 battery light 5, 63, 64 battery power 61 battery release latches 8, 62 battery temperature 69 bay, battery 8 BD drive 43 BIOS, updating 80 Blu-ray Disc ROM with SuperMulti DVDR/RW Double Layer 44 Bluetooth device 13 boot options 85 boot order 85 buttons left TouchPad 1 power 3 right TouchPad 1 wireless 3 C cables LAN 27 USB 45 VGA 35 caps lock light, identifying 2 CD drive 43 changing Setup Utility language 83 charging batteries 63, 66 checking audio functions 33 components additional hardware 10 bottom 8 display 7 front 4 left-side 6 right-side 5 TouchPad 1 connecting to a WLAN 18 connection, external power 60 conservation, power 69 cord, power 10 corporate WLAN connection 18 critical battery level 65 D Diagnostics menu 86 digital card inserting 46 removing 47 stopping 47 supported formats 46 Digital Media Slot, identifying 5 Disk Cleanup software 41 Disk Defragmenter software 41 diskette drive 43 display image, switching 55 screen brightness hotkeys 55 display switch, identifying 7 displaying system information 84 drive light, identifying 5 drive media 57 drives connecting external 44 diskette 43 external 43 hard 41, 42, 43 optical 43 drives, boot order 85 DVD drive 43 E earbuds 5, 30 encryption 18 entering a power-on password 74 entering an administrator password 73 esc key 4 exiting Setup Utility 84 external audio devices, connecting 33 external drive 43 external monitor port 35 external monitor port, identifying 6 Index 87 F firewall 18 fn key 4, 53 function keys 4, 53 H hard disk drive external 43 installing 42 removing 41 replacing 41 hard drive external 43 installing 42 removing 41 replacing 41 hard drive bay, identifying 8 hard drive cover removing 50 replacing 51 hard drive self test 86 hardware, identifying 1 HDMI port 35 HDMI port, identifying 6 HDMI, connecting 35 headphone (audio-out) jack 5, 30 headphones 5, 30 Hibernation exiting 58 initiated during critical battery level 65 initiating 58 high-definition devices, connecting 35 hotkeys decreasing screen brightness 55 decreasing speaker sound 56 decreasing speaker volume 31 description 53 increasing screen brightness 55 increasing speaker volume 31, 56 initiating QuickLock 55 initiating Sleep 54 muting speaker sound 56 muting speaker volume 31 88 Index switching screen image 55 using 54 HP Connection Manager software 15 HP Mobile Broadband Module 20 HP USB Ethernet Adapter, connecting 27 hubs 45 I icons network 13, 25 wireless 13 installed drives, identifying 40 interference, minimizing 26 internal display switch, identifying 7 internal microphone, identifying 7, 30 Internet connection setup 17 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 5, 30 audio-out (headphone) 5, 30 RJ-45 (network) 6 K keyboard hotkeys, identifying 53 keys esc 4 fn 4 function 4 Windows applications 4 Windows logo 4 L labels Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 11 regulatory 11 service tag 10 language support 85 latches, battery release 8 left TouchPad button, identifying 1 lights battery 5 caps lock 2 drive 5 power 2 webcam 7 wireless 2 local area network (LAN) cable required 27 connecting cable 27 low battery level 64 M Main menu 85 maintenance Disk Cleanup 41 Disk Defragmenter 41 managing a power-on password 74 managing an administrator password 73 memory module inserting 50 removing 50 memory module slot 8 memory test 86 microphone (audio-in) jack 5, 30 minimizing interference 26 monitor port, external 6 monitor, connecting 35 mouse, external connecting 53 setting preferences 53 multimedia components, identifying 29 multimedia software installing 32 using 32 mute hotkey, identifying 30 N navigating in Setup Utility 83 network cable connecting 27 noise suppression circuitry 27 network cable, connecting 27 network icon 13, 25 network jack, identifying 6 network key 25 network security codes network key 25 SSID 25 noise suppression circuitry, network cable 27 O operating system 70 optical drive sharing 44 P passwords administrator 73 power-on 73 set in Setup Utility 72 set in Windows 72 external monitor 6, 35 HDMI 6, 35 USB 5, 6, 45 ports power connecting 60 conserving 69 power button, identifying 3 power connector, identifying 6 power cord, identifying 10 power light, identifying 2 power-on password creating 74 entering 74 managing 74 Processor C4 State 85 product name and number, computer 10 programs, updating 82 projector, connecting 35 public WLAN connection 18 HP Mobile Broadband Module Q QuickLock 72 QuickLock hotkey 55 R readable media 57 regulatory information serial number 11 regulatory label 11 wireless 11 release latches battery 8, 63 restoring default settings 84 right TouchPad button, identifying 1 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 6 S screen brightness hotkeys 55 screen image, switching 55 security cable slot, identifying 6 Security menu 85 security, wireless 17 selecting in Setup Utility 83 serial number, computer 10 service tag 10 setup of WLAN 17 Setup Utility, passwords set in 72 setup, computer 1 shared drives 44 shutdown 70 shutting down 70 SIM inserting 20 removing 21 Sleep exiting 57 initiating 57 Sleep hotkey 54 slots security cable 6 software Disk Cleanup 41 Disk Defragmenter 41 HP Connection Manager 15 installing 32 multimedia 32 Windows Media Player 32 Wireless Assistant 15 solid-state drive (SSD) 40 speakers, identifying 4, 30 storing battery 69 System Configuration menu 85 system information 85 T temperature 69 TouchPad buttons 1 identifying 1 using 53 TouchPad scroll zone, identifying 2 traveling with the computer 69 turning off the computer 70 U unresponsive system 70 USB cable, connecting 45 USB devices connecting 45 description 45 removing 45 stopping 45 USB hubs 45 USB ports, identifying 5, 6, 45 V vents, identifying 6, 8 video transmission types 55 volume down hotkey, identifying 31 volume up hotkey, identifying 31 volume, adjusting 31 W webcam light, identifying 7, 30 webcam, identifying 7, 30 Windows applications key, identifying 4 Windows logo key, identifying 4 Windows, passwords set in 72 wireless antennas 9 Wireless Assistant software 14, 15 wireless button, identifying 3 wireless controls button 14 HP Connection Manager 14 operating system 14 Wireless Assistant software 14 wireless function key 14 wireless icon 13 wireless light 14 wireless light, identifying 2 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 18 corporate WLAN connection 18 equipment needed 17 functional range 19 public WLAN connection 18 security 17 WLAN 8 WLAN antennas, identifying 9 Index 89 WLAN device 13 writable media 57 WWAN antennas, identifying 9 WWAN device 20 90 Index

 

 

INSPIRON SETUP GUIDE INSPIRON Mini 10 SETUP GUIDE Model PP19S Notes, Cautions and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. __________________ Information in this document is subject to change without notice. 2008 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, Inspiron, and YOURS IS HERE are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Intel and Atom are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries; Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries;

Bluetooth is a registered trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and is used by Dell under license. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. November 2008 P/N R891K Rev. A00 I N S P I R O N Contents Setting Up Your Inspiron Mini 10 Laptop . 5 Before Setting Up Your Computer . 5 Connect the AC Adapter . 6 Connect the Network Cable (Optional) . 7 Press the Power Button . 8 Enable or Disable Wireless. 9 Ubuntu Information . 9 Microsoft Windows Setup . 9 Connect to the Internet (Optional) . 10 Setting up the TV Tuner (Availability Varies by Regions) . 13 Using Your Inspiron Laptop. 14 Left Side Features . 16 Computer Base and Keyboard Features . 18 Touch pad Gestures. 20 Display Features . 24 Removing and Replacing the Battery . 25 Software Features . 26 Solving Problems . 28 Network Problems . 28 Power Problems . 29 Memory Problems . 30 Lockups and Software Problems . 30 Dell Support Center . 33 Using Support Tools. 33 System Messages . 34 Hardware Troubleshooter . 35 Dell Diagnostics . 36 3 Restoring Your Operating System . 38 System Restore . 38 Windows XP: Using Dell PC Restore . 40 Dell Factory Image Restore . 42 Operating System Reinstallation . 43 Getting Help . 45 Technical Support and Customer Service . 46 Online Services . 46 AutoTech Service. 47 Product Information. 47 Before You Call. 48 Contacting Dell. 49 Finding More Information and Resources . 50 Basic Specifications . 52 Index . 60 4 I N S P I R O N Setting Up Your Inspiron Mini 10 Laptop WARNING: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do not store your Dell computer in a low-airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. CAUTION: Placing or stacking heavy or sharp objects on the computer may result in permanent damage to the computer. This section provides information about setting up your Inspiron Mini 10 laptop and connecting peripherals. Before Setting Up Your Computer When positioning your computer, ensure that you allow easy access to a power source, adequate ventilation, and a level surface to place your computer. Restricting airflow around your Inspiron laptop may cause it to overheat. To prevent overheating ensure that you leave at least 10.2 cm (4 in) at the back of the computer and a minimum of 5.1 cm (2 in) on all other sides. You should never put your computer in an enclosed space, such as a cabinet or drawer when it is powered on. 5 Setting Up Your Inspiron Mini 10 Laptop Connect the AC Adapter Connect the AC adapter to the computer and then plug it into a wall outlet or surge protector. WARNING: The AC adapter works with electrical outlets worldwide. However, power connectors and power strips vary among countries. Using an incompatible cable or improperly connecting the cable to a power strip or electrical outlet may cause fire or equipment damage. 6 Setting Up Your Inspiron Mini 10 Laptop Connect the Network Cable

(Optional) To use a wired network connection, plug in the network cable. 7 Setting Up Your Inspiron Mini 10 Laptop Press the Power Button 8 2. Enable or Disable Wireless To turn on wireless, with the computer turned on:

1. Press <Fn><F2> or double-click the wireless icon on the system tray. The Wireless Enable/Disable dialog box is displayed. Select one of the following:

Click Enable Bluetooth Enable Wireless LAN Enable Wireless WAN/GPS 3. To turn off wireless, press <Fn><F2> again to turn off all radios. Ubuntu Information Your Dell computer is preconfigured with the Ubuntu operating system if you requested for it while ordering. See the Ubuntu Quick Start OK. Setting Up Your Inspiron Mini 10 Laptop Guide that shipped with your computer for more operating system specific information. Microsoft Windows Setup Your Dell computer is preconfigured with Microsoft Windows operating system if you requested for it while ordering. To set up Windows for the first time, follow the instructions on the screen. These steps are mandatory and may take up to 15 minutes to complete. The screens will take you through several procedures including accepting license agreements, setting preferences, and setting up an Internet connection. CAUTION: Do not interrupt the operating systems setup process. Doing so may render your computer unusable. 9 Setting Up Your Inspiron Mini 10 Laptop Connect to the Internet (Optional) NOTE: ISPs and ISP offerings vary by country. To connect to the Internet, you need an external modem or network connection and an Internet service provider (ISP). Setting Up a Wired Internet Connection If you are using a dial-up connection, connect the telephone line to the external USB modem

(optional) and to the telephone wall jack before you set up your Internet connection. If you are using a DSL or cable/satellite modem connection, contact your ISP or cellular telephone service for setup instructions. Setting Up a Wireless Connection Before you can use your wireless Internet connection, you need to connect to your wireless router. To set up your connection to a wireless router:

10 1. 2. 3. Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs. Click Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the setup. Start Connect To. Setting Up Your Internet Connection To set up an Internet connection with a provided ISP desktop shortcut:

1. Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs. Double-click the ISP icon on the Microsoft Windows desktop. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the setup. 2. 3. If you do not have an ISP icon on your desktop or if you want to set up an Internet connection with a different ISP, perform the steps in the following section. NOTE: If you cannot connect to the Internet but have successfully connected in the past, the ISP might have a service outage. Contact your ISP to check the service status, or try connecting again later. NOTE: Have your ISP information ready. If you do not have an ISP, the Connect to the Internet wizard can help you get one. Windows Vista 1. 2. 3. 4. Control Panel. Start Network and Internet, click Connect Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs. Click Under to the Internet. The Connect to the Internet window appears. Click either depending on how you want to connect:

a. Broadband (PPPoE) or Dial-up, Broadband if you will use a Choose DSL, satellite modem, cable TV modem, or Bluetooth wireless technology connection. Setting Up Your Inspiron Mini 10 Laptop b. Dial-up if you will use an optional Chose USB dial-up modem or ISDN. NOTE: If you do not know which type of connection to select, click Help me choose or contact your ISP. Follow the instructions on the screen and use the setup information provided by your ISP to complete the setup. 5. Windows XP 1. Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs. Click The New Connection Wizard appears. Start Internet Explorer. 2. 11 6. 7. How do Select the appropriate option under you want to connect to the Internet?, and then click Next. Use the setup information provided by your ISP to complete the setup. Setting Up Your Inspiron Mini 10 Laptop 3. 4. Connect to the Internet. Click In the next window, select the appropriate option:

If you do not have an ISP and want to select one, click Choose from a list of Internet service providers (ISPs). If you have already obtained setup information from your ISP but you did not receive a setup CD, click Set up my connection manually. If you have a CD, click from an ISP. Use the CD I got 5. Next. Click If you selected Set up my connection manually, continue to step 6. Otherwise, follow the instructions on the screen to complete the setup. NOTE: If you do not know which type of connection to select, contact your ISP. 12 Set up the TV Tuner (Availability Varies by Regions) You can set up the TV Tuner through PowerCinema. To set up the TV Tuner for the first time:

1. Click the PowerCinema icon in Programs. Go to TV and follow the instructions on the screen. Main Menu Entertainment Live Start All 2. Main Menu Entertainment Live To re-configure your TV tuner settings:

1. Start All Click the PowerCinema icon in Programs. Go to TV. Click Select Click instructions on the screen. Settings. 2. 3. 4. 5. Advanced in the control menu. Run Setup Wizard and follow the Setting Up Your Inspiron Mini 10 Laptop 13 N O R I P S N I Using Your Inspiron Laptop Your Inspiron Mini 10 has indicators, buttons, and features that provide information at-a-

glance and time-saving shortcuts for common tasks. Right Side Features 6 5 4 3 21 14 Using Your Inspiron Laptop 5 6 Power USB connector Connects to USB devices, such as a mouse, keyboard, printer, external drive, or MP3 player. This port can support up to 2 ampere current loading. Network connector If you are using a cabled network signal, this connects your computer to a network or broadband device. 1 2 3 4 Audio Out/ Headphone connector Connects to a pair of headphones, or sends audio to a powered speaker or sound system. Audio In/ Microphone connector Connects to a microphone or input signal for use with audio programs. HDMI connector Connects to a TV for both 5.1 audio and video signals. NOTE: When used with a monitor, only the video signal will be read. USB 2.0 connector Connects to USB devices, such as a mouse, keyboard, printer, external drive, or MP3 player. 15 Using Your Inspiron Laptop Left Side Features 5 4 3 2 1 16 1 Security cable slot Attaches a commercially available antitheft device to the computer. NOTE: Before you buy an antitheft device, ensure that it works with the security cable slot on your computer. 2 3 AC adapter connector Connects to the AC adapter to power on the computer and charge the battery. USB 2.0 connector Connects to USB devices, such as a mouse, keyboard, printer, external drive, or MP3 player. 4 Antenna In connector (on supported models) Connects to an external antenna, through a MCX connector, to view programs using the TV Tuner card (optional). For more details on TV Tuner card setup, see Setting up the TV Tuner (Availability Varies by Regions) on page 13. Using Your Inspiron Laptop 5 SD/SDHC/MMC/MS/MSPro 3-in-1 media card reader Provides a fast and convenient way to view and share digital photos, music, videos, and documents stored on the following digital memory cards:

Secure Digital (SD) memory card Secure Digital High Capacity

(SDHC) card Multimedia Card (MMC) Memory Stick Memory Stick PRO 17 Using Your Inspiron Laptop Computer Base and Keyboard Features 1 2 3 4 18 1 Power/Battery indicator light Turns on steadily or blinks to indicate battery charge status. If the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, the light operates as follows:

On AC Adapter Solid white: The system is on and the battery is charging. Flashing white: The system is in standby mode. Off: The system is off and the battery is adequately charged. On Battery Solid white: The system is on. Flashing white: The system is in standby mode. Flashing amber: The battery charge is low. Connect to an AC adapter to charge the battery. Off: The system is off. Using Your Inspiron Laptop 2 Keyboard The settings for this keyboard can be personalized by using the system setting utility. 3 Touch pad buttons Provides left- and right-click functions like those on a mouse. 4 Touch pad Provides the functionality of a mouse. It supports the Scroll, Flick, Zoom, Rotate, Desktop, and My Favorites features. For more details , see Touch pad Gestures on page 20. 19 Using Your Inspiron Laptop Touch pad Gestures Scroll Features Scrolling allows you to navigate through content. Pan Scroll Allows you move the focus of the visible area. To use the pan scroll feature:

Place two fingers next to 1. each other on the touch pad. 2. direction you wish to move the focus of the visible area. Auto Scroll Vertical Allows scrolling in an upward, or downward direction. Move both fingers in the Place two fingers next to 1. each other on the touch pad. 2. downward or upward at a fast pace to activate auto scrolling. Move both fingers 3. Tap on the touch pad to stop auto scrolling. 20 Auto Scroll Horizontal Allows scrolling in a left-to-right, or right-to-left direction. Place two fingers next to 1. each other on the touch pad. Move both fingers left or 2. right at a fast pace to activate auto scrolling. Tap on the touch pad to stop auto scrolling. 3. Traditional Scroll Allows you to scroll up or scroll down. Place one finger in the 1. vertical scroll zone (extreme right of the touch pad). 2. or downward to scroll through the active window. Move your finger upward Circular Scroll Allows you to scroll up and down, or right and left. To scroll up and down:

Place one finger in the 1. vertical scroll zone (extreme right of the touch pad). Move your finger in a 2. clockwise circular direction to scroll downwards or counterclockwise to scroll upwards. To scroll right and left:

Place one finger in the 1. horizontal scroll zone (extreme bottom of the touch pad). Move your finger in a 2. clockwise circular direction to scroll right or move your finger in a counterclockwise direction to scroll left. Using Your Inspiron Laptop Flick Feature Flick allows you to flip your focus on content forward or backward based on the direction of the flick. Place three fingers next to 1. each other on the touch pad. Move your fingers quickly 2. in the direction you wish to flip content. The screen content changes based on the application that is open. 21 Zone Zoom Allows you to zoom in or zoom out using one finger in the zoom zone (extreme left of the touch pad). To zoom in or zoom out using the zoom zone:

Place one finger in the 1. zoom zone. Move your finger upward 2. and downward to zoom in and out. Rotate Features Rotate allows you to rotate the active content on the screen. This feature includes Twist and Arc. Using Your Inspiron Laptop Zoom Features Zoom allows you to increase or decrease the magnification of the screen content. The zoom features include:

Pinch Zoom Allows you to zoom in or zoom out by moving two fingers apart or bringing them closer together on the touch pad. Place two fingers close 1. together on the touch pad. Move your fingers apart to 2. enlarge the view (zoom in) of the active content. Alternately, moving two 3. fingers that are apart back together minimizes the view

(zoom out) of the active window on the screen. 22 Twist Rotate Allows you to rotate active content in 90-degree increments using two fingers where one finger is anchored and the Place two fingers on the other rotates. 1. touch pad. Keeping the lower finger in 2. place, move one finger in and arched direction right or left to rotate the selected item 90 degrees. Arc Rotate Allows you to rotate active content by moving two fingers in an arched direction. 1. Place two fingers on the touch pad. Move both fingers in an 2. arched direction to the left or right to rotate active content. Using Your Inspiron Laptop My Favorites Feature My Favorites allows you to open your favorite applications. Tap three fingers that are apart on the touch pad. The applications that you select in the touch pad configuration tool launch. Desktop Feature Desktop allows you to minimize all open windows together so that the Desktop is visible. Place a hand on the touch pad in any orientation and briefly hold in place. 23 Using Your Inspiron Laptop Display Features The display panel holds a camera and a camera activity light. 21 3 4 1 Microphone Provides quality sound for video chatting and voice recording. 2 Camera activity light Indicates when the camera is on or off. 3 Camera Built-in camera for video capture, conferencing, and chat. 4 Display Your display can vary based on selections you made when purchasing your computer. For more information about displays, see the Dell Technology Guide. 24 Using Your Inspiron Laptop Removing and Replacing the Battery WARNING: Using an incompatible battery may increase the risk of fire or explosion. This computer should only use a battery purchased from Dell. Do not use batteries from other computers. WARNING: Before removing the battery, shut down the computer, and remove external cables (including the AC adapter). 3. To remove the battery:

1. 2. Shut down the computer and turn it over. Slide the battery lock latch until it clicks into place. Slide the battery release latch to unlock position. Pull the battery up and out of the battery bay. 4. To replace the battery, slide it into the bay until it clicks into place. Then slide the battery lock latch to the lock position. 1 2 3 1 Battery 2 Battery release latch 3 Battery lock latch 25 Using Your Inspiron Laptop Software Features NOTE: For more information about the features described in this section, see the Dell Technology Guide on your hard drive or on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. Productivity and Communication You can use your computer to create presentations, brochures, greeting cards, fliers, and spreadsheets depending on the applications installed in your computer. Check your purchase order for software installed on your computer. After connecting to the Internet, you can access websites, setup an e-mail account, upload and download files, and so on. Entertainment and Multimedia You can use your computer to watch videos, play games, listen to music and internet radio stations. 26 Customizing the Desktop in Windows Vista You can customize your desktop to change the appearance, resolution, wallpaper, screensaver, and so on by accessing the Personalize appearance and sounds window. To access the display properties window:

Right-click an open area of the desktop. 1. Click Personalize, to open the Personalize 2. appearance and sounds window and learn more about your customization options. Customizing the Desktop in Windows XP You can customize your desktop to change the appearance, resolution, wallpaper, screensaver, and so on by accessing the Display Properties window. To access the display properties window:

Right-click an open area of the desktop. 1. Click 2. Properties window and learn more about your customization options. Properties, to open the Display Customizing Your Energy Settings You can use the power options in your operating system to configure the power settings on your computer. Windows provides three default options:

This power option saves This power option offers full Balanced performance when you need it and saves power during periods of inactivity. Power saver power on your computer by reducing system performance to maximize the life of the computer and by reducing the amount of energy consumed by your computer over its lifetime. High performance provides the highest level of system performance on your computer by adapting processor speed to your activity and by maximizing system performance. This power option Using Your Inspiron Laptop Start Control Panel System Backing Up Your Data on Windows Vista It is recommended that you periodically back up files and folders on your computer. To back up files:

Click 1. and Maintenance Welcome Center Transfer files and settings. Back up files or Back up computer. Click Click Continue on Your User Account Control dialog box and follow the instructions in the Back up Files wizard. 2. 3. Backing Up Your Data on Windows XP It is recommended that you periodically back up files and folders on your computer. To back up files:

Click 1. System Tools Backup. Follow the instructions in the Back up Files wizard. Start All Programs Accessories 2. 27 N O R I P S N I Solving Problems WARNING: Only trained service personnel should remove the computer cover. See the Service Manual on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com for advanced service and troubleshooting instructions. Network Problems Wireless Connections If the wireless network connection is lost The wireless router is offline or wireless has been disabled on the computer. Check your wireless router to ensure it is powered on and connected to your data source (cable modem or network hub). Interference may be blocking or interrupting your wireless connection. Try moving the computer closer to your wireless router. 28 Re-establish your connection to the wireless router:

a. Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs. Click Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the setup. Start Connect To. b. c. Wired Connections If the network connection is lost The cable is loose or damaged. Check the cable to ensure it is plugged in and not damaged. The link integrity light on the integrated network connector lets you verify that your connection is working and provides information on the status:

Green A good connection exists between a 10-Mbps network and the computer. Orange A good connection exists between a 100-Mbps network and the computer. Off The computer is not detecting a physical connection to the network. NOTE: The link integrity light on the network connector is only for the wired cable connection. The link integrity light does not provide status for wireless connections. Power Problems If the power light is off The computer is either turned off or is not receiving power. If the computer is plugged into a power strip, ensure that the power strip is plugged into an electrical outlet and that the power strip is turned on. Also bypass power protection devices, power strips, and power extension cables to verify that the computer turns on properly. Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. Solving Problems Check the AC adapter cable connections. If the AC adapter has a light, ensure that the light on the AC adapter is on. If the power light is solid white and the computer is not responding The display may not be responding. Press the power button until the computer turns off and then turn it back on. If the power light is blinking white The computer is in standby mode. Press a key on the keyboard, move the pointer using the touch pad or a connected mouse, or press the power button to resume normal operation. If the power light is solid amber The computer has a power problem or an internal device malfunction. For assistance contact Dell, see Contacting Dell on page 49. If the power light is blinking amber The computer is receiving electrical power, but a device might be malfunctioning or incorrectly installed. 29 Solving Problems If you encounter interference that hinders reception on your computer An unwanted signal is creating interference by interrupting or blocking other signals. Some possible causes of interference are:

Power, keyboard, and mouse extension cables. Too many devices connected to a power strip. Multiple power strips connected to the same electrical outlet. Memory Problems If you receive an insufficient memory message Save and close any open files and exit any open programs you are not using to see if that resolves the problem. See the software documentation for minimum memory requirements. If necessary, install additional memory 30

(See the Service Manual on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com). If you experience other memory problems Ensure that you are following the memory installation guidelines (see the Service Manual on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com). Run the Dell Diagnostics (see Dell Diagnostics on page 35). Lockups and Software Problems If the computer does not start up Ensure that the power cable is firmly connected to the computer and to the electrical outlet. If a program stops responding End the program:

1. 2. 3. Press <Ctrl><Shift><Esc> simultaneously. Click Click the program that is no longer responding Click Applications. End Task. 4. If a program crashes repeatedly Check the software documentation. If necessary, uninstall and then reinstall the program. NOTE: Software usually includes installation instructions in its documentation or on the media (CD or DVD). NOTE: Your computer may or may not have an optical drive. Use an external optical drive or any external storage device for the procedures that involve media. If the computer stops responding CAUTION: You might lose data if you are unable to perform an operating system shutdown. Turn the computer off. If you are unable to get a response by pressing a key on your keyboard or moving your mouse, press the power button for at least 8 to 10 seconds until the computer turns off and then restart your computer. Solving Problems If a program is designed for an earlier Microsoft Windows operating system Run the Program Compatibility Wizard. The Program Compatibility Wizard configures a program so that it runs in an environment similar to non-Windows Vista/non-XP operating system environments. Windows Vista Start 1. Control Panel Click Programs Use an older program with this version of Windows. In the welcome screen, click Follow the instructions on the screen. Next. 2. 3. Windows XP 1. Start All Programs Accessories Click Program Compatibility Wizard. In the welcome screen, click 2. Follow the instructions on the screen. 3. If a solid blue screen appears Turn the computer off. If you are unable to get a response Next. 31 Ensure that the program is installed and configured properly. Verify that the device drivers do not conflict with the program. If necessary, uninstall and then reinstall the program, Dell Support Center. Write down any error message that is displayed to help in troubleshooting when Contacting Dell. Solving Problems by pressing a key on your keyboard or moving your pointer or mouse, press and hold the power button for at least 8 to 10 seconds until the computer turns off. Then restart your computer. If you have other software problems Back up your files immediately. Use a virus-scanning program to check the hard drive or CDs. Save and close any open files or programs and shut down your computer through the Start menu. Check the software documentation or contact the software manufacturer for troubleshooting information:

Ensure that the program is compatible with the operating system installed on your computer. Ensure that your computer meets the minimum hardware requirements needed to run the software. See the software documentation for information. 32 Using Support Tools NOTE: The instructions in this section are for computers with Windows Vista operating system installed. Dell Support Center The Dell Support Center helps you find the service, support, and system-specific information you need. For more information about Dell Support Center and available support tools, click the Services tab at support.dell.com. Click the icon in the taskbar to run the application. The home page provides links to access:

Self Help (Troubleshooting, Security, System Performance, Network/Internet, Backup/

Recovery, and Windows operating system) Alerts (technical support alerts relevant to your computer) I N S P I R O N Assistance from Dell (Technical Support with DellConnect, Customer Service, Training and Tutorials, How-To Help with Dell on Call, and Online Scan with PCCheckUp) About Your System (System Documentation, Warranty Information, System Information, Upgrades & Accessories) The top of the Dell Support Center home page displays your computers model number along with its service tag and express service code. For more information about the Dell Support Center, see the Dell Technology Guide on your hard drive or on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. 33 Using Support Tools System Messages If your computer has an issue or error, it may display a System Message that will help you identify the cause and action needed to resolve the issue. NOTE: If the message you received is not listed in the following examples, see the documentation for either the operating system or the program that was running when the message appeared. Alternatively see the Dell Technology Guide on your hard disk or the Dell Support website at support. dell.com. Alert! Previous attempts at booting this system have failed at checkpoint [nnnn]. For help in resolving this problem, please note this checkpoint and contact Dell Technical Support The computer failed to complete the boot routine three consecutive times for the same error see Contacting Dell on page 49 for assistance. CMOS checksum error Possible motherboard failure or RTC battery low. Replace the battery.

(See the Dell Technology Guide on your hard disk or the Dell Support website at support.dell. com or see Contacting Dell on page 49 for assistance. Hard-disk (HDD) drive failure Possible hard disk drive failure during POST, see Contacting Dell on page 49 for assistance. Hard-disk (HDD) drive read failure Possible hard disk drive failure during HDD boot test see Contacting Dell on page 49 for assistance. Keyboard failure Keyboard failure or loose cable. No boot device available No bootable partition on hard disk drive, the hard disk drive connector is loose, or no bootable device exists. If the hard drive is your boot device, ensure that the connector is connected and that the drive is installed properly and partitioned as a boot device. 34 Enter system setup and ensure that the boot sequence information is correct (see the Dell Technology Guide on your hard disk or the Dell Support website at support.dell.com). No timer tick interrupt A chip on the system board might be malfunctioning or motherboard failure (see Contacting Dell on page 49). USB over current error Disconnect the USB device. Your USB device needs more power for it to function properly. Use an external power source to connect the USB device, or if your device has two USB cables, connect both of them. NOTICE - Hard Drive SELF MONITORING SYSTEM has reported that a parameter has exceeded its normal operating range. Dell recommends that you back up your data regularly. A parameter out of range may or may not indicate a potential hard drive problem S.M.A.R.T error, possible hard disk drive failure. This feature can be enabled or disabled in the Using Support Tools BIOS setup (see Contacting Dell on page 49 for assistance). Hardware Troubleshooter If a device is either not detected during the operating system setup or is detected but incorrectly configured, you can use the Hardware Troubleshooter to resolve the incompatibility. To start the Hardware Troubleshooter:

Help and Support. 1. 2. Start Click hardware troubleshooter in Type the search field and press <Enter> to start the search. In the search results, select the option that best describes the problem and follow the remaining troubleshooting steps. 3. 35 Using Support Tools Dell Diagnostics If you experience a problem with your computer, perform the checks in Lockups and Software Problems on page 30 and run the Dell Diagnostics before you contact Dell ( see Contacting Dell on page 49) for technical assistance. It is recommended that you print these procedures before you begin. CAUTION: Dell Diagnostics works only on Dell computers. NOTE: The Drivers and Utilities media is optional and may not ship with your computer. To review your computers configuration information, and ensure that the device that you want to test displays in the system setup program and is active. See the System Setup section in the Dell Technology Guide. Start the Dell Diagnostics from your hard drive or from the Drivers and Utilities media. 36 1. 2. 3. Starting Dell Diagnostics From Your Hard Drive The Dell Diagnostics is located on a hidden diagnostic utility partition on your hard drive. NOTE: If your computer cannot display a screen image, see Contacting Dell on page 49. Ensure that the computer is connected to an electrical outlet that is known to be working properly. Turn on (or restart) your computer. When the DELL immediately. Select Diagnostics from the boot menu and press <Enter>. NOTE: If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft Windows desktop;

then, shut down your computer and try again. NOTE: If you see a message stating that no diagnostics utility partition has been found, run the Dell Diagnostics from the Drivers and Utilities media. logo appears, press <F12>

4. Press any key to start the Dell Diagnostics from the diagnostics utility partition on your hard drive. Starting Dell Diagnostics From the Drivers and Utilities Media 1. 2. NOTE: Your computer may or may not have an optical drive. Use an external optical drive or any external storage device for the procedures that involves media. Insert the Drivers and Utilities media. Shut down and restart the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press <F2>

immediately. NOTE: If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft Windows desktop; then, shut down your computer and try again. Using Support Tools NOTE: The next steps change the boot sequence for one time only. On the next start-up, the computer boots according to the devices specified in the system setup program. When the boot device list appears, highlight CD/DVD/CD-RW and press <Enter>. Select the Boot from CD-ROM option from the menu that appears and press <Enter>. Type 1 to start the CD menu and press

<Enter> to proceed. Select the numbered list. If multiple versions are listed, select the version appropriate for your computer. When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears, select the test you want to run. Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics from 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 37 N O R I P S N I Restoring Your Operating System You can restore your operating system in the following ways:

Factory Image Restore returns your hard Restore returns your computer to an System earlier operating state without affecting data files. Use System Restore as the first solution for restoring your operating system and preserving data files. Dell drive to the operating state it was in when you purchased the computer. This procedure permanently deletes all data on the hard drive and removes any programs installed after you received the computer. Use Dell Factory Image Restore only if System Restore did not resolve your operating system problem. If you received an Operating System disc with your computer, you can use it to restore your operating system. However, using the 38 Operating System disc also deletes all data on the hard drive. Use the disc only if System Restore did not resolve your operating system problem. System Restore The Windows operating systems provide a System Restore option which allows you to return your computer to an earlier operating state (without affecting data files) if changes to the hardware, software, or other system settings have left the computer in an undesirable operating state. Any changes that System Restore makes to your computer are completely reversible. CAUTION: Make regular backups of your data files. System Restore does not monitor your data files or recover them. NOTE: The procedures in this document were written for the Windows default view, so they may not apply if you set your Dell computer to the Windows Classic view. Starting System Restore in Windows Vista 1. 2. Start Start Search box, type System Click In the Restore and press <Enter>. NOTE: The User Account Control window may appear. If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired action. Click on the screen. Next and follow the remaining prompts 3. In the event that System Restore did not resolve the issue, you may undo the last system restore. Starting System Restore in Windows XP 1. Start All Programs Accessories Click System Tools System Restore. Restoring Your Operating System In the welcome screen, click Follow the instructions on the screen. 2. 3. Undoing the Last System Restore in Windows Vista Next. NOTE: Before you undo the last system restore, save and close all open files and exit any open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete. Click In the Restore and press <Enter>. Click Next. Start Start Search box, type System Undo my last restoration and click

. 1. 2. 3. Undoing the Last System Restore in Windows XP NOTE: Before you undo the last system restore, save and close all open files and exit any open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the 39 Restoring Your Operating System Start All Programs Accessories 1. 2. system restoration is complete. Click System Tools System Restore. In the welcome screen, click restoration and then click Next. Follow the instructions on the screen. 3. Using Dell PC Restore in Windows XP Undo my last CAUTION: Using Dell PC Restore permanently deletes all data on the hard drive and removes any programs or drivers installed after you received your computer. If possible, back up the data before using these options. Use PC Restore only if System Restore did not resolve your operating system problem. NOTE: Dell PC Restore by Symantec and Dell Factory Image Restore may not be available in certain countries or on certain computers. 40 Use Dell PC Restore only as the last method to restore your operating system. These options restore your hard drive to the operating state it was in when you purchased the computer. Any programs or files added since you received your computerincluding data filesare permanently deleted from the hard drive. Data files include documents, spreadsheets, e-mail messages, digital photos, music files, and so on. If possible, back up all data before using PC Restore. Using PC Restore:

1. Turn on the computer. During the boot process, a blue bar with www.dell.com appears at the top of the screen. Immediately upon seeing the blue bar, press

<Ctrl><F11>. If you do not press <Ctrl><F11>

in time, let the computer finish starting, and then restart the computer again. 2. 3. 4. 5. Finish to reboot the CAUTION: If you do not want to proceed with PC Restore, click Reboot. Click Restore and click Confirm. The restore process takes approximately 6 to 10 minutes to complete. When prompted, click computer. NOTE: Do not manually shut down the computer. Click Finish and let the computer completely reboot. When prompted, click The computer restarts. Because the computer is restored to its original operating state, the screens that appear, such as the End User License Agreement, are the same ones that appeared the first time the computer was turned on. Yes. Restoring Your Operating System 6. Next. Click The System Restore screen appears and the computer restarts. After the computer restarts, click OK. 41 Restoring Your Operating System Dell Factory Image Restore CAUTION: Using Dell Factory Image Restore permanently deletes all data on the hard drive and removes any programs or drivers installed after you received your computer. If possible, back up the data before using these options. Use Dell Factory Image Restore only if System Restore did not resolve your operating system problem. NOTE: Dell Factory Image Restore may not be available in certain countries or on certain computers. Use Dell Factory Image Restore only as the last method to restore your operating system. These options restore your hard drive to the operating state it was in when you purchased the computer. Any programs or files added since you received your computerincluding data filesare permanently deleted from the hard drive. Data files include documents, 42 spreadsheets, e-mail messages, digital photos, music files, and so on. If possible, back up all data before using Factory Image Restore. Dell Factory Image Restore 1. Repair Your Computer. System Recovery Options window Turn on the computer. When the Dell logo appears, press <F8> several times to access the Vista Advanced Boot Options Window. Select The appears. Select a keyboard layout and click To access the recovery options, log on as a local user. To access the command prompt, type administrator in the User name field, then click OK. Click Factory Image Restore welcome screen appears. Dell Factory Image Restore. The Dell Next. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Next. The Confirm Data Deletion NOTE: Depending upon your configuration, you may need to select Dell Factory Tools, then Dell Factory Image Restore. Click screen appears. CAUTION: If you do not want to proceed with Factory Image Restore, click Cancel. Select the checkbox to confirm that you want to continue reformatting the hard drive and restoring the system software to the factory condition, then click Next. The restore process begins and may take five or more minutes to complete. A message appears when the operating system and factory-installed applications have been restored to factory condition. Click Finish to reboot the system. 7. 8. 9. Restoring Your Operating System Operating System Reinstallation Before you Begin If you are considering reinstalling the Windows operating system to correct a problem with a newly installed driver, first try using Windows Device Driver Rollback. If Device Driver Rollback does not resolve the problem, then use System Restore to return your operating system to the operating state it was in before you installed the new device driver. See System Restore on page 38. CAUTION: Before performing the installation, back up all data files on your primary hard drive. For conventional hard drive configurations, the primary hard drive is the first drive detected by the computer. To reinstall Windows, you need the following items:

Dell Operating System Dell Drivers and Utilities media media 43 Restoring Your Operating System NOTE: The Dell Drivers and Utilities media contains drivers that were installed during the assembly of the computer. Use the Dell Drivers and Utilities media to load any required drivers. Depending on the region from which you ordered your computer, or whether you requested the media, the Dell Drivers and Utilities media and Operating System media may not ship with your computer. Reinstalling Windows The reinstallation process can take 1 to 2 hours to complete. After you reinstall the operating system, you must also reinstall the device drivers, virus protection program, and other software. NOTE: Your computer may or may not have an optical drive. Use an external optical drive or any external storage device for the procedures that involve media. Save and close any open files and exit any open programs. 1. 44 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Operating System disc. Exit if the Install Windows message Insert the Click appears. Restart the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press <F2>

immediately. NOTE: If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft Windows desktop; then, shut down your computer and try again. NOTE: The next steps change the boot sequence for one time only. On the next start-up, the computer boots according to the devices specified in the system setup program. When the boot device list appears, highlight CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive and press <Enter>. Press any key to Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation. Boot from CD-ROM. Getting Help If you experience a problem with your computer, you can complete the following steps to diagnose and troubleshoot the problem:

1. 28 for 35 for See Solving Problems on page information and procedures that pertain to the problem your computer is experiencing. See Dell Diagnostics on page procedures on how to run Dell Diagnostics. Fill out the Diagnostic Checklist on page 48. Use Dells extensive suite of online services available at Dell Support (support.dell.com) for help with installation and troubleshooting procedures. See Online Services on page 46 for a more extensive list of Dell Support online. If the preceding steps have not resolved the problem, see Before You Call on page 47 and then Contacting Dell on page 49. 2. 3. 4. 5. I N S P I R O N NOTE: Call Dell Support from a telephone near or at the computer so that the support staff can assist you with any necessary procedures. NOTE: Dells Express Service Code system may not be available in all countries. When prompted by Dells automated telephone system, enter your Express Service Code to route the call directly to the proper support personnel. If you do not have an Express Service Code, open the Dell Accessories folder, double-click the Express Service Code icon, and follow the directions. NOTE: Some of the services mentioned below are not always available in all locations outside the continental U.S. Call your local Dell representative for information on availability. 45 Getting Help Technical Support and Customer Service Dells support service is available to answer your questions about Dell hardware. Our support staff use computer-based diagnostics to provide fast, accurate answers. To contact Dells support service, see Before You Call on page 47 and then see the contact information for your region or go to support.dell.com. Online Services You can learn about Dell products and services on the following websites:

www.dell.com www.dell.com/ap only) www.dell.com/jp www.euro.dell.com www.dell.com/la Caribbean countries)

(Asian/Pacific countries

(Japan only)

(Europe only)

(Latin American and 46 www.dell.ca

(Canada only) You can access Dell Support through the following websites and e-mail addresses:

Dell Support websites support.dell.com support.jp.dell.com support.euro.dell.com

(Japan only)

(Europe only) Dell Support e-mail addresses mobile_support@us.dell.com support@us.dell.com la-techsupport@dell.com Caribbean countries only) apsupport@dell.com countries only)

(Asian/Pacific

(Latin America and Dell Marketing and Sales e-mail addresses

(Asian/Pacific apmarketing@dell.com countries only) sales_canada@dell.com

(Canada only) Anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP) ftp.dell.com Log in as user: anonymous, and use your e-mail address as your password. AutoTech Service Dells automated support serviceAutoTech provides recorded answers to the questions most frequently asked by Dell customers about their portable and desktop computers. When you call AutoTech, use your touch-tone telephone to select the subjects that correspond to your questions. For instructions on accessing the telephone number to call your region, see Contacting Dell on page 49. Automated Order-Status Service To check on the status of any Dell products that you have ordered, you can go to support.dell. com, or you can call the automated order-

status service. A recording prompts you for the information needed to locate and report on your Getting Help order. For the telephone number to call your region, see Contacting Dell on page 49 for problems with your order. If you have a problem with your order, such as missing parts, wrong parts, or incorrect billing, contact Dell for customer assistance. Have your invoice or packing slip handy when you call. For the telephone number to call for your region, see Contacting Dell on page 49. Product Information If you need information about additional products available from Dell, or if you would like to place an order, visit the Dell website at www.dell.com. For the telephone number to call for your region or to speak to a sales specialist, see Contacting Dell on page 49. 47 Getting Help Before You Call NOTE: Have your Express Service Code ready when you call. The code helps Dells automated-support telephone system direct your call more efficiently. You may also be asked for your Service Tag (located on the back or bottom of your computer). Remember to fill out the following Diagnostics Checklist. If possible, turn on your computer before you call Dell for assistance and call from a telephone at or near the computer. You may be asked to type some commands at the keyboard, relay detailed information during operations, or try other troubleshooting steps possible only at the computer itself. Ensure that the computer documentation is available. Diagnostic Checklist Name:

Date:

Address:

Phone number:

Service Tag (bar code on the back or bottom of the computer):

Express Service Code:

Return Material Authorization Number (if provided by Dell support technician):

Operating system and version:

Devices:

Expansion cards:

Are you connected to a network? Yes /No Network, version, and network adapter:

Programs and versions:

48 See your operating system documentation to determine the contents of the computers start-up files. If the computer is connected to a printer, print each file. Otherwise, record the contents of each file before calling Dell. Error message, beep code, or diagnostic code:

Description of problem and troubleshooting procedures you performed:

Contacting Dell For customers in the United States, call 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355). NOTE: If you do not have an active Internet connection, you can find contact information on your purchase invoice, packing slip, bill, or Dell product catalog. Dell provides several online and telephone-

based support and service options. Availability varies by country and product, and some services may not be available in your area. Getting Help To contact Dell for sales, technical support, or customer service issues:

support.dell.com. 1. 2. Visit Verify your country or region in the Choose A Country/Region drop-down menu at the bottom of the page. Click Select the appropriate service or support link based on your need. Choose the method of contacting Dell that is convenient for you. Contact Us on the left side of the page. 3. 4. 5. 49 N O R I P S N I Finding More Information and Resources If you need to:

reinstall your operating system. run a diagnostic program for your computer, reinstall desktop system software, or update drivers for your computer, and readme files. learn more about your operating system, maintaining peripherals, RAID, Internet, Bluetooth, networking, and e-mail. upgrade your computer with new or additional memory, or a new hard drive. reinstall or replace a worn or defective part. See:

the Operating System media. the Drivers and Utilities media. NOTE: Drivers and documentation updates can be found on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. the Dell Technology Guide installed on your hard drive. the Service Manual on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com NOTE: In some countries, opening and replacing parts of your computer may void your warranty. Check your warranty and return policies before working inside your computer. 50 If you need to:

find safety best practices information for your computer review Warranty information, Terms and Conditions (U.S. only), Safety instructions, Regulatory information, Ergonomics information, and End User License Agreement. find your Service tag/Express Service Code You must use the service tag to identify your computer on support.dell.com or to contact technical support. find drivers and downloads. access technical support and product help. check on your order status for new purchases. find solutions and answers to common questions. locate information for last-minute updates about technical changes to your computer or advanced technical-reference material for technicians or experienced users. Finding More Information and Resources See:

the safety and regulatory documents that shipped with your computer and also see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance. the back or bottom of your computer. the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. 51 N O R I P S N I Basic Specifications System Model Dell Inspiron Mini 10 This section provides basic information that you may need when setting up, updating drivers for, and upgrading your computer. NOTE: Offerings may vary by region. For more information regarding the configuration of your computer, click Start Help and Support and select the option to view information about your computer. 52 Processor Type CPU L2 Cache External bus frequency Memory Connectors Capacities Memory type Memory configuration possible Intel Silverthorne Intel Atom Z520 or Z530 or Z540 512 MB 533-MT/S @ 133 MHz none 1 GB and 2 GB DDR2-800 (Run @

DDR2-533/ 266 MHz) 1024 MB, 2048 MB Communications Modem type Modem interface Network adapter Wireless Computer Information System Chipset Data bus width DRAM bus width Processor address bus width Flash EEPROM Internal Storage Intel LPIA (Low Power Intel Architecture) Poulsbo US15W 64 bits single channel 64-bit buses 32 bits 1 MB 2.5 HDD SATA:

120/160/250 GB 5400 rpm Basic Specifications External V.92 56K USB Modem Universal Serial Bus

(USB) 10/100 Ethernet LAN on system board WLAN, WiMax, WWAN/GPS (3G Mini-Card that can activate 3G, or GPS, or both), Bluetooth wireless technology, internal TV tuner module 53 Audio External Interface Speaker Internal speaker amplifier Volume controls integrated analog microphone, microphone-in connector, stereo headphones/

speakers connector, digital MIC with camera module

(optional) two 1.0 watt speaker 1 watt per channel software program controlled Intel LPIA Poulsbo 8 MB system memory (shared) LVDS 2 channel High Definition Audio ALC269 24-bit (analog-to-

digital and digital-to-

analog) Intel High Definition Audio Basic Specifications Video video controller video memory LCD interface Audio Audio type Audio controller Stereo conversion Internal Interface 54 Ports and Connectors Audio Mini-Card Network adapter integrated analog microphone, integrated analog speaker, microphone connector, one stereo headphone/speakers connector, digital MIC with camera module (optional) two full size Mini Card slots and one half size Mini Card slot, the half slot supports dual interface and the full slots support USB only RJ-45 port USB Video Display Type (TrueLight) Dimensions:

Height Width Diagonal Basic Specifications three 4-pin USB 2.0-compliant connectors 19-pin type A HDMI connector 10.1 inch WSVGA AG 10.1 inch HD AG 222.72 mm (8.76 in) WSVGA AG 222.73 mm (8.76 in) HD AG 125.28 mm (4.93 in) WSVGA AG 125.22 mm (4.92 in) HD AG 255.52 mm (10.06 in) 55 Basic Specifications Maximum resolution Refresh rate 1024 x 576 WSVGA AG 1366 x 768 HD AG 60 Hz Operating angle 0 (closed) to 135 Luminance Viewing Angles:

Horizontal 180 min. 200 typ. cd/m (5 point avg) WSVGA AG 230 min. 250 typ. cd/

m (5 point avg) HD AG 40 (CR10) typ.. WSVGA AG 60 (CR10) typ.. HD AG Vertical Pixel pitch Controls Keyboard Number of keys 56

+10 - +30 (CR10) typ. WSVGA AG

+50 (CR10) typ. HD AG 0.2175 x 0.2175 mm WSVGA AG 0.16305 x 0.16305 mm HD AG brightness can be controlled through keyboard shortcuts

(see Dell Technology Guide for more information.) 82 (U.S. and Canada);

83 (Europe); 86

(Japan); 82 (Korea) Basic Specifications Camera Pixel Video resolution Diagonal viewing angle Touch pad X/Y position resolution (graphics table mode) Size:

Width Height 1.3 megapixel 320x240 ~1280x1024

(640x480 at 30fps) 66 AC Adapter Input voltage Input current

(maximum) Input frequency Output power 100240 VAC 1.0 A 5060 Hz 30 W 240 cpi Output current 1.58 A (maximum) Rated output voltage 19.0 VDC 78.5 mm (3.09 in) sensor-active area 38 mm (1.49 in) rectangle Dimensions:

30 W (APD) Height Width Depth 59.2 mm (2.33 in) 34.0 mm (1.34 in) 85.0 mm (3.35in) Weight (with cables) 0.15 kg (0.33 lb) 57 Basic Specifications AC Adapter 30 W (PI) Height Width Depth 70.0 mm (2.76 in) 36.0 mm (1.42 in) 78.0 mm (3.07in) Weight (with cables) 0.156 kg (0.34 lb) Computer Environment Temperature range:

Operating 0 to 35C (32 to 95F) 20 to 65C (4 to 149F) Relative humidity (maximum):

Storage 25.3 mm to 28.0 mm

(0.99 in to 1.10 in) 261 mm (10.27 in) 182.5 mm (7.18 in) 1.30 kg (2.86 lbs) Operating Storage 10% to 90%

(noncondensing) 5% to 90%

(noncondensing) Maximum vibration (using a random-vibration spectrum that simulates user environment):

Operating 0.66 GRMS Storage 1.3 GRMS Physical Height Width Depth Weight (with 3-cell battery):

Configurable to less than 58 Computer Environment Maximum shock (measured with hard drive in head-parked position and a 2-ms half-sine pulse):

Operating 110 G Storage 160 G Basic Specifications 59 N O R I P S N I Index A AC adapter size and weight 57, 58 airflow, allowing 5 AutoTech 47 B backups creating 27 C calling Dell 48 chipset 53 computer, setting up 5 connect(ing) to the Internet 9 conserving energy 27 60 Contacting Dell online 49 customer service 46 customizing your energy settings 27 D damage, avoiding 5 data, backing up 27 Dell Factory Image Restore 38 Dell Support Center 33 Dell support website 51 Dell Technology Guide for further information 50 Diagnostic Checklist 48 drivers and downloads 51 E e-mail addresses for technical support 46 energy conserving 27 expansion bus 53 F finding more information 50 FTP login, anonymous 47 H hardware problems diagnosing 35 Hardware Troubleshooter 35 help getting assistance and support 45 I Internet connection 10 ISP Internet Service Provider 10 M memory problems solving 30 memory support 52 N network connection fixing 28 network speed testing 28 O order status 47 Index 61 Index P power problems, solving 29 power strips, using 6 problems, solving 28 processor 52 products information and purchasing 47 R reinstalling Windows 38 resources, finding more 50 restoring factory image 42 S setup, before you begin 5 software features 26 software problems 30 solving problems 28 specifications 52 62 support e-mail addresses 46 support sites worldwide 46 System Messages 34 system reinstall options 38 System Restore 38 T technical support 46 V ventilation, ensuring 5 W Windows, reinstalling 38 Windows Vista Program Compatibility Wizard 31 reinstalling 44 setup 9 Windows XP 31 wired network network cable, connecting 7 wireless network connection 28 Index 63 Printed in China. Printed on recycled paper. www.dell.com | support.dell.com